Home

X-Analysis User Manual 11.1

1. DSOCOE Distributor CEC a LSELD PRPCDE Product Code Tnpk Triggers Object E Sites by Salesperson Sites by Validator USERNM Contact Input Gutput Programs 2 Objects H No Attributes Mo Attributes b Update Programs 14 Objects H i l E ppp Eo conn Update Cutput Programs 4 Objects H oe a ail Display Product Display Product Sites by Organisation Sites by Name Input Field Input 1 Fel No Attributes No Attributes 0 PRPCDE Product Code PRPCDE Product Code BE WF BE NUR vies Pains i Sites by Stat Sites by Numb CAIDPTIPER AUDIT Work with Customer Sites Work with Customer Sites na a Audit PTYPES file Audit LISTS File No Attributes No Attributes Y UpdOut 47 Fields Upd0ut 47 Fields Input Fields Input 2 Fields m i a ADDI A l ADDI A l a CNAME Company 0 CHAME Company 190 Ad rie ano Ad Fl CUSNO Cus No LSLCDE Orig List Code a j S F 0 ADDG Address 3 0 ADDS Address 3 Sites by Dist 8 Status Sites By Dist 8 Name 0 PRPCDE Product Code 0 ADD4 Address 4 0 ADD4 Address 4 No Attributes No Attributes 0 ALTTEL Alt Tel No 1 0 ALTTEL Alt Tel No 1 i 0 ALTTL2 Alt Tel No 2 0 ALTTL2 Al Tel No 2 ZAUDORGS CUSREAD a Audit ORGS Fl Test Sequential Read options APDATE Next Contact fe APDATE Next Contact UFU FLG i Date Date Sites by Last Crt Date Sites by Next Cnt Date Input 2 Fields Input 1 Field rer chi o Attributes o Attr
2. if Affinity Comparison x m Affinity Comparison for XANACDXA Faz Programs ACCOUNTS ACHEADO1 BCHEADO1 COBOL CONHDR CONUPD CUSFMAINT CUSTOMERS CBS06R 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CNTCMAINT 10 0 0 0 0 0 oc Ct RINMSGTEXT 10 0 0 0 TO o 10 10 X GSCD 10 0 0 0 Ty o w o CONUPDO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CONUPD1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CONUPD2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CONDO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CUSCPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CUSFMAINT 10 0 0 0 4g 0 4g 20 CUSFMOLD 10 0 0 0 20 0 20 EN CUSFSEL 0 0 0 0 20 0 20 20 CUSGRSEL 0 0 0 0 20 0 wD 2a CUSLETSQ 0 0 0 0 14 0 14 0 z lt The submenu has the following options Initialize Cross Reference Refresh Cross Reference Rebuild Data Model Repository Refresh Log Initialize Cross Reference The Initialize Cross Reference option initializes the cross reference library to reflect the changes made to the cross reference library Select the option from the Refresh Options submenu on the context menu of the cross reference library The following dialog is displayed on selecting this option Confirmation dialog for Initialize Cross Reference option X Analysis or Initializing Cross Reference XAM4CDXA Do you wish to proceed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 63 Application Library Click Yes to submit a new batch job for initializing the cross reference library The batch job processing on the server is displayed as below Initialize Cross Reference Job
3. Provide a name and description for the alternate library group in the above dialog box Click OK to add the alternate data library group name under the cross reference library node shown below Alternate Library List added to the cross reference library lB 192 168 170 10 wk XANACDXA MANACDEM Tutorial System H TEST 1 Alternate Data Library Ta Application Area Diagram at Data Model Diagram Es Overview Structure Chart Se All Objects Expand the cross reference node and select the Alternate Data Library node Then opt for the context menu as displayed below Alternate Library List menu options S W 192 168 170 10 i XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System H TEST 1 Alternate Data Library fe Applica Work with Alternate Data Library List at Data M Select Alternate Data Library List Ba Overvi Remove Alternate Data Library List Se All Objec X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 59 Application Library Add Data Library ies to the Alternate Data Library List To add data library ies select the Work with Alternate Data Library List option from the right click menu of the Alternate Data Library List The Work with Alternate Data Library List invokes the following dialog Work with Alternate Data Library List dialog Add Alternate Data Library List TEST1 Fill in the name of the data library as desired and click Add To List This
4. Z Am a a owe ely eee eee NAC DA X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 19 Anos Configure Cross Reference Library Date libraries 2 2 e 2 e e e 2 2 gt XAN4CDEM1 Name for more values Mode Eme cN eE 5 5 6 6 6 6 E OC SPOMLOCICO NAMES A En Press ENTER to run the modelling command This principal command runs in batch and completes the modelling process Feature Brief Description X Analysis Library The X Analysis cross reference library name Object Libraries Specify the data library names Model Method PGMLOGIC Derive foreign keys from RPG LE program logic Relationships are only considered valid when foreign keys match all the components of the owning file s primary identifier CA2E The entire data model has been generated by Synon Use only the Synon data model database to derive the data model NAMES Only derive foreign keys for owning relationships taking into account the option specified in the Matching Method parameter BOTH Derive foreign keys taking into account the Program Logic and the NAMES OR Program Logic and CAZ2E in case of CA2E application REFRESH THE CROSS REFERENCE LIBRARY Attempt the Refresh option only when you have modified Objects Members X Analysis provides a refresh command to register changes in Objects Members of the application library to the cross reference library The XREFRESH command refreshes the X Analysis cross ref
5. a Opt for the context menu on the tutorial application and then select the Convert DDS to me gosn SQL option from the Export Options submenu The following dialog appears iil Convert DDS to SQL dialog on cross reference library Convert DDS to SOL s Ref Library Application Area Mew Database Library obo AD Click OK to start the process of conversion Opt for the context menu on the application area ORDERS and select the Convert DDS to SQL option under the Export Options submenu The following dialog appears Convert DDS to SQL dialog on application area Convert DDS to SOL Ref Library Application 4rea New Database Library ORDERSD1 Cancel The New Database Library contains the generated SQL Objects XDDSTOSQL command The XDDSTOSQL command will initiate the following sequence Generate DDL source members for the PFs CREATE TABLE Amend the DDL source members to specify the new library and SQL table name Run RUNSQLSTM over the DDL source members to create the tables Create a copy of original PFs as LFs pointing to the new SQL table Generate DDL source members for the LFs CREATE INDEX X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 327 Exporting amp Printing Run RUNSQLSTM over the DDL source members to create the indexes Create a copy of original LFs as LFs pointing to the new SQL table but using the format of the PF These will use
6. Click Submit Report to generate the report A batch job will be invoked and upon its completion the Specialized Analysis window will be updated X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 269 Anda Audit Options Specialized Analysis window Ta Specialized Analysis 5 0 X Analysis Metrics for XAN4CDXA zme amp Category iReport Run M Date Type Status a RPG Metrics Reports EB COMPLEXP General cross language complexity by program 2015 06 06 Metrics data Submitted COMPLESS General cross language complexity by SUBROUTINE CATACH Program data complexity LOGICP Program logic complexity LOGICS Program logic complexity by subroutine SourcetObject Reports HARDCODE Programs with hardcoded libraries MISSING Source or objects missing SRCOBIDT Source change date after object created Database Reports DATAERR Database file and member errors and alerts DSGNALRT Database design alerts To view the generated report select the report and right click on it which invokes the context menu Select the View Report option as displayed below Updated Specialized Analysis window J Specialized Analysis E Analysis Metrics for XAN4CDXA oi r Category Report Runt Date Type Status RPG Metrics Reports E COMPLEXP General cross language complexity by program 2013 06 06 Metrics data Complete COMPLESS General cross language complexity by SUBROUTINE 1 fes
7. A K S2OXTYP A K S2OXVAL X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Sample Values for XS2EFOXTR S2OXTYP S20XVAL S2OXFNT F 12 PMTRCD F 12 DSPRCD F 12 EDTRCD F 12 SELRCD 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 412 Appendix F X2E Specific Features Appendix F X2E Specific Features The X2E reengineering process is a two part process 1 Reengineering of non 2E programs and EXCUSRSRC members 2 Reengineering of 2E programs REENGINEERING OF NON 2E PROGRAMS This entails the following steps Generate Business Rules In this process the business rules are generated and object source level information i e Files used in the program External data structure declared in a program program calls file field info entry parameters program declared fields actual source code and other object related information is extracted and stored in various X Ref files This information is then used by X2E reengineering process to create procedure based module service program Reengineer Programs Program Restructuring Here the original RPG COBOL source code is converted from language specific syntax into a general format e g MOVE MOVEL ADD SUB etc statements get converted into ASSIGN with proper conversion In case of interactive program the source code gets restructured to extract each logical screen as an equivalent function and related processing logic Thereby each logical screen is recovered as an equivalent function to be converted into JSF
8. Business Process Logic e AA Size 8 PF as x 1 69 Screen Flow Diagram Normal j Contention Resolution System Documentation creates documents in Application Folder If the Application Folder ts shared and documents are created opened while the documentation is in progress then this may lead to contention Please select appropriate options to enable resolution C Do not overwrite Overwrite if exists but if in use then Create document by similar name _ Exit Skip document creation Back Click Finish to generate the document The progress status is displayed on the screen while generating the System document The document will be located in the specified save location Generate Individual System Documents Select the Generate Individual System Documents option from the following dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 342 Document Manager gt Individual System Documents Type and Location X Analysis Se Ed System Documentation Type and Location Select the type of documentation and its location System Documentation can generate Single document with documentation of all the objects marked for documentation OR Generate multiple documents For each object marked For documentation System Documentation type O Generate Single System Document Generate Individual System Documents Document Details Folder lt Select Browse to set location
9. CUSGRSELOLG 2201 Please select 1 fe SFL CUSGRP Please select D ee ee oD e E CUSTMNTI PF CUSTMINT LOD ZZFTOI DISTS CUSTMANT 1020 Z eF Ue USF Note Multiple selections of Screen Components are allowed for Component Documentation Click the Component Documenter icon to display the System Documenter Wizard as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 387 Appendix C Component Documenter Component Documentation Wizard Screen X Analysis System Documentation Type and Location Select the type of documentation and its location System Documentation can generate Single document with documentation of all the objects marked for documentation OP Generate multiple documents For each object marked for documentation System Documentation type Generate Single System Document Generate Individual System Documents CO Generate System Documents using previous values Document Details Document Title System Document For 4h4cD4 Mame System Document For AMADA pdf Fath D Program Files Databorough 4nalysis 192 166 170 10PEF_sAN4 DRA System Document For AN4 COs A pdf Cancel Document Wizard Sections System Documentation type The following options are available for System Documentation type Generate Single System Document This is the default option It means that a single system document will be gene
10. Configure Columns option Business Rules 3 Business Rules for CUSFMAINT Number of Lines 10 Source Member CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT 00001 00002 Rule Number Field CUSNO CNAME TELNO FAXNO DSDCDE DSDCDE STATUS USERN SALUT CUSNO Company Phone lt gt Fax Wo lt Salutation Cus No TtT anA E M E Field File Rule Message ID Rule Status Rule Status Comment Annotation Width of selected column Filter the display of business rules using the various buttons The rules can be filtered based on whether they are Exportable Rules Update Rules or Excluded Rules These three filters have toggle behavior X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 241 JHJ LEGACY Business Rules Analysis Business Rules window Filter buttons File CUSFMAINT 00001 CUSNO CUSF CUSFMAINT OQ CNAME CUSF CUSFMAINT 1003 TELNO 8 CUSF Rule Cus No not found on Sites Company blank Phone lt gt blank X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 242 Inter Repository Options Inter Repository Options The Inter Repository Options provides different sub options for comparing database files across any two cross reference libraries and managing linked repositories The Difference Analysis option analyzes the application database files and reports the di
11. In the following image the Display Code Review option has been selected on an individual object WWCUSTS Code Review view for WWCUSTS 1 Code Review c5 gt wer Al E Code Review for WVYCUSTS 5 Records Object Category Comment Time WWCUSTS Update date on source and object do no Request generated by ACODERVW Job 11 13 09 WWCUSTS Greatest subroutine nbr of lines exceeds Request generated by ACODERVW Job 201 11 13 09 WWCUSTS Greatest IF DO block nbr of lines exceed Request generated by ACODERVW Job 11 13 09 WWCUSTS Greatest subroutine nbr of lines exceeds Request generated by ACODERVW Job 201 13 17 45 WWCUSTS Greatest IF DO block nbr of lines exceed Request generated by ACODERVW Job 20 13 17 45 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 473 Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi X Analysis features can be invoked through the Remote System Explorer on RDi You have to right click on a specific member name to use the options The first step is to install RDi Download RDi version 9 0 and above preferably Then go to the X Analysis client interface If you have installed a new version then use the Clean start Eclipse option Then go to Window gt X Analysis gt Open Perspective gt Other and choose Remote System Explorer Open Perspective Remote System Explorer Ba CVS Repository Exploring Database Debu
12. It is identical to the OTH function except that it allows call with parameters OTHFIL Other File Defines a program which accepts files in input mode and does not have Printer File s Display File s or any other files in update write mode PMTRCD Prompt Record Defines a program which prompts for a list of fields defined by a specified access path The validated values can be passed to any other function PRTDSP Print Display Defines a program which Display Print records from input files and does not have any files in update write mode PRTFIL Print File Defines a program which prints records from a specified access path SELRCD Select Record Defines a program which displays the records from a specified file many at a time using a sub file The program allows you to select one of the records The selected record is returned to the calling program This function is called from a function that requested a selection list UPDFIL Update File Defines a program which updates specified files and does not have any Printer File s or Display File s X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 83 Application Library UPDOTH Update Other Defines a program which updates data areas and has Display File s The program neither has a Printer File s nor files in update write read mode UPDPRT Update Print Defines a program which prints a report with update s from the specified p
13. Note that the Printer should be already configured EXPORT AS DDL FROM X ANALYSIS The Export as DDL option exports data model information as Data Definition Language DDL to the application folder This information may be used by any database management system e g Oracle or SQL Server to create a similar data model The Data Definition Language DDL is a sequence of Structured Query Language SQL commands that defines the structure of a database X Analysis can export the structure of an application or application areas as DDL The DDL can be used to recreate a database on any SQL database system If your modelling tool does not support XML then you can use the Export as DDL option This option recreates your database as SQL tables with complete metadata information required for a tool to re engineer the new database over ODBC Some third party modelling tools allow importing SQL scripts or DDL files directly X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 323 Exporting amp Printing To export the DDL for the example Tutorial System KAN4CDXA data model 1 Open XAN4CDXA from the X Analysis Client 2 Opt for the context menu on XAN4CDXA and then select the Export as DDL option from the Export Options submenu Export as DDL option a i XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System New Application Area Add Alternate Data Library List Reset Library List Application Library List Affinity Comparison Refresh O
14. Structure Chart Diagram e Object List El CLET are Ts ax m Structure Chart for CLET Total Objects 8 a A v e HO gA T Gi C C ET Build Customer Letter OTHCAL LETN1 Letter Prefix Generation WKCUSL Customer Letter PRTFIL CUSLETSQ Update Letter Sequence WKCUS amp E Customer Release Letter WKCUS8P Customer Enquiry Letter PRIFIL Legend The SCD Legend describes the type of object displayed M Update Update This depicts the program that updates a file F Display Display This depicts the program that uses a Display file BR Prin Input Print This depicts the program that uses a Print file Output Input This depicts the program that uses an Input file C Command i l l Others Output This depicts the program that writes to a file Internal Routine Command This simply depicts a Command Indeterminate Others This refers to the Programs where it is referring to gy Trigger a file which is not Update Display Print Input Output F Module E internal Routine This refers to the Synon specific routines X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 184 Program Logic Documentation Indeterminate This depicts the programs where the usage cannot be programmatically determined Trigger This depicts the program which is a Trigger Module This depicts the program which is a Module Rollup Group The Ro
15. 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 252 HJA Inter Repository Options DB2 Port Specify the port number for the default DB2 instance where DB2 services must be running Default DB2 port is 50000 Fetch After the DB2 information is supplied click Fetch to populate the Repository Combo Once this action is performed you can select the repository to add X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 253 Ths LEGACY Audit Options Audit Options These options simplify the auditing processes for you by providing effective means to measure monitor and manage changes and complexity to applications Audit Options are available on the context menu over the cross reference library and application areas The following options constitute Audit Options Metrics Analysis Screen Metrics File Metrics Business Process Logic Metrics Specialized Analysis Problem Analysis Object Allocation Database Summary Summary Report Initialize Source Archiving Generate Metrics Analysis Edit Problem Audit Limit Edit Problem Categories Generate Problem Analysis View Database Size Statistics X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 254 THUS Audit Options METRICS ANALYSIS Metrics Analysis is the first option under Audit Options The Metrics Analysis option provides low medium and high complexity classification of each program based on the following attributes of the program Sour
16. Data Area use Option 5 against it The following similar window appears Work with Data Areas Linked Project X Analysis Work with Data Area Values Databorough Lia XARWKDARAS ee eae PAOS Ora 2Zi Enter options Press Enter 2 Change value Description Current Value Linked Project Library Name Use Option 2 to change the value of the Data Area Linked Project Change value of Data Areas Linked Project X Analysis Change Data Area Value IDeliesiloreicteue lal Ibe XARWKDARAS 11 49 25 ZOSO Linked Project Library Name X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 398 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command Main Project To display edit the Main Project Data Area use Option 5 against it The following similar window appears Work with Data Areas Main Project X Analysis Work with Data Area Values Dakavoroughe hid XARWKDARAS IG pS Oakes AO G0 ib Enter options press Enter 2 Change value Description Current Value Main Project Library Name Use Option 2 to change the value of the Data Area Main Project Change Value of Data Areas Main Project X Analysis Change Data Area Value Databorougi ECA XARWKDARAS Tee Oe 2013 01 21 Main Project Library Name Program Object Exclusion Library This X 2E feature allows the user to exclude the programs from reengineering them when the program objects are in the specified library This feature is directly controlled by XS2EP
17. Jump to Displays all the options available for a specified member object or variable for fast access to Source Browser DFD Structure Chart PSC Object Where Used Source cross reference Variable Where Used and DMD Source Browser View Displays source code of the selected member Provides various options related to the source code Object Where Used Displays all the instances of an object in the application Variable Where Used Displays all the instances of the specified variable in the application File Field Details Displays the Field Details for a file LFs Access Paths Displays all Access Paths for the selected Physical File Member X Ref Displays all the instances of the specified variable in the source code This is available only on the Source Browser view Enhanced Member X Ref Displays the references of a variable in the member along with the information Add Bookmark Displays the bookmarked source lines besides allowing you to edit bookmarks as per requirement More Info Displays detailed object Information like name library type attribute etc JUMP TO DIALOG The primary requirement of an analyst working with a case tool is to get quick and ample information about an object X Analysis facilitates this by providing faster access to the objects using the Jump To utility This utility is accessible from any screen using the Jump To button on the toolbar Jump to displays all the options available for a specified
18. REGEN AGENBRULES REGEN GENBRULES REGEN REGEN AtEMBRULES REFRESH S EMBRULES AGENBRULES AlENBRULES 4DMODEL REGEN AGEMBRULES Motes FALL programs ALL programs FALL programs Program Ww CUSTS AREFRESH Processing AREFRESH Processing AREFRESH Processing Grea MVCPROCESS Grea MVCPROCESS Program CUSTMAT1 Program CUSTMNT 1 Grea MVCPROCESS Grea MVCPROCESS ALL programs AREFRESH Processing Program CUSFMAINT Grea MVCPROCESS ALL programs BOTH PREFIX Program AH040 Program SHOO040 US US DVER MIA US US US US US TESTER TESTER US US US US us US US US ANURUGHD ANURUCHD The log contains information about the user who executed a command and its date and time details Only the following commands were reported DERIVE BUSINESS RULES Application Initialization XA4INIT Data Model Generation KDMODEL Business Rules Extraction KGENBRULES X Resize Initialisation XRESIZE Application Refresh KREFRESH The Derive Business Rules option is available on the context menu over the application library an application area and on an individual PGM type object of RPG RPGLE or CBL attribute For more details refer to the Business Rules Analysis section X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 66 Application Library IMPORT OPTIONS thJst pot The Import Options submenu has the Application Area using Excel Sheet as the onl
19. Single System Document Type and Location X Analysis l Bx System Documentation Type and Location Select the type of documentation and its location System Documentation can generate Single document with documentation of all the objects marked for documentation OR Generate multiple documents For each object marked For documentation System Documentation type O Generate Single System Document Generate Individual System Documents Document Details Document Title System Document For SAN4CDNA 4oplication Area MYCPROCESS Mame System Document for sAM4CDsA Application Area MYCPROCESS pdf C Documents and SettingsialakhiMy Documentsis Analysis Application Data19 168 170 10 PCF 4ah4Cor 4a system Document For ANATOA Application Area MVCPROCESS pdf Cancel To change the default document name and path click Browse to specify new document name and path The default location is lt Application Folder gt After this step click Next to proceed further as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 351 Document Manager Single System Document Application Area Features X Analysis E mfx System Documentation Application Area Options Select Application Area Features to be included in the System Document Diagram Options Overview Structure Chart Normal Expanded Detailed Data
20. Step 2 On the Sign On screen enter the User Profile XAN4SEU Press Tab and enter the Password also as XAN4SEU I Session 24 x 80 Fle Edit View Communication Actions Window Help o DA AR BS a we el a ee Sign On C COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1980 2009 i re MW 06 053 af 1902 Session successfully started Press ENTER The IBM i main menu screen will be displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 384 Appendix B Enabling the SEU Interface Session A 24 x 80 EEk Fle Edt View Communication Actions Window Help D DA AR Em wi hb act B ee IBM i Main Menu Exii t F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve 17 Cancel 13 Information Assi 3 Set initial menu C COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1980 2009 MW A R 20 007 a 1902 Session successfully started Step 3 Stop the recording by selecting the Stop Recording Macro option from the Actions submenu or clicking the related button directly from the toolbar X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 385 Appendix B Enabling the SEU Interface i Session A 24 x 80 Fle Edt View Communication Fcnca Window Help D hb an E Send Fle To Host ee a Receive Fie From Host IBM i Main Menu Launch Eu Display Popup Keypad Keyboard Macro Script Function Stop Recording Macro Cancel Recording Matra Pause Recording Macro Set initial menu C COPYRIGHT IBM
21. Submit Action Usually on the record screen or a form which submits the data for validation and moves on Navigation Action To branch off to a new screen Usually on the grids or record screens being viewed in the display mode Right click for the context menu over a selected Screen Component and select the Screen Actions option as shown below Screen Actions option kE eban oO Screen Components for Application Library MANCINA Call Program Function Type S5SegqMo OSPF Format Physical File Title CUSTMATI I a ere ee Ee E screen Source Code is CUSTMANT 1020 2 FTO2 CUSTMNT1_0 fig Function Editor oe at Preview Designer Pia a TUZ CUSTMAT1 0010 CUSTMAT 0020 l CUSTMNT1 1 M Page Designer CUSTMAT1 1020 eFt Screen Actions HL Class Diagram Business Rules CUSTMNT1 2 2fFTO1 2fFTO2 CUSTMATI 010 CUSTMAT I 02D CUSTMATIR R I R R I CUSTMNT1 1010 R FTFTOL ne Data Content R I R R component Documenter CUSTMNTIROLD JFF TOI 4 lil 3 Annotate The Screen Actions option is available for all Screen Components and Development Screens X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 229 Options on Screen Components Screen Action Diagram Screen Components of Data Content Diagram Screen Action Diagram For WiWtCONHDRO1G E work with Orders WiWCONHDROIG 225F01 S O Change WWCONHOROZD ZZFTOL em SWECCD WorkField SO Delete Wi
22. The DMD for an application area can be un restricted by clicking the Unrestrict To Application Area icon X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 217 Data Model Diagram DMD for Application Area MVCPROCESS Un Restricted 1 Data Model Diagram i t Data Model Diagram for M CPROCESS ALL Total Objects 25 Product Master Store Master Transaction type Order status description Status file description pe ee E ome 1 Delivery Areas 1 C rt Organisations Ea at DMD Details 83 DMD Relations for MVCPROCESS ALL Total Relations 42 Rel No Dependent File Relation Type Parent File Dependent Fields Parent Fields Dep LF 1 Contacts REFERS TO Sites Cus Mo Cus Mo CNTACS Contacts REFERS TO Salespersons Sales Person Person Contract Detail OWNED BY Contract Header Contract Contract CONDET Contract Detail REFERS TO Stock Balances Product Store Stk Bal Product Store CONDETL Contract Detail REFERS TO Product Master Product Stk Product CONDETLS Note While using the Restrict To Application Area feature ensure that the originally selected application area is not changed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 218 Data Model Diagram UNDERSTANDING DATA MODEL DATABASE The metadata database that underlies X Analysis is a valuable resource and contains information that can be leveraged for your own purposes There are five core tables that are generat
23. When the icon is clicked the following window is displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 187 Program Logic Documentation SCD Show Overridden Files Only window Se Object List CLET G CET Structure Chart with Overridden files for CLET Total Objects 11 A we H H HACLET Build Customer Letter OTHCAL UPD LETN1 Letter Prefix Generation AWKCUSL Customer Letter CUSLETSO Update Letter Sequence FHIWECUSE Customer Release Letter FHAWKCUSSF Customer Enquiry Letter PRIFIL _QSECTXT gt AEE WKCUSSEF Find Fax Number OTHFIL Detailed Structure Chart m Generate the Detailed SCD by clicking the Show Narratives icon from the toolbar of both the SCD and the Expanded Structure Chart Diagram The following image shows the icon X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 188 Joa d Program Logic Documentation Show Narratives icon e Object List CLET Sees Structure Chart for CLET Total Objects 8 M h amp h Show Narratives The image below shows the detailed SCD for the selected object CLET Detailed Structure Chart Diagram e Object List CLET CLE S Detailed Structure Chart for CLET Total Objects 19 amp Fl amp H CLET OTHCAL Build Customer Letter Program Build Customer Letter A principal function of this program is to make H certain calculations then return the values to the calling progr
24. http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 6a63ab9c df12 4d41 933c be590feaa05a amp DisplayLang en Download and copy the GDIPLUS DLL to the default installation directory e g C PROGRAM FILES DATABOROUGH ECLIPSE JRE BIN Restart X Analysis and the diagrams should show up now X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 429 Appendix G Troubleshooting SCREEN REPORT DESIGN FEATURE FAILS WITH SERVER JOB ERROR If the Screen Report Design feature was working fine earlier and is now giving error then look at the Server Job associated with X Analysis 1 Identify the QZDASOINIT job associated with the XA session and look for the USER NAME QPRTJOB messages For example Message A duplicate job named 103581 MARK QPRTJOB was found Message A duplicate job named 161482 MARK QPRTJOB was found 2 Runthe following command on the session WRKSPLF SELECT ALL JOB 103581 MARK QPRTJOB and WRKSPLF SELECT ALL JOB 161482 MARK QPRTJOB Take Option 4 against the spool files to delete them 3 Opt for the Screen Report Design feature again This should be working now X ANALYSIS DIAGNOSTICS UTILITY Note To ensure correct results please use the Run as administrator option for this utility The X Analysis Diagnostics utility is invoked automatically when an exception occurs on X Analysis it opens the log folder which has the XADiagnostics log along with other log files This utili
25. iD Add Note f FIU1 Eile F Customer Detail Maintenance Ith Edit a w Format d Filters D E Show Properties view Apply Stereotype Screen Source Code Class Diagram Data Content Screen Actions Screen Report Design Migrated Logic Business Rules More Info Component Documenter Annotate The Function Logic options work correctly when the X Analysis application library is selected in the X Analysis Perspective CLASS DIAGRAM The Class Diagram is the backbone of all Object oriented methods including UML The diagram describes the static structure of a system Classes represent an abstraction of entities with common characteristics Associations represent the relationships between classes Let us see how a Class Diagram looks for our example From the tutorial application XAN4CDXA select CUSTMNT1 and opt for the context menu on it then select the Class Diagram option This action displays the Class Diagram as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 296 UML Diagramming Class Diagram for CUSTMNT1 The Class Diagram displays the following 1 Shows all the PF used by the program and their relationships 2 Joining fields are shown on the edge of the connection 3 All the keys fields and field usage are shown inside the file figure as attribute with their types Function Logic The Function Logic is av
26. Actions Options Report issue picked for a program F6 Add Option 2 Change Delete reported issue fora program Option 4 Display reported program details Option 5 Notes Option 7 Compilation Errors Option 8 Missing Files Option 9 Summary F20 Project Notes F21 File Errors F22 F6 Add Enter the following information Note Same applies to Option 2 change the added issue Program Name Enter the program s name for which the issue has to be reported Text Enter suitable description for the issue Issue Type Enter issue type Date and Time of event This is a system generated field Issue Category Enter issue category Category Description Enter category description Assigned To Enter the name of the person to whom the issue is assigned Programmer Narrative Enter note for programmer X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 407 X2E RPG Work with X2E RPG Project Control XARWKPRJL Project AACA2EDEMO Ref d Project NONE CEG e X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command F6 screen To add issue picked for a program Databorough Ltd Zien Ours Program Name TEXT o alee OTE SSA Sra 41 sae ERRET Date and Time Of event o r 2 ses Onl 2 EO A Sal Issue Cacegory Category Description Assigned TO gt a amp amp Programmer Narrativ Option 4 Delete Use this option to delete the reported issue Option 5 Display Use this option to disp
27. Application Library Application Library view Fie Edit Navigate Search Project Analysis Tomcat Run Window Help E Q oE Mm ab BS GAN i Re Oe Havigation Metrics Dashboard BB 1927 168 170 10 Wh ZAN4ACDZA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System Ta Application Area Diagram Work with Members at Data Model Diagram Overview Structure Chart fe All Objects I Programs Work with Objects E Files Business Rules Consolidated Rules Screen Components an Change History Regenerated Programs Esl Source Scan H A amp Sanitize A Resize E3 Fal Procedures BE ACCOUNTS Company Accounts OBJECT LIST The Object List displays a list of all objects of the specified type from the selected library Double click on the All Objects node under the cross reference library KAN4CDXA to bring up the Work with Objects dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 77 Application Library Work with Objects dialog Work with Objects Application 4rea Description All Members Selected Library ALLUSR t Type Attribute Function Attributes Component Status Function Type FF Mame w Program Type The Library drop down box contains the following two important entries apart from the user libraries ALLUSR All objects belonging to the user libraries ALL All objects including those in the X Ref lib The default option is ALLUSR Programs When you double click on the Programs no
28. CUSFMAINT 00010 CUSNO CUSF Customer 0 Width of selected column There are various buttons for filtering business rules display The rules are filtered based on whether they are Exportable Rules Update Rules or Excluded Rules The filters have toggle behaviour The following image shows the three filter buttons Business Rules window Filter buttons EA Business Rules E amp E I1 ETleaa B B o Business Rules For CUSFMAINT Number of Lines 10 Source Member Rule Number Field File Rule CUSFMAINT OOU01 CUSNO CUSF Cus No not Found on Sites CUSFMAINT Oo002 MAME USF Company blank An additional option Filter by Rule Status has been provided to filter the rules based on their status Make the selection from the list of Rule Status in a drop down menu X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 451 Joa d Appendix L Setting Status for Business Rules Business Rules window Filter by Rule Status option EM Business Rules i QE ET os a KOO Bus w Show All d No Status Rule d Applicable Wot able to be generated Not assigned Sus Maceo Ceumcaq Sloss Complete Company blank 04 Done Phone lt gt blank L Awaiting Feature Fax Mo lt gt blank T Bevened Distributor lt gt blank E a Exact match not Found For Distributor g Not applicable Sts lt gt blank J Covered by Metadata Not Verified Contact blank Not Applicable for Endeavor Salutation lt gt blank and lt gt Mr
29. Customize Perspective Save Perspective 4s Reset Perspective Close Perspective Close All Perspectives Navigation To view modify various X Analysis Preferences select the X Analysis node When you select the X Analysis node the following window is displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 44 type filter text General Ant Data Management Help Install Update Java JavaScript JPA Plug in Development Remote Systems Run Debug Server Service Policies Tasks Team Usage Data Collector Using X Analysis Client X Analysis Preferences Analysis General X Analysis Preferences IP Address User _ Case sensitive or greater than 10 character Password Offline Mode Specify the DB2 port number in order to access offline A Analysis cross reference DB Port 30000 i _ Begin with Outline _ Detailed DFD by default _ Show Re engineered Screen for Screen Report layout J Ignore Linked Repositories if any Open Called Procedure Program source in same tab Validation Open Data Flow Diagram in same tab dane _ Use Business Rules Overlay mode as default Web Service y _ Use Source buffering Analysis XDoclet _ Allow editing in Consolidated Rules ML Show only Objects in Metrics Restore Defaults Apply Here is a detailed look at the X Analysis Preferences for the X Analysis Plugin X Analysis User Manual 11 1 IP Address Specify the IP a
30. I E E E oen Source Code CUSTMNTiOZO l3 ZEF TO sy Function Editor at Preview Designer CUSTMANT1_ 0 CUSTMANT1_OO1D CUSTMNT1 0020 f2FTO1 FFFTO2 l Fage Designer CUSTMNT1_1010 s7FTo Of Data Content R I R R CUSTMNT1_1 I R CUSTMNT1 1020 R 2eFTU2 BE Screen Actions R R I R CUSTMNT1_ 2 HL Class Diagram CUSTMNT1_ 2010 Business Rules CUSTMAT1 4020 f2F 101 ZEF 102 CUSTMATIR TE component Documenter CUSTMNTIROLID f FTUl fl B Annotate For more details refer to Appendix C ANNOTATE The Annotate option is available to provide annotates to a specific function Right click on a Screen Component for the context menu and select the Annotate option as displayed underneath X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 233 Options on Screen Components Annotate option 5 Screen Components x b eE de Fob E G El amp warn 0 Screen Components For Application Library MAN4CDKA fall 5 Program Function Type Seqgho OSPF Format Physical File Title CUSTMANT1 I eg er ee Ce EE E sen Source Code CUSTMAT 1020 13 ffF TO CUSTMNT1_0 big Function Editor at Preview Designer CUSTMNT1 0010 CUSTMNT1 0020 R I R Z7FTOL R ZZFT02 CUSTMNT1_1 I M Page Designer CUSTMNTI_101D R s7F To Me Data Content CUSTMNT1_102D FR ZZFTO2 IB Screen Actions I R R I R CUSTMNT1_ FL Class Diagram CUSTMATI
31. I F F I CUSTMANT1 1010 R CUSTMNT1 1020 R CUSTMAT1 I CUSTMAT1 010 RF CUSTMANTI 020 R CUSTMNTIR I F Component Documenter CUSTMNTIROLD f FTO1 ii E Annobabe The Data Content Diagram generated for a screen uses the model information to depict the primary file in use by that screen shown in blue The sub node is the secondary file in green with which the primary file joins to pull the additional information to show on the screen The sub node splits into two parts The first part displays Joins lists the field s from the secondary file facilitating the file join the second part displays Fields lists the field s from the primary file Data Content Diagram 1 Screen Fields OF Data Content Diagram 23 amp E oy x fa 7H Data Content Diagram for CUSTMNTIO1D E e Fields a DNAME e DSDCDE Distributor gt El A CUSTS Purchases Joins No Join Rule Exists Fields WiorkField Fields SLMEN Salespersons T CO m m m Joins No Join Rule Exists Fields CUSGRP Customer Groups Joins No Join Rule Exists Fields CO m X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 228 HJA Options on Screen Components SCREEN ACTIONS The Screen Actions Diagram presents the actions allowed on the screen The actions could be Prompt Action To look up for the possible values for a field facilitated by the join on the secondary foreign file
32. Paper Size Contention Resolution etc X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 369 Document Manager Select Paper Size and Resolution X Analysis System Documentation Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Level Settings Application Area OSC Normal Application Area OSC Level 2 Application Area DMD Normal Structure Chart Level 8 LFA4ccess Path details Source Level 5 File Field Details Source Flow Chart Level 5 Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Normal with Annotation Structure Chart Normal with Annotation Screen Report Layout Mormal SOuUrce Source Flow Chart Paper Size Letter 8 5 x 11 CO A4 Size 8 27 x 11 69 Contention Resolution System Documentation creates documents in Application Folder IF the Application Folder is shared and documents are created opened while the documentation is in progress then this may lead to contention Please select appropriate options to enable resolution Do not overwrite Overwrite iF exists but if in use then Create document by similar name O Exit Skip document creation Click Finish to generate the document No Detailed Object Documentation If the No Detailed Object Documentation option is selected then only the Overview Structure Chart and or the Data Model Diagram as specified in the Applica
33. This brings up the DFD for the object CUSF X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Statu D m E g B A D D x Page 174 Program Logic Documentation Data Flow Diagram ths o Files S Object Where Used EQ CUSTMNTI iE CUSF 23 ye Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 ea B amp a gt zl a ZAUDCUSF E ZBPRNCUSF CUSF B o CUSFLA o CUSFLB Audit CUSF file Print Customer Details Sites by Product renamed from Sites by Orig List r cusfla For testing b Attributes b Attributes P Access Paths 13 Objects g freee gt Attributes gt Input Programs 59 Objects A a DSPPTYPES HH OSPPTYPESR gt Input Services 1 Object H a 3 b a b aS P npu Trijges 1 Object g Sites ees Mri b Input Output Programs 2 Objects B gt Attributes gt Attributes gt Update Programs 14 Objects H i 4 ee enc i 4 a ete iii eit ee laa B CUSFLE o CUSFL1 udi ile udi ile P Attributes P Attributes Sites by Organisation Sites by Name b Attributes gt Attributes E ZAUDORGS m CUSREAD 3 3 Audit ORGS file Test Sequential Read options P WWCUSF P WWCUSFR Marei T ia j j U Attributes gt Attributes Work with Customer Sites Work with Customer Sites a y TEE Z b Attributes b Attributes S esc 4 a WKCUSP B ZAUDASTATU a a i i CUSFLS CUSFL6 sey Customer Report Ault ASTATLE fle 2 ZBCUSFMNT 2 ZBCUSFMNTR Sites by Dist amp Status Sites By Dist amp Name Attributes Attribute
34. WRE NWumber 4 ZERO WRE Wumber 5 ZERO URE Number_7 ZERO URE Alpha 6 RLAWE DTL Country RIVCND DTL Country Name USER Initialize detail screen existing record WRE Wumber 4 ZERO WRE Number 5 2ERO URE Number _ 7 ZERO UFE lpha 6 BRLANE USER Delete DEF record USER Validate detail screen fields iiil EH Business Rules E3 waa Ta n M 4 oO Business Rules for TS4JE1R Number of Lines 12 Source Member Rule Number Field o0001 Country TSACREP IF DTL Hospital Country is South Africa T54AJE1R ooo02 Gddress Post 7ip TS4CREP IF OTL Hospital Address Post ip is Range TS4JE TR OO00s IF OTHER WISE T54JE1R 00004 Country TS4CREP IF DTL Hospital Country is United Kingdom T5AJE1R 0000s Address Post Zip TS4CREP IF OTL Hospital Address Postizip is Range TS4JE1R OO006 IF OTHER WISE TS4JE1R a000 Country TS4CREP IF OTL Hospital Country is United States ol TS4IE1R o0008 Gddress Post 7ip TS4CREP IF OTL Hospital Address Post ip is Range TS5AJE1R o0009 IF OTHERWISE TSAJETR oo010 Country TS4CREP IF OTL Hospital Country is Canada T5AJE1R 00011 Address Post Zip TS4CREP IF WREKE Alpha 6 ME OTL Hospital Address F TS5AJE1R o0016 Gddress Post fip TS4CREP IF OTHERWISE lt ti This also opens an additional Business Rules summary window listing all the business rules for the program MIGRATED LOGIC The Migrated Logic is the reorganized restructured view of what is shown in the Business Rules view It
35. X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Application Libraries Databorough LEd XARWKLIB MOEA FAS aM Jali AOL Selected x ref Library gt XAN4CDXAT Enter options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display Type Sequence Library eae Fi2 Cancel eG eee X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 14 Configure Cross Reference Library The sequence of libraries is important because the objects and the sources are given preference according to the order of the library they belong to Only the first occurrence of the object source gets reported Subsequent occurrences are omitted Press F6 to add the names of the Source Object Model libraries associated with the application and press ENTER Repeat the step if application consists of multiple libraries Press F3 when all the libraries have been defined X4WRKAPP Add Library screen X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Application Libraries Databorough Lid XARWKLIB 132328328 Zae 2015 xX ref library XAN4CDXAT TOST S O O Object S Source M 2E Model Sequence iO TsO n a ceeeneatc XAN4CDEM1 Je So EISE FiIl2 Cancel The Type may be any one of the following O Object S Source E M Model Source amp Object Libraries While the source library contains the un compiled source files the object library comprises the compiled objects for the same Specify the libraries containing both source and object as O and S types See the settings
36. X Analysis comes fully equipped to address all analysis and documentation needs from analyzing Metrics to decoding monolithic Business Rules and many more In sum X Analysis is a power packed toolset designed to keep technical complexities at bay making conversion of existing application designs into the latest format a much easier exercise ACRONYMS USED IN THE MANUAL APD Access Path Diagram DFD Data Flow Diagram DMD Data Model Diagram FFD File Field Details SCD Structure Chart Diagram HSC Hierarchical Structure Chart PSC Program Structure Chart OSC Overview Structure Chart X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 11 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Introduction to X Analysis Introduction to X Analysis X Analysis is a proven world leading tool used by analysts developers architects and operations teams for analysing documenting modernizing and rebuilding of IBM i applications It provides detailed analysis and interactive diagrammatic constructs that enable rich understanding of existing applications It also has a set of powerful re engineering facilities for automated database and application modernization which are integrated with the analysis and design extraction functions Whether an application is poorly structured or highly structured eg Synon 2E applications X Analysis can extract the design logic of the application providing an excellent base for efficient and effective design recov
37. _ Business Process Logic Level Cancel The Object List option is disabled in this dialog Choose the options which you want to document from the above dialog If a user selects the Business Rules for documentation then he has the option to get the business rules documented in MS Excel This can be done by checking the Export to MS Excel option If the user selects the Business Rules for documentation with the Summary X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 345 Document Manager option then the basic rule information will be documented if he selects the Detailed option then the logic behind the rule will also be documented If a user selects the Screen Report Layout for documentation with the Normal option then the System Documentation process will print the Screen and the Fields list of individual formats one after the other for all the screen formats If the Detailed option is selected then it will also print the Header information the Data Content Diagram and the Screen Action Diagram for each screen apart from the Screens and the Fields List for all the screen formats Click Next which displays the following screen Individual System Documents Specify Sequencing oystem Documentation Specify sequence What sequence would you like to have for the System Document Data Flow Diagram Normal with Annotation Structure Chart Normal w
38. _SLMEN gt X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 205 ths Program Logic Documentation Application Area OSC When you select the OSC option on an application area Application Area node should be selected then objects not belonging to the selected application area are highlighted in blue The names of application areas are displayed on the tool tip of those objects not belonging to the selected application area OSC on selected application area MVCPROCESS be Object List Ss Overview Structure Chart 2 3 Overview Structure Chart for MYCPROCESS ALL ALL Total Objects 15 amp Bl amp a o CUSLETSO Update Letter Sequence PLAN LIPDFIL CUSFSEL Customer Site Selection CUSGRSEL Customer group Selection NONE DSPFIL DISTSSEL Distributor Selection RINMSGTEXT Return message text NONE OTHCAL SCREEN REPORT DESIGN The Screen Report Design option works on Display and Printer Files It displays the actual layout for the Display Printer file This option also works on program objects RPG RPGLE and MENU and displays the layout of the associated Display Printer files X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 206 Screen Report Design view e object List H Device Design 2 Screen Design for CNTCMAINTD ZZFTO1 oO r p ES Screen Fields 4 Field details For CNTCMAINTOID Total Objects 12 Program Logic Documentation am SE Mm a alc Ob ME
39. and E in Process Customer 0 Oo Waiting Production Unit Tested Generated By Analysis Mot Verified tl gt There is an option to allow to Add User defined Rule Select the relevant File Field and set the Rule text and error message ID Such rules start from 60001 and are shown in a different color orange Select the option to invoke the following dialog Fal Business Rules 22 GE LTA Al E gooo Add User Defined Rule Rule Cus Mo not Found on Sites Company blank Phone lt gt blank Fax Mo lt gt blank File Distributor lt gt blank Exact match not Found For Distributor Field Sts lt gt blank Contact blank Salutation lt gt blank and lt gt Mr and Rule Customer 0 Source Member Message ID X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 452 THUS Appendix L Setting Status for Business Rules Note Define a rule only when you have selected the Business Rules feature on an individual program from the Source Member view Select the right click option to convert a rule to Exportable Non Exportable The option is displayed in the image below Business Rules window Convert to Exportable option Business Rules i Business Rules For CUSFMAINT Number of Lines 10 da Ys Terrea R a Source Member CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINT Rule Number ooouz OOO03 O
40. lt PleaseUpdateThisField gt Customer name lt PleaseUpdateThisField gt Telephone lt PleaseUpdateThisField gt IP he Oe Serial number Mes Partition ID 1 P Group POS Security Code modules 1 2 3 45 6 789 10 Exp 2038 11 30 Click Send Alternatively you can click Copy to Clipboard 1 Enter the login informations and Connect to retrieve the server informations Host Name seo UseSSL O Installed Licenses 2 Send the Server Information to Fresche Legacy to receive your License file Server Info Serial Number Partition ID Total Partitions Send Server Information Copy to Clipboard X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 35 HSA Using X Analysis Client The information gets copied and is displayed as follows Information displayed when clicking Copy to Clipboard X Analysis License Manager Tool Help License Manager View 52 1 Enter the login informations and Connect to retrieve the server informations Host Name w Username w Password sssssss Connect Use 55L C Info Installed Licenses Security Code 2 Send the Server Information to Fresche Solutions to receive your License file Server Info Serial Number Partition ID a Host information has been copied to clipboard Total Partitions J Company PleaseUpdateT hisField gt z Customer name lt PleaseUpdateThisField gt Send Server Informatic Telephone lt PleaseUpdateThisField
41. 000r 000s oaos o oara o o IL pobrago A poo omona Un 10 05 04 FCOMNOOLDFCF F F ZUSTS FCONADR FCOMNDET FATEMASA FATOMAA FATEBAL PT A IF EXPORT TO MICROSOFT EXCEL So o o oo 40000002 yeas erie a E testing WORES TH AREM1I ESFILE DISE DISE DISE DISE DISE DISE E X Analysis displays various lists All lists have the options to export data to MS Excel and MS Word The Export Options drop down icon appears on the associated toolbar Select Export to Excel and export current source code in the MS Excel format as displayed below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 320 Exporting amp Printing Microsoft Excel view of Current Source Code E Microsoft Excel X Analysis Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM1 QRPGSR E BX sE File Edit wiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Contribute Help Adobe POF i F E i Arial A BA BARER ESI S Snaglt Et window AZ fe mi0 5 Bos UJ Set E F FE i d Fy Reply with Changes End Review z A 1 X Analysis Source List of CON001 in XAN4CDEM QRPG E 2 E 3 Seg Ho ar a teas L da 0 eis 2 erateas aaa ea eee ametis 4 0001 00 US 10 05 04 A000000 testing 5 0002 00 FEONODIDFCF E WORKSTN 0003 00 F RERNI KSFILE OE SFL 0004 00 FeUSTS IF E k DISK FEONHDR UF E K DISK A OO06 00 FCOMDET UF E K DISK A O 0007 00 FSIKMAS IF E K DISK k k m m im J lt OOO O
42. 155 197 198 pseudo code 86 PTF Analysis 75 242 245 246 247 248 Purge Data 117 315 316 317 RDi 8 12 158 425 431 473 Referred Files 192 193 Re generate Programs 423 Relationship Details 302 303 305 306 Remote System Explorer 8 473 Remove History 471 Reset Perspective 426 RPG environment 440 Rule Status Manager 448 449 Runtime Environment 433 435 444 Screen Action Diagram 229 340 345 386 393 Screen Components 9 73 76 87 88 89 157 219 227 228 229 231 234 386 Screen Flow Diagram 155 207 208 209 210 Screen Metrics 75 253 262 263 264 265 Screen Source Code 219 220 Screen Report Design 157 205 206 207 429 Signon 25 26 380 430 445 447 Source archiving 281 Specialized Analysis 75 253 266 267 268 269 272 273 274 Spool File 121 122 123 440 Structure Chart Diagram 11 17 146 155 182 183 185 186 187 188 189 Structured Query Language 322 Subset Data 48 117 312 313 Summary Report 75 253 277 278 279 280 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 484 Synon 12 15 20 48 181 183 195 196 200 214 408 409 410 411 SYNON 399 440 TD OMS 469 Test Process 117 118 UML Options 123 293 297 Update Rules 450 Use SSL 27 445 447 V2 28 Variable Program Calls 21 22 Index Variable Where Used 4 51 52 96 97 98 145 146 162 163 164 165 166 302 442 478 480 Ve
43. 170 171 Business Process Logic 75 152 153 154 253 266 394 415 420 421 Business Rule Matching 452 Business Rules 9 11 13 17 18 19 20 21 46 66 69 70 76 86 87 116 150 151 158 159 163 219 230 231 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 338 344 389 394 396 401 412 415 416 417 423 436 439 440 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 Business Rules Analysis 9 66 235 Business Rules Overlay 46 150 448 Business Rules Status Category 453 Change Rule Status to 448 Class Diagram 48 156 219 229 230 233 293 295 296 297 Clean start Eclipse 425 435 473 Code Review 469 470 471 472 Component Status 81 82 Configure Columns 240 449 450 Consolidated Rules 46 76 86 87 151 152 448 Customised Libraries 75 242 245 246 247 Data Content 219 227 231 233 340 345 386 388 392 Data Content Diagram 227 340 345 386 392 Data Definition Language 69 322 Data Dictionary 218 298 299 300 301 303 304 305 306 Data Flow Diagram 5 11 46 48 98 146 155 173 174 180 181 182 431 475 477 478 data library 20 58 59 60 61 Data Management 116 117 298 306 312 313 315 316 data model 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 69 90 218 230 298 299 308 312 318 322 323 399 400 439 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 482 eh er Index Data Model Diagram 11 146 213 215 351 359 365 369 Data Modelling 19 27
44. 300 303 DB2 Connection 39 251 DDL 43 68 69 98 125 126 127 128 129 132 133 134 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 DDL conversion 127 129 134 Development Screen 89 90 Difference Analysis 75 242 243 244 Document Application Area 116 348 350 362 363 Document Manager 9 41 71 116 335 336 Documenter 40 41 160 207 219 231 232 335 336 347 376 386 427 428 Dreamweaver 56 225 Eclipse 12 25 28 44 56 158 224 226 423 425 426 427 429 435 444 Edit Problem Categories 76 253 283 284 285 entity relationship diagram 19 318 Excluded Rules 450 Export Options 68 72 116 144 160 258 265 318 319 323 326 331 336 Exportable Rules 450 File Analysis 126 133 File Connection 213 File Metrics 75 253 265 266 Filter by Rule Status 450 451 Flowchart 156 157 320 321 375 Function Attributes 82 Function Editor 219 220 221 233 Function Logic 294 295 296 297 Function Type 82 184 189 197 201 204 411 Generate Database Service Programs 69 71 331 332 Generate Programs 55 74 123 422 generic file 17 23 24 generic program 23 Google Drive 43 51 456 464 465 466 468 Graphical Editor Framework 431 Hierarchical Structure Chart 11 155 189 190 192 Hierarchy Exclusions 16 17 184 202 IBM i 9 12 13 19 27 39 45 71 100 158 242 249 251 325 331 378 427 Interactive Structure Chart 51 Inter Repository Options 7
45. AUC ODUONS rorirori ne E E AE EEE ee ee eee 124 UMC ODIOS ear a E A AE E E E A A E E EOE 124 DDL Modernization node on an Application Area cccsccccssecccesseeceeseceeaescesaeeees 126 Application Area Diagramming sesessesessecessecesseoesoscecssoecesoesesoecesoecesoesesseceseeceeee 141 Application Area Diagtaifissosisciaieun E EEEE ERR 141 Area Flow DAU AINA sopenssininiceriioin cinei err enin E EN EENAA 144 Quick Reference to an Object ssssesessesessecessscesescessscecesoesesoesessecessecesssoeceecesesoeoe 146 Jamb O DaO Ea E E EA OA 146 Source BROW SE VOW oa vsininsc deeusteegn anepi eea ip aTa eR REESE E TRAS EER cons E 148 ODE ENNO 0 EO ir AE EAEE 162 Variable Where Used ccccssccccessceccesececeescecseneceeeeeceseescesseaecessuscesseeeeseaecessuecessees 163 Fie FEIO DE eale anae A A ET eee 167 LF Access Paths aucuna eea E T Oaai 168 Mem er A RO aernrn e 169 Enhanced Member X Ref cccsssecccssecccessccccesececeececseneceeeaeceseusceseescesseecessuecesseaess 170 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 4 Contents Add BOOKMATE ces a aerew a E E E E EN 171 Program Logic Documentation ssessescecceecoesceccesceccoeccescecceeccescesceecoesceeceeceesceese 174 Data FLOW DIJET OI enet E EENE OENE 174 Structure Chart Diag ait icancctaseactevasacdratccenenoncsssenctusnardevacnsdvaisnerenareauseestuaiaedeeaasedeeteee 183 Application Area SCD uento E E a 190 Hierarchical Structure Chart Diagran wsnstsscas
46. DEVFMISMCH Source member changed after devicefile created FILEMISMCH Source member changed after file created NOFILEOB No file found for existing source member NOFILESRC No source member for file NOPGMOB No program object found for source member NOPGMSRC No source member for program module FILEMISMCH Source member changed after file created ZEFILEQUD NODEVOBJ No device file found for existing source member NODEVSRC No source member for device file NODTAREF Referenced data area does not exist NOFILEREF Referenced database file does not exist Use the Edit Add or Delete buttons to make changes to the Problem Category Group Click Edit to invoke the following dialog Edit dialog Problem Category Group Problem Category Group Group Number 1 Description Edit the Group Number and or the Description Click Save Click Add to invoke the following dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 285 HSA Audit Options Add dialog Problem Category Group Problem Category Group Group Number Category Group Seq No Severity Category Description Cancel Enter details in the given fields In the Category Group section enter the sequence number and the severity scale to be assigned to the new category The Severity scale indicates the complexity of the problem and is based on the combination of problem report data
47. For each attribute 1 6 you will allocate weights e g each file usage 1 each Copybooks usage 4 etc The sum total of these per program will be calculated and the Complexity level for the program worked out E g Points lt 10 LOW 10 20 AVERAGE gt 20 HIGH You can allocate weights in the General Metrics Preferences dialog 2 Units When collapsed it displays the total number of programs When expanded it displays the names of the programs 3 Text Displays the description of the object 4 Source Type Informs about the type of source 5 Source Lines Total number of Source Lines in a source member 6 Cyclomatic Complexity Measures amount of decision logic in a program Shows total number of conditional statements used 7 Halstead Displays program s complexity directly from source code based upon the operators and operands used X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 256 Audit Options 8 Maintainability Index The maintainability index is calculated with certain formulae from lines of code measures Cyclomatic Complexity and Halstead complexity measures 9 Files Total number of Files used by the source member 10 Device Files Total number of Display and Printer Files used by the source member 11 Called Programs Total number of called programs from the source member 12 Calling Programs Total number of calling programs from the source member Note The Cyclomatic Complexity
48. LEGACY Options on Screen Components Function Editor option Screen Components i k La sie a ES CS Ek Ee Ta E iB i fal E Screen Components For Application Library AN4A Gall Program Function Type Seqgho OSPF Format Physical File Title CUSTMAT1I I el PY UST MINT OLD CLUSTMAT 1020 5 F7FTO Screen Source Code CUSTMNTI_R or Function Editor ffFTO1 at Preview Designer Z 2F 102 CUSTMAT1 ROD CUSTMATL RO2D Page Designer R I R R CUSTMNT1_O I CUSTMNT1 OO1D R 77FTO1 Of2 Data Content R I R R I R CUSTMNT1_0020 ZZFTO2 we Screen Actions TE H Class Diagram FFFTO Business Rules CUSTMMT1_1 CUSTMNITL 1010 CUSTMNITL_1020 CUSTMMT1L_ CUSTMNTL 2010 Component Documenter kS mm 22F TOL B Annotate Select the Function Editor option to invoke the following window Function Editor window e Object List a e zzETOL ES gt 77FT01 Screen Editor CUSTMNT101D H i A E 10 ig E E A File Field Action Label Line Column Attribute Type Parameters E Files CUSTS Purchases DISTS Distributors SLMEN Salespersons CUSGRP Customer Groups E Fields 2PM Databorough Ltd ZZDATE awRCCD Customer Wo Mult TA Customer Wane AWBZ CO Statement Account oy BSD Related Account SWHITS Tax Reg i as SWWEONB Bank AWOUNO Bank Alc Select a particular field and right click over it for the context menu The context menu will displ
49. Other functions The following screen displays the Screen Metrics information for the cross reference library XAN4CDXA Window displaying Screen Metrics for XAN4CDXA Screen Metrics for XAN4CD A feaua Complexity Level Units Files Database Fields Work Fields Outgoing Calls Incoming Calls Function Keys Conditioning Fields E Grand Total a a31 664 Jaza fe Ja as O O aO O High 6 55 13 6 48 Average fl 1i4 590 Low 11 11 19 a TH Application Area Breakdown ACCOUNTS 38106 57H IR High Tahar 5 o 0 0 12 Average 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Low 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CUSFMAINT 62 105 59 BO The Metrics information displayed above has the following columns 1 Complexity Level This shows various groups The topmost group is either Grand Total or App area totals All functions in application areas or cross reference application are then grouped based on complexity and then on type of function 2 Units Shows the number of functions in the group 3 Files Total number of Files used by screen function 4 Database Fields Total number of screen fields which are read from database fields 5 Work Fields Total number of work fields in the group 6 Outgoing Calls Number of functions called by this function 7 Incoming Calls Number of functions calling this function 8 Function Keys Total number of Function key based actions called by functions in this group 9 Conditioning Fields Number of fields on whic
50. Page 159 JHJ LEGACY a Object List 2h k Object List of ALLUSR ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Total Objects 362 a7 a fl Library XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM CLXAN4CDEM RE KANACDEM XAN4CDEM CLXAN4CDEM CLXAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM PF XAN4CDEM Re XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM LFXAN4CDEM LF XAN4CDEM LFXAN4CDEM LF XAN4CDEM PF XANACDEM LF XAN4CDEM LF XAN4CDEM LF XAN4CDEM PF XAN4CDEM Nt waeaktacnre w Name BALANCESTO CBCUSTSD CBC110 CB906R CB906RD CLET CLETN CLO3 CNTACS CNTCMAINT CNTCMAINTD CNTLF1 CNTLF2 CNTLF3 CNTLF4 CONDET CONDETL1 CONDETL2 CONDETL3 CONDETNW eB EE mA Type OMFORM FILE PGM PGM FILE PGM PGM PGM FILE Attribute QUERY DSPF CLP RPG DSPF CLP Description Balance by Store Work with Customers Order Entry System Back out account Order Entry display file Build Customer Letter Print Customer Letter for read source file Contacts Contacts Maintenance Contacts Maintenance Global Contacts by Salesman Global Contacts by Name Global Contacts by Status Global Contacts by Prod amp Status Contract Detail by Store Contract Product by Store Contract Product by Product Contract Contract Detail new CBL Ver wr p at o OO i gt Quick Reference to an Object More Info window for a Program CNTCMAINT More Info for CNTCMAINT General Name CNTCMAINT Description Contacts Maintenance Library XAN4CDEM Type PGM Attribute RPGLE
51. Program logic for ER Edit Hospital Edit record 1 secre E USER Initialize detail screen new record WERE Number 4 ZERO WERE Number 5 ZERO WEE Number 7 ZERO WRER AlLpha 6 BLANE Country RIVCND DTL Country Name Inpervelize Petal Screen existing record M X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 416 Appendix F X2E Specific Features Note that the Call has a before it indicating that the program being called has parameter s BUSINESS RULES Opt for the Business Rules option from the Source Options drop down menu on the Action Diagram toolbar Business Rules option on the Action Diagram toolbar e Programs B TSAJEIR 3 H Action Diagram for ER Edit Hospital Edit recordi 1 screenj TSAJE1R E Ham it S Ba os f Original Source Code w Action Diagram tion Migrated Logic logic for ER Edit Hospital Edit record 1 serem ii gt On selecting the Business Rules option the following screen is displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 417 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Appendix F X2E Specific Features Business Rules for the selected program e Programs TSAJEIR BS E r Business Rules for TS4JE1R in 442EDEMO O2ESRC E a H Pe SB eA o f Business Rules Program logic for ER Edit Hospital Edit recordil screen TsaAJEL1R USER Initialize detail screen new record
52. The Use MS Word OLE Automation box is unchecked by default Checking the box activates OLE Automation allowing greater flexibility in handling data during the document generation process Diagram Export The Use Open Office Draw for 64 Bit box is unchecked by default Check the box to use Open Office Draw for exporting diagrams more efficiently in 64 bit machines If the box is left unchecked the diagrams will be exported in the default format Synon Data Flow Diagram When the Use old logic for Synon DFD box is checked then the Synon DFD uses the older logic of reading the references from X2EPGRF When the box is not checked the new logic is used In the latter case you must have the latest server Database Language Translation This allows French users to select Database Translation Language which enables correct display of French characters in the X Analysis Client software X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 48 Using X Analysis Client FOLDERS PREFERENCES Expand the X Analysis node to view modify the Folders Preferences Folders Preferences Preferences type filter text Folders Folder Preferences Data Management Analysis Folder D Program Files Databorough 4nalysis Help Install Update Logs and Temporary Files Folder Java Mote Javascript The user should have the wrikefmodify authority to the selected Folder IPA Y Analysis Perspective should be
53. X Analysis System Documentation Specify Sequence what sequence would you like to have For the System Document Application Grea OSC Normal Application Area DMD Normal Mowe Up Move Down Cancel From the above screen the user can re sequence the options selected for System Documentation After re sequencing click Next to reach the final step of documentation wizard Here the user can see all selections that he has made and can also define various options related to document formatting like Paper Size Contention Resolution etc X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 362 Document Manager Select Paper Size and Resolution X Analysis System Documentation Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Level Settings Application Area OST Normal Application Grea OSC Level 2 Application 4rea DMD Normal Paper Size Letter 8 5 11 O A4 Size 8 27 x 11 69 Contention Resolution System Documentation creates documents in Application Folder IF the Application Folder is shared and documents are created opened while the documentation is in progress then this may lead to contention Please select appropriate options to enable resolution Do not overwrite Overwrite if exists but if in use then Create document by similar name CO Exit Skip document creation Click Finish to generate the document Document Ap
54. and Show unrelated files 4 Click OK The Data Model Diagram node is present under the cross reference library node and the Application Area nodes X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 216 Data Model Diagram DMD FOR AN APPLICATION AREA The DMD can also be generated for an application area It can be opted either by expanding the application area under the cross reference library node or by selecting the specific application area name on the Data Model Diagram dialog The DMD for an application area is restricted to that application area representing the relationships among the related objects of the application area DMD for Application Area MVCPROCESS Restricted at Data Model Diagram 22 A Er Data Model Diagram for M CPROCESS ALL Total Objects 13 A E we 0s fa 7 Purchases i Order status description Contract Detail Salespersons Transaction type Store Master description Distributors Customer Groups a DMO Details 2 als E A DMO Relations for MYCPROCESS 4LL Total Relations 22 Rel Mo Dependent File Relation Type Parent File Dependent Fields Parent Fields Dep 1 Contract Detail OWNED BY Contract Header Contract Contract COL Z Contract Detail REFERS TO Stock Balances Product Store Stk Bal Product Store COMC 3 Contract Detail REFERS TO Product Master Product Stk Product CONI 4 Contract Detail REFERS TO Store Master Store Store COR a
55. change date e UPG Upgrade the X Analysis database and rebuild all data including all indexes replacing current ones Build Data Model If you take the option to build the data model for your application then you can view it through X Analysis Select one of the following e YES Build the data model e NO Do not build the data model Should have the X Analysis Professional set for this to work Generate Business Rules If you take the option to generate the business rules for your application then you can view it through X Analysis Select one of the following e YES Generate Business Rules e NO Do not generate Business Rules Should have the X Rules set for this to work X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 18 Anda Configure Cross Reference Library Feature Brief Description Initialize X Resize If you take the option to generate the X Resize Project for your application then you can view it through X Analysis Select one of the following e YES Initialise X Resize Project e NO Do not initialise X Resize Project Should have the X Field Resize Module for this to work Include obsolete If you set this as source object e YES It will pick the name of the same Object Source from the Library List of the X Ref e NO Only the first instance of the same Object Source from the Library List of the X Ref will get picked Obsolete source refers to source member
56. click Consent screen The following window will appear X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 460 thJs LEGACY Appendix M Export to Google Drive Consent screen window Google Developers Console x https console developers google com project eternal nucleus 803 apiui consent ve a Search HA A Ya Google Developers Console lt Projects My Project APIs amp auth APIs Credentials Consent screen Push Monitoring Source Code Storage Big Data Support Need help Privacy amp terms Consent screen The consent screen will be shown to users whenever you request access to their private data using your client ID Note This screen will be shown for all of your applications registered in this project EMAIL ADDRESS Logo PRODUCT NAME Product Name Project Name would like to HOMEPAGE URL Optional Sign up for a free trial rr gmail com Know your basic profile info and list of people in your circles PRODUCT LOGO Optional Make your listen app and comment activity available via Google visible to Your circles This is how your logo will look to end users Max size 120x120 px By clicking Accept you allow this app and Google to use your information in accordance with their respective terms of service and privacy policies You can change this and other Account Permissions at any time PRIVACY POLICY URL Opti
57. gt lt Select Browse to set location gt Cancel After selecting the Generate Individual System Documents option click Browse Select the desired location to save the document X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 343 ths Document Manager Document Folder Browse For Folder f Desktop E My Documents 4 My Computer a My Network Places Q Online Help New Images Folder My Documents Make New Folder For the Generate Individual System Documents option the following dialog is displayed after the user clicks Next on the System Document Wizard X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 344 thJsst LEGACY Document Manager Individual System Documents Features oystem Documentation Specify Contents Select features to be included in the System Document Object List Data Model Diagram Normal In Word as Image Detailed In Visio Annotation _ LF Access Path details Detailed _ File Field Details Field Annotation Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Normal C Detailed Annotation Structure Chart Normal C Expanded C Detailed Depth 5 w Annotation Screen Flow Diagram Normal _ Expanded Program Structure Chart _ Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal Detailed _ Business Rules Export to M5 Excel Summary Detailed a Include Internal Rtn s Source Source level Pseudo Code Flowchart Level
58. in turn calling program of calling program This setting specifies the number of maximum recursions made while querying for the calling program The default level is 7 Default Source Editor o LPEX LPEX editor is checked by default for IBM Rational products having RSE plugin It implies that the source member will be displayed in LPEX editor for editing purpose o 5250 Emulator 5250 Emulator is the default option for non RSE plugin It implies that the source member will be displayed in a 5250 session for editing purpose Others o No of records to display Displays the total number of records to be displayed in any FILE object when the View Data option is executed X DATA TEST PREFERENCES Expand the X Data Test node to view modify the X Data Test Preferences X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 52 Preferences type Filter text H General H Ant Data Management Help Install Update Jav JavaScript JPA Model Validation Plug in Development Remote Systems Run Debug Server Service Policies Tasks Team Tomcat UML Diagrams Usage Data Collector Validation Web Web Services Analysis Advanced Folders General amp Data Test E 4 Reda Advanced Doclet AML Using X Analysis Client X Data Test Preferences Data Test Data Testing d Java specific version Screen Testing Default Recording Mode
59. k mm oF Object ARPGLE CUSTS CUSTS CUSTS CUSTS CUSTS ARMETCHGS ARMETCHGS ARMVBIZRMB ARMVBIZRMEB AREENGPGM AREENGPGM Frobler Appendix N Code Review feature TD OMS support Problem Analysis Request History aon i Problem Analysis Request History 960 Records Category Update date on source and object do not Source member changed after file created Source member changed after file created File has Constraints No Matching Parent Key in derived const Foreign Key value does not match parent Greatest IF DO block nbr of lines exceeds Greatest IF DO block nbr of lines exceeds Update date on source and object do not Unused Procedures Update date on source and object do not Program has non excluded hardcoded l Comment Request generated by QPADEVO01 Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Request generated by ACODERVW Date 2015 05 14 2015 05 05 2015 05 05 2015 05 05 2015 05 05 2015 05 05 2015 04 24 2015 04 24 2015 04 24 2015 04 24 2015 04 24 2015 04 24 lt The Code Review functionality can be used for the entire X Ref library and for individual objects as well
60. renamed From cusfla For testing b Attributes E CUSFLC Sites by Salesperson b Attributes CUSFLE Sites by Organisation P Attributes m CLUSFLZ Sites by Status b Attributes CUSFLS Sites by Dist amp Skatus b Attributes lt Page 179 Program Logic Documentation Detail DFD icon The Detail DFD presents the field usage of all the objects Detail DFD icon e Files ZA Object Where Used CUSTMNTI aa ysr i m Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 o g A g i RA A Detail DFD a CUSF m CUSFLA Sites by Product renamed Fromm cusfla For testing b Access Paths 13 Objects H Sore F 2 When you click on the Detail DFD icon on the toolbar the Attributes section of all the objects gets expanded displaying referred fields from all objects The following screenshot displays the detailed DFD screen Detailed DFD view a Fies dh Object where led Bacus use K og Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 a A A Ow r A E EAUDCUSF 0 ZBPRNCUSF CLUSF CUSFLA B CUSFLE Audit CUSF File Print Customer Details Sites Sites by Product renamed from Sites by Orig List Input Fields w Input 5 Fields cut for testing No Attributes P Access Paths 13 Objects H Input Programs 54 Objects H Input Services 1 Object H 0 ADDS Address 4 No Attributes a CNAME Company CNAME Company a CUSNG Cus No
61. 00 DCL VAR sCUSN0 TYPE DEC LEN S 0 CLET 0009 00 CHGVAR CUSNO COANE CLET 0010 00 CALL LETNI sCUSH0 PREFIX LETSQ CLETW 0001 00 FGM PARM amp CUSNO PREFIX amp LLETag CLETW 0003 00 DCL VAR amp CUSNO TYPE DEC LENIS 0 CLETW 0010 00 CALL LETNI iCUSNO PREFIX LLETSQ CNTACS 0003 00 CUSHO SP D TEXT Cus No CNTACS 0021 00 E COSNO CNTCMAINT 0101 00 eval zcusno cusna 4 Legend Dark Red depicts the Definition Statements Black depicts the File Operations Magenta depicts the Parameters Dark Brown depicts the Program Structure Operation Dark Blue depicts the Field Operation X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 164 ands Quick Reference to an Object Legend for Variable Where Used ee fariable Where Used s ee B fess Fe T ko O ariable where Used for ALLICUSNO Lines 184 view Level Levell I Definition Statements Io Name Seq Non Torr tea oahi secre eats E File Operations Bc Gs oe CBCUSTSD oz70 00 4 FCUSNO R CDEM CUM CBCUSTSD 0383 00 aA 2CUSN0 E E Parameters CDEM CU CLET OO04 00 DCL VAR amp CUSNO TYPE E Program Structure Operation CLET 0009 00 CHGVAR CUSANO sCUSNC CLET 0010 00 CALL LETN1 amp CUSN0 PREFIX 4E Field Operation CLETN OOO1 O0 FGM PARM lt amp CUSNO amp PREF DS ELCLETSI CLETH 0003 00 DCL VAR SCUSNO TYPE DEC LENS 0 CLETH 0010 00 CALL LETNI amp CUSN0 PREFIX amp LLETSQ ka lt it gt View Levels The Var
62. 1 Choosing Perspective in RDp Window New Wingo Open Perspective Show view Customize Perspective Save Perspective s Reset Perspective Close Perspective Close All Perspectives Navigation Open Perspective cvs Repository Exploring Le Database Debug Le Database Development Debug g Java d Java Browsing g Java EE default fel Java Type Hierarchy JavaScript He JPA ae Planning eth Plug in Development ER Remote System Explorer Py Resource fla SW Repository Exploring eo Tear Synchronizing web ane 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 25 Using X Analysis Client Click OK to start the X Analysis Perspective X Analysis Perspective A Analysis Eclipse Platform File Edit Navigate Search Project A Analysis Tomcat Run Window Help Qa 6 H Gee org Navigation Metrics Dashboard fa New Connection Host Name 127 0 0 1 wema UseSSL Session Information Session Items Description Host Name A Analysis Usern A Analysis Library Job Details lt Expand the New Connection node to bring up the Sign on dialog X Analysis Sign on dialog Host Name 192 168 170 10 Username Use SSL LJ Enter the following information to the Sign on dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 26 eet Sar Using X Analysis Client 1 Enter the TCP IP address Computer Name of the IBM i to be accessed 2 P
63. 5 00 5 25 Time in Months Size No of Members Records Deleted Records All Statistics can be further split for individual parameters like Size or No of records as specified in the context menu When you select the Size option the size of the database is plotted as follows Size view E Database Statistics Database Statistics Chart I D Statistics Chart 53 Ja Database History for CNTACS 10 000 5 000 7 0 00 0 25 0 50 0 75 1 00 1 25 1 50 1 75 2 00 2 25 2 50 2 75 3 00 3 25 3 50 3 75 4 00 4 25 4 50 4 75 5 00 5 25 Time in Months X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 293 UML Diagramming UML Diagramming X Analysis provides various options for UML diagramming on RPG RPT SQLRPG types of programs The following options are available in X Analysis for UML diagramming Re generate UML Activity Diagram Class Diagram The UML Diagramming options are available on the context menu under the UML Options submenu on the Object Member List THE PRE REQUISITES 1 Asa pre requisite you need to install the XAUML msi XA UML Support 2 Use the Business Rules functionality to re engineer the programs The Activity Diagrams will then be generated on the re engineered program s Note The UML functionality works only on the Eclipse 3 4 provided with the Runtime Environment RE GENERATE UML When the Re generate UML option is opted from the UML Options submenu availab
64. AUTO ADD C O AUTO ASSIGN CUST ADD COST INCOME AUTO ADD DOC AUTO ASS ITM JCPMST AUTO ADD P O POPSHP AUTO ADD J The fourth submenu option is Relationships Select this option to view relationships among all the PFs that form the Data Model as the files contained in an application could be inter related For executing the data modelling procedure it is imperative to have information of all these relationships OWNING PF ASTATUS ASTATUS CONDET CONDET CONDETNW CONDETNW CONHDR CONHDR CONHDR CONHDR CUSF CUSF lt DEP PF CNTACS CUSF PROJECT TRNHST PROJECT TRNHST CONDET CONDETNW PROJECT TRNHST CNTACS CUSTS Data Dictionary Relationships DEP LF CNTLF3 CUSFL2 DEP SEQ K TYPE 1 0 2 0 PROJECLIA 1 0 TRNHSTL6 2 0 PROJECL5A 1 0 TRNHSTL6 2 0 CONDET 1 0 CONDETNW 2 0 PROJECLSA 3 0 TRNHSTL6 4 0 CNTACS CUSTSL3 1 0 2 0 OWNING PF TEXT RELNID Status file 00102 Status file 00114 Contract Detail 00126 Contract Detail 00144 Contract Detail new CBL V Contract Detail new CBL V Contract Header Contract Header Contract Header 00128 Contract Header 00146 Sites 00101 Sites 00118 There are three types of relationships that can be identified X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 302 Data Management Features Owns PID to PID relationship Accesses Access Path to Access Path relationship
65. Analysis dialog prompting to open the generated document X Analysis System Documentation process completed The POF document has been sawed as D Program Files Databoroughis Analysis192 168 170 10 PCF_ 4N4Coe4 System Document For Soh4COe4 pdf Do you want to open this Viewing the Generated Document The following screens display the generated document Table of Contents system Document for XAN4CDXA pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional led File Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help x oF mg Ela Le amp SYSTEM DOCUMENT FOR XAN4CDXA TABLE OF CONTENTS CUSTMNT1I01D Customer Detail Mainbenance _ 2 ecceresecceseecetsaceeessceereaceeeesseeesanenesecceneaneeesseeneneass Header Information for 22FTO1 CUS TMNT 101D ne eeeeceeceeseeeeneceeeeeeeneeeseceessnnssccereneersceeeeceeaees Parameter List for 27FT01 CUSTMINT 1010 2 nn een nnn neee ee eeeecesenneenceesnceen ceeeeneeeenseeecneeenenees Data Content Diagram for 27FTO CUSTMNTIOID WW We seeneecenennesecesneteracenseneeseneesenneseaeeaces Screen Action Diagram for 22FTO1 CUSTMNT101D W ne eceeteeeseneeseceeseneesnnneraaceesesessecneeeneeeenes Screen Design for 27FT01 CUSTMNT 1010 2 2 2 nnnnnnecen none eee cece eee ee cece een eee eeeeen eee eneeenenees Migrated Logic for Function 27FTO1 CUSTMNTIO1D ee ceceecncee neces secnseaceesseeesenenecenesceeeaces Business Rules for 22FTO CUSTMNT
66. CORP 1980 2009 MW R 20 007 Stop hevetrohe recording and save X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 386 ANUS Appendix C Component Documenter Appendix C Component Documenter The Component Documenter option documents the extracted Screen Components Re engineered Functions The option is available on the toolbar of Screen Components Data Content Diagram and Screen Action Diagram The System document is generated for the selected Screen Component WORK WITH COMPONENT DOCUMENTER Expand the X Analysis application library cross reference library and then double click the Screen Components node This invokes the Screen Components list Select the screen component for which component documentation is to be done and then click the Component Documenter icon as shown below Component Documenter option on the Screen Components list EA Business Rules 3 Screen Components lt G Fob E B H baa Arn o Screen Components for Application Library YAN4CDNA Ali l component Documenter Program Function Type S5eqMo DSPF Format Physical File Titl LONOOLOTS l OESFL LONDET CONTRACT ENTRY CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINTOLD f2FTO1 CUSF Customer Site Mainte CUSFMOLD CUSFMOLDOID f2FTO1 USF Customer Site Mainte i CUSFSEL E CUSFSELOIL CUSFSELO1G FFCTL Please select FF SFL Please select CUSFSELR CUSFSELROID FFCTL Please select E CUSGRSEL CUSGRSEL01D
67. Comparison Name Text Library Comparison Library Name Status Object Usage Usage Comparison Usage Value Incl Ref d Pgms Pgms Level Incl Ref d Files Incl Owning Files Incl Dependent Files No Application Area CNTCM CB906R Cancel The various options in the Application Area Rules dialog are described as below Feature Brief Description Sequence The sequence number of the rule which determines the order in which the rules are processed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 106 HJA Application Area Feature Brief Description Rule Type Rule Value Selection Object Type Object Comparison X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Select from Object This specifies that the scope of the rule type for only an Object Application Area This specifies the scope of the rule type for an application area Problem Analysis This specifies the scope of the rule type on Problem Analysis Category When the Rule Type is set as Application Area the Rule Value dropdown will display all the application area names when Rule Type is Problem Analysis then all the Problem Analysis categories are displayed Defines whether the specified Object s should be selected or omitted Choose from S Select O Omit AND a further condition for the previous Select Omit If only Omits are specified then a Select ALL will be applied when the rules are processe
68. DEM AAMA DEM AAMA DEM Type Attribute FEM RPISleE PGM RPGLE PGM RPGLE FEM RPGLE epg ppg Fiz Compare with Previous Fiz Compare with Next Context Menu displaying Source Compare Options E Change History 5 E Av A Description Customer group Selection Customer group Selection Customer Site Selection Customer Site Selection uro Conversion Calculation es CPU Letter Customer Enquiry Letter Fiz Compare with Current Find Fax Number eel id SS acim Release Letter FP GM RPts FP GM RPts Summary Customer Report Security Code Report You can also view this data in program sequence For this click on the Order by Program option available on the toolbar Order by Program option Ta Change History 25 Change History for XAN4CDZA e Object List ChangedDate Mame Library Type Attribute 2013 03 20 Description k Source change date Order by Program The following window will be invoked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 91 HIS Application Library Change History Order by Program window e Object List Change History E3 E Change History for XAN4CDXA im FA e Po ta ChangedDate Mame Library E CES06R 2013 03 14 Soh 4 DEM Back ouk account CBC110 2013 03 14 Soh DEM Order Entry System 2011 09 15 aoh4_DEM Order Entry System CLET 2013 03 14 Soh DEM Build Customer Letter 2011 09 71 Soh DEM Build Customer Letter CLETH 2013 03 14 Soh 4 DEM Print Custo
69. Databorough Ltd XARWKAPP 13 26921 21 Jan 2015 rer Library Text S Company division indez sre Files cote F Process var amp bound calls Include obsolete source Build data model Data model match value TCPIP address User iD F1l Help F3 Exit F12 Cancel X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 13 Configure Cross Reference Library Cc This option will add an entry to the list of the X Analysis 4 applications and create a new empty cross reference library You must specify the name of the cross reference library TA e g XAN4CDXA You can optionally specify text and a company name X4WRKAPP Application added X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Applications Databorough Ltd XARWKAPP hee Ge Zl lena E ZC IES p ae E ON sa Cem ne ee XAN4CDXAT Eee aan cyl ee a ean Or UNA eet se eyes XAN4CDEM1 Tutorial System Company division Dingle sre ir eS 5a so o o o o o c Y Process var amp boune calls s c Y Include obsolete source Build data model Data model match value TCPIP address User iD F1l Help F3 Exit F12 Cancel LIBRARIES After successfully adding the cross reference library the next step is to provide libraries for the cross reference library These libraries are used when initializing the application and for various other commands which need this information Select Option 8 to assign the Source Object and Model 2E Libraries X4WRKAPP Libraries screen
70. Diagram at Data Model Diagram Ea Overview Structure Chart Se All Objects I Programs E Files Source Files Business Rules Em Consolidated Rules Screen Components Ce Change History Regenerated Programs Source Scan x Sanitize Resize sa Procedures All Procedures es Exportable Functions External Procedures SOL Procedures cis ACCOUNTS Company Accounts These options are discussed as under 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 95 Application Library All Procedures The first option under the Procedures node is All Procedures Select All Procedures to display a list of members The members in this list have procedures defined in their source code Procedure Marne lt FILE gt checkRow lt FILE gt deleteRow lt FILE gt _insertRow lt FILE gt readRow lt FILE gt readRows lt FILE gt _updateRow abbrev ACOMMENT aComment acvilsActive Already_Identitied AnalyseDBF AnalhyseLF All Procedures option All Procedures List Total Objects 2261 Source Member ZSTEMPLATE STEMPLATE STEMPLATE STEMPLATE STEMPLATE STEMPLATE XSRSRY XRRCVUNI XRRCVURY ABRBDSFE ADDLANZDBF ADDLANZLF Source File ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC Source AASRC AASRC AASRC XASRC XASRC RASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC AASRC AASRC AASRC Context menu on a Procedure Name All Procedures
71. EMENU Total Objects 14 fl H OEMENU Order Entry Menu Referred Files O_o O oo Order Entry Order Enquiry Product Enquiry Referred Files Referred Files Referred Files O DEOM TD OEO06 Customer Enquiry Mainte Print Invoices Referred Files Referred Files Click on the icon to invoke a pop up window which provides the auto generated narration for the program as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 192 HJA Program Logic Documentation Narratives pop up box e Object List ch OEMENU 2i E Hierarchical Structure C EMENU Total Objects 14 F y H gar i E OEMENU OEMENU Program Order Entry Menu A principal function of this program is to present a menu te call certain programs L OE001 Order Entry Referred Files Order Enquiry Referred Files Product Enquiry Referred Files O OE004 OE006 Customer Enquiry Mainte Print Invoices Referred Files Referred Files Referred Files The Hierarchical Structure Chart has a feature which displays the referred files inline An expandable icon called Referred Files is available in each box Click on the icon preceding Referred Files X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 193 Referred Files Program Logic Documentation E002 Order Enquiry Referred Files o OE004 OE006 D Customer Enquiry Mainte Refe
72. F 0ELNS Perform FRO Format Shape tLines 0057 00 co 00 a Help i z X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 376 Document Manager LIMITATIONS OF X ANALYSIS SYSTEM DOCUMENTER Editing another Word Document X Analysis uses OLE Automation to send data to Microsoft Word This depends on Automation objects provided by Microsoft Word Automation objects by Microsoft Word have the limitation that when Automation is used on a Word document then editing of another Word document may get affected or may interfere with the automation process of the system document The following problems may be noticed in the document being edited The cursor will frequently change to hourglass Text once selected may not be unselected After clicking a menu it may disappear by itself Opening a dialog may end block the documentation process abruptly USING THE ANNOTATOR Annotate option The Annotate option is available on the context menu of an object or field name Selecting the Annotate option invokes a dialog box Provide the required text and click Save The annotation is stored in a table available in the cross reference library Annotation dialog for a program object Annotation for CUSTMNT1 Additional Notes Cancel X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 377 SSS aa yng Document Manager Object type based Annotation The annotations based on the Object type are sa
73. File Exclusion window Window Spool File Exclusion cae Spool File Exclusion 2 5 F Test Result Spool File Exclusion ee Ys fa Spool Mame Spool Description Recognition Value Recognition Start Postion Recognition Length Exclusion You can add a new spool file by clicking the Add Spool File icon as shown below Add Spool File icon ey Spool File Exclusion 3 Test Result Spool File Exclusion Spool Mame Spool Description Recognition value Recognition Start Postion Recognition Length Exclusion The following dialog box is invoked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 122 Anos Application Area Dialog Add Spool File Spool Mame Spool Description Recognition Value Add Spool File Spool Name Provide the Spool Name and the Spool Description in the above dialog Click OK to add the Spool File to the Spool File Exclusion window In the following screenshot the added Spool File is displayed o Spool File Exclusion window displaying the added Spool File E E Spool File Exclusion xo A Test Result Spool File Exclusion eR fs fa Spool Name Spool Description Recognition Value Recognition Start Postion Recognition Length ORDERSPL Eliminate date time differences _ ee ee ae The next step will be to add exclusion criteria to the spool file For this select the spool file and right click on it for the context menu The menu contains a singl
74. For 4 Test Demo F BASRES Base run results F TSTRES1 Unchanged results at level 1 E3 F TSTRESI 2 Results Level 1 with spool exclusions F TSTRES Level 2 some changes Found 4 F TSTRESS Level 3 more changes Found Create Checkpoint Definition This option is used to create checkpoints The checkpoint acts as an image of the test data The tutorial application has a pre defined checkpoint XAN4CDCKP The following screen displays the checkpoint Checkpoint node BE ATEST s Test Demonstration F Test Process sAM4COCEKP Checkpoint For 4 Test Demo Ep BASRES Base run results E3 Ep TSTRES1 Unchanged results at level 1 E3 F TSTRES1 2 Results Level 1 with spool exclusions F TSTRES2 Level 2 some changes Found E3 F TSTRESS Level 3 more changes Found Create Test Result Definition Create the Test Result Definition in order to save the test process results The tutorial application is pre configured to have a Test Result Definition BASRES The following screen displays the test result definition Test Result node S MTEST amp Test Demonstration F Test Process rs Soh COCKER Checkpoint For 4 Test Demo p BASRES Base run results F TSTRESI Unchanged results at level 1 E3 F TSTRES1 2 Results Level 1 with spool exclusions F TSTRES2 Level 2 some changes Found TSTRESS Level 3 more changes Found Test Result Field Exclusion This option lists all
75. Fresche Legacy Inc Page 428 Appendix G Troubleshooting X Analysis 3 System documentation Failed java io FileWotFoundException D Prograrn Files Databorough Analysis 192 168 170 10 PCF_sAN4RFLIB System Document For XAN4RFLIE log tek The System cannot Find the path specified This means that the user does not have rights to create files under Program Files folder Do the following to get around this problem 1 On WDSc under the X Analysis menu opt for Change Application Folder Select the folder for which you have full rights 2 Opt for the Documenter again SWTEXCEPTION ON WINDOWS 2000 MACHINES If the following error is reported on opting for diagrams in X Analysis running under Windows 2000 machine X Analysis a x x This error was not expected and is probably due to 4 programming problem Kindly report this error with the Following information to supporb databorough com See Error log for more detail Reason org eclipse swt SWTException Unable to load graphics library GDI is required java lang NoClassDefFoundError Details gt gt This can be corrected as follows This is the SWTException that is reported on the Windows 2000 machines The cause for this exception is the absence of GDI library gdiplus dll on Windows 2000 On Windows XP and Vista it is available by default The user needs to download the required DLL gdiplus dll from Microsoft site
76. Geo O Label Line Column Databorough Ltd z 6g Customer Mo co Product Code Fit contact Name 20 Telephone Mo 28 Email Address 20 Last Contact Date 20 Next Contact Date 20 Salesperson 28 SAPS 7A Field AEP GM EDATE CUSNO PRP_DE USERNM TELNO fFasNO EMAIL L_TDAT 2APDATE PERSON PSTATIS key Type File WorkField WorkField CATaLS WorkField WorkField WorkField WorkField WorkField WorkField WorkField SLMEN WiorkField Attribute Output Output Both Both Both Both Both Both Both Both Both Anth Type Length A A 5 A A A A A L L A A 10 11 z 2 a4 1 15 a0 10 If more than one Display or Printer File is associated with a program then the Screen Report Design will display Screen Design list icon for selecting the DSPF PRTF to display Select Layout for DSPF PRTF Nexk Screen Format X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 207 Program Logic Documentation Screen Report Layout view F e Object List H Device Design 23 0 Report Layout for OEOO6RT d P a Alr If you select the Screen Report Design option while documenting then the current Screen Design will be printed with the Field Details An option for detailed documentation of Screen Design has been provided
77. Google Authorization successful dialog Google Authorization successful This shall be used for the entire A Analysis session This needs to be done again for a new session After completing these steps you will see Export DOCX to Google Drive and Export XLSX to Google among the Export Options Export Options displaying Google Export By Pen Seq No ans Export to MS Word 0001 00 1f Export to MS Excel 0002 00 Export DOCX to Google 0003 00 i Export XLSX to Google TEXT Contract 0004 00 TEXT Praduct Annotate 0005 00 F COLHDG Product Documenter 00 L TEXT Store 7 00 XWI8TX 54 TEXT Ref No 00 XWRICD TEXT Trn Hst Trn Type 00 AWASOT TEXT Contract Oty 00 EDTCDE M The document you select would be placed in the google drive and can be checked using the web browser Note Once authorized the Google Export feature will work on an active session of X Analysis After exiting the X Analysis platform you will need to re authorize the Google drive X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 469 Ths D n gt O lt i Appendix N Code Review feature TD OMS support Appendix N Code Review feature TD OMS support The Code Review functionality has been added to X Analysis for harnessing the TD OMS support The Code Review functionality effectively is the problem analysis execution on the selected object It helps you to vie
78. Java XAML Silverlight The batch programs are simply converted without any restructuring The restructured code is stored in the X Ref library Service module generation Having restructured the code the process creates procedure based module and service programs with all subroutines procedures converted into procedures For interactive programs the exportable procedures are created for the functions which could be used either from the controller Javabean or from RPG screen controller module Refactoring In this process all the special characters i e or which are not allowed in java literals are replaced with allowed characters to make a valid Java C literal If a special character is used on a PF LF a new LF is created by renaming the fields with the java acceptable names The original file is then replaced in the program with the new file along X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 413 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Appendix F X2E Specific Features with the new fields throughout the program In case a program contains a Display Printer File and that file contains special characters in field names a new file with the same name is created in X Ref library The newly created file contains java compatible field names and the necessary changes due to renaming of fields and record formats are reflected in RPG program The data structures except PSDS INFDS and Externally described DS the Ja
79. List Total Objects 2261 Procedure Name lt FILE gt checkRow lt FILE gt deleteRow lt FILE gt _insertRow lt FILE gt _readRow ILE gt _readRows LE gt _updateRow Source Member STEMPLATE STEMPLATE STEMPLATE STEMPLATE STEMPLATE STEMPLATE Zoom Source Variable Where Used b acvisActive Already Identified AnalyseDBF AnalyseLF AnalysePF ANALYSEPF ABRBDSFR ADDLANZDBF ADDLANZLF ADDLANZPF ADDLANZPF Source File ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC ORPGLESRC EVFTEMPFO1 QRPGLESRO Library Right click on a row to access the Zoom Source or Variable Where Used option Source Library XASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC AASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC XASRC X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 96 Application Library Exportable Functions Select the Exportable Functions option to display the list of names of exported procedures and variables in a module which can be referred to by other modules thJss0 LEGACY Exportable Functions List Exportable Functions List Total Objects 1129 Exportable Functions Module Name Attribute Library ELLIPSE AWUSRV RPGLE AAMODS ISAVALIDSQLREF AWUSRYV RPGLE AAMODS PARMYN QUALLOOKUP RTNWCPGM AWU_BRACKETED AWU_BUILDSTMT AWU_CHECKPARMFLD AWLU_EACLUDETHISREF AW
80. Log view initialize Cross Reference Command S6BMJOB CMD AAAINIT ARFLIB KAN4C DAA LIBRARIES TAANACDEM SRCLIBS AANACDEM INLLIBL AAOQB OQGPL QTEMP CCSID SYSVAL JOB AAAINIT Library List XAOBJ OGPL QTEMP Job Log Mon Mar 02 14 52 45 ST 2015 AAA4INIT ARFLIB AANACD AA LIBRARIES AAN4ACDEM SRCLIBS AAN4CDEM Note The Initialize Cross Reference option gets enabled only for the new cross reference application Refresh Cross Reference The Refresh Cross Reference option refreshes the cross reference library to reflect any changes that have been made to the cross reference library This option only refreshes the sources and objects that have already been initialized it will not look at the freshly added or deleted sources and objects Select the Refresh Cross Reference library option from the Refresh Options submenu on the context menu of the cross reference library X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 64 Ths Application Library Context menu option for Refresh Cross Reference Navigation Metrics Dashboard 4 i XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System New Application Area Add Alternate Data Library List Reset Library List Application Library List Affinity Comparison Refresh Options Derive Business Rules Rebuild Data Model Repository Refresh Log Import Options i Export Options The following dialog is displayed Refresh Cross Reference dialog Refresh Cross Refe
81. Maintenance 19 03 10 APPLY APPLY APPLY APPLY APPLY APPLY MODIFIED MODIFIED MODIFIED MODIFIED MODIFIED MODIFIED MODIFIED MODIFIED MONTETEM lt ORGS ORGSL1 CUSGRSEL CUSTSSEL DISTSSEL DSPPTYPES CNTCMAIN CONDET CONDETL1 CONDETL 2 CONDETLS CUSFSELD CUSTMNT 1 CUSTS CUSTS 4 Lu Organisations Organisations by Name Customer group Selection Customer Selection Distributor Selection Display Product Contacts Maintenance Contract Detail by Store Contract Product by Store Contract Product by Product Contract Customer Site Selection Customer Detail Maintena Purchases hy Mietrihi itor AT ietamer 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 19 03 10 ain3in 28 09 09 28 09 09 28 09 09 08 03 10 03 03 10 08 03 10 28 09 09 18 03 10 19 03 10 18 03 10 18 03 10 18 03 10 18 03 10 18 03 10 18 03 10 NAAN The first column of the PTF Analysis displays Class The Class column can have any of the following entries MODIFIED The object from the PTF library was found in one of the CUSTOMISED libraries User Action The PTF object will have to be reviewed and changes applied in the CUSTOMISED library manually applied to the object in the PTF library NEW The object from the PTF library was not found in the base repository User Action The PTF object can be placed in the base library APPLY The object
82. Name nap w Username 2 Use SSL Info Installed Licenses Security Code 2 Send the Server Information to Fresche Legacy to receive your License file Server Info Serial Number Partition ID Total Partitions Send Server Information Copy to Clipboard You must wait to receive the License file by Fresche Click Send Server Information to send this information to the license team at Fresche prompting them to begin reviewing and processing the license request An email will be automatically generated as is shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 34 Using X Analysis Client Sample of the automatically generated Outlook email X Analysis V11 Request License information Message HTML MESSAGE INSERT OPTIONS FORMAT TEXT REVIEW amp Cut a v 8 1 e R gt z D Caibi cha JA A E amp 88 A 0 NY gt gt Follow Up al EB Copy i High Importance Paste Bru W A y 3 Address Check Attach Attach Signature Zoom LEGACY Format Painter zn aak Book Names Fie item Low Importance Clipboard G Basic Text G Names ths Include Tags amp Zoom From To Ca Subject X Analysis V11 Request License information Hello This is a request to upgrade to version 11 Company
83. No Attributes E Update P Update Prog _ b Updatefoukpukt Programs 4 Objects H z CUSFLE b lt ill gt Each object box has a colored square or disk on the top left corner A disk denotes that the object is a file whereas a square denotes a program The description of the DFD Legend is as follows Access Path This is the LF for the File on which the Data Flow Diagram has been opted Called This is to represent programs called by the main program 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 181 Program Logic Documentation Calling This denotes the programs calling the main program Input For a program centered DFD this denotes an input file For a file centered DFD this denotes a program taking input from the file internal Routines These are Synon specific routines being called from a 2E program Output For a program centered DFD this denotes an output file For a file centered DFD this denotes a program giving output to the file Update For a program centered DFD this denotes an update file For a file centered DFD this denotes a program updating the file DFD Restricted to an Application Area X Analysis provides an additional feature related to DFDs You can restrict the DFDs to the selected application area by clicking on the Restrict To Application Area icon On clicking the icon only those child objects are displayed which belong to the selected applica
84. ON THE MAIN MENU BAR DISAPPEARS FROM X ANALYSIS PERSPECTIVE Sometimes it so happens that the X Analysis menu on the main menu bar disappears Use the Window gt Reset Perspective option to restore it Reset Perspective e Do you want to reset the current 4nalvsis perspective to its defaults F Also Eclipse allows you to drag and drop various views If some of the X Analysis views are accidentally closed or are not visible the Window gt Reset Perspective option should be used to restore them ERROR IN RUNNING X ANALYSIS INSTALLED ON WINDOWS VISTA FOR THE FIRST TIME This is observed when The user has installed XARuntimeEnv11_x_x msi On running X Analysis the following error message is reported An error has occurred See the log file C Users sjriworkspace metadata log Check the XAPlugin log file available under X Analysis gt Open Log folder to see if it has the following line java lang UnsatisfiedLinkError no swt win32 3232 in java library path This means that swt win32 3232 file is not copied to the system folder The reason is that UAC User Account Control the security feature in Windows Vista is ON and does not allow the user to write in the system folders e g C Program Files C Windows etc X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 427 Appendix G Troubleshooting To correct this opt for the context menu on the Clean start Eclipse X Analys
85. OPTIONS This submenu has the following options Verify Data Relationships X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 117 Subset Archive Filter Subset Data Archive Data Purge Data Archive amp Purge Data Application Area We shall discuss these options under the Data Management Features section TEST MANAGEMENT OPTIONS This context menu contains various options related to X Test The following image displays the options Test Management Options Application Area Options Derive Business Rules Export Options Annotate Document Application Area Data Management Options Test Management Options Reengineer Programs Generate Programs Generate Web Services Generate Data Application Data Migration Display Difference Analysis Audit Options UML Options Create Test Process Definition Create Checkpoint Definition Create Test Result Definition Create Test Process Definition Create Screen Test Test Result Field Exclusion Test Result Spool File Exclusion The Create Test Process Definition is used to define the test process It creates Test Process node under the application area The following screen displays the available Test Process node it comes pre configured with the tutorial application XAN4CDXA X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 118 Application Area Test Process node D XTEST Test Demonstration F Test Process r Sh COCK an
86. OWNED By REFERS TO OWNED BY REFERS TO REFERS TO Project Tracking ae ee h Tt XU SS a S SS oF Parent File AS5TATUS CUSF NAMESIDN PTYPES SLMEN CONHDR STEBAL STEBAL Il Dependent Fields STATUS CUSNO USERNM PRPtDE SIMIT WOR DN WOR DA Ava ACS ED Aw AACS E naM EN Farent Fields STATUS CUSNO TANAME PRPCDE PERSON AWORDN OECD A AACS ABO Ay AACS The File Connection details are displayed in the DMD Details view Salespersons Product Master LIL Store Master w a Al of TH Dep LF CNTLFS CNTACS CNTLF4 CONDET CONDETL CONDETLZ Single click on a specific object shows the references of that object Click on CUSTS to view its references X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 214 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Data Model Diagram DMD of XAN4CDXA with CUSTS selected PA ee O s a OS at Data Model Diagram 3 Data Model Diagram for ALL Total Objects 50 ed i a ASIMPLTEST STOMAS EVA STKMAS STKBAL cpversec Purchases Cobol copybooks CONDETNW TRATYP Transaction type description Contract Detail new CBL Wer with Long Fields CNTACS a CONDET Transaction History Product Master Stock Balances Contract Header Contract Detail v Legend The DMD Legend shown alongside depicts the relationship type of the
87. Options on Screen Components Screen Source Code window Be Object List a zzFTo custmnTioip Ba CUSTMNTIFM 52 z Source List of CUSTMNT1FM in XAN 055R C Lines 239 View Level 5 Fie E gt P W BE i a amp Seq No maina Fl cutee AA oaaae el aayan Eh create EE ceca 0013 00 A VLDCHDEREY 2 0014 00 BR eee m 0015 00 A Flat Scereen Maintenance Format i 0016 00 LR eee rrr res sss 0017 00 A 0015 00 A TEXT Enqui 0019 00 A N94 caging PR 0020 00 A KEEP 0021 00 A RINCSGRLOC amp lt m gt 5 Screen Components i3 We ok A oE BR A amp Bie An 8 Screen Components for Application Library AAN4 CDX4 All SSeS Program Function Type SeqNo DSPF Formal Physical File Title CUSTMNT1 I P CUSTMINTIOID l 2 ZZFTO1 B Screen Source Code CUSTMNT 1020 F U CUSTMNT1_0 Man Function Editor CUSTMNT1 0010 Z2FTOl CUSTMNT1 0020 eeFTO2 i Preview Designer CUSTMNT1_1 M Page Designer CUSTMNT1_1010 7zF TO Of Data Content CUSTMNT1_102D cF TU E screen Actions CUSTMNT1 2 He Class Diagram CUSTMNT1_2010 ZZFTOI CUSTMNT1_202D R ZZFTO2 Feil Business Rules CUSTMNTIR Vie Component Documenter CUSTMATIROID fer IO B Annotate UI FUNCTION EDITOR The Function Editor option allows you to modify a given function Right click over a selected Screen Component for the context menu as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 221 JHJ
88. R O Business Rules For CUSFMAINT Mumber of Lines 10 Message ID Rule Status Rule Status Camment Annotation Mo Status CEMOO12 You must enter the customer name No Status CEMOO14 The telephone no is invalid Mo Status CEMOO1S The fax na is invalid Mo Status Mo Status QEMOO18 The distributor is invalid Mo Status CEMOO19 The status is invalid Mo Status CEMOZO You must enter a contact name Mo Status CEMOO21 The title is invalid Mo Status Mo Status The Configure Columns feature in the Business Rules view allows the user to manage the columns displayed The user can reduce the width or hide any column by setting width to 0 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 450 Anos Appendix L Setting Status for Business Rules Business Rules window Configure Columns option p Bu TALARN FOH Business Rules For CUSFMAINT Number of Lines 10 E Configure Col Source Member Rule Number Field File Rule CUSFMAINT 00001 CUSNO CUSF Source Member CUSFMAINT 0002 CNAME CUSF d Rule Number must enter CUSFMAINT 00003 TELMO CUSF Field telephone CUSFMAINT 00004 FAXNO CUSF File fax no is CUSFMAINT 00005 DSDCDE CUSF Rule CUSFMAINT o0006 DSDCDE CUSF Message ID distributor CUSFMAINT 00007 STATUS CUSF Sts lt gt blank f Rule Status e status is irr CUSFMAINT pooo USERNM CUSF Contact blad Rule Status Comment must enter CUSFMAINT 00009 SALUT CUSF Salutation lt gt f Annotation
89. Redo gt XDoclet gt XML X Analysis User Manual 11 1 General Preferences General Setting Preferences Structure Chart Maximum Diagram Depth Maximum Unexpanded Depth Maximum Files to show ina row in Show Files mode 3 Preferred Volume Limit 1000 System Document amp View Export as Paper Size PDF MS Word document A4 Letter Google Drive Export Allow Export to Google Drive as DOCX Allow Export to Google Drive as XLSX Program Structure Chart Default View Level 13 Number of records to display 1 Variable Where Used Default View Lewel 1 v Object Where Used Entry Level References 7 w Default Source Editor Lpex 5250 Emulator Others Number of records to display 1000 Restore Defaults Cancel 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 50 Using X Analysis Client Structure Chart o Maximum Diagram Depth The Interactive Structure Chart can be displayed up to 14 levels Select appropriate level for the interactive Structure Chart The default level is 14 o Maximum Unexpanded Depth This sets the maximum depth up to which the SCD will be displayed as expanded The data for further levels will be fetched but shown as collapsed initially The default level is 10 o Maximum Files to show in a row in Show Files mode The Interactive Structure Chart can display up to 10 files in a row Select appropriate value for files to be displayed Value ranges from 1 10 The default va
90. Refresh the Cross Reference Library ccccsecccssscccceseccceseceeeececeeeceseeeeeeeecensneeseees 20 Variable Program Calls from Files Programs cccccccccseccsceeeessssseeceeeecceceseeseeeeeeeeaeees 21 Using X Analysis Client sie sacstcracensuvensesecusevasievicsncsteaucasetsasesuicasewessedieaaesnesneaseteensenteres 25 IPONA NOE ae E E E E E E EEE ee EAA 25 SESSION O OM e E E E E 27 PAA SIS MONU E A E eas ciesawiiesesanensseianieneaneee 28 cane Mano O an aa a a 28 X Analysie Prefere nCES sasicaxccseanelsesasacacenawaisacneonssavetanataaiancesdenauaidacvenneenestueabarsencsaexencies 44 Advanced PrETEl NCES sorier eonen E A 46 Folders Preferentes arrire norr nre nrin Nr RE ET EET ES TE EEES 49 General PC Te CNN COS aac sectscetcac ect euacnee EEA EE seanagusieeeaercocaenobu 50 X Data Test Pi CREN ONC CS agacacsnechseesceapansanaynrseasencapacassnenstantenenansetaawassneneesastharataeeaceectan 52 MARCO Preferente S wsrgan sae seseacce ane veatassnesacatenatadsisaine dessin coe iieus abooseedaoetenneadsuseeintaianniadeess 54 X REdo Advanced Preferences cccccsssccccssccccsececesececesccccesecesascecsuseceeeaeceseuscetsgaees 55 Application Library ssesesessesessecessecessecesoecesoscesssoecesoesssoesssoecesoecessecessecoesescoesssoesseoe 57 Work with Application LibrarieS eesssssseeseeesreesereessrrosseresseresreresrresseresseeesreresreessseess 57 Application Library Menu Options ccccccsssececssececescecsenec
91. Specialized Analysis 25 Analysis Metrics for XAN4CDXA Category iReport E RPG Metrics Reports Create New Report The following report definition dialog is invoked when the user clicks the Create New Report icon Create New Report dialog X Analysis Metrics Report Specification and Submission Report Name Report Title Report category RPGMET wt Edit categories Application Area All Members Selected Object Name Select Report Columns and Options Metrics YarMame Subr Object and Source ID Data Object Library OBILIE Object Mame OBINAM Object Type OBITYP Object Attribute OBIATR Object creation date OBICRTDAT Object last used date OBILSUDAT Source File OBISRUCFIL Source Library OBISRCLIB Source file change date OBISRCFCHD Zai wnn Cade Adak Show report data at subroutine level Save and Submit Report Save Definition Only X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 274 THUS Audit Options View Log The user can view log related to Metrics processing The View Log icon is available on the toolbar as shown below View Log icon on Specialized Analysis Toolbar 1 Specialized Analysis 52 X Analysis Metrics for ZAN4CDRA Category Report Type Status RPG Metrics Reports Click the View Log icon to check the log View Log window view Log i O Log Report Mumber of Lines 3738 Log Time Report name Log text 013 06 06 11 56 05 480000 COMPLESS SOLSTT 0
92. The next submenu option is Override Relationship Details Select this option to display XOVRSHKS file which contains the override entries for the XSHKEYS file Field Field Size Description Name File OVRFIL 10A Match File OVRMFIL 10A Key Seq OVRSEQ 5P 2 Field OVRFLD 10A Match Field OVRMFLD 10A Constant OVRCON 20A Relationship ID OVRRLID 5P 0 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 306 JHJ LEGACY Data Management Features Data Dictionary Overrides Override Relationship Details e Object List OWN PF DEP PF DEP LF KEY SEQ OWN PF FLD DEP PFFLD CONSTANT Override Program References The last option is Override Program References Select this option to add or remove program references for a specific object Data Dictionary Overrides Override Program References 2 Object List PA Jai Fe E rige w TOT 7 I f CRE x b Data View For XOVRPGRF Calling Program Called Program Add Remove VERIFY DATA RELATIONSHIPS The Verify Data Relationships option is a submenu option of the Data Management Options which is available on the context menu of a selected application area Clicking the Verify Data Relationships option brings up a dialog showing the selected cross reference library and application area X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 307 Ap
93. Triggers Include Chg FMTLVLID entries Retain Journal Info Additional DDL Clauses The Generation method of DDL conversion is as follows Basic Conversion i PF with Unique key will be created as Table with Primary key ii PF with non UNQ key will be suffixed surrogate table without key and Index with the key will be created with PF name iii PF without key will be created as table iv LF will get converted to DDL indexes views as applicable Surrogate Table for Keyed PFs and Index for PF keys i amp ii Tables wiil be created with suffixed name index with PF name iii Table as specified above iv same as above Surrogate Table for PF and DDS LF for original PF fields keys i ii amp iii suffixed surrogate table DDS LF with PF name iv same as above X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 132 ths Application Area Surrogate Table for PF and DDS LF for PF and all Access Paths i ii amp iii as above iv DDS LF method of indexes views Check the other relevant boxes as per the conversion requirements and then click Apply Note The Import Column Template in the image provided above is disabled To enable this feature the XDDLTMPLTE table must be populated manually from the IBM i screen Modify Conversion Parameters Double click the Modify Conversion Parameters option to invoke the following window Window dis
94. X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 116 Ths Application Area Affinity Comparison window IE Affinity Comparison 24 H0 Affinity Comparison for ACCOUNTS ag Programs ACCOUNTS ACHEADO BCHEADO COBOL CONHDR CONUPD CUSFMAINT CBS06R 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 CNTCMAINT 10 0 0 0 0 0 10 RTNMMSGTEXT 10 0 0 0 10 0 10 X GSCD 10 0 0 0 10 0 10 The first column displays the selected application area and rest of the columns are the other application areas in the X Ref library The blue color in a specific cell showing affinity value represents the presence of that object in the application area corresponding to that column red color means the object does not exist in the application area but has the highest affinity green color represents the specific object has highest affinity and is also present in that application area DERIVE BUSINESS RULES The topic has been discussed under the Application Library section EXPORT OPTIONS The topic has been discussed under the Application Library section ANNOTATE X Analysis provides the annotation facility for application areas Select any application area and opt for the context menu on it then select the Annotate option This invokes a dialog box provide the required text and click Save The annotation is stored in a table available in the cross reference library DOCUMENT APPLICATION AREA We will discuss it under the Document Manager section DATA MANAGEMENT
95. XREPORT Audit Log for lt X Ref library gt Business Rule If Generate Business Rules is YES Extraction For 2E environment the following spool files are generated Spool File Message Purpose XREPORT Audit Report for lt X Ref library gt Load on Object Member List XREPORT Audit Log for lt X Ref library gt Init Job Initialisation XBREPORT SYNON Relationships where foreign keys are missing Foreign key relationships XREPORT Audit Log for lt X Ref library gt D B Model Build If Build Data Model is YES XREPORT Audit Log for lt xX Ref library gt Re engineering Re engineering executed Processing XREPORT Audit Log for lt X Ref library gt Business Rule 8 y If Generate Business Rules is YES Extraction Use the following command to check the generated spool file WRKJOB JOB JOB NUMBER USER XAXREF This should invoke the following similar screen X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 441 Appendix H Refresh X Analysis Work with Job screen Work with Job oy Seem wee OPADEVO021 User Us Number 087868 Select one of the following Display Job status attributes Display job definition attributes Display joo run atrio oa 1h lt alcCel ye Work with spooled files HOS Display Job log 1f active On Job queue Or pending e Dulsiedleny eal eak a aa eye 12 Work with locks if active Ie Display library list Ii aoe 14 Display open files if active 15 Display file overrides if active le Display C
96. accesre spe aoe sca rete vane scet tea ncesactecneacansesiossucaaneasseuescsenensaea 443 XAROBOT COMMANO crcccaeecsatesecututeseeecuiessa cesanarenctessartebeasedontessaniovansteentesgesdeveasedenteoes 443 Appendix J Dual Installation of X AnalysiS cscsccscsecscsccsceccscsccccnceccnceccncees 445 Appendix K Use SSL feature scscsssscscsccccccscsccccccscnceccccscncescccscscescscccscssescess 446 Appendix L Setting Status for Business RUules ccccscssscsecscsccccccscsccccecscececcecs 449 Business Rules StaIlUS T irrar E EE EEEE EARS 449 BUSINESS Rules Status CategOty sncccutsinsccsrtcunecerthovsdceasavecandecccesssceareauteenseceasanqeanieacesase 454 Appendix M Export to Google Drive s sessssesessesessecesssoesescesescecssoesessesesoesesseeee 457 Appendix N Code Review feature TD OMS support sssssssssessessessessssossoseoseessee 470 Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi ccsccsccsccsccsccsccscescesceees 474 SN ON n E E E E E E E E sie 482 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 8 THUS Preface Preface ABOUT THIS GUIDE This guide X Analysis User Manual describes how to use X Analysis and its other related modules In particular it discusses the following topics Configuring X Analysis Using X Analysis Client License Manager V2 licensing Application Library Areas Diagramming features Screen Componen
97. and additional data Click Save The new category will appear in the Edit Problem Categories window On selecting the Delete option a window appears which asks the user s confirmation before deleting a specific category Similarly you can select the Edit and or Delete options for the displayed sub categories By selecting the Add option the user can add a new category under a pre defined main category Note that you must make a few changes on the server side for editing the problem categories on the client side If you have to add new problem category TRIGGERS with description like FILE HAS TRIGGERS follow the steps given below to add problem category in the XPRBCATS file X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 286 Audit Options File Edit View Communication Actions Window Help 8 Dh aS BS a ade D ae Hast Warkstahie nit Destornnect Columns DO S Browse ORPGLESRC SEU gt XRADDTRGRS FMT 0059 0060 3 uae pricat AaS setllle prbcat xprbcats if not a maine Category group number catgrpn 2 Category sequence number catsegn 40 if Category description catdes File has triggers Write the records write te rprbcats eee a i esh F Retrie Fid Cursor Fil Toggle Fi2 Cancel HA Al 04 018 i ipl Session succesciully started You will get CATGRPN and CATSEQN fields value from XA while adding new prob
98. application area in which you want to add the object and click OK To add the related objects select the second option i e Add to Application Area with Related Objects as shown below Add to Application Area with Related Objects option Application 4rea Options Add to Application Area 0 add to Application Area with Related Objects Omit From Application rea This option invokes the following dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 102 Application Area Add to Application Area with Related Objects Add CONO01 to Application Area with Related Objects Application 4rea COMNHDR CUSFMAINT CUSTOMERS DATATEST DECI MYCPROLCESS OIE OEOO1 ORDERS Description conhdr New Sub Opp Area Customer 4op 4rea Data Test Demo Test area Re Engineering Order Entry Application 4rea CEOO1 orders Options For Related Objects Do not include files r ferenced updated by this program t Do not include called programs WF Do not include files referenced updated by any included program Perform the steps given below 1 Select the application area in which you want to add the object 2 Choose the required options from the three drop down menus 3 Click OK This adds the objects to the application area fulfilling the criterions REMOVING OBJECT FROM AN APPLICATION AREA Opt for the Object List and select the object to be removed from the application area Right click for the co
99. available software Include items that have already been installed Open the Automatic Updates preference page to set up an automatic update schedule If the installed GEF software is below 3 3 its upgraded version will be shown in the list of available software Click the relevant box to install the latest version If the latest version of the software is not displayed click on Add Site The following window will be displayed Add Site dialog Local Location 3 Provide the name of the given site in the Location field http archive eclipse org tools gef downloads drops R 3 3 200706281000 4 Click OK 5 Close the Software Updates and Add ons window and re start the WDSc to view the DFDs X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 433 Appendix G Troubleshooting Note Verify the current location of the installed X Analysis If it is installed on the XA Runtime Environment you must uninstall the X Analysis client as well as the XA Runtime Re install X Analysis to resume its working on the WDSc SETTING THE PASSWORD FIELD To set the password field for more than 10 characters please perform the given steps 1 Go to Window gt Preferences gt X Analysis 2 Check the Case sensitive or greater than 10 character Password setting and click OK The setting is shown below X Analysis Preferences Modifying the password setting type filter text Analysis Ge
100. details is invoked Purge Data dialog Purge Data Ref Library Application Area Archive Library ORDERSA1 Subset Library ORDERSS1 Archive mode FARCDT A Delete live data Database library name X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 316 Data Management Features The Purge Data dialog is the same as the Archive Data dialog However note that the default Archive mode is ARCDTA you can change it to BOTH and the Delete live data is pre set as YES Click OK to submit a batch job The details appear on screen as shown below Batch Job details Purge Data Command XARCASS XA4AREA ORDERS XA4LIBCKANACD XA ARCLIB ORDERSA1 SBSLIB ORDERSS1 ARCMODE BOTH DLTDTA YES DBASELIB LOADLIB Job Log Tue Dec 02 13 28 10 IST 2074 Job Completed ARCHIVE amp PURGE DATA Select the Archive amp Purge Data option from Data Management Options to invoke the following dialog similar to the Subset Filter Criteria dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 317 ths Archive amp Purge data Filter Criteria Field Name Query Viewer Archive Purge data Archive amp Purge Data dialog Physical Files Operator Field Value Data Management Features Boolean Filter Criterion Description Field Mame us Mo us Mo Company Distributor Sts Last nt Date Operator Choose operator Choose operator Less than LT Le
101. dialog A Ref Library AANACDAA Remove History NO You can choose to Remove History The default option is NO If you select YES then all the previous history will be deleted or removed Click OK to begin the Code generation Click the Problem Analysis Request History option to review the generated code The option is shown below Audit Options Problem Analysis Request History a i XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System New Application Area Add Alternate Data Library List Reset Library List Application Library List Ho So Affinity Comparison Refresh Options Derive Business Rules gg Import Options i RE Ey Se ie fiii Lii Export Options Document Entire Application Document Changed Objects Reengineer Programs Generate Programs X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Generate Web Services Generate Data Application Data Migration Inter Repository Options Audit Options Pee ee ee eee b i T Information Metrics Analysis Screen Metrics File Metrics Business Process Logic Metrics Specialized Analysis Problem Analysis Generate Code Rewiew Problem Analysis Request History Object Allocation Database Summary Summary Report Initialize Source Archiving Generate Metrics Analysis Edit Problem Audit Limit Edit Problem Categories Generate Problem Analysis View Database Size Statistics 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 472 LEGACY
102. file Application Folder displaying the generated XML file PCF_XAN4CDXA Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help gt a Search ey Folders Heb fo Folder Syne l Fa y FileFieldDetails_X4N4CD 4 xm File and Folder Tasks YML Darument 2 609 KB gt Make a new Folder Es Publish this Folder to the Web Open the generated XML file in Internet Explorer or any other suitable editor X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 70 THUS Application Library Generated XML File C Documents and settings alakhiMy Documents X Analysis Application Data6 2 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help sup Favorites C Documents and Setting aj E mm Page Safety Tools lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt files gt lt file gt definition lt filename gt ASIMPLTEST fillename gt lt description gt ASIMPLTEST lt description lt filetype gt Physical lt filetype gt lt library gt AN4CDEM lt library gt lt recordformatname ASIMPLTEST lt recordformatname lt modulelibrary gt Same library as file F lt modulelibrary gt lt highspeedtable gt N lt highspeedtable gt lt autocommit N lt autocommit gt 1m harena ADH fs barren a My Computer Convert DDS to SQL The Convert DDS to SQL option calls the XDDSTOSQL IBM i command and submits the job in batch For details refer to the Convert DDS to SQL section Generate Database Service Programs The
103. file AACHTACS CHTACS Contacts AACONDET CONDET Contract Detail AACONDET A yy CONDETH w Contract Detail new CBL Yer with Long Fields AACOMNHOR COMNHOR Contract Header GA USF CUSF Sites GAC USGRP CLUStsRP Customer Groups AACUSTS CUSTS Purchases GADELTY A DELTVA Delivery Areas AADISTS DISTS Distributors X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 89 Application Library The columns of Development Screens List are described below Function This column lists the Standard Development Screen Definitions associated with the Development Screen in X Analysis These Standard Development Screen Definitions are built when the data model is created directly from the database of the existing application using the data model relationships to control cross file validation and navigation Physical File This column represents the associated Physical File name with the specific Standard Development Screen in the database Standard Development Screens tie directly to physical files and can be used for file maintenance and display as well as providing searchable grids and general purpose reports Title This represents the description of the Development Screen as per the database CHANGE HISTORY The Change History option lists the source members that have a change in their history Double click the Change History node under XAN4CDXA to invoke the following Work with Change History dialog Change History
104. files and copybooks A wide variety of options can be specified including Files Array Definitions Data Structures Sub Fields Data Structures Indicators Key Lists Data Fields File Formats Subroutines Program Variable Array Elements Parameter Lists Parameters Key Fields Message Ids EXCPT Names etc The Variable Where Used submenu provides the following options All References All references of this variable Update References References where this variable is being updated File References All references where the object using this variable is a file X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 163 Quick Reference to an Object Definitions Only Lists references where this variable was defined Summary References This option on a variable or File Field lists all objects that use the selected variable or File Field and also the usages for the same The result is displayed in Object Where Used Rule Variable References Lists all Business Rules based on the selected object from across the entire application Select the Variable Where Used option for the CUSNO field using the JumpTo dialog Variable Where Used view for CUSNO SA Variable Where Used 23 a A Mehl M O Variable Where Used For ALLICUSNO Lines 184 view Level Levell Seq No CBCUSTSD i 2CUAN0 F B 19 22REFFLD COSNO A amp N4CDEM COSTS e CBCUSTSD 0383 00 2CUaN0 F 0 19 2e2REFFLD COSNO AaN4CDEN COSTS CLET a004
105. for documentation OR Generate multiple documents For each object marked for documentation System Documentation type O Generate Single System Document Generate Individual System Documents Generate System Documents using previous values Document Details Document Tithe System Document For sAM4 OSA Name System Document For H4h4COX4 pdf C Documents and Settings alakhilly Documents 4nalvsis Application Datall 92 168 170 10 PCF_ 4nN4COe4 System Document For H4N4C0 4 pdf Cancel Note that the Documenter option can also be alternatively accessed from the Export Options drop down on the Source Browser toolbar of a selected object X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 337 Document Manager Document Wizard Sections System Documentation Type Various options are available for the System Documentation type By default the Generate Single System Document option is checked Document Details Document Title The user can change document title as per the requirement Path Click the Browse button to change the default path The default path is lt C Documents and Settings alakh My Documents X Analysis Application Data 192 168 170 10 PCF_XAN4CDXA gt Press Next to proceed further For Single System Documentation the following dialog is displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 338 AHISHA Document Manager Generate S
106. from the input date t 85P013 Holiday Checking amp Adjustment 1 Holiday Area OTHFIL XRZZF Exception error Handling called from XRZZ subr OTHCAL OTH 5P013 Holiday Checking amp Adjustment 1 Holiday Area OTHFIL Detailed OSC Click on the Show Narratives icon to invoke the Detailed Overview Structure Chart It is available on the toolbar associated with the OSC X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 203 Anos Se Object List Program Logic Documentation Detailed OSC a Overview Structure Chart 3 CBC110 OTHFIL UPD Order Entry System Program Order Entry System A principal function of this program is to call __Jcertain programs The following programs are called to carry out subsidiary functions CB906R CB907R Parameters are passed to the program when itis called Input CBACPF Update CBTRPF CBS06R EDTFIL UPD Back out account Program Back out account A principal function of this program is the online maintenance of SECF the Security Codes file through a subfile display The following programs are called to carry out subsidiary functions X GSCD Parameters are passed to the program when itis called The program is called Update SECF Security Codes Rollup Groups CBC 110 QTHFIL Order Eniry System Program Order Entry System A principal function of this program is to call certain programs The following programs are called to carry out subsidia
107. generate Business Rules for a single application area or for the entire application The following screen displays the Business Rules window Generate Business Rules screen Generate Business Rules Type choices press Enter X Analysis x Ref Library Kea Rev LIDA tere a aaa X Analysis Application Area F3 Exit F5 Refresh F4 Prompt F24 More keys gt AA2EDEMO XALIB ALL Fl2 Cancel XGENBRULES Name Name XALIB Character value ALL PGM Bottom F13 How to use this display This command will identify the business rules logic in each program in the application over which the specified X Analysis cross reference database has been built X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 402 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command A source member containing the business rule logic and narrative describing each rule is generated for each program Option 16 Generate Option 16 can be used to generate the new RPGLE application programs The following screen displays the Generate window GENERATE screen Re engineer Programs XREGENP Type choices press Enter Program Name AREA Name AREA ALL X Analysis Library Gc eee 2 SAZE DEMO Name New Pgm Suffix Restructure Interactiv e Pgms R YE Compile the Re engineered Pgms SYES F3 Exit F24 More keys Option 17 Failures F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Character value enor IC SCS NO Bottom F13
108. identifies the name by which the key field is referred to in the calling program This is the field which has values moved into it to determine which programs should be called Variable Program Calls from Programs This case is for the generic programs which are called by the other program to either return the names of the programs to call or call further programs directly The purpose of this setup is to bypass the intermediate generic program and directly display the actual second level program Press F6 to add a Generic Program The following data should be maintained Program name The name of the program which is called to call further programs Key Type This field indicates the method used by the generic program to determine which programs to call Choose from ALL All program references for the generic program are shown as references for the calling program FILE The generic program uses a generic file to determine which programs to call The references as defined through Work with Generic Files will be shown as references for the calling program X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 22 Configure Cross Reference Library File name This field only applies when the key type above is specified as FILE The file name is validated against the files maintained through the Work with Generic Files screen Demo case The example illustrated below displays the generic pr
109. in a XS2ELDLOG log file The XSZEEPVFD data area is set to YES to indicate that the entry parameters have been processed successfully The default value is NO Synon Product Library for the Edit Code Definitions The X 2E reengineering process is capable of obtaining the edit codes definitions stored in YEDTCDERFP file The XS2EEWLIB data area has a value Y2SY by default which helps in locating the base product library for the PRD Edit code definitions file You can change the data area value to suit your environment As an example Y1SY is another base product library 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 409 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command Synon Edit Code Definitions Processed X 2E has the requisite capability to integrate the Synon edit code definitions into the X Analysis edit code definitions table XEDITC This in turn will be accessed by the reengineering process when required The process sets the XSZEEWRUN data area to VES if the Synon edit code definitions are successfully processed else it will remain unchanged The shipped value is NO Synon Field Mapping Fix The X 2E reengineering process maintains the field mapping data in X 2E databases The value in the XS2EFIEFIX data area will be set to YES if the reengineering process manages to fix both external and internal Synon field mappings successfully By default the XS2EFIEFIX data area is set to NO Synon EXCUSRSRC Function The residual logic is a h
110. in the System Documenter Wizard Select the Detailed option to also print the DCD ACD and header information for each screen SCREEN FLOW DIAGRAM The Screen Flow Diagram is an extended form of Activity Diagram for RSA RSM It displays the screens flow for a program This diagram is available on RPGLE RPG There are four types of screens Subfile Screen with a dependent grid Update capable screen Display only screen Repeated node Select WWCONHDR from the Object List of the tutorial application Opt for the context menu on it and then select the Screen Flow Diagram option The following image displays the Screen Flow Diagram for WWCONHDR X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 208 Program Logic Documentation Screen Flow Diagram Se Object List Fo WIMCONHDR 52 gim Screen Flow Diagram for WWCONHDR Total Objects 7 a A amp f gt Po ea Hemo SSC E rT Legend The Screen Flow Diagram Legend illustrates the type of object displayed Subfile This refers to the object using a Subfile E Suptile Update Update This refers to the object updating a file Display Display This refers to the object using a Display file Primary File Primary File This refers to the PF used by the object mo one Indeterminate Secondary File This refers to the Secondary File used by the object Indeterminate This refers to the
111. is also a precursor of what the generated java code will look like For this the program should be reengineered first 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 418 Appendix F X2E Specific Features Select the Migrated Logic option from the Source Options drop down icon on the Action Diagram toolbar as shown below Action Diagram with Migrated Logic option be Programs El TSAJEIR 53 E Action Diagram for ER Edit Hospital Edit recordi 1 screen TSAJE1R Er Ha mP U SBa s f amp o Original Source Code Action Diagram Business Rules ction s Migrated Logic mie logic for ER Edit Hospital Edit record 1 sere il gt On selecting the Migrated Logic option the following window is displayed Migrated Logic window e Programs Fl TSAJEIR 23 E Migrated Logic for TSAJEIR Afi H eaw fa O r Migrated Logic Entry Parameters for ER Edit Hospital Edit record 1 screen Data Section for TSAJELR Program logic for ER Edit Hospital Edit record 1 screen USER Initialize detail screen new record H E USER Initialize detail screen existing record USER Delete DBF record USER Validate detail screen fields USER Create DBF record USER Change DBF record USER Process command keys Bee amp H USER Exit program processing ES REENGINEERED ACTION DIAGRAM The Reengineered Action Diagram is available only when the Reengineering process is over The following screen displ
112. is available or not Library List Displays the library list for the current job X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 27 Using X Analysis Client X ANALYSIS MENU X Analysis provides the X Analysis toolbar menu on the Eclipse toolbar The following screen displays options available on the X Analysis menu X Analysis Menu Run Window License Manager New DB400 Connection New DBZ Connection Mark all for Documenter Change Application Folder Open Log Folder Open Application Folder Authorize Google Drive Report an Issue Install SSL CA certificate The details of the options provided by the X Analysis menu are discussed as under LICENSE MANAGER V2 is the new licensing mechanism which adds to the ease of both the new and existing X Analysis users Please contact Fresche Legacy at license freschelegacy com to obtain the license file Obtaining the License File Note If you have already received the License File please refer to Applying the License File section The initial step is to download the XALicenseManagerTool It is important to know if you need the 32 or 64 bit version for the License Manager Tool Determine this by running the cmd exe command java version If for instance the 64 Bit Server VM appears then download the 64 bit version See the screenshot below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 28 Using X Analysis Client Mi
113. objects where the usage cannot be programmatically determined Repeated Nodes in Screen Flow Diagram The Screen Flow Diagram displays the repeated nodes in their original color Also an arrow of the same color is displayed for the repeated nodes having child nodes The following image displays repeated nodes in Screen Flow Diagram X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 209 Program Logic Documentation gt Screen Flow Diagram with the repeated node be Object List Pe WihWCONHDR i E Screen Flow Diagram for WWCONHDR Total Objects 7 a Bly amp f fs a EA ZZFTOL Work with Order Details WW ONDE TOZO i I wg Repeated Node WWLONDETOLG Z CNF1 Confirm Wy Ff SFO Work with Order Details The Show Files icon is provided to show the files used by the function Show Files icon be Object List E WIWCONHDR E3 E Screen Flow Diagram for WWCONHDR Total Objects 7 a fly e f E ZZ5F01 Work with Orders VAN CONHDR Se les When you click on the icon all the files related to the selected object are displayed as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 210 Program Logic Documentation Screen Flow Diagram for WWCONHDR with Files Se Object List E WWCONHDR 63 E Screen Flow Diagram for WWCONHDR Total Objects 26 a A EM OoOo g gt A PT BFPSFOl Work with Orders uy ORJADRO Contract Header i F
114. on the XAN4CDXA Tutorial Application It has XAN4CDEM specified as O and S types Cool 2E Synon Model Libraries In order to analyze a Synon application the Synon model library s can be specified by putting the library type as M The initialization process picks the data model information in the Synon model library s when creating the X Ref library Before moving on to the initialization step you should confirm that the X2E specific Data Areas are set with appropriate values For details refer to Appendix D X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 15 EXCLUSIONS Configure Cross Reference Library The exclusions can be set up using the Exclusions option from the master command menu X4WRKAPP Select Option 16 to do this and press ENTER x Analysis XARWKXCS Enter options 5 Work with Program XARWKSCE XARWKSFE XARWKBRC XARWKHRE XARWKUMLE X4WRKAPP Work with Exclusions screen Work with Ese lUs Ons Databoreugqm Led oO a 2L Jan 2015 Dress BNCE Description Work Work Work Work Work Fl Help F3 Exit with with with with with Diagram Exclusions SOuneceur mle Exe lie tome Business Rule Call Exclusions Hierarchy Exclusions UML Exclusions F10 Cmd line F12 Cancel F14 WRKSBMJOB F24 More keys The exclusions screen provides a menu for object exclusion The options are XARWKSCE Work with Diagram Exclusions XARWKSFE Work
115. page 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 80 Application Library Changed displays the date when the file was changed Created displays the date the file was created Used displays the date when the file was last used Stmt Count displays the total count of the statements in the source list of the file Format Count displays the total count of screen formats related to a file The displayed Object List is sorted on an object s name in ascending order Click the respective column heading to change the sort order To narrow down the search the object name on the object group may be mentioned as well It can be E ALL Object Name maximum 10 characters long Besides the other settings the following can also be specified on the dialog Component Status The Component Status can be picked up by selecting appropriate status for e g A B etc under the Function Attributes section Work with Objects dialog showing Component Status Function Attributes Component Status Function Type PF Marne w J Frogram Type Component Status for Programs A Parent or top level program i e calls other programs but is not called itself B Program is called by another and also calls other programs C Program at the end of a program tree does not call other programs E D Standalone program X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 81 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Application Libra
116. program The call operation can perform the following Execute a Subroutine Execute a Sub Procedure Execute a Program Module Service Program The subroutines are displayed as small rectangles with grey background displaying name of the subroutine The object s Function Type determines the coloring of all other boxes viz Programs Modules and Service Programs Boxes other than the subroutine boxes are of the size of program element as on the Structure Chart X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 198 Program Logic Documentation Program Structure Chart e Object List E oeoo i E Program Structure Chart for OEOO1 Total Objects 6 i Al 4 7 OE001 Order Entry CUSLET Customer Letter Stage 1 ERYCUS ORLNS VALID CRORD The menu options and context menu options on the PSC work the same way as on the SCD except for the Zoom Source option If there is no Main Procedure and only sub procedures exist then the PSC displays each sub procedure s PSC independently one after the other If no sub procedures exist then the PSC only displays the program Legend Legend M Subroutines Procedures There are two colors in the PSC Legend White depicts the calling Programs or Modules Gray depicts the calling Subroutines or Procedures OVERVIEW STRUCTURE CHART OSC The OSC gives a snapshot of an application displaying all entry points to the application The
117. specified variable in the application Same as Variable Where Used but displays only those source lines where the field is updated Displays the source lines where the variable is defined Displays the Data Model Diagram of the object 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 147 Quick Reference to an Object SOURCE BROWSER VIEW The source browser displays the source for an object The context menu on any member object has the Zoom Source option which invokes the source browser for that object or member Context menu Zoom Source option Se Object List 4 pim Object List of ALLUSR ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Total Objects 327 ee al 47 is fl Library Mame Type Attribute Description Status Changed Created Us eS AN4CDEM Pik Contract Entry IE i YAN4CDEM Zoom SOURCE der Entry Display os 06 12 15 XAN4CDEM tract Entry Display os 06 12 18 CLXAN4CDEM fae Data Flow Diagram Correspondence A 05 06 12 18 PFRAN4CDEM Object where Used p ool copybooks 0 050612 C4 CLYAN4CDEM d Security Fax an OS 06 12 15 CLYAN4CDEM variable Where Used J Code to Batch 5 050612 16 ne ee ee ee oe mnm a Select any member object and double click on it to open the source member of that object in the X Analysis source browser Zoom Source The Source Browser follows the pattern similar to IBM s SEU and is equivalent to viewing a source member in SEU browser mode However the X
118. the Hierarchical SCD The colors help in establishing the reference and association of specific objects Click the Legend icon as shown below Legend icon Hierarchical Structure C EMENU Total Objects 14 P a o L OEMENU Order Entry Menu Referred Files O OE002 OE003 all JE eind Order Entry Referred Files Order Enquiry Product Enquiry Referred Files Referred Files The following image shows the expanded view of the Legend X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 195 Ths Program Logic Documentation Legend expanded e Object List rh OEMENU 2 o Hierarchical Structure C EMENU Total Objects 14 F H aa M Update yy o OEMENU Display Order Entry Menu Print Referred Files E input Output Command Others oO OE002 B OE003 Internal Routine Order Enquiry Product Enquiry Bo ee Referred Files Referred Files 1 E Trigger IO koe T O oow_ Module t The description of the HSC Legend is as follows Update This depicts the program that updates a file Display This depicts the program that uses a Display file Print This depicts the program that uses a Print file Input This depicts the program that uses an Input file Output This depicts the program that writes to a file Command This simply depicts a Command Others This refers to the Programs where they are referring to a file which is not Update Disp
119. the access paths of the indexes Copy data from the original PFs to the new SQL tables Working of XDDSTOSQL command With the help of the XDDSTOSQL command one can run all original application software immediately on the new database with no level check problems The DDL source for the SQL tables and indexes are stored in QDDLSRC in the X Analysis library The DDS source for the new LFs is stored in QDDSSRC in the X Analysis library The new SQL tables are named using the maximum number of first characters from original PF name which together with the specified suffix are not more than ten characters The new SQL indexes are named in the same way This suffix is specified in the XSQLCVSFX data area Display Data Area System DBs S258 Datadarccoa aa aa re see ee enc XSQLCVSFX PPr a ae E ge XAN4CDXA DAS eet a aa o a aa E x CHAR EEE a 10 Tec oo as ee anc ee XDDSTOSOL SQL Table Name Suffix Value Offset eeu QO X The converted DDS source members can be flagged in columns 1 to 5 This flag is specified in the XSQLCVFLG data area If the data area is blank or missing then columns 1 to 5 are not changed Display Data Area System DEBssZ 5B Dartamarca sy oan ys ee oe XSQLCVFLG PDE A a oe XAN4CDXA DAOS e a a o r a doo aa e SCHAR Kenot No E ee 3 Text ae a aa oa ea an ae XDDSTOSQL Source Flag Value Offset S aoo re O DDS OVE Certain run time values used in the generation of the DDL source are stored in data are
120. the files PFs under the application area so that you can select any field for exclusion purpose The following screen displays the field exclusion window X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 119 Application Area Test Result Field Exclusion File Field CORBET LORIFDR CUSTS STRBAL STEM AS STORM AS HAA BY Test Result Field Exclusion Field Type Length Description Cromithed Expand a file to display the fields of that file Test Result Field Exclusion Expanded Test Result Field Exclusion File Field EB CONDET a wWwORDE oe ABCO oe AS ae TST awRICD ae SCT AW AZO AW PRIC COMHDR CUSTS STRBAL STEMS STOMAS HHDH Field Type Length Description Ommitted 5 A A fay fay 5 fay 5 mo oc oc OO OO Contract Product Store Ref Mo Trn Hst Ten Type Contract Oty Stk Unit of Measure Price The keyed fields are displayed in RED To exclude a field select any field other than the keyed fields and opt for the context menu X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 120 Application Area Field Exclusion option File Field Field Type Length Description Gmmitted CONDET aw ORON Contract yt ABCD a Product ay Oo Ss a TTS awRICD ay BolT ay Get O aww PRI CONHDR CUSTS STEBAL STEM AS STOMAS Omit From Result comparison Trn Hst Trn
121. the object dependencies Select CUSF from the Member Object List and choose the Object Where Used option from the context menu Object Where Used option e Object List 53 ial Object List of ALLUSR ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Total Objects 362 a EF En a re Library Mame Type Attribute Description CLXANSCDEM CSEC PGM CLP Build Security Fax CLXANSCDEM CSEC2 PGM CLP Add Code to Batch CLXANSCDEM CSEC3 PGM CLP Agent Fax Prompt REXAN4CDEM CUSCPY PGM RPG Customer Copy Te eS S a ee ro Ie LFXAN4CDEM CUSFLA em e roduct renamed from cusfla for te LFXAN4CDEM CUSFLB fa Data Flow Diagram rig List LF XAN4CDEM occa Object Where Used d Usage References LF XAN4CDEM CUSFLD All Ref LF XAN4CDEM CUSFLE Variable Where Used d Tre eae lic pem Update References TAANE Baiia xt Data Model Diagram lt n LF XANA4CDEM CUSFL2 P i Delete References LFXAN4CDEM CUSFL3 facia co Entry Level References LFYANAC eae LFs Access Paths a S AANSCDEM CUSFLS Real Time References LFXAN4CDEM CUSFL6 Access Path Diagram PETE ie Consolidated Rules gt X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 162 Quick Reference to an Object This produces an Object Where Used listing for all objects referring to CUSF If you select the Object Where Used on a PF CUSF in this case then besides listin
122. through the Lpex editor For this change the settings through the X Analysis General Preferences dialog 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 479 Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi Lpex as the Default Source Editor JHJ CEA Wo Context Aware Search Data Management LEGACY Setting Preferences Dependency Build Structure Chart Ecore Diagram Maximum Diagram Depth Hel E Maximum Unexpanded Depth gt 1 Projects IBM DevOps Services Maximum Files to show in a row in Show Files mode IMF eas Install Update Preferred Volume Limit 1000 Instant Messaging Jawa JavaScript gt LPEX Editor Google Drive Export a E Allow Export ni ee Drive as DOCX Allow Export to Google Drive as XLSX System Document amp View Export as Paper Size CO PDF MS Word document Ad Letter Modeling Planning gt Plug in Development Program Structure Chart Profiling Default View Level Number of records to display 1000 Remote Systems gt Report Design Variable Where Used gt Run Debug L Default View Level Selection Feedback gt Server Object Where Used gt TD OMS Entry Level References Team Team Build Default Source Editor gt Team Process Lpex 5250 Emulator Terminal Test Others Tracing Validation Web Services Work Items A Analysis Advanced Folders General A Data Test t M Redo AML Click OK to confirm the change Again select the WWCUSTS program and ri
123. view Progress 3 ie 8 XPRBANLDDL SKHAWN 668561 a JOBQ X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 129 thJsst LEGACY Application Area At any point while the batch job is running click on the hyperlink JOBQ to view the Job Log The Job Log view is shown below Window displaying the Batch Job status Generate Problem Analysis Command APRBANLDODL ARFLIB AANACD AA Library List AAN4CDAA XAOBJ QGPL OTEMP Job Log Mon Dec 01 19 10 49 IST 2014 APRBANLDDL ARFLIB AANACD AA Problem Analysis Problem Analysis contains specific information related to DDL conversion issues Double click on the Problem Analysis option The following image presents the conversion issues like PFs with non unique key for the application area CUSTS Problem Analysis window Problem Analysis data for CUSTS Total Problems 19 Alert Category Object Total Description Source Detail a DDL Conversion Issues J 4 File is a Joined logical ORDBALDTL gt PF with non unique key gt LFs referenced by embedded SOL LFs referenced by Query CUSTSLI by Cus Grp Customer AAN4CDEM QDDSSRC CUSTSL1 AAN4CDEM Foreign Key value does not match parent key value 4 CONDET RMTDDL QDDLSRC CONDET CONHDR RMTDDL QDDLSRC CONHDR PROJECT RMTDDL QDDLSRC PROJECT TRNHST RMTDDL QDDLSRC TRNHST X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc RMTDDL RMTODL RMTODL RMTODL Page 13
124. which are accessible through the Screen Components option Double click on the Screen Components node to invoke the Work with Screen Components dialog as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 87 HISH Application Library Screen Components dialog Work with Screen Components Application Area Mame Description All Members Selected d Development Screens Click OK to generate the list of all Screen Components Screen Components List E Screen Components s Ey Ee fe a Screen Components for Application Library 24h4cDe4 Call Programmi Function Type SeqMo OSPF Format Physical File Title CE906R CBI06RO1D CBI06RO02D CBS06R03D CBSU6RO4D CBS06R 1 Date SHOO01 ACCOUNT ENTRY ST 100 ACCOUNT ENTRY SC Tio ACCOUNT ENTRY CBS06RO6D SPLAT 1 SECF ACCOUNT ENTRY CATCMAINT CHTCMAINTOID 2 FTO1 CHTACS Contacts Maintenance CONDO1 E CONOO1O1D OESFL a CONTRACT ENTRY t jili gt I R C R R CBS06R05D R SCT1O2 ACCOUNT ENTRY R I R I R The following table displays the details of the generated reengineered components Component Type Description TSAJE1R PGM Executable reengineered program TSAJELRB SRVPGM Created using TSAJE1RA and TSAJE1RB modules TSAJE1R MODULE Ul module for the Reengineered program TSAJE1RA MODULE Re engineered Action Diagram aka Programmed Module TSAJE1RB MODULE Re engineered Controller aka Generated Code Module TSAJE1RB FI
125. which means that the object does not belong to any application area Similarly note the sign which means that the object belongs to multiple application areas DATABASE SUMMARY The Database Summary option gives the user access to the summarized database report for the entire cross reference library The report contains information related to files their unique keys and other necessary file related details On clicking the option the following window is displayed Database Summary Report window if Specialized Analysis Problem Analysis E DB Summary i E Database Summary Report for XAN4CDXA fal fo fa File Unique Keys Parent File Wo Child File Mo File With Identical Key Foreign Keys to Parent Foreign Keys from Child ASTATUS STATUS CNTACS CUSNO PRPCDE CONDET AWORDN SV ABCD CONDETN YY SWORD Aw ABCO CONHDR xWORDN CUSF CUSGRP AWBNECD CUSTS MWBICCD DELTA WEDD DISTS DSDCDE EVFEVENT 0 4 j J l i co oe S amp S OO a eS oo A coo co fF oOo ore FF O AA l i l l l l l l i D oe amp OO oe ee NA A SUMMARY REPORT The Summary Report option is available under the Audit Options submenu on the context menu of cross reference library and application areas X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 278 Audit Options Summary Report Type and Location X Analysis Audit Report Type and Location Select the type of documentat
126. will add the data library in the Library section of the dialog You can add more data libraries in the similar manner The Work with Alternate Data Library List dialog provides the following options for the libraries added Move Up moves the specific library name to a higher position in the list Move Down moves the specific library name to a lower position in the list Delete removes the library name from the list OK proceeds to the further process and closes the dialog box Cancel closes the dialog box Select the Alternate Data Library List The Select Alternate Data Library List option is used to select the Alternate Data Library On selecting the option the Library List is modified by replacing the Data Library from the user part of the Library List with Alternate Data Library ies in the user part of Library List Remove Alternate Data Library List Select the Remove Alternate Data Library List option to remove the Alternate Data Library from the cross reference library It will invoke the following confirmation dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 60 Application Library Confirmation dialog on removing Alternate Library List X Analysis P Alternate Data Library List TEST1 will be deleted v re YoU sure Click OK to remove the Alternate Data Library Click Cancel to cancel the option Reset Library List When a cross reference library is selected the Lib
127. will appear as shown in the following image RMTDDL node a BE CUSTS Custs file yo Application Area Diagram at Data Model Diagram Area Flow Diagram Fes Overview Structure Chart All Objects Programs Files Business Rules Consolidated Rules H Screen Components J Regenerated Programs Run DDL Conversion Analysis Problem Analysis b RMTDDL X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 128 THUS Application Area You may delete the newly created node Right click on the node to select the Remove Schema option The option is shown in the following image Remove Schema option Business Rules Consolidated Rules Screen Components Regenerated Programs A Source Scan 4 By DDL Modernization Run DDL Conversion Analysis Problem Analysts A confirmation dialog will appear asking you to confirm the deletion The action removes the node from the Client Ul and the table although the schema library will continue to exist in the database and you must manually remove it Note It is vital that if any PFs or LFs are converted they have the same format level identifiers as the original in order to prevent repetitive level checks Run DDL Conversion Analysis Select this option to invoke the following dialog Generate Problem Analysis window Generate Problem Anal Eg Click OK to submit a batch job The following window displays the progress of the batch job Batch Job Progress
128. x JOBCTL GAVOT Sjoeieale LL 3S Ironmen e So Vek SAVME wos Covel gt NONE 1S 6 6 Display eig OM iNt E Omit on oe Valk SAMES NO AYES oe Valk Rass Wold expirat ron Iinterya lnm xSYSVAL 1 366 SAME SYSVAL NOMAX Limit device sessions xSYSVAL SAME E NOMRE YES ovo Van Keybecard Dufferin 2 2 25 aa aa OSVALD SOANE oo oV AL NO Maximum allowed storage NOMAX Kilobytes NOMAX Highest schedu ule priority n 3 039 Job description Library Group profile QDFTJOBD QGPL x NONE Name Neame AME A CURIE Name NONE Monnerii i Slap ibe F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel PIRB How to use thas display F24 More keys Step 3 Logoff CREATING MACRO OF XAN4SEU Macros allow you to automatically sign on for XAN4SEU and seamlessly work with the SEU option So it is necessary to verify whether the XAN4SEU macro has been created If not then record this macro using the following steps Step 1 Press the Start Recording button The Record Macro Script as dialog will be displayed Sign on with the XAN4SEU user profile X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 383 Appendix B Enabling the SEU Interface Record Macro Script as File Name Directones IMAN4SEU c emulator private Record Format C VBScript File fe Macro File Description Record User Wat Time fe Actual C None C Fired List Files of Type Macro S crpt Files mac v Express Logon for Macro
129. 0 Application Area DDL Conversion RMTDDL The sub nodes under the new node are shown below DDL Modernization sub nodes DDL Modernization Run DDL Conversion Analysis Problem Analysis F RMTDDL whe DDL Conversion Settings A Modify Conversion Parameters Te Generate File Analysis File Analysis iat Dered Constraints af Run DDL conversion DDL conversion error log File Conversion Report Hf Tables Ey Indexes Ey Views Schema Diagram DDL Conversion Settings When the DDL Conversion Settings option is clicked the following dialog is invoked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 131 ths Application Area DDL Conversion Settings window DDL Conversion Settings 8 is g DDL Conversion Setting for DDLMAN2 Table Suffix Generation Method Basic Conversion Surrogate Table for keyed PF and Index for PF keys Surrogate Table for PF and DDS LF for original PF fields keys Surrogate Table for PF and DDS LF for PF and all Access Paths v Use Create or Replace Clause Import Column Template Template Name v Add Identity Column Declare as Primary Key Column Name N Add Row Change Timestamp Add Row Creation Timestamp Generate Existing LF with original fields specified v Create Indexes to support retained DDS LFs Index Suffix DX v Create Constraints in separate source members Restore Original
130. 0 FSTOMAS IF E DISK 0009 00 FSTKBAL IF E DISK 0010 00 FIRNHSTLAIF E K DISK 0011 00 a 5 0012 00 E CMO 1 370 6 0013 00 17 0014 00 MEDM H o4 ok FS Sheeti Ready L CMD Key Data L k i im Ff lo bo O OL ITIRIE fae IT 4 EXPORT TO FLOWCHART X Analysis generates Flowcharts for RPG RPGLE and COBOL programs It also generates Process Flow Diagrams for CL programs The Flowchart option is enabled only in the source browser view It generates the flowchart of the displayed program using MS Visio Each level of source selected source member has a different flowchart Level 1 2 will have a Flowchart without any code Level 3 4 will have a Flowchart with code without blank lines and with no comments Level 5 will have a Flowchart with full code and comments In Level 1 2 the context menu on a shape in the Flowchart has the option View Source The View Source option displays the code for that section of the flowchart in the form of an HTML page X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 321 ths Exporting amp Printing Flowchart generated using Microsoft Visio isin 7000 Source List nf ANFANI in XON4TDFM_ORPGS ef File Edit View Insert Format Tools Shape Window D Ae Hayle Fluw Moral Cuurier Miew r fay E T 3 4 lalla EEN Tako cl oral neler a an ROOT kama CDEM QPPGSRC cance AMATO MA ee OAS B view Source Duplicate V
131. 11S0QL CYSOS5OL CY DESL C200450L C20055OL C0485 OL C0495OL C20505OL C205450L CA0555OL C20705OL C207 1507 C207250L C207 S5OL C207450L C20755OL C20765OL C20805OL C20615OL C4685 0L C25015OL X Analysis User Manual 11 1 CDO 115QL CVSQS50L CVSQGSQL C0045 C0055 C itas 2049501 C0505 C2405450L 4055501 C0050 Ceiri SGL C207 250 C407 3501 CA07450L C407 SSL C0650 CA0805QL C061 501 Ceta C2501 501 MISSYSOBIICD 11501 MISSYSOBIICYSOSSOL MISSYSOBIPCYSO85GL MISSYSOBIPCZO045OL MISSYSOBIPCZOOS5OL MISSY SOBINCZO4850L MISSYSOBINCZO4950L MISSYSOBIPCZOSO5GL MISSY SOBIPCZO5450L MISSYSOBIPCZOS554L MISSYSOBINCZOFO5GL MISSYSOBINCZOF15GQL MISSY SOBINCSOF259L MISSY SOBINCZOF35OL MISSY SOBINCZOF45OL MISSY SOBINCZOFS5OL MISSY SOBINCZOF65OL MISSY SOBINCZOROSGL MISSY SOBINCZO81 SQL MISSY SOBINCS4385OL MISSYSOBINCZSO159L 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 99 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Application Area Application Area ADD APPLICATION AREA X Analysis creates application areas from part of one or multiple systems It is possible to subdivide an application programmatically into logical modules or areas This can be within the context of a single system or specific parts from multiple systems For example you can have an application area like ORDERS containing Order Entry details from Operational System to represent single system Application Area You can also have an application area as ORDERS containing Orde
132. 1567 SOLERM 2013 06 06 11 56 05 337000 COMPLEXS Create table X4N4COe4 eMCOMPLEXS runrptnam varcha 2013 06 06 11 56 05 335000 COMPLE Execution started for run number 1 U13 06 06 11 56 04 570000 COMPLEXP SOLSTT 01567 SOLERM 2013 06 06 11 56 04 746000 COMPLESP Create table s4N4COe4 eMCOMPLEXP runrptnan varcha 2013 06 06 11 56 04 699000 COMPLEXP Execution started for run number 1 2013 06 06 11 56 04 435000 IMMETGEN DLTHST NO j New metrics data not generated because 2013 06 06 08 58 58 070765 COMPLEXS Data report submitted for run number 1 with Job details 7013 06 06 08 34 29 7835832 COMPLEXP Data report submitted for run number 1 with Job details 2013 06 04 17 45 34 573000 IMREFRESH 24 programs logged with metrics andor source changes 2013 06 03 12 55 36 852000 IMREFRESH 0 programs logged with metrics andfor source changes PROBLEM ANALYSIS After the Generate Problem Analysis batch job is over select the Problem Analysis option from the Audit Options under the context menu on XAN4CDXA to display the Problem Analysis data X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 275 JHJ LEGACY e Object List P Problem Analysis data for XAN4CDXA Total Problems 435 Audit Options Problem Analysis for Cross Reference Alert Category Obyect 4 Source Object Alerts p TO YO OVYO yY O O FO O O FO O yO O yO O O y O O O FO O F Source member changed after devicefile created No file foun
133. 1920 69632 79632 69932 69638 67632 69632 110592 120592 120592 110792 120592 110592 122880 132880 122980 123180 102880 122880 15 20 7 18 15 15 Context menu showing options Database Statistics Database Name 4 ASTATUS All Statistics Size No of Members Records Deleted Records SD amp amp y 4 CONHDR Date 2012 07 05 2012 09 06 2012 12 12 2013 05 09 2014 12 03 2015 08 05 2012 07 05 2012 09 06 2012 12 12 2013 05 09 2014 12 03 2015 08 05 2012 07 05 2012 09 06 2012 12 12 2013 05 09 2014 12 03 2015 08 05 2012 07 05 2012 09 06 2012 12 12 2013 05 09 2014 12 03 2015 08 05 2012 07 05 479 A Ne 110592 120592 120592 110792 120592 110592 122880 132880 122980 123180 102880 122880 No of Members Records 15 20 When you click All Statistics the graph will display the entire statistics of the database over the selected period of time 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Page 292 TJ Audit Options Cc All Statistics view e om fH Database Statistics Database Statistics Chart 2 Database Statistics Chart 3 Ta TA Database History for CNTACS LEGACY 80 000 75 000 70 000 65 000 60 000 55 000 4 50 000 a 45 000 amp 40 000 35 000 30 000 4 25 000 20 000 15 000 10 000 5 000 0 00 0 25 0 50 0 75 1 00 1 25 1 50 1 75 2 00 2 25 2 50 2 75 3 00 3 25 3 50 3 75 4 00 4 25 4 50 4 75
134. 2 Cancel Option 6 Date Attributes Option 6 can be used to change the SYNON shipped date types The following screen displays the Date Attributes window Change Date Attributes WORK WITH DATA IN A FILE a ee CHANGE RHoOrmen a a Se ke ee XSZEDTATRE ee ee XSZEDIATR PZ DTATR FP3ISEXLE F5 Refresh F6 Select format X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 400 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command F9 Insert F10 Entry Fli Change rori Option 8 Libraries Option 8 can be used to set up library list for the X REDO application The following screen displays the Libraries window Libraries screen X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Application Libraries Databorough hed XARWKLIB 11 51311 Al dang AO Selected x ref Library gt AA2EDEMO Enter options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display Type Sequence Library HOO X2EGEN 500 X2EGEN 560 X2EMDL FI EXLE Fil2 Cancel F16 Print The F6 function key can be used to add new library as shown below Add New Libraries screen X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Application Libraries Dat Borough Wed XARWKLIB Lls51311 Zi deg 2101s Keren library AA2 EDEMO die clan eee ee ee M O Object S Source M 2E Model Sequence 200 Li orary This screen is used to set up the source object and model libraries for the selected application If you intend to build the data model using CA 2E model libraries then you should e
135. 2010 Business Rules CUSTMNTI 2020 2eFT FTO2 CUSTMNTIR Component Documenter CUSTMNTIROID Lil eeFIOl Annotate The following dialog box is invoked in which you can write notes Subsequently click the related buttons to Save Delete or Cancel annotates Annotation dialog for a selected Screen Component Annotation for CUSTMNT101D Additional Notes DEVELOPMENT SCREENS X Analysis provides the following options on Development Screens Function Editor Screen Actions Preview Designer Class Diagram Page Designer Business Rules Data Content X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 234 Anos Options on Screen Components Options available on Development Screens List FA Development Screens i Fob amp aie wale oO Development Screens List of NONEs 4LL ASL Function Physical File Title ASTATLUS Status File RACNTACS eg Function Editor CNTACS Contacts AoC ON DET at Preview Designer CONDET Contract Detail 4A COMDET HY IP Page Designer CONDETHM Contract Detail new CBL ver with Long Fields 4A OMHDR LORD Contract Header ALACUSF Of Data Content CUSF Sites AACUSGRP BE Screen Actions CUSGRP Customer Sroups AACUSTS a Claes Diagram CUSTS Purchases AADELTY DELIA Delivery Areas AADISTS Business Rules DISTS Distributors AGEYFEYENT rr EYFEVENT File EVFEVENT lt jiii All these options available on Development Screens are already dis
136. 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 421 Appendix F X2E Specific Features Business Process Logic Metrics option Z m Fer e New Application Area Add Alternate Data Library List Reset Library List Application Library List Affinity Comparison Refresh Options Derwe Business Rules Import Options Export Options Document Entire Application Document Changed Objects Reengineer Programs Generate Programs Generate Web Services Generate Data Application Data Migration Inter Repository Options Metrics Analysis l BE STAN stanley o Screen Metrics p BG TESTDBI File Metrics D gt fi TRSBP1 my first bit Business Process Logic Metrics p Recovery Error Report Window displaying Business Process Logic Metrics fe Programs EQ TSAJEIR Summary Metrics 53 a_i Total Lines Included Lines ExcldFixMe Lines Unmarked Lines Total Strmts Excluded Stmts 41002495 100499 41002500 AO02505 41002504 41002505 A025 26 A052 A025 26 41002569 A025 724 A025 3 1002576 le Salle belo le te le re ete a aAa aAa aAA AA oo oo AA OD Aa aaa A AAA GAG G AA amn S m AAA ms SA m S m SA m BA m SA m S o S os AA m SAA a SA m no iN i X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 422 thJs LEGACY Appendix F X2E Specific Features GENERATING JAVA APPLICATION Once the reengineering process completes the user can opt to generate a Java ap
137. 3 00 EXFMTOESFLC 99 0063 00 WRITEQETRL 99 0064 00 EXFMTOESFLC 99 0074 00 WRITEQETRL 99 Legend Dark Red depicts the Definition Statements Black depicts the File Operations Magenta depicts the Parameters Dark Brown depicts the Program Structure Operation Dark Blue depicts the Field Operation Legend for Member X Ref dad Member Ref 2 a A E M Member Reference for CONOD1IDOF in 4N4COEM W Cefinition Statements w o 7 i n l t D E File Operations FCONOGOLDFCF E F M Parameters P Program Structure Operation L i C E Field Operation ENHANCED MEMBER X REF The Enhanced Member X Ref option displays the references of a variable in the member along with information about how each subroutine handles this variable It also presents the logical order in which the variable actually gets used and not in the order of how it is physically placed in the source X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 170 HIS Quick Reference to an Object Enhanced Member X Ref view Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Leye 5 GQ E 7 B Aga ee M BBE i wA oe fee seq Mo a a l a a sine evay eee 000z 6 00 Cc Until Fa 0027 00 i INOS Add Bookmark Variable Where Used CMDDTA Member 4 Ref WADD1 Enhanced Member Ref SW ADDS Indicator Where Set sWADDS eid Business Rules Member Ref E Enhanced Mbr Ref 2 5 Member Reference For INO3 in X
138. 4 00 ch Hierarchical Structure Chart iil Structure Chart Diagram 0206 00 l an oF E Screen Flow Diagram 0208 00 E Program Structure Chart HOVEL 1 IN3S lt iil gt Generate UML Choose different UML diagram options 1 Class Diagram Generates Class Diagram for the Object 2 Activity Diagram Generates Activity Diagram for the Object Generate UML options Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 iewLeveh5 A E aE P Us B Bee i A 2 Seq Mo GL Class Diagram fos 8 Seetia 2 aehan So soc F 0204 00 Z ES Activity Diagram z JC Bi O206 00 Ct Validate Contract v lt i gt Flowchart It is a drop down menu and contains two options 1 Flowchart Generates Flowchart for the Program 2 Flowchart for current Subroutine Procedure Generates Flowchart for the selected Subroutine Procedure of the Program Flowchart options Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Level 5 BA seq Mo peace E E ed El EA Ut SEO i a os amp ite owchark L 5S e ee Aes 5 Ae D E Flowchart for current Subroutine Procedure X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 157 ths Quick Reference to an Object Click the Flowchart icon to generate a flowchart using Microsoft Visio Screen Components Select the Screen Components option to display a list of all available screen components for the selected program Screen Components op
139. 4CDEM CEXAN4CDEM QBLSRC QC BLSRC QC BLSRC OC BLSRC QC BLSRC CBCONDET CBCONDETH CBCONHDR CBCUSFMNT CBCUSTMNT 2 Work with Order Details Work with Order Details Long fi Work with Orders Cobol vers Customer Site Maintenance Customer Detail Maintenance L The first screen is sorted on the member name in ascending order To change the sort order or to sort on any other column click the respective column heading SOURCE FILES Double click on the Source Files node to generate a list of all the source files The option is available under the cross reference node Double click on any source file to display the Member List Source File List All Procedures List ea Exportable Functions List Source Files ii TE Source File List for XAN4CDXA Total Objects 13 m Al Source Library Source File Source File Text XAN4CDEM ON4CDEM ON4CDEM tON4CDEM ON4CDEM ONC DEM ON4CDEM ON4CDEM ON4CDEM ON4CDEM tON4CDEM MAC Diy f COMA CD X Analysis User Manual 11 1 ASIMELTEST CPYBKSRIC OCBLSRC OCLSRC OCMDSRC ODDSSRC OLETSRC POMOR YSR QRFOLESRC QRFPOSRE QSECTAT QEDSSRE QIRPGLESRC Cobol copybooks CBL Source File RPGLE Source File DDS Source File Generated RPG Service Modules 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 85 Application Library BUSINESS RULES The program source is grouped into discrete blocks of logic so that each block represents a particular execution of business logic
140. 5 242 244 246 247 248 249 Inverted Structure Chart 196 197 Java 56 74 97 378 412 413 422 423 424 430 Legend 143 144 163 164 169 180 183 194 195 196 198 200 208 211 214 375 LFs Access Paths 167 210 License Manager 28 32 34 36 37 38 Manage Linked Repositories 75 242 249 250 251 Member List 76 84 85 167 293 440 metadata 89 218 299 300 303 318 322 Metrics History 259 260 261 Migrated Logic 417 418 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 483 ar yng Index Narratives 187 188 191 192 202 New DB2 Connection 39 40 379 New DB400 Connection 39 Object Allocation 75 276 Object Library 199 Object List 47 76 77 78 79 80 81 101 103 158 161 166 207 344 366 420 Object Where Used 16 24 52 145 146 148 161 162 163 174 197 442 OLE Automation 48 376 434 435 Open Database Connectivity 318 Open Office Draw 48 Overridden Files 186 187 Overview Structure Chart 11 17 198 199 200 202 204 205 351 355 359 365 369 Page Designer 56 219 223 224 225 226 233 Preferences 44 45 46 47 49 50 52 53 54 55 56 158 189 224 225 254 255 257 264 378 379 433 434 448 Preview Designer 219 223 224 233 Problem Analysis 75 76 126 128 129 133 253 274 275 288 405 Problem Analysis Request History 471 472 program logic 20 21 182 230 Program Structure Chart 11 51 146
141. 5 2002 05 35 16 10f05 2002 05 58 14 1Of10 2008 11 02 12 1Of10 2008 11 14 52 1010 2008 11 02 50 2A OS 2009 09 37 38 27 f05 2009 09 35 19 11f02 2009 01 01 21 11f02 2009 01 02 07 No Pee ed od 6 Click Import and select the Security Certificate issued from the iSeries It would then get added to the list of certificates providing you with the necessary authorization After performing these steps check the Use SSL box in the Sign on dialog to begin using the feature X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 448 Appendix L Setting Status for Business Rules Appendix L Setting Status for Business Rules BUSINESS RULES STATUS When you select the Business Rules Overlay or the Business Rules mode in the Source Editor a new functionality allows you to set Rule Status for any rule Check the box Allow editing in Consolidated Rules from Window gt Preferences gt X Analysis for full activation of these features You can set comment and or change the rule status for any rule Select the right click option Change Rule Status to for directly changing the rule status A list of such possible statuses is already provided and shown in the image below Business Rules window List of Rule Status feu Business Rules 2 amp TE htt Te a M R O Business Rules for CUSFMAINT Number of Lines 10 Source Member Rule Number Field File Message ID CUSEMAINT oo001 PCUSNO CUSF ate eet CUSFMAI
142. A gt Plug in Development gt Remote Systems gt Run Debug gt Server Service Policies t Tasks gt Team gt Usage Data Collector Validation gt Web Web Services A Analysis Advanced Folders X Data Test b X Redo bo ADoclet gt AML General Setting Preferences Structure Chart Maximum Diagram Depth Maximum Unexpanded Depth Maximum Files to show in a row in Show Files mode s Preferred Volume Limit System Document amp View Export as Paper Size O PDF MS Word document A4 Letter Google Drive Export Allow Export to Google Drive as DOCX Allow Export to Google Drive as XLSX Program Structure Chart Default View Level 13 Number of records to display Variable Where Used Default View Level 1 w Object Where Used Entry Level References 7 w Default Source Editor Loex 5250 Emulator Others Number of records to display 1000 Restore Defaults 9 Click the Preferences gt Advanced tab The following window will be displayed Provide the saved Google Client ID and the Google Client Secret in the specified fields X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 465 Appendix M Export to Google Drive Advanced Preferences window JHJ type filter text Advanced LEGACY General Advance Setting Preferences Ant Data Management i Help t Work with Objects Install Update t Subset D
143. A Source Scan E O x Sanitize Resize fal Procedures Ee BE ACCOUNTS Company Accounts AL COBOL Cobol Application HA CONHDR conhdr HAMS CONUPD fl CUSTOMERS Customer pp 4rea E3 HA DATATEST sDataTest Demo Ee BE MVCPROCESS Re Engineering 4 pE OE Order Entry 4 ats QEOO1 Application Area OEO01 ORDERS Order entry System BE PLAN Planning System 4 ak PRINT Printed documentation E SALES Sales System BE XTEST Datatest Example ADDING OBJECT TO AN APPLICATION AREA Opt for the Object List to add an object to an application area Double click on All Objects to bring up the Work with Objects dialog Provide the object name to be added to the application area For example input CONOO1 and click OK Select CONO01 and opt for the context menu on it Then select the Add to Application Area option as shown below Add to Application Area option Application Area Options Addto Application Area Add to Application Area with Related Objects Omit from Application Area This option presents the following dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 101 THUS Application Area Add to Application Area Add CONOO1 to Application Area Application 4rea Description CONHDR conhdr CUSFMAINT New Sub App Area CUSTOMERS Customer App 4rea DATATEST Data Test Demo DECL16 Test area MVCPROCESS Re Engineering Order Entry Application Area CEOO1 orders Cancel Select the
144. AN4 CDEMIORPSSRG CONO01 cogni El 0027 00 TMOS DOUEQ I E 0046 00 INOS IFNE 1 E 0067 00 INOS IFNE 1 E 0078 00 INOS3 IFME 1 RVCON PRLNS VALID cRcoN ADD BOOKMARK Use the Add Bookmark option to access the facility and bookmark a selected source line in the Source List view Add Bookmark option e Object List Fla CONOO1 3 E Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDE PGSRG Lines 271 iewLevel 5 A ES BREE E i mh S amp B i A oe amp Seq Mo een ae ee Te er ee ee ia a a ee 0026 00 C Until F3 0027 00 Variable Where Used d CHMDDTA Member Ref WADD 1 0032 00 Enhanced Member Ref AWAD DS 0033 00 Indicator Where Set AWADDS al lt ti gt Select this option to invoke a dialog as shown below You can edit the name of the Bookmark as per requirement X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 171 Quick Reference to an Object Add Bookmark dialog Add Bookmark Enter Bookmark name Click OK to bookmark the specific source line The following image shows the bookmarked source line Bookmarked selection IN03 Se Object List CONDDL 3 E Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Levek5 si A E 6 aH w p Awein aA Seq Mo T E ae a ae oe On ee a ea ee T 0026 00 C Until F Oo2z7 00 T THOS DOUED 1 0029 00 C Initialise screen 0030 00 T MOVEACHD 1 CHDDOTS J lt i a To remove the bookmark r
145. AN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System F1l Help F3 Exit F6 Add F10 Cmd Line F12 Cancel F24 More Keys This provides access to the following X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 21 Configure Cross Reference Library Variable Program Calls from Files You can add the relevant file containing the info about the program names to be called The files listed in this screen are called Generic Files These files are read by the program s to determine which programs to call based on certain keys Work with Generic Files allows you to maintain the details of the files which are read by a program in order to determine which programs to call Press F6 to add a Generic File The following data should be maintained File name The name of the database file which is used to retrieve the name of the programs to be called the generic file The name entered can be either a physical or a logical file name but it must be a keyed file Key type This field indicates the type of data used to retrieve the called program name Choose from ALL All records in the file are to be scanned to find the possible programs that can be called by the program CONSTANT All records keyed by any value which is moved into the key field name see below within the calling program refer to programs which can be called by the program Key field name This field only applies when the key type is specified as CONSTANT It
146. Analysis source browser provides a number of additional features It allows you to browse another source and also continue with another zoom on reaching there Further you can traverse to the previous screen from where the zoom was issued Source Browser View Se Object List Es CONDO E3 E Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Leve 5 A E B aAA P E p AEiG Seq No ne Sen ee oe a er ce ie eel 0019 00 I 244 253 Uma o020 00 I nine oO Ler eee eee eee TTT TTT TTT OOe2 00 C Receive Parameters 0023 00 T ENTRY PLIST 0024 00 i PARM HERTH 1 0026 00 G Until Fa O027 00 i INOS oUt 1 0025 1 i t ti ao X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 148 SSS aa yng X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Quick Reference to an Object Note the following on this view When the Source Browser invokes then the cursor is positioned to the beginning of C specifications for RPG RPGLE programs and Procedure Division for COBOL programs Double click on the line performs Member X Ref or Object Where Used depending on whether Object Variable is available on that line Preference is given to the Member X Ref option in case it is a Program On Physical Logical Files Global Where Used is performed for the field on that line for that file Use of Templates by the Source Browser The source browser uses the extension of any PGM file to determine its type for e g the attributes which
147. Business Rules 16 Generate 17 Failures 18 Errors 19 Load Log 20 X A Log 21 File Check 22 23 Compile Chk 24 Prb Anl CT Prj Ctl X ror Ils Text Company division AA2EDEMO X 2E Hospital Demo XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System F1l Help F3 Exit F10 Cmd Line Fl2 Cancel F24 More Keys OPTIONS AVAILABLE ON THE XREDOAPP COMMAND INTERFACE The following options are available on the XREDOAPP command interface Option 2 Linking Option 3 Copy Option 6 Date Attributes Option 8 Libraries Option 12 Initialise Option 15 Business Rules Option 16 Generate Option 17 Failures Option 18 Errors Option 19 Load Log Option 20 X A Log Option 21 File Check Option 22 Compile Check Option 24 Prb Anl Option CT Prj Ctl X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 397 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command Option 2 Linking Option 2 can be used to link multiple applications To use the Linking option some Data Areas need to be updated The following screen displays the Linking window LINKING option Work with Data Areas X Analysis Work with Data Areas Dabavworcoughe lied XARWKDARAS a FAO I S10 2 Ab Enter options press Enter 5 Work with values Data Area XSZb KP Tinked Fro ect CS EMNPRJ Main Eves eer SOMOS Progr amn ODI t Elu cron ibrary F3 Exit F12 Cancel Linked Project To display edit the Linked Project
148. C file Files with no members or multiple members are automatically excluded A message is written to the error log for each of these files Files can be manually excluded by adding them to the XMDLEXCS file The Reason Code should be set to blank Error Log An Error Log is written to source member ERRORLOG in QTXTSRC in the X Analysis library The messages may be diagnostic or terminal Exception Processing Please note the following X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 330 SSS aa yng Exporting amp Printing Multi format files Indexes are created for each file access path E LFs not using the PF format name or where individual fields specified The format name is retained No statement is required to point to the original PF format name JOIN Files JFILE and JOIN point to the SQL table names The format name is retained No statement is required to point to the original PF format name FIFO LIFO Files The keyword cannot be used with SQL tables and is removed A message is written to the error log for each file REFERENCE Fields These can only be used in PFs so the references are removed A message is written to the error log for each file TEXT specified on an LF format Where the PF format can be added TEXT cannot be specified so it is removed ALWNULL CCSID and DFT field keywords These are removed from the original PF definition when i
149. CMD XEXITJ XFNSPCMGRT XFNSPCMGR1 XUVAINIT XLICDTLQRY XLICDTLQRY XLICVERPGM XREFINUSE XSCNRPTLYT XSECCHK XSRVAPP XWRKAS4JB1 XAOBJ XACRTMLK XAOBJ XADSPOJU XAOBJ XADTARDR XAOBJ XADTARDR2 XAOBJ XAFFNDET le ee ee eee Data Flow Diagram Object Where Used Variable Where Used XAOBJ XCHKLIB XAOBJ XCRTLIB XAOBJ XEXCCMD XAOBJ XEXITJ XAOBJ XFNSPCMGRT XAOBJ XFNSPCMGRT XAOBJ XJVAINIT XAOBJ XLICDTLQRY XAOBJ XLICDTLQRY XAOBJ XLICVERPGM XAOBJ XREFINUSE XAOBJ XSCNRPTLYT XAOBJ XSECCHK XAOBJ XSRVAPP XAOBJ XWRKAS4JOB Right click on a row for the context menu and select the options to view the Data Flow Diagram or the Object Where Used Variable Where Used references SQL Procedures The last option under the Procedures node is SQL Procedures This option presents the entire procedure coded with SQL The option follows SQL Standard PSM and allows normal DDL DML SQL in addition to procedural statements The following window appears on selecting the SQL Procedures option X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 98 ahs Application Library Window SQL Procedures SOL Procedures List E aa i Specific Mame Routine Mame External Name External Language AUTHENTICATECREWUSERID AUTHENTICATECRE WUSERID MISSYSOBI SUTHEOOOOL CANEDITPROJECTPHASE CAMEDITPROJECTPHASE MISSYSOBJ CANEDOOOOZ CANEDITPROJECTSTEF CAMEDITPROJECTSTEF MISSYSOBJICANEDOOOO1 SQL Procedures List Total Objects 164 COF
150. Client ID APPLICATION TYPE Web application Accessed by web browsers over a network Service account Calls Google APIs on behalf of your application instead of an end user Learn more Installed application Runs on a desktop computer or handheld device like Android or iPhone INSTALLED APPLICATION TYPE Android Learn more Chrome Application Learn more iOS Learn more PlayStation 4 Other Create Client ID 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 463 Anos Appendix M Export to Google Drive On the pop up window select APPLICATION TYPE gt Installed application and INSTALLED APPLICATION TYPE gt Other Click Create Client ID 7 Awindow will appear displaying the Client ID and Client Secret Please save the Client ID and Secret for later use Client ID and Client Secret Client ID for native application CLIENT ID ile Pe a fa et eee r ie ar BT a Bii Ey pip tiigri CLIENT SECRET ahii AT aci REDIRECT URIS urm ietf wg oauth 2 0 00b http localhost Reset secret Download JSON Delete 8 On the X Analysis Client check to allow options for DOCX and XLSX on the Window gt Preferences gt X Analysis gt General X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 464 Appendix M Export to Google Drive General Preferences window showing Google Drive Export options type filter text gt General gt Ant t Data Management gt Help t Install Update gt Java gt JavaScript JP
151. Cloud Platform Use the same infrastructure that powers Google s own applications v have read and agree to all Terms of Service for the Google Cloud Platform products Leam more Check the box on the pop up and click Continue 3 The following window will appear Confirm the registration process by checking all the boxes X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 458 Appendix M Export to Google Drive Google Developers Console x amp i https console developers google com flows enableapi apiid drive A Search r B a Google Sign up for a free trial gmail com thJs0 LEGACY Projects Register your application for Drive API in Google Developers Console Google Developers Console allows you to manage your application and monitor API usage Billing You have no existing projects A new project named My Project will be created Account settings Need help Privacy amp terms v Ihave read and agree to the Google APIs Terms of Service v Ihave read and agree to the Drive API Terms of Service V I have read and agree to all Terms of Service for the Google Cloud Platform products Agree and continue Activities 1 Create Project My Project See all activity Click Agree and continue A project will be created with the default name My Project 4 Under My Project gt APIs amp auth click on APIs Check that the Drive API is ON as displayed in the following
152. Component Documenter R I R R I CUSTMNTL 101D R zzFTo OE Data Content R I R R I R CUSTMATIROID HH F TOL 3 Annotate The following screenshot displays the Page Designer window in the Eclipse mode Page Designer window Customer Detail Maintenance Customers Customer Detail Maintenance Databorough Ltd Customer No Customer Name Statement Account Related Account Tax Reg Bank Bank A c CusGrp Rep Distributor Credit Limit Stl Dsc Cr Guarantee B O Lang Date Loaded Chg Date Last Sale X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 227 Options on Screen Components DATA CONTENT Select the Data Content option to access further relevant details of a particular file The option is available for all Screen Components and Development Screens Right click on a Screen Component for the context menu and select the Data Content option as shown below Data Content option HS Screen Components 23 we A PCE ER MaA WO Screen Components for Application Library XAN4COX4 CAIN zj Program Function Type SegWo DSPF Format Physical File Title CUSTMNT1 I CUSTMNT101D COE reen ie E CUSTMNT 1020 13 Z F 102 CUSTMNT1_0 sig Function Editor ffFTdl l 2 Preview Designer ffFTU2 a CUSTMAT1 0010 CUSTMAT1 0020 PM Page Designer CUSTMANTI 1 77FTOL Data Content FZFTO2 BE Screen Actions 7 Class Diagram feFITO1 FETUS Business Rules F
153. Components Business Rules Screen Components USTMNT101D Number of Lines 13 Field File AWBCCD CUSTS AWG4TA CUSTS AWBNCD CUSTS PERSON CUSTS DSDCDE CUSTS XWGIVA CUSTS CUSNO CUSTS CUSNO CUSTS AWBCCD CUSTS COMPONENT DOCUMENTER ZJtYTeau OB B a Rule Debtor blank Name blank End of file on CUSGRP and CUSGRP CusGrp lt gt blank Rep not found on Salespersons Distributor not found on Distributors Credit_Limit lt 0 Cus No 0 Cus No not found on Sites Debtor found on Purchases The Component Documenter option documents the extracted Screen Components Re engineered Functions The following information is documented Additional Header Info This includes the function header information Data Content This includes the data content diagram Screen Actions This includes the screen action diagram Screen Design This includes the Screen Design for all formats Residual Logic This includes the business process logic for the selected screen component Business Rules This includes the business rules for the selected screen component X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 232 Options on Screen Components Component Documenter option fs Screen Components cs bem sia a of a Ek E E E Aly O Screen Components For Application Library 4N4CD 4 Call aee eo a eS Program Function Type SeqNo OSPF Format Physical File Title 5 CUSTMNTI
154. DXAMI MANS CDXAM2 E XANACDXAT MANS CDKAUC XANSCDXC AANA CDXAIR XANACDXAM3 object lable wa MACDXANA XANACDXAMS A NEWXREF A RDCTSTB XANACDXAMG XANACDXAP4 XANACDXA AANACDXAS YARA MYARAT Select the X Ref library Selected X Ref Library Click OK The Data Flow Diagram for the selected object will be displayed as follows X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 478 thJs0 LEGACY X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi Data Flow Diagram on RSE Le Remote System Explorer Program Centered Data Flow Diagram for WWCUSTS Total Objects 16 IBM Rational Developer for File Edit Navigate Search Project TestXAAPICall Run Window Help ae 5 0 gt is H T AH A e a Da AF H Aaa DA E TD OMS Wor gt Fi fE WWCUSTS 32 8 BIS 7 a B X Anais 19216821102 CONHDRLI SF CUSTMNTI sz Objects Customer Detail p By Work with libraries Maintenance a B53 Work with objects gt Parameters M Filter created successfully Expand this again to create ai gt 19 Work with members CUSGRE gt Output Files 1 Object B gt Library list 3 i ite B _ _DISTSSEL RINMSGTEXT gt i User libraries Update Outp Retum message text a E XANSCDEM WWCUSTS gt Parameters H WWCONHDR Work with Orders gt Parameters XBCCLMSG Clear a Message Queue b Parameters The Variable Where Used options can also be accessed
155. Documentation Application Area Options Select Application Area Features bo be included in the System Document Diagram Options Overview Structure Chart Normal C Expanded Detailed Data Model Diagram Normal In PDF as Image Detailed In visio Show Al Application Area Diagram Annotation F Application 4rea Annotation Coverage of System Document Detailed Object Documentation in Alphabetical Order No Detailed Object Documentation Cancel The Overview Structure Chart and the Data Model Diagram options mentioned in the above dialog box are only for the selected application area The wizard dialog displayed above has a section called Coverage of System Document This section has two options depending on which the System Document differs in its approach Let us see how these two options work X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 366 Document Manager Detailed Object Documentation in Alphabetical Order mn If the Detailed Object Documentation in Alphabetical Order is selected then the object documentation generates in ascending alphabetical order of Object name from the application area The following dialog is displayed in the wizard Exclude Object List X Analysis l B System Documentation Exclude Objects Exclude objects From documentation optional Mame Type Description Delete Objects SELNG FCT A APO Last Skeleton Let
156. E else C z add uresul ounnb C endif Code snippet of the generated procedure based module IIXUTX IIXVTX uscanl uscan2 tranl utran2 uresul uscan2 uscanl ulen upos utranl utran2 uresul Oms_status SEL Oms_status blank blank blank blank ZeLro 11xutx 1ixvtx 7 len Strim uscanl 6xlate lo up uscanl exlacLe Llo up uscanz 6scan ssubst utranl l ulen utran2 Lt Error oounnb else oounnb 294 uresul X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Upas j Page 415 Appendix F X2E Specific Features endif Scanresult OOUNNB Let us closely look at the artifacts recovered by the X2E Reengineering process i e 1 Action Diagram 2 Business Rules 3 Residual Logic 4 Re engineered Action Diagram 5 Re engineered Controller 6 INTERNAL ROUTINES Objects 7 Business Process Logic Metrics ACTION DIAGRAM The X Analysis Initialization process uses 2E Model to generate Action Diagrams in the cross reference library On the X Analysis Perspective double click the Programs node under the selected cross reference to bring up the list of all programs Double click on a program to zoom source into its corresponding Action Diagram see below Action Diagram for a program e Programs Action Diagram for ER Edit Hospital Edit record 1 screen TSAJE1R E H g e aua a a i Action Diagram ye ene laces Workfield
157. ED is selected by default It means that X Analysis will retrieve all object libraries you have previously specified using Option 8 Source Libraries Special value SPECIFIED is selected by default It means that X Analysis will retrieve all source libraries you have previously specified using Option 8 Index Source Files Specify whether or not to create indexes over the source files These indexes will allow the immediate display of where used data They may be required for the data model generation depending on which options are taken If the indexes are not built now they can be built for an individual Source Member at the time they are viewed through the X Analysis browser Select one of the following e CHG Only update current indexes It will find newly added source members and remove deleted members It will also index any source member that has changed since the last initialisation e NO Do not build the indexes e ALL It is similar to CHG when it comes to finding new members and removed members It will index all source members without checking the change date e UPG Upgrade the X Analysis database and rebuild all data including all indexes replacing current ones Build Data Model If you take the option to build the data model for your application then you can view it through X Analysis Select one of the following e YES Build the data model e NO Do not build the data model You should have the
158. Function EDTRCD Status A Creation Date 13 09 10 Creation Time 13 14 09 Last Used 22 09 14 Days Used 24 CNTACS Physical File Business Rule BR Count Annot Count Complexity Source Lines Cyc Complex Halstead Maint Index Files Device Files Called Programs Calling Programs However for objects with PF attribute the More Info display is limited to the General and the Complexity details The image below shows More Info without the Business Rules count for the PF object CONDET Be Object List 22 Object List of ALLUSR ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Total Objects 362 ay Al Library PF XAN4CDEM RE XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM LFXAN4CDEM LFXAN4CDEM LFXAN4CDEM LFXAN4CDEM PF XAN4CDEM LFXAN4CDEM LFXAN4CDEM LFXAN4CDEM PF XAN4CDEM PF XAN4CDEM LF XAN4CDEM LF XAN4CDEM LF XANASCIFM lt Name CNTACS CNTCMAINT CNTCMAINTD CNTLF1 CNTLF2 CNTLF3 CNTLF4 CONDETL1 CONDETL2 CONDETLS CONDETNW CONHDR CONHDRL1 CONHDRLIA CONHNRI 2 More Info window for a File CONDET Type FILE PGM FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE Attribute PF RPGLE DSPF LF LF LF LF Description Contacts Contacts Maintenance Contacts Maintenance Global Contacts by Salesman Global Contacts by Name Global Contacts by Status Global Contacts by Prod amp Status Contract Detail by Store Contract Product by Store Contract Product by Product Contract Contract Detail new CBL Ver wr Contract Heade
159. GSRC Lines 271 Yiew Levei 5 A S B AEH 6 i e BBE i A a seq Mo a T e E T tee oc N 0013 00 E Print View Code Select the View Code option to view the reengineered the restructured or the generated code of a selected object View Code option Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRG Lines 271 ViewLeve 5 ss A E BHEE P k m Ampi aN Ge ie eg eee iin eg E EEEa Ft X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 161 ANUS Quick Reference to an Object OBJECT WHERE USED The Object Where Used option lists all the instances in the application where a specified object has been used referenced The following are the details of the sub options of Object Where Used Usage References List of objects which are using this object All References List of objects where this object is being used Besides this source references for which the objects do not exist are also displayed Update References List of objects which are updating this object Delete References List of objects which are performing delete operation on the specified object Entry Level References Entry level references in Object Where Used list all entry level programs A which directly or indirectly access the object in question Real Time References Object Where Used references to track dependencies It facilitates the live impact analysis at runtime and lets you see the Real Time references or
160. Generate Database Service Programs option calls the XWRTDBSP IBM i command and submits the job in batch For details refer to the Generate Database Service Programs section DOCUMENT ENTIRE APPLICATION Refer to the Document Manager section DOCUMENT CHANGED OBJECTS The Document Changed Objects option documents those objects which have changed since the last initialization was run on the cross reference library This option is available on the context menu of the application library For more details refer to the Document Manager section X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 71 Application Library REENGINEER PROGRAMS The Reengineer Programs option submits a batch job which performs the two tasks Reengineering and Service Modules generation The batch command XREGENS reengineers the client programs in such a way that the old code in RPG RPGLE free fixed format gets converted into free format procedure based module It does not change the program structure The subroutines are converted into procedures The Reengineer Programs option is available on the context menu of application library and application areas and also available on individual PGM type objects under the Modernization Options submenu Select this option to display the following dialog Reengineer Programs dialog Ree ngineer Programs Ed Click OK to submit a batch job The following window displays the progress of the bat
161. HAZZFTOL Work with Orders w OBADROZD CUSTS Contract Header Purchases Order status _ 225F01 Work with Order Details Ww ORNDETOLG Contract Detail Product Master 8F7FTO1 Work with Order Details YW ONDE TOZO Contract Detail Contract Header Product Master Transaction type LHAZZCNFI Confirm Wi ONDETOFD Z TRNTY Contract Detail Contract Header Product Master Transactior ka lt Note The functions in Screen Flow Diagram suffixed with G denote the grid display corresponding to the subfile record format of the display file used in the program The ones suffixed with D represent the screen functions for the flat screen record format of the display file ACCESS PATH DIAGRAM The Access Path Diagram is the diagrammatic representation of LFs Access Paths lists The LFs Access Paths displays all the access paths for a selected physical file Opt for the context menu on that PF to generate the Access Path Diagram for a PF and then select the Access Path Diagram option The following diagram displays the Access Path Diagram for CUSF X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 211 qhJS03 Program Logic Documentation Access Path Diagram for CUSF h Object List Cu N 7 i emr Access Path Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 14 i CUSF B Sites CUSFLA CUSFLB CUSFLC CUSFLD Sites by Product renamed From Sites by Orig List Sites by Salesperson Sites by Validator cusfla or tes
162. Halstead and Maintainability Index columns in the Metrics window display the average count This can be seen in both the Group Total and the Grand Total The conventions that are used for processing Cyclomatic Complexity Halstead and Maintainability Index are given below Cyclomatic Complexity This is simply a count of the number of decision points and exit points in a module In RPG this would be a count for each subroutine or procedure plus mainline of how many statements have these operation codes FXX ELSEIF DOW DOU CABxx WHxx CASxx FOR Halstead measures These are five different measurements based on formulas applied to four different values obtained from the code again for each subroutine n1 the number of different op codes in the subroutine n2 the number of different variables or files used on all statements in the subroutine N1 the total number of op codes used in the subroutine some may be used multiple times N2 the total number of all instances of variables in the subroutines From these four numbers different measurements are calculated Module length N1 N2 Module vocabulary n1 n2 Halstead Volume N log 2 n Difficulty n1 2 N2 n2 Effort Volume Difficulty X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 257 Audit Options Maintainability Index This is a formula based on some years of experience of Hewlett Packard engineers Th
163. How to use this display Option 17 can be used to list program failure from the Generate Option 16 job The following screen displays the Failures window Position to line Line OOOO 000002 000003 000004 000005 000006 000007 000008 000009 000010 Oral Ik 000012 OOOO Ls 000014 000015 OOE ES En e e a X2RDAT 2 ONSON ZONES ZO NO 208 ZO MO 2 8 AOI 0 28 ZOO 22 ONS AOE 2 On OSN ZOTE TS ZOSO N O I 2 8 AOI S028 AOI Oy S28 ZOU SO a2 2 AOI O07 228 X2RTIM Oe Lae Oa O98 214 Corey Ge ba Oma a Cera Oe LAR Oa Oe be OO OAT Oe a 09 14 OOTA Oon A Fi2 Cancel X Analysis User Manual 11 1 oee Failures Report Display Report a E ZAROBI A1002498 A1002498 A1002499 A1002499 A1002500 A1002 300 A1002503 A1002503 A1002504 A1002504 A1002505 A1002505 A1002527 ATOO So A1002528 A1002528 F19 Left Report width Shire tO COLUMN E T E E STE XZRERR File Y2CFGTLO 15s missing Failed to Compile Pile yY FCOCTLO Iis missing Failed to compile Pile Y2CFGTLO 1s missing railed io compile Pile Y2DSTFLO 1S missing Failed to compile Pile Y DoTFLO 1s Missing Failed ro compile Bley Dorr LOTi S mies ing Failed to compile Pile Y2CFCGTLI 15s missing Pailed io Compile ile Y CFGTLI 15 missing Failed to compile F20 Right 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc BZ plir Megas Page 403 Appendix D XREDOAPP Co
164. IEW Lines OOSY 00 to OO Format ESF Shape a Help Lines O000 00 te OO Propertles cee 8 Source Code generated in HTML on Program Files Databorough X Analysis Temp 314154114 Soure 0 x Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help O Back 3 x ar Ti Search s Favorites GA Media Address B E Program Files Databoroughi Analysis Temp13141541140015 00 EJ Go a a a a a a e a aH C RECEIVE PARAMETERS CC UNTIL F3 C IMITIALISE SCREEN RETRIEVE LAST ORDER NUMBER b CALL CUSLET GET ORDER NO amp CUSTOMER NG SO LONG AS EXIT NOT REQUESTED 1 RETRIEVE CUSTOMER DETAILS EZSR RVCUS 4 My Computer X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 322 Exporting amp Printing The right click menu option Jump to subroutine on EXSR Execute Subroutine boxes opens the flowchart for the selected subroutine This option is available at all levels Jump to Subroutine Lines 0046 00 to O055_00 gt 2 View Source ESE kump to subroutine R WLU Lines 0057 00 to gog CUE EXER Copy Subroutine View of SRVCUS isio 27000 Source List of GEOO L in XAl File Edit View Insert Format Tools D gE Hean b SEEE TN BOT jp AN4CD EM QRPCSRC OEOOL 4 ACUS lt Lines 0104 00 to 0107 00 PRINTING FROM X ANALYSIS X Analysis allows printing of various List Diagrams Source members The Print icon is available on the toolbar of various list diagrams source members
165. IGNER The Preview Designer option is the outline of the Page Designer Use the options in the Preview Designer window to make changes such as adding constants or modifying page layout After the changes are applied they subsequently show up on the Page Designer window Preview Designer option ee NIG amp Moka E amp SkSaA oO Screen Components For Application Library 4N4Coe4 Gall Program Function Type SegWo DSPF Format Physical File Title CUSTMAT1 I US TMNTIOID EAE B Screen Source Code 13 CUSTMAT O20 2eFTOe ompanenks lt i CUSTMNT1_0 sig Function Editor CUSTMNT1_001D CUSTMAT 1 O02D FTO1 2 FTUe Preview Designer F Page Designer CUSTMNT1_1 FFF TO ne Data Content CUSTMAT1 1010 CUSTMNT1_ 2 gr Class Diagram Business Rules FTO1 eFTUe CUSTMAT 2010 CUSTMAT 2020 i CUSTMNTIR Component Documenter R I R R I R CUSTMNTi_ 1020 R eF T BE Screen Actions I R R I R CUSTMNTIROLIC HT f2F 101 3 Annotate Right click on a Screen Component for the context menu and select the Preview Designer option to invoke the following window X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 224 Options on Screen Components Preview Designer window bs Object List 28 usmon 33 oy ZFT CUSTMNT101D Screen Design bet e o EL Customer Detail Maintenance Jaaa Baa agaa Customers Customer Detail Maintenance Databorough Lt
166. INT FAXNOQ CUSF Fax No lt gt blank CUSFMAINT DSOCDE CUSF Distributor lt gt blank CUSFMAINT DSDCDE CUSF Exact match not found for Distributor on Distributors CUSFMAINT STATUS CUSF Sts lt gt blank CUSFMAINT USERN CUSF Contact blank CUSFMAINT SALUT CUSF Salutation lt gt blank and lt gt Mr and lt gt Mrs and CUSFMAINT CUSNO CUSF Cus No 0 The Business Rules view also displays columns for Error Message Business Rule Annotation Rule Status and Rule Status Comment The columns can be seen in the image underneath X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 240 H ma og H pr E E k TESS Message ID QEMOO012 You must enter the customer na il Business Rules Analysis Business Rules window showing the new columns Business Rules for CUSFMAINT Number of Lines 10 QEMO014 The telephone no is invalid QEMO015 The fax no ts invalid OEMO018 The distributor ts invalid QEMO019 The status ts invalid QEMO0Z0 You must enter a contact name QOEMO021 The title ts invalid Rule Status No Status No Status No Status No Status No Status No Status No Status No Status No Status No Status Rule Status Comment tefta H 4 0 Annotation The Configure Columns feature in the Business Rules view helps you manage the columns displayed You can reduce the width or hide any column by setting width to O Business Rules window
167. IO1D ccccsesscceesssseeneeceeraneesanerseenssceneneseeensseneraneneasees mo om on ie fo Po bi P o 26 x 11 69 in X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 392 System Document for XAN4CDXA pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help x OFF ct GS lja ad Appendix C Component Documenter Header amp Parameter information CUSTMNT107D Customer Detail Maintenance 1 Header Information for ZZF T01 CUSTMNT101D Customer Detail Maintenance Function Type R Record Re Engineered Function No attached Grid Co Attached Trailer 7FTO1 Entry Mode NO Grid with Ada Noo OO 2 Parameter List for ZZFT01 CUSTMNT101D DSDCDE _ Distributor gt G26 x 11 69 in 3 Data Content Diagram System Document for XAN4CDXA pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help OrRrAsAwR e LEa 3 Data Content Diagram for ZZFTO1 CUSTMNT101D J DISTS Distributors Fields DNANE DSDCDE Distributor gt CUSTS Purchases Jons No Join Rule Exists Fields a XWECCD Customer No WorkFietd Fields E RECNAM a SFIELD 6 26 11 69 in 4 Ak X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 393 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Appendix C Component Documenter Screen Action Diagram System Do
168. Keys Only Mouse Only Mouse and Keys Minimum Similarity 100 be Note Minimum similarity change will only effect new Screen Test projects 100 similarity will match every pixel From source recorded image to target image screen Restore Defaults Apply You can modify the following X Data Test Preferences Screen Testing o Default Recording Mode Radio button Select one of the following methods X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Keys Only Only entries by computer s keyboard are recorded Mouse Only Only entries through computer s mouse are recorded Mouse and Keys Both keyboard and mouse entries are recorded This is the default option 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 53 X REDO PREFERENCES Using X Analysis Client Expand the X Analysis node to view modify the X Redo Preferences type filter text General Ant Data Management Help Install Update Java JavaScript JPA Plug in Development Remote Systems Run Debug Server Service Policies Tasks Team Usage Data Collector Validation Web Web Services A Analysis Advanced Folders General X Data Test x Redo ADoclet AML X Redo Preferences General X Redo Preferences Web Server Folder C Program Files Tomcat Web URL 127 0 0 1 Grid Display Show 5250 Grid Labels Number of rows to display in the Grid DEFAULT Site Date Format Date format to use on the Web page Numeric Precision Higher Numeric Precis
169. LE Program Variables structure aka Program Data Object TSAJE1RD FILE Display file used by the reengineered program TSAJELRG FILE Grid Data Object To display the Screen Components list for a specific program opt for the context menu on that program and select the Screen Components option X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 88 Application Library Development Screens A Development Screen is a set of data that describes how information is to be displayed on a screen and governs the user interactivity with that information For instance validation information may be held for a field or details of a program to be called when the record is updated In short a Development Screen is a set of metadata relating to a screen display Select Screen Components and double click on it to display the Work with Screen Components dialog Then check the Development Screens box which expands the dialog for the Development Screens option as shown below Work with Development Screens dialog Work with Screen Components Ed Application Area Mame MONE ka Description All Members Selected File Mame Function Type Show Screen Components also Cancel Click OK to generate a list of all Development Screens for the cross reference library Development Screens List FA Development Screens it d E E E hme ale O Development Screens List of NOME ALLY ALL Function Fhysical File AAASTATUS ASTATUS Status
170. LU_GETDSDEFN AWLU_GETEATPROCNAME AWLU_GETEATRANAMES AWUSRV AWUSRV AWUSRV AWUSRV AWUSRV AWUSRV AWUSRV AWUSRV AWUSRV AWUSRV RPGLE RPGLE RPGLE RPGLE RPGLE RPGLE RPGLE RPGLE RPGLE RPGLE AAMODS AAMODS AAMODS AAMODS AAMODS AAMODS AAMODS AAMODS AAMODS AAMODS AWLU_GETFMTUPDATEREFS AWUSRV RPGLE AAMODS Right click on a row to select the Zoom Source or the Variable Where Used options External Procedures The third option under the Procedures node is External Procedures This option registers high level language program like RPG Java C etc as a stored procedure However the procedure may or may not use SQL Select the External Procedures option to invoke the following window X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 97 Application Library Window External Procedures List a External Procedures Lis External Procedures List Total Objects 27 Specific Name Specific Schema Routine Name External Name External Language X BWUDTA XAOBJ X BWUDTA XAOBJ X BWUDTA cL XABGWUI XAOB XABGWUI XAOBJ XABGWUI CL XACRTMLK XADSPOJU XADTARDR XADTARDR2 XAFFNDET XARTVOBJWU XBLDSCD XCEMBLFWU XCHKLIB XCRTLIB XEXCCMD XEXIT XFNSPCMGRT XFNSPCMGRI XUVAINIT XLICDTLOQRY XLICD00001 XLICVERPGM XREFINUSE XSCNRPTLYT XSECCHK XSRVAPP XWRKAS4JB1 XAOBJ XAOB XAOBJ XAOBJ XAOB XACRTMLK XADSPOJU XADTARDR XADTARDR2 XAFFNDET XARTVOBJV XBLDSCD XCEMBLFW XCHKLIB XCRTLIB XEXC
171. Lib The process involves identifying certain key components of the program including message statements return codes and validation flags Then the significant update files are identified After the process is over the program is scanned for statements which represent any of the above logic types These statements are written to the file XEXTRGLINS the Trigger Lines file which is then used to produce the required output The Derive Business Rules option for the entire application or a single application area calls the XGENBRULES command Derive Business Rules dialog on an Application Area Derive Business Rules Eg This command will identify the business rules logic in each program in the application over which the specified cross reference database has been built A source member containing the business rules logic and narrative describing each rule is generated for each program This is achieved by invoking the XBIZRULES X Model command for each program in the application X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 238 Business Rules Analysis VIEW BUSINESS RULES X Analysis can display Business Rules automatically using the generated index X Analysis allows the display of the source member for any program in the application When the source member is displayed click the Source Options drop down menu and select Business Rules to see the business rules logic highlighted within the member You can im
172. List for Files a Files ci Object List Files Object List of ALLUSR ALL FILE PF ALL YALL Total Objects 50 w a A PF eAN4CDEM PF YAN4CDEM PF YAN4CDEM PF YAN4CDEM PF YAN4CDEM PF eAN4CDEM PF YAN4CDEM PF YAN4CDEM PF YAN4CDEM PF YAN4CDEM PF eAN4CDEM lt ASIMPLTEST ASTATUS CNTACS CONDET CONDETH Y CONHDR CPYBRSR CUSF CUSGRP CUSTS DELIY A DISTS FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE Attribute Description Status file Contacts Contract Detail Contract Detail new 7 Contract Header Cobol copybooks Sites Customer Groups Purchases Delivery Areas Distributors status Changed 05 06 12 05 06 12 OS 06 12 1S 08 12 05 06 12 25 09 12 05 06 12 zzl06liz Os 0612 04 10 12 05 06 12 pua The description of the columns that appear in the Files List are as follows Library displays the name of the Object Library Name displays the name of the file Type displays the type of object in this case it is FILE 30 03 11 0109 08 0109 08 0109 06 D20211 0109 08 10 05 11 0109 08 0109 08 010908 0109 08 O109 08 gt a X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Attribute displays the object attribute like PF LF DSPF or PRTF Description displays textual description long name of the file Status displays the file status which will be either A B C or D The details are provided in the Component Status section on the following
173. M CLXANSCDEM XANSCDEM RE XANSCDEM RE XANSCDEM RE XANSCDEM RE XANSCDEM REXANSCDEM CLXAN4CDEM CLXANSCDEM CLXAN4CDEM Name Type IRA Attribute on Zoom Source R Zoom in Lpex a Data Flow Diagram Object Where Used Variable Where Used Hierarchical Structure Chart Structure Chart Diagram Inverted Structure Chart Program Structure Chart Screen Report Design Description Order Entry System Back out account Build Customer Letter Print Customer Letter for read source file Contacts Maintenance Revert Back Customer Info Update Customer Info Version 1 Update Customer Info Version 2 Contract Entry List Correspondence Build Security Fax Add Code to Batch CLXANSCDEM Agent Fax Prompt REXANACDEM amp ScTeer Report Source Customer Copy RE XANSCDEM Consolidated Rules Customer Site Maintenance CLXANSCDEM PaaS Customer Site Maintainance 07 03 14 RE XAN4CDEM een Customer Site Maintenance 14 02 14 RE XAN4CDEM Customer Site Selection 14 02 14 RE XANSCDEM More Info Customer group Selection 14 02 14 CLXAN4CDEM Change History Initialise Customer Record 14 02 14 CLXAN4SCDEM Source Compare Customer Letter Stage 1 14 02 14 REXANSCDEM Update Letter Sequence 14 02 14 CLXANSCDEM Screen Components Customer Letter Stage 2 14 02 14 CLXAN4CDEM Screen Flow Diagram Customer Library Settings 14 02 14 CLXAN4CDEM Screen Activity Diagram Customer Menu 14 02 14 The following window shows t
174. M QDDSSRC CUSF Sites AAN4CDEM AAN4SCOEM QDDSSRC CUSGRP Customer Groups XAN4CDEM XANA4CDEM QDDSSRC CUSTS Purchases XANSCDEM XANA4CDEM QDDSSRC PROJECT Projects SAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM QDDSSRC PROTRK Project Tracking XANSCDEM XAN4ACDEM QDDSSRC TRNHST Transaction History RAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM QDDSSRC 4 Unspecified Category Count2 ASTATUSL1 Non keyed LF vl AAN4CDEM XANAC ODDSSRC ORDBALDTL AANSCDEM XANA4CDEM QDDSSRC lt Derived Constraints Derived constraints are optionally generated during DDL modernization These constraints are derived from the Data model The validity of the constraints is determined during problem analysis the entries which are invalid are reported as usual in the DDL Modernization gt Problem Analysis node 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 134 HSA Application Area Run DDL conversion When you double click on the Run DDL conversion option the following dialog shows up Run DDL conversion dialog Cross Reference Library XANACDXAT Name of new SCHEMA RMTDDL Application Area CUSTS Compilation Type INLINE OK Cancel Choose the Compilation Type from the drop down menu The default option is INLINE Click OK DDL conversion error log The DDL conversion error log lists the record of errors which occurred during the DDL conversion process File Conversion Report The File Conversion Report lists all the objects for conversion under the given categories To be rebuilt as SQL Index To be rebuil
175. Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 265 Audit Options Print button on the Screen Metrics Toolbar Screen Metrics 23 H Screen Metrics for XAN4CDKA i a Complexity Level Units Files Database Fields Work Fields Outgoing Calls E Grand Total 88 isi 66d 324 ui Export Screen Metrics Select the PDF or MS Excel option as required under the Export Options icon Export Options on the Screen Metrics Toolbar Screen Metrics E3 E Screen Metrics for YAN4CDXA r t fal x E Grand Total ga fuse Fig Export to MS Excel High Complexity Level Units Files Database Fields Work Fields es Export to POF m FILE METRICS The File Metrics option displays various metrics on all the files The file metrics information is displayed for the complete application and for all the application areas The File Metrics displays information under the following headings 1 Units Displays total number of Files Fields Displays the total number of fields available in the file Access Paths The total number of access paths for the file Creating Programs The number of programs creating records in this file Reading Programs The number of programs reading this file Updating Programs The number of programs updating records in this file Deleting Programs The number of programs deleting records from this file Total References The total numbers of programs referencing this file in effect total of 3 6 The fol
176. Model Diagram Normal In PDF as Image Detailed In visio Show Al Application Grea Diagram Annotation d Application Area Annotation Coverage of System Document Detailed Object Documentation in Alphabetical Order Detailed Object Documentation in Call Sequence Order No Detailed Object Documentation The Overview Structure Chart and the Data Model Diagram options mentioned in this dialog are only for the selected application area The wizard dialog displayed above has a section called Coverage of System Document This section has three options depending upon these three options the System Document differs in its approach Let us see how these three options work Detailed Object Documentation in Alphabetical Order If the Detailed Object Documentation in Alphabetical Order option is selected then the object documentation proceeds in ascending alphabetical order of the name of objects in the application area The following dialog is displayed in the wizard X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 352 Document Manager Single System Document Exclude Objects X Analysis System Documentation Exclude Objects Exclude objects From documentation optional Mame Type Description 3 Delete Objects SELNG FCT AAPL Last Skeleton Letter CNTCMAINTD FILE Contacts Maintenance CONDET FILE Contract Detail Delete by Type CONDETLI1 FILE by Sk
177. NDETL1 CONDETL2 CONDETL3 CUSTSL1 CUSTSL2 CUSTSL4 CUSTSL5 DISTS LISTS ORGS PTYPES SLMEN Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr Logical file cr XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM XAN4CDEM QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC QDDSSRC 2FD29BC8C74 2FD29BC8C74 432B98FF0135C 432B98FF0135C 432B98FF0135C 432B98FF0135C 432B98FF0135C 432B98FF0135C 49C1211A71718 49C1211A71718 49C1211A71718 49C1211A71718 49C1211A71718 49C1211A71718 49C1211A71718 49C1211A71718 2B06DADC49 2BO6DADC49E 2CE87CAEEC 2CE87CAEECC 33E7A236EC196 33E7A236EC196 304D50AA4C 304D50AA4C1 1DD9402FDD 1DD9402FDDA oo oo o oo oo eo Oo Oo amp b To be rebuilt directly as SQL Tables Count 14 4 Unspecified Category Count 1 ASTATUSL1 View created RMTDDL XAN4CDEM QDDSSRC QDDLSRC 2FD29BC8C74 2FD29BC8C74 Tables Double click the Tables sub node to invoke the following window It presents the names of all the Tables for RMTDDL Each table is also assigned a system tabl
178. NO01 00002 XWORDN CONHDR Contract not found on Contract_Header CONO01 00003 XWECCD CONHDR Debtor not found on Purchases CONO01 00004 XWORDN CONHDR Contract found on Contract_Header CONO001 00005 XWABCD CONDET Product lt gt 0 CONO01 00006 XWABCD CONDET Product found on Contract_Detail CONOO1 00007 AWABCD CONDET Product lt gt 0 CONO01 00008 AWABCD CONDET Product not found on Product_Master CONO001 00009 AWABCD CONDET Product not found on Stock Balances CONO01 00010 AWAACS CONDET Store not found on Store_Master CONO01 00011 XWABCD CONDET Product not found on Transaction_Histo Consolidated Rules Select the Consolidated Rules option to display the file field based business logic for the selected source member The Consolidated Rules for CONO01 are displayed below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 152 ths Quick Reference to an Object Consolidated Rules e Object List Ee cONod E3 E Consolidated Rules T for CONOO1 E E Pe ARpA aA Frogran coNool mm R0001 rooo02 ROOOS ROOO4 ROOOS ROOOG Contract Contract not Lound on Contract Header Debtor not Cound on Purchases Contract found on Contract Header Product found on Contract Detail Product lt gt U Business Process Logic Select the Business Process Logic option to access the process logic for the selected source member The Business Process Logic for CONO01 is shown below Business Process Logi
179. NT opoz CNAME USF Annotate CUSFMAINT OO00S TELMO CUSF Rule Status Manager COSI O Wo Status Change Rule Status to CUSI CUSI cus Complete Variable Where Used CUS 4 Done CUS Awaiting Feature CUS Applicable Mot able to be generated Not assigned Matched Rules Convert to Exportable feces Show Hierarchy Mok applicable Covered by Metadata Mot verified Mot Applicable For Endeavor In Process gA Waiting Production Unit Tested Generated By X Analysis Mot Verified View the history of how the rule status has changed through the Rule Status Manager option available on right click on a rule The following image shows the Rule Status Manager dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 449 Ths Appendix L Setting Status for Business Rules Rule Status Manager dialog Rule Status Manager x Rule Status Comment BR added programmatically for rule 4 Rule Status History Previous 5t Currentst User Date Time A C DVERMA 2014 02 06 15 14 Change Rule Status Complete gA Done O Awaiting feature F Assigned G Not applicable L Covered by Metadata Not Verified Ml _ gt 4 The Business Rules view displays new columns for Error Message Business Rule Annotation Rule Status and Rule Status Comment The columns are shown in the image underneath Business Rules window showing the new columns 7 HA Business Rules E3 mT ht Te Aa M
180. PACT PRTACCT DDAACTT ATCO DDAACTT ATDS AmA a ATT Pin i aT aa Ilil 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Show All Show Changed Only Show Matched Only Show Removed Only Old Rul Promotional Rate Code fr Account found on OD Pror ACCT _TYPE_CODE not foL ACCT_TYPE_DESC lt gt bla g A eee mime Aeee es hie Page 453 Appendix L Setting Status for Business Rules BUSINESS RULES STATUS CATEGORY The Business Rules Status Category option is present on the context menu of the X Ref library as is seen in the image below Business Rules Status Category option X Ref context menu New Application Area Add Alternate Data Library List Reset Library List Application Library List Affinity Comparison Refresh Options Derre Business Rules Import Options Export Options Document Entire Application Document Changed Objects Reengineer Programs Generate Programs Generate Web Services Generate Data Application Data Migration Inter Repository Options Audit Options All the pre set categories of Business Rules Status are displayed on clicking this option The following window shows all the categories X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 454 shJs LEGACY Business A i 3 Appendix L Setting Status for Business Rules Business Rules Status Categories Category Description N Not Applicable for Endeavor AFTODA ACR X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Gener
181. PG V3K PG V4 KKKKKK KKKKKKKK End OE report KkKKKKKKK Configure Cross Reference Library Dawabencougqhe lin ce Se a ZA Jena ZS Considering the above setup and example below program references are added once XREFRESH or the initialization process is executed on the X Ref library X Analysis 4 XARWKGFS Enter options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display WHPNAM WHTEXT WHFNAM CL GEN PGM PG V2K CL GEN PGM PG V3K kkxkxkxkx x EXER EK KER End OL care KkKKKKKKK Work with Generic Files Daraborough Lira aes e all Zl kena ZCI WHOBTP WUSAGE P I B I In this example reference to Generic Programs has been deleted and the references from relevant file field listing on the Work with Generic Files screen has been added The key type is specified as ALL in the generic file entry All the program names under the PGM1 field of PGNAME file are considered as dependencies of CL_GEN_PGM Therefore the object dependencies of PG_V5 are removed and the program names existing in PGM1 field of PGNAME file are added as the dependencies of CL_GEN_PGM program As a result the Object Where Used displays the replaced dependencies X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 24 Using X Analysis Client Using X Analysis Client SIGN ON DIALOG Start IBM s Rational products 7 5 and above or Eclipse 3 4 and above Select Window gt Open Perspective gt Other gt X Analysis X Analysis User Manual 11
182. Page 86 Application Library Consolidated Rules for XAN4CDXA Member Message ID Description CUSNO Cus No Cus No 0 WWCCONS 2 247 Cus No found on Contacts WWCCONS 1 160 Cus No not found on Contacts CNTCMAINT 1 44 FAXNO Fax No Fax No lt gt blank CNTCMAINT 5 184 QEMO015 The fax no is invalid SINIT Sales Person Exact match not found for Sales Person on Contacts CNTCMAINT 7 198 OEMO023 Invalid salesman Sales Person lt gt blank CNTCMAINT 6 196 STATUS Sts Sts lt gt blank CNTCMAINT 8 209 OEMO019 The status is invalid w Hi Select any business rule listed under a file and expand the business rules node to check the actual business rules code used as shown below Expand Business Rules node to see the actual code E Consolidated Rules x ml E File Field Rule Rule Member Message ID Desc CNTACS Contacts CNTACS Contacts CUSNO Cus No CUSNO Cus No Cus No 0 Cus No 0 WWCCONS 2 247 Cus No found on Contacts Cus No found on Contacts WWCCONS 1 160 Cus No not found on Contacts Cus No not found on Contacts CNTCMAINT 1 44 ff Retrieve record f f Retrieve record READ rentac cntacskey READ rentac cntacskey IF not Sfound cntacs IF not Sfound cntacs inlr EQ on inlr EQ on RETURN RETURN END END SCREEN COMPONENTS The reengineering process involves several steps that generate various reengineered components for each program There are eight types of reengineered components details of
183. Q il TEAT Cus Wo X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 165 Anda Quick Reference to an Object Level 2 Level 2 adds indirect references Variable Where Used Level 2 View i Variable Where Used 2 im fle Variable Where Used for ALLIEUSNG DBS Se Wien Devel evel B9 ba O CECUSTAD l 2CUSNO F CECUSTSO 0383 ZCUSNO F CLET 0004 DCL CLET 0005 DCL GLET 000g CLET OOO B 19 a2 REFFLD COSMO xAN4CLEM CUSTS 0 19 aPEFFLD CUSNO AAN4CDEM CUSTA VAR CUSNO TYPE DEC LEN 5 0 VAR gCUSNC TYPE CHAR LEN 5 CHGVAR amp CUSNC PE CHGVAR amp CUSNO CORNEC GLET 0010 CALL LETN1 amp CUSNO PREFIX LETAQ CLET OO11 CHGVAR CUSNC amp PREFIX CLET o014 CALL WECUSL 4 iiil aCUSNC PREFIX LETNE Level 3 Level 3 adds further indirection references to the field in level 2 referencing the first field Variable Where Used Level 3 View SA Variable Where Used 22 es A H i a ga variable Where Used for ALL CUSNO linieSieisellieiLetelsLeWela CBCUSTSD H CBCUSTSD i SFIELD H CBCUSTSD i ACUSNO R E CECUSTSD 2CUSNO R T CLET PARM PE 19 a2a2REFFLD COSNO AN4ACDEM COSTS 19 2e2REFFLD CUSNO AN4CDEM COSTS CLET VAR GPE TYPE CHAR LEN S00 CLET i VAR amp CUSNO TYPE DEC LEN S 0 CLET VAR sCUSNC TYPE CHAR LEN S CLET P VAR i prefixi TYFE CHAR LEMN 5 Level 4 Parameters Level 4 further in
184. RULES sersan rentran E A E NEA 231 C omponent DO CUIMGINGC Tj ecncscesieniescsaanes seesnanvanpoesanansinadsaqseuecanesaan seca acteaneneseramensenaans 232 ANOOI ee E tuponccantsamucemicandesmieemcuiaesidcen tbanestectceaucnanes 233 Development Sre EN anerian een een AE E E 234 Business Rules Analysis sesessesessesessesessecesoscessscecescecescecesoecssssecessecesceceseecsessececee 236 PUE SRU ee E E E A 236 Defive Business RULES scot vr acquececeanncnadcaeensenaseaceroenesanduraoantasounteaescaseeieasnessataenoeseecunte 237 VIEW BUSINESS NOS srren n E E E N 239 Inter Repository Options ssessessecceesoescecceccoesceccescecsoeccesceeceeccescesceecoescecseeceesceese 243 Generate Difference ANallySis ccccsseccsssssccsssscccssecctcneseccusseceessccneeseseusseseusecnens 244 Display Difference ANN SIS wiscidesseneivit arevavducieverdasanndsvevessieieasevanducndeetdaiaewsdveseceivieeneves 244 Customized PrO rroen E E A EN 246 Genecrate PIF PV SS ecne r Na E EAEE 246 PE ANION Y nene E E A N T 247 Manage Linked FREDO SILO CS cnrroreidon rnar n EAT EE A 250 PUC OD UON ene E E E 254 Menco TAIN SIS a EEE NEEE 255 Sareen SNCS saapasnacte pct caive tate onan en eE OE a ET 263 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 5 Contents PEMET S sarees vite conus toes uestsaeance toaseaessteamaws tabs E svoreneiuseamawe tape AR 266 BUSINESS Process LOGIC IVICLINCS ii cxscnasanvccnatadenewannsacendendssuicanacesentbatessua
185. Refers to Foreign key to PID relationship When you right click on an object besides the Variable Where Used functionality you get two more options on the context menu Joint Where Used and Where Extracted These options are shown in the screenshot below Context menu showing Joint Where Used and Where Extracted options Relationships 3 HO Relationships Br lie TYE OWNING PF DEP PF DEP LF DEP SE ome Variable Where Used CONHDR CUSE Joint Where Used CUSF Where Extracted CUSF SECF CUSF SECF The details for these features are as follows Joint Where Used Displays the list of programs with the Join Usage of the Owning file and Dependent file Where Extracted Displays the origin program and relationship details The Origin program is the program of X Analysis product where the relationship was extracted in the Data Model build process The information of Where Extracted is further used in the data modelling process Relationship Details The last submenu option is Relationship Details Select this option to view the detailed composition of every File to File relationship This file is the counterpart to XRELS and every File to File relationship is recorded in XRELS XSHKEYS describes each of the Field to Field relationships that make up these XRELS relationships X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 303 ths Data Management Features Data Dictionary Relations
186. SA00001 CONDET CONDET AWORDN AWAB ORDNNOODOBABCDAODO20 CONDET CONDETL1 AWAACS AWOR AATSA0001T TORDNNOO00 CONDET CONDETL2 AWABCD X _ ABCDAOD02Z04ACSA0001 CONDET CONDETL3S AWABCD XWOR ABCDA000200RDNNO0006 CONDETNW CONDETNW AWORDN X m ORDNNO000GABCDA00020 CONHDR CONHDR AWORDN ORDNNOOOOG lt Up to 10 key fields can be associated with each field Fields The third submenu option is Fields Select this option to view information for every field in each file in the application database All the field information extracted during the Data Modelling process is contained in the Data Dictionary file Each field from each Physical File in XPIDS is listed The metadata extracted can be interpreted and utilized by applications to read write and format the fields correctly On selecting the Fields option the file fields details are displayed as shown in the image below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 301 Fa e Object List FIELD NAME DESC ITEM SPART FU0OM WEIGHT AACG AACM AACS AADO AAIT AAPO AAPS lt Data Management Features Data Dictionary File Fields PF NAME ITEMS ITEMS ITEMS ITEMS ITEMS AFRF XFRF XFRF XFRF XFRF XFRF XFRF Relationships RCDSEQ TYPE 2 0 D 1 0 K 3 0 K 3 0 4 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 2 0 6 0 70 FLD HEADING FLD CLASS Description Item Part Weight Unit of Measure Weight JCPMST
187. STEM The name of the command for which related data areas have to be listed X Analysis Work with Data Areas Dakavorough Lia XARWKDARAS llgZ sea E LOTOS 27 1 Enter options press Enter 5 Work with values Data Area XDDSTOSQL Source Flag XDDSTOSQL Run Parameters XDDSTOSQL Replacement Characters From XDDSTOSQL Replacement Characters To XDDSTOSOL SQL Table Name Suffix The above screen displays the command screen for XWRKDTAARA Data areas related to the XDDSTOSQL command are listed here The user can use Option 5 against any of them to view modify their value GENERATE DATABASE SERVICE PROGRAMS The Generate Database Service Programs option calls the IBM i command XWRTDBSP and submits the job in batch This option is available on cross reference library application areas and physical files PF Opt for the context menu on the tutorial application and select the Generate Database Service Programs option from the Export Options submenu The following dialog invokes when the user selects the option Generate Database Service Programs dialog Generate Database Service Progr Eg ZUTEMPLATE Template Source Member Click OK to execute the batch command Opt for the context menu on the application area ORDERS and select the Generate Database Service Programs option from the Export Options submenu The following dialog invokes when the user selects this option X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Leg
188. Seg ho OSPF Format Physical File Title A CECONDETNW W Screen Components 2 CBCONDETNVWO1G CBCONDETNVWO2D CBCONDE THOS CBCONDETHVWO1D CBCONDE THVWO4D CBCONDETNWO E CBCUSFMAT CBCUSFMNTOID CBCUSTMNT2 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 G G F C F C T 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc f25F01 fZFTOL dF TU ffCTOl ff2CNF1 ffCTOL ffFTO1 STEM AS STEM AS CONHDR CONHDR STEMAS Work with Order Detail Work with Order Details Work with Order Details Work with Order Detail Work with Order Details Work with Order Detail Customer Site Maintenal Page 73 GENERATE PROGRAMS Application Library Select the Generate Programs option to generate a new Java application using the recovered screens and business logic Generate Programs dialog Project Name Project Components DAQ Entities Ul JSF beans CSS Business Logic The option generates a new Java application by default The generated application follows MVC Model View Controller Architecture and uses Open frameworks viz Spring Hibernate JSF 2 0 Facelets JQuery etc which drive it The generated project has its neatly organized classes under various packages See the screenshot below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Hg E H Dmi mm e ia te ta t fe a a g E H Referenced Libraries E conf H E META INF WebContent l i build properties ff build xml Generated Java P
189. Sequence Order If the Detailed Object Documentation in Call Sequence Order option is selected then the object documentation is based on the Overview Structure Chart for the selected application area For this option the Overview Structure Chart is always generated X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 356 Document Manager Detailed Object Documentation in a Call Sequence Order X Analysis E 5 EJ System Documentation Application Area Options OST will always be prepared For Call Sequence Order Diagram Options Normal Expanded Detailed Data Model Diagram w g Normal In PDF as Image Detailed In visio Show All _ Application Area Diagram Annotation d Application Area Annotation Coverage of System Document Detailed Object Documentation in Alphabetical Order Detailed Object Documentation in Call Sequence Order No Detailed Object Documentation Cancel Click Next to proceed further X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 357 JHJ LEGACY Document Manager Detailed Object Documentation Document Features oystem Documentation Specify Contents Select features to be included in the System Document Object List Data Model Diagram Normal In Word as Image C Detailed In Visio Annotation LF Access Path details _ Detailed File Field Details _ Field Annotation Object Where Used Data Flow Diagr
190. This block of code is then converted into pseudo code that describes the execution of the logic Literals and constants are liberally used in the narration wherever possible giving accurate descriptions of the logic These logics are termed as Business Rules The Business Rules option displays a list of all the business rules and their narrations for the selected cross reference library The Business Rules node is available under the cross reference node Business Rules for XAN4CDXA Eid Business Rules 3 GETS A O R O Business Rules for ALL Number of Lines 412 Source Member Rule Number Field File Rule CB906R 00 SSRLNE SECF Srl_no blank CB90BR OO SSRLNB SECF Sr_no blank CB9DBR 10003 SSRLNB SECF Srl_no blank CNTCMAINT CUSNO CNTA Cus No not found on Contacts CNTCMAINT IANAME MAME Name found on Names Index CNTCMAINT 00003 USERNM CNTA Contact blank CNTCMAINT TELNO CNTA Phone lt gt blank CNTCMAINT 0000 FAXNO CNTA Fax_No lt gt blank CNTCMAINT 000 SINIT CNTA Sales Person lt gt blank CNTCMAINT SINIT CNTA Exact match not found for Sales Person on Contacts lt CONSOLIDATED RULES X Analysis provides an important feature related to file fields and business rules Through this feature you can view all the business rules related to a file field Double click the Consolidated Rules node to invoke the following window X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc
191. This prints the function header information from the screen design It also prints the parameters and windows information for the selected screen component Data Content This prints the data content diagram for the selected screen component X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 389 Appendix C Component Documenter Screen Actions This prints the screen action diagram for the selected screen component Screen Design Re engineered Screen This prints the screen design re engineered screen for the selected screen component It has got two sub options Normal and Detailed The default option is Normal When the Detailed option is selected then the Field Details for the associated screen formats are also printed Residual Logic This prints the business process logic for the re engineered screen Business Rules This prints the business rules for the selected screen After making the appropriate selections click Next which displays the following screen Component Documentation Wizard Screen Ill X Analysis System Documentation Specify Sequence what sequence would vou like to have For the System Document Screen Components Header Information Data Content Screen Actions Screen Design Residual Logic Business Rules Summary Click Next which displays the following screen X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Cance
192. Type Contract ky Stk Unit of Measure Price Ly La P P He H amp B On selecting the exclusion option Omit from Result comparison the window gets updated and starts displaying O against the omitted field as displayed below Omitted Field Test Result Field Exclusion fs i Did A File Field Field Type Length Description Ommitted Aw OROM A ED ETIT AACS aw TOTA Contract Product Ref No a wWwRTCD Trn Hst Trn Type AW ASOT contract Oty HW AZC Stk Unit of Measure avy PRI Price In order to clear field omission select the omitted field and select the Clear Criteria option from the context menu X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 121 Anda Application Area Clear Field Omission option F Field Exclusion 3 H Test Result Field Exclusion fs fa File Field Field Type Length Description Ommitted aw ORD Contract ay GBCD Product HWAACS Store OOOO O oO OOOO O O Mo Aw TOTA f awRICD Tra Hst Trn Type AWAIT contract Cty KATTA W Stk Unit of Measure AW PRIC Price COMHDR CUSTS STRBAL STEMAS STOMAS Test Result Spool File Exclusion There are some fields that may pollute the test results during the test data comparison process The Test Result Spool File Exclusion option helps you to exclude such polluted fields On selecting this option you will invoke a new window for Spool File Exclusion The following screenshot displays the Spool
193. VEN GENTAB ITEMS LISTS NAMESIL ORDSTS ORGS PFIWNG PF2WNO PFS WNO PFAWNO PFSWNO PRODFT PROJEC PROORD PROTRE PTYPES Object List of ALLUSR ALL FILE PF ALL ALL Total Objects 61 Type Attribute Zoom Source Data Flow Diagram Object Where Used Variable Where Used Data Model Diagram File Field Details LFs Access Paths Access Path Diagram Consolidated Rules Programs to Consolidate Annotate Mark for Documenter Exclude Constraints More Info Change History Source Compare Application Area Options Modernization Options UML Options Added DB Audit record Object List Add to Database Audit option Description ract Detail new CBL Ver with ract Header Jl copybooks omer Groups nases ery Areas butors ric Table File Master File a es Index status description isations ith No Keys ith No Keys ith No Keys With No Keys With No Keys ct Default Steps ed Orders Tracking Audit Options 14 02 14 02 07 15 14 02 14 02 07 15 14 02 14 02 0715 14 02 14 14 02 14 14 02 14 23 02 15 14 02 14 15 07 14 14 02 14 14 02 14 14 02 14 14 02 14 04 08 15 04 08 15 04 08 15 04 08 15 04 08 15 14 02 14 14 02 14 14 02 14 14 02 14 14 02 14 After you select the file the following window will appear confirming the addition of the file X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Hereafter you have to process the XSETUPLOG command f
194. WCUSTS TESTAREA My Test Application Area2 5 F EQ CUSTS TESTAREA My Test Application Area 2 P EQ CUSTMNT1 5 P EQ CUSTMNT1 TESTAREAS My Test Application Area 3 Right click on the required row to delete the entries save the changes by clicking the Save icon marked in the above image EXPORT OPTIONS This submenu has the following options Export as DDL Export as Web Query Metadata X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 68 Application Library Export as Web Query Application Export Business Rules as XML Convert DDS to SQL Generate Database Service Programs Export CRUD Spreadsheet available only for application areas Export as DDL The Export as DDL option exports Data Model information as Data Definition Language to the application folder This information may be used by any database management system e g Oracle or SQL server to create a similar data model For details refer to the Export as DDL from X Analysis section Export as Web Query Metadata The Web Query Metadata files are generated using the XWBQMET command These files can be used in IBM s DB2 Web Query Tool Export as Web Query Application The Web Query Report files are generated using the XWBQRPT command These files can be used in IBM s DB2 Web Query Tool Export Business Rules as XML The Export Business Rules as XML option generates an XML file which has details of all the business rules of
195. WviCONHDROZD Z7FTO1 3 a SWECCD WorkField SC Display WWCONHDROZD Z2FTO1 eg SWECCD WorkField Lines CLASS DIAGRAM Select the Class Diagram option to generate the UML class diagram Right click for the context menu on a Screen Component and select the Class Diagram option Class Diagram option 5 Screen Components i i B a ae ii oF E Ek P Th Ed iB A 4 pereen Compenents for Appkcaton LEvary SACDXA A Program Function Type Seq Mo OSPF Format Physical File Title CUSTMAT1 US TMNTIOID a Screen Source Code CUSTMNT 102D ZZFTO2 CUSTMNT1_0 sig Function Editor CUSTMINT1_001D ZzFTOL gyn CUSTMNT1_002D ZzFTO2 Preview Designer CUSTMMNT1 1 F Page Designer CUSTMNT1_ 1010 z7FTo1 SE Data Content CUSTMNT1_102D P7FTO2 B Screen Actions is CUSTMNT1_2 Class Diagram CUSTMNT1_ 2010 77F TOI CUSTMNT1 2020 Z7FTU2 Business Rules CUSTMNTIR Component Documenter CUSTMATIROID feFTO1 ral In j E Annotate The Class Diagram option is available for all Screen Components and Development Screens X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 230 m gt TOSH Options on Screen Components Class Diagram CUSTMNT LEM i Tables Ea CUSTMNT 1010 H Distributors attributes 1 description String 7 code String operations classes E BUSINESS RULES Business rules are defined as discrete blocks of program logic gathered during the design recovery process whic
196. X Analysis Professional Module Modeling set for this to work X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 440 m gt TOSH Appendix H Refresh X Analysis Feature Brief Description Generate Business Rules If you take the option to generate the business rules for your application then you can view it through X Analysis Select one of the following e YES Generate Business Rules e NO Do not generate Business Rules You should have the X Rules Module Design Recovery set for this to work If choosing YES Modeling should have been already performed or Build Data Model should be YES Initialize X Resize If you take the option to generate the X Resize Project for your application then you can view it through X Analysis Select one of the following e YES Initialise X Resize Project e NO Do not initialise X Resize Project You should have the X Field Resize Module for this to work Press ENTER to submit a batch job to process the XAXREF command Once the batch job is over you can check the different log files which are spool files generated as a result of this batch job Different sets of spool files are generated based on RPG or 2E environment For RPG environment the following spool files are generated Spool File Message Purpose XREPORT Audit Log for lt X Ref library gt Init Job Initialisation XREPORT Audit Log for lt X Ref library gt D B Model Build If Build Data Model is YES
197. X Analysis Sign on dialog Host Name 192 168 170 10 Username MARK LI Cancel Then click Login to start offline session of X Analysis On successful logon the tutorial application XAN4CDXA can be seen located under the navigation view displayed below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 X Analysis window displaying Offline Application Fie Edit Navigate Search Project Analysis Run Window Help OBER ook M a Metrics Dashboard fH 192 168 170 10 o 127 0 0 1 Sh i Application Area Diagram at Data Model Diagram Overview Structure Chart be All Objects E Programs a Files All Procedures Exportable Functions Source Files Business Rules ee Consolidated Rules Screen Components B Change History Regenerated Programs lah Web Services DA amp Cloak a Resize BE 4 Accounting Main BE DBARK DBARK test at MVCPROCESS Re Engineering BE DE KXXXXXX HH ORDERS Order entry System HH FLAN Planning System BE PRINT Printed documentation fas SALES Sales System E B STOCK Stock System 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 381 ths Appendix B Enabling the SEU Interface Appendix B Enabling the SEU Interface CREATE USER PROFILE XAN4SEU When browsing source code using the IBM i AS400 SEU it is necessary to be logged in as user XAN4SEU The following gives instructions for creating the correct user profile Step 1 Logon as QSECOFR Step 2 Create XAN4SEU user profile Use
198. X Analysis User Manual Software version 11 1 12082015 LEGACY X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Publication Information Publication Information 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Published by Fresche Legacy Inc 995 Wellington Suite 200 Montreal QC Canada H3C 1V3 Tel 514 747 7007 toll free in US and Canada 1 800 361 6782 toll free in Belgium France Germany UK 00 800 361 67 82 0 toll free in Australia 0011 800 361 6782 0 E mail for inquiries info freschelegacy com E mail for support Support freschelegacy com Web www freschelegacy com Title X Analysis User Manual software version 11 1 Publication Date August 2015 Fresche Legacy documentation team Kim Chan Shilpi Khan Chaudhary Vincent Gardner Trademarks X Analysis X Analysis Professional and X 2E Modernize are trademarks or registered trademarks of Fresche Legacy Inc or its subsidiary Databorough Ltd lt iSeries Power Systems Power8 gt are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation Microsoft and Microsoft Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior permission in writing from Fresche Legacy The information in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of publication However Fresche Legacy Inc makes no warranty ex
199. XAN4CDXA zme g Category Report Runt Dake Type Status RPG Metrics Reports COMPLEXP General cross language complexity by program COMPLEXS General cross language complexity by SUBROLITINE Siam a DATACRS Program data complexity Modify Report Definition LOGICP Program logic complexity L R t Definiti LOGICS Program logic complexity by subroutine a aele alt Delete Report Definition B Source Objeckt Reports HARDCODE Programs with hardcoded libraries MISSING Source or objects missing SRCOBIDT Source change date after object created Database Reports DATAERR Database File and member errors and alerts DSGNALRT Database design alerts Specialized Analysis Toolbar The Specialized Analysis toolbar comprises various options which are discussed below Specialized Analysis Toolbar Ta Specialized Analysis 2 5 E X Analysis Metrics for XAN4CDXA smal s amp X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 273 qhJS03 Audit Options Refresh Metrics The Refresh Metrics icon performs the refresh function Refresh Metrics icon on Specialized Analysis Toolbar J Specialized Analysis 3 Analysis Metrics for 44640044 Category iReport y un M Date Type Status E RPG Metrics Reports Refresh Metrics Create New Report The user can create a customised report For this the Create New Report icon is available on the toolbar Create New Report icon on Specialized Analysis Toolbar
200. XLIB data area If the user wants to exclude the programs from a particular library then that library name can be specified in the XS2EPXLIB data area The default value is blank To display edit the Program Object Exclusion Library Data Area use Option 5 against it The following similar window appears Work with Data Areas Program Object Exclusion Library X Analysis Work with Data Area Values Dakzaveorougm Lid XARWKDARAS Tae 2 AO Me Sr 0 eo Ik Enter options press Enter 2 Change value Description Current Value Program Op Ce Ex lucon Lbr X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 399 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command e Use Option 2 to change the value of the Data Area Program Object Exclusion Library Change Value of Data Areas Program Object Exclusion Library X Analysis Change Data Area Value Baur coon ot oa Ibyzicl XARWKDARAS e Oa AWS k Ik Progmanim Ob Cer Exec lone L nrar Option 3 Copy Option 3 copies the X REDO Application Control settings to a new library The following screen displays the Copy window Screen displaying Copy option X Analysis 4 X Redo Applireariom Control Dazaborough Ltd XARREDOAPP 1Ls51211 21 Jan 2013 x ref Library E T e E es ne E X 2E Hospital Demo Company division Index sre files ee Process var amp bound calls Include obsolete source Build data model Data model match value TCPIP address User iD if Sl LIC F1
201. a XSQLCVPMS Data Area XSQLCVPMS X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 328 Data area Dray Type Length Text Offset Q 50 Exporting amp Printing Display Data Area System DBSO 25B XOOFGVEMS XAN4CDXA CHAR IOO XDDSTOSQL Run Parameters Value o Se A E T E A E A A A A ORRIN en ry AeA Sob JOBK Jer lt I SO ede PERIOD YES PREFIX N YES The following values are currently stored The shipped value is shown first Positions 1 to 6 Standards Option AS400 DB2 ISO Positions 7 to 10 Naming Option SQL SYS Positions 11 to 14 Date Format JOB ISO EUR JIS USA MDY DMY YMD JUL Positions 15 to 21 Date Separator JOB SLASH PERIOD COMMA DASH BLANK Positions 11 to 14 Time Format ISO EUR JIS USA HMS Positions 26 to 32 Time Separator JOB COLON PERIOD COMMA Positions 33 to 39 Decimal Point PERIOD COMMA Positions 40 to 43 Generate aliases YES NO When generating aliases you can specify replacement characters XSQLCVRPL The data area containing replacement characters are XSQLCVRFR and XSQLCVRTO Positions 44 to 51 Leading numeric processing for aliases PREFIXN XLATE If PREFIXN is specified then N is added to the beginning of the alias name XLATE will translate the numeric into characters NOT YET IMPLEMENTED Positions 52 to 55 Compress embedded blanks for alias
202. a Tables sessssesessesessecessscessecesoscecessecsssesessecesseese 411 Synon Function Key Option Defaults ccccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeaeens 411 Synon Function Key Option Extra Defaults ccccccccccccceeesseeseeeeesseseeeeeeeeceseeeeees 412 Appendix F XZE Specific Features sessesesessesessecessecessscoessecesesoecesoecessesesoeseeceese 413 Reengineering Of Non 2E Programs ccccccsssecccssscecesceceesececssceseeseeeseecenseecesaeaess 413 PCT GW DAS AGW ie sancaccopacevssancvorcsanseetesen E R 416 PSI SSS RUC eneren EE E EE E E E 417 Miere d EOE IC ereen NENI NET E EEE E EEEE TE 418 Reengineered Action Diagram csccccssscccessececessceceesecceesececauecesauseeeseecessuecessenees 419 INTERNAL ROUTINES ODJECE S croira e EENE ERN 420 Business Process Logic Metrics cscccssccscccsccesccesccasccscccsecesecesccesscusesaeeesecesecesees 421 Generating Java AD DIICATION assieindiacaserscacessasecadanepcadncdesdanasiranasevanauentecnmananedessmeeimeosas 423 Appendix G Troubleshooting scsccccscsceccccscsceccccscsceccecscnceccccecscesescecsceseesecs 426 X Analysis Perspective not visible working after upgrading X Analysis Client 426 X Analysis menu on the main menu bar disappears from X Analysis Perspective 427 Error in running X Analysis installed on Windows Vista for the first time 427 VITA ZAIONT HOON sereen a a 428 System docum
203. acy Inc Page 332 Exporting amp Printing Generate Database Service Programs dialog for application area ORDERS Generate Database Service Progr Eg Template Source Member fUTEMPLATE The XWRTDBSP command will generate Service programs for the specified database files The generated source will be placed in QRPGLESRC of the specified cross reference library The type of service program generated will depend on the template specified The command requires Template Source Member name as input parameters The pre defined templates are located in XAOBJ QRPGLESRC The following are the available pre defined templates ZUTEMPLATE file update delete program template ZSTEMPLATE this will generate an SQL CRUD service program ZXTEMPLATE this will generate an SQL extended READ service program ZRTEMPLATE this will generate an RPGLE CRUD service program Generated Service Program The service program naming depends upon the template selected The following table explains this Template Service Program starting with ZUTEMPLATE ZU ZSTEMPLATE ZS ZRTEMPLATE ZR ZXTEMPLATE ZX On selecting ZSTEMPLATE an SQL CRUD service program is generated whereas on selecting ZRTEMPLATE an RPGLE CRUD service program is generated In both the cases a service program is generated containing sub procedure definitions for READ UPDATE WRITE DELETE record On selecting ZXTEMPLATE an SQL extended READ service progra
204. ailable as context menu on the Class Diagram The following screen displays the Function Logic options on a Class Diagram X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 297 THUS UML Diagramming Function Logic options on Class Diagram for CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1 classdiagram umiclass 2 5 RPG Program 1 attributes i operations classes E J Add Note File Edit Format Filters E Show Properties View Apply Stereotype H CustomerGroupSelection 200m Source fa Data Flow Diagram Object Where Used Variable Where Used Ta J a f m k Structure Chart Diagram Program Structure Chart Screen Flow Diagram Screen Components Screen Report Layout Annotate Mark For Docurnenter More Info Re engineering Options Application Area Options Design Recovery Options a RE GENERATE UML FOR APPLICATION AREA The Re generate UML option on an application area generates Activity Diagram and Class Diagram for all objects belonging to the selected application area Select the MVCPROCESS application area from XAN4CDXA and opt for the context menu on it Then select the Re generate UML option from the UML Options submenu This generates the Activity Diagram and the Class Diagram for all objects along with the Class Diagram for the selected application area X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Pa
205. ailed Annotation Structure Chart Normal C Expanded O Detailed Depth Annotation Screen Flow Diagram Normal Expanded Program Structure Chart Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal C Detailed Business Rules _ Export to MS Excel Summan C Detailed a _ Include Internal Rtn s Source Source level Pseudo Code Flowchart Lewel Business Process Logic Lewel Choose the options which you want to document from the above dialog Click Next which will display the following screen X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 354 Document Manager Single System Document Specify Sequence oystem Documentation Specify Sequence What sequence would you like to have for the System Document Application Area OSC Normal Application Area DMD Normal Object List Data Model Diagram Normal LF Access Path details File Field Details Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Normal with Annotation Structure Chart Normal with Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal Business Rules Summary Source Source Flow Chart Program Structure Chart Business Process Logic Screen Flow Diagram Normal Move Up Move Down Cancel From the above screen the user can re sequence the options selected for System Documentation After re sequencing click Next to reach the final step of documentation wizard Here the user can see all selections that he has made and can als
206. alculation is done at the server using the XAFFINIDX command The Affinity Identification option is shown below Affinity Identification option Application Area Options Update Description ee Bie ee Remove Application Area Application Area Rules es ee Affinity Identification Annotate Affinity Comparison Document Application Area New Application Area Data Management Options Add to Application Area Test Management Options Omit from Application Area Reengineer Programs Generate Programs Generate Web Services Generate Data Application Data Migration Display Difference Analysis Audit Options UML Options Select the option to generate a matrix of programs in the application area against the related program objects falling within or outside the selected application area The affinity is displayed as shown in the following image X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 114 dnd Application Area Affinity Identification window h l Affinity 83 z Affinity Identification for ACCOUNTS Al Programs CB906R CNTCMAINT RINMSGTEXT A GSCD s _ CUSFMAINT CUSFMAINTC CUSFMOLD CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1_0 CUSTMNT1_1 _CUSTMNT1_2 USTMNTIR RTNMSGTEXT TRNCLPCMD TRNHSTCLP WWCONDET WWCONHDR m TTT oO Oo 8 o amp O amp amp Two colors denote the affinity index of the programs with all the objects under the selected application area Red denotes above a
207. alysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 247 Inter Repository Options Customized Libraries dialog Library Name Customized AANACDEMCU W Customized Apply Changes Cancel Now add the XAN4CDEM library as non customized library Type in XAN4CDEM to the Library text box and un check the Customized box Then click Add This adds the XAN4CDEM library as a non customized library Customized Libraries dialog Library Name Customized XAN4CDEMCU W XAN4CDEM x Customized Add Apply Changes Cancel 4 The next step is to select the Generate PTF Analysis option Opt for the context menu on the X Analysis application XAN4CDXP and select the Generate PTF Analysis option from the Inter Repository Options submenu Enter XAN4CDXC in the Base Repository Click OK to submit the batch job X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 248 Ths Inter Repository Options Compare Base to PTF dialog PTF Repository Base Repository bates mes 5 The final step is to display the PTF Analysis data Opt for the context menu on new X Analysis application XAN4CDXP and then select the PTF Analysis option from the Inter Repository Options submenu The following screen should appear PTF Analysis for XAN4CDXP at PTF Analysis 3 E 80a r PTF Change Date Base Change Date PTF Analysis for XAN4CDXP Total Objects 45 Class Name Description APPLY CUSFMAINTD Customer Site
208. am Normal Detailed Annotation Structure Chart Normal _ Expanded Detailed Depth Annotation Screen Flow Diagram Normal C Expanded Program Structure Chart Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal C Detailed Business Rules _ Export to MS Excel Summary C Detailed _ Include Internal Rtn s Source Source level Pseudo Code _ Flowchart Level Business Process Logic Level Choose the options which you want to document from the above dialog Click Next to proceed further X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 358 Document Manager Detailed Object Documentation Specify Sequence oystem Documentation Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Level Settings Application Area OSC Normal Application Area OSC bevel 8 Application Area DMD Normal Structure Chart Level 5 Object List Screen Flow Diagram Level 1 Data Model Diagram Normal LF Access Path details File Field Details Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Normal with Annotation Structure Chart Normal with Annotation Program Structure Chart Screen Flow Diagram Normal Letter 8 5 x 11 Ad Size 8 27 x 11 69 Paper Size Contention Resolution System Documentation creates documents in Application Folder lf the Application Folder ts shared and documents are created opened while the documentation is in progress then this m
209. am The following programs are called to carry out subsidiary functions LETN1 WKCUSL LETNI OTHFIL Letter Prefix Generation Program Letter Prefix Generation A principal function of this program is to read fle CUSFL3 the Sites by Number file Parameters are passed to the program when itis called The program is called by CLET CLETN CPDM CUSLET i PRTFIL Program Customer Letter A principal function of this program is to produce a report on QLETSRC The following programs are called to carry out subsidiary functions CUSLETSQO WKCUSSE WKCUSSEF WKCUSSEF WKCUS8P Parameters are passed to the program when it is called The program is called by CLET CUSLET 1 Rollup Group H0O The Rollup group describes the cumulative component function of the program and its dependents The following types of Rollup groups are available UPD At least one program updates a file PRT Program and dependent programs create a printed report DSP Program and dependent programs use input files and display files X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 189 THUS Program Logic Documentation OTH No cumulative component function can be determined Function Type Function Type describes the function of the object and is based on COOL 2E definitions APPLICATION AREA SCD When you select the Structure Chart Diagram option on an application area the application area node
210. any changes that are made to the cross reference library The command refreshes both the sources and objects that are already initialized it will not look at freshly added sources or objects It is recommended to run this command each night so that the cross reference reflects the most updated state Before using the XREFRESH command ensure the following sequence of the library list XAOBJ E QGPL QTEMP Then type the XREFRESH command on the command line and press ENTER The following screen should appear XREFRESH command screen Refresh Changed Objects XREFRESH Type choices press Enter oea Ilmklopecmas eau sy ye eae Name Refresh Application Areas n AROPE NOT N Refresh Business Rules SYES NO BOrEEOm SEs F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Parameter XRFLIB required X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 437 Appendix H Refresh X Analysis Provide the name of the cross reference library which needs to be refreshed along with other details and click ENTER to submit a batch job This batch job refreshes the cross reference library Once the batch job is over you can check the error log It is a spool file generated as a result of this batch job The following screen displays the spool file listing Spool file listing Work with Job Spooled Files JOD s XREFRESH User US Number 086439 Type options press Enter 1 Send 2 Change 3 H
211. are equivalent to CBL are CBLLE CBLnn CBL36 amp CBL38 CICSCBL CICSSQLCBL SQLCBL SQLCBLLE and undefined attributes if it is a COBOL Source File Information about an object can be displayed by selecting highlighting the object and performing any of these Opt for the context menu to select an option Double click to bring up a designated view depending on the current view Zoom Source toolbar Zoom Source toolbar comprises various options which are discussed below Toolbar available on Source Browser Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Level 5 A E BaB P Ww m SBBGi wA a amp Source Options Source Options is the drop down menu presenting the different source mode views that are available 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 149 ths Quick Reference to an Object Source Options e Object List El CONDO ES g Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Levek5 BA ERP AEE r EE mE A af w Normal Source Code A oe ee A eo Indented Source Code 244 253 fifi Business Rules Overlay Business Rules ree a a ee a a a a s ee Consolidated Rules i Peceive Parameters Business Process Logic ENTRY PLIST 0024 00 PARM HY RTH 1 0026 00 Ce Until Fa si lt iiil gt Normal Source Code The Normal Source Code is the default source view for RPG COBOL programs Indented Source Code Select Indented Source Code from Source Options to display the indented source co
212. ary List option The following dialog is displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 61 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Application Library Application Library List dialog Application Library List x Text Object Libraryis Source Libraryis XAN4COEM SAMIC DEM Library Mame Type The Application Library List dialog displays the list of libraries for the selected cross reference library You can add new libraries to the existing cross reference library list Provide a valid library name in the Library Name text box and choose the appropriate Type for the added library from the drop down it could be an object a source or a model library Then click Add to add the library to the existing library list Re initialize the cross reference library to see the change Affinity Comparison The Affinity Comparison option is allowed on the X Ref library as well as an application area The Affinity Comparison option at the X Ref library displays all the objects belonging to one or more application areas along with the affinity comparison of those objects In the following window the rows display the objects which exist on one or more application area whereas the columns display the names of all the application areas belonging to the X Ref library 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 62 Application Library Affinity Comparison window for XAN4CDXA REFRESH OPTIONS
213. ata a gt Search Settings JavaScript eau oe JPA Plug in Development t Document Generation Remote Systems Diagram Export Run Debug t Synon Data Flow Diagram Server n EEE Database Lanquage Translation No Translation requiret w Service Policies Tasks Google Client ID Team Usage Data Collector Validation Web Web Services A Analysis Advanced Folders Google Client Secret General X Data Test X Redo ADoclet a i a YML Restore Defaults 10 Click Authorize Google Drive from the X Analysis drop down menu X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 466 Appendix M Export to Google Drive X Analysis menu Authorize Google Drive option License Manager New DB 400 Connection New DBZ Connection Mark all for Docurnenter Change Application Folder Open Log Folder Open Application Folder Report an Issue Install SSL CA certificate The Authentication URL using the Client ID and Secret will be automatically generated 11 The Google Authorization window will appear Sign in with your gmail id and password Google Authorization Sign in window https accounts google com o auth2 auth access type onlineBtapproval prompt auto8iclient id 1007793557 Google Sign in with you
214. ate time against the date time recorded in XAACVHDR If there is a difference archiving takes place i e copy X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 282 Audit Options the source write out to XAACVSRC update XAACVHDR and write out to XMETOBJ XMETOBJH if appropriate data is not already present in these files The wrapper command program XACVMBR XRACVMBR first checks whether metrics is active then performs either a if metrics are active writes out a record to XMETCHGS which will cause metrics processing to take place when XRMETCHGS is called which is the case in XREFRESH XA4INIT and XA4SRCMNT or b if metrics are not active calls procedure XACV_ArchiveMember If metrics is active then the source archiving call is made from metrics processing which will call XACV_ArchiveMember This is so that metrics will write the appropriate XMETOBJ XMETOBJH records before source archive processing takes place Purge A purge process command XACVPRG will move source to a user specified library and record the location in XAACVSRC Purge is by cut off date as compared to the archive timestamp in XAACVSRC The purge process always leaves one source version in place even if the timestamp is older than the cut off date GENERATE METRICS ANALYSIS The Generate Metrics Analysis option generates the metrics data for the selected cross reference library The following dialog is displayed when you select the Genera
215. ated By X Analysis Not Yerified Unit Tested Production QA Wating In Process Covered by Metadata Not Venfied Not applicable Assigned Awaiting feature QA Done Complete Applicable Not able to be generated Not assigned The existing categories can be edited or deleted by using the right click context menu ona specific category The following image shows the context menu opted on a category Right click context menu opted on a category Description Not Applicable for Endeavor Generated By A Analysis Not Verified Unit Tested es Covered by Metadata Not Verified Not applicable Assigned On selecting the Edit option the following dialog box is invoked 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 455 Appendix L Setting Status for Business Rules Work With Status Category dialog JHJ LEGACY Category T cane Using the above dialog modify the description of the default category as required On clicking Add Status Category icon on the Status Category toolbar the same dialog as presented above is invoked This time you can assign a letter for the Category besides the Description The icon is indicated in the following image Add Status Category icon a Add Status Category Description a Not Applicable for Endeavor Generated By X Analysis Not Verified Unit Tested Production QA Waiting X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 456 HOSA Appendix M Export to Goo
216. ated Programs Verification Process The Verify Data Relationships option submits the XVERIFY command in batch The XVERIFY command uses the data model constructed by re engineering to automatically verify that all application data satisfies the relationships deduced by the data model The product examines each data record in turn to see if its referential integrity relationships are satisfied Each integrity relationship that is breached is separately reported on in a comprehensive audit print produced by the product This command is used to verify the data model against the data in the database Parameters The parameters passed internally to the XVERIFY command are Re engineering Function Library It is the library which contains the data model and application specific files created by the command XA4MODEL This is the name of the library that was entered as the Function Library on the XA4MODEL command Database Library Name The library name which contains the application database files The command submitted with the value LOADLIB implying each database file should be located in the same library used when XA4MODEL was run X Analysis Application Area The command uses the application area on which this option is invoked to control which files in the data model should be verified Only relationships among files in the specified 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 309 Data Management Features application area will be veri
217. ation Area Diagram AAD details for selected Application Area rea Diagram i ZAN4CDXA E s J am Brash iM Wn Go ie MOREL H TiS Se Ah VES PRS bape eae G K marak De Sina a PA ETAN _ Te aie Set TE AAD Details 2 an Application Area Diagram details For SAM4COWA Application Area Rel Application Area Type Object Count ACCOUNTS COMHOF Referred File ACCOUNTS LONLUPD Referred File ACCOUNTS CUSFMAINT Referred File ACCOUNTS CUSTOMERS Referred File ACCOUNTS DATATEST Referred File ACCOUNTS DEC16 Referred File ACCOUNTS MYCFPROCESS Referred File ACCOUNTS OE Referred File me ote Po ote E 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 143 AREA FLOW DIAGRAM Application Area Diagramming The Area Flow Diagram AFD can be generated for an individual application area Select the Area Flow Diagram option to display programs and files in an application area along with the relations among them The default selection is on the file which has the most referring programs The following screen displays the AFD for the application area MVCPROCESS Area Flow Diagram for MVCPROCESS ia Application Area Diagram ota Area Flow Diagram lt Area Flow Diagram for M CPROCESS Total Objects 30 WKCUSL SLMENSEL STOMASEL Customer Letter Salespersons Store faster Selection Selection WECUSLY Validity Checker for WECUSL C WWCUSTS CUSGRP 3 Work with Customer Groups Contract Header Cust
218. ation is same as the procedure of documenting an application area DOCUMENT CHANGED OBJECTS The Document Changed Objects option documents those objects which have changed since the last initialisation was run on the cross reference library This option is available on the context menu on a cross reference library The Document Changed Objects provides a filter criterion for the System Documentation process The user can select the object s library name type and attribute as per the requirement Filter Documentation List Filter Documentation List Library Mame Attribute VIEWING THE GENERATED DOCUMENT The default Application Folder for a specific application can be opened by selecting the Open Application Folder option from the X Analysis menu from menu bar X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 374 Anos Document Manager Open Application Folder Run Window Help New DB400 Connection New DBZ Connection Mark all for Docurnenter Change Application Folder Open Log Folder Authorize Google Drive Report an Issue Install SSL CA certificate Locate the document in the specified save location and double click on it to open the document Document Folder PCF XAN4CDXA File Edit View Favorites Tools Help e E Search 2i E x 1 aH System Document for System Document For ONC DA pdf CNC Oe log ibe dobe Acrobat Document Text Document Preview of the generated S
219. ava Plug in Control Panel Go to Proxies Panel The Proxies panel looks like this Java Plug in Control Panel amp Javai T Flug inm Control Panel w Use Browser Settings Uncheck the Use Browser Settings checkbox Click Apply and close the Java Plug in Control Panel 2 Start XA again X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 431 ths Appendix G Troubleshooting DATA FLOW DIAGRAMS ARE UNAVAILABLE Sometimes the available version of the Graphical Editor Framework may not be compatible with what is required for the new feature Perform the following steps to begin viewing the Data Flow Diagrams 1 On the WDSc go to Help and select Software Updates This will display the list of the installed plugins as shown below Look for the Graphical Editor Framework and cross check the version number The following image shows the Software Updates and Add ons window List of installed plugins Installed Software Available Software Name Version Update Up EMF Edit UI 2 4 0 v200806091234 uh EMF Mapping 2 4 0 v200806091234 Lit EME Mapping UI 2 4 0 v200806091234 Ope EMF Model Converter 2 4 0 v200806091 234 Li EME Sample Ecore Editor 2 4 0 v2008060091 23 4 iit EMF SDO Service Data Objects Runtime 2 4 0 v200806091234 Ep Graphical Editing Framework Draw2d 3 4 0 7200801 15 33 7w3119163_ Graphical Editing Framework GEF 3 4 0 v200801 15 677 8082 45696H2 744 Opt Java EE Develo per Tool
220. ay lead to contention Please select appropriate options to enable resolution Do not overwrite Overwrite if exists but if in use then Create document by similar name _ Exit Skip document creation From the above screen the user can re sequence the options selected for System Documentation After re sequencing click Next to reach the final step of documentation wizard Here the user can see all selections that he has made and can also define various options related to document formatting like Paper Size Contention Resolution etc X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 359 Document Manager Select Paper Size and Resolution X Analysis l Bx System Documentation Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Level Settings Application Area OSC Normal Soplication Area OSC Level 8 Application Area DMO Mormal Structure Chart Level 8 Object List Source Level 1 Data Model Diagram Normal Source Flow Chart Level 1 LFiAccess Path details File Field Details Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Mormal with Annotation Structure Chart Normal with Annotation SOuUrCE Source Flow Chart Program Structure Chart Paper Size Letter 8 5 x 11 CO A4 Size 8 27 x 11 69 Contention Resolution System Documentation creates documents in Application Fo
221. ay the Properties option as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 222 sig ZEFTOL E3 FTO1 Screen Editor CUSTMNT101D File Field Action E Files CUSTS LISTS SLMEN CUSGRP E Fields EPM f DATE A WBC a Gq Reassign Field XWBSCD Delete AIT a EONE avy JUNO e Object List Properties 7 Options on Screen Components Properties option E PERBERES TEGEMA a 7 Label Line Column Attribute Type Parameters A Purchases Distributors Salespersons Customer Groups Databorough Ltd a Z Output au Qutout Customer Mo ssaa 5 22 Both Customer Name 6 22 Both Statement Account 7 22 Both Related Account z 22 Both Tax Reg g 22 Bath Banks 10 2 Both Bank ajc 0 il 22 Bath ki III gt Click this option to invoke the following dialog You can make the necessary modifications in this Properties dialog CUSTS XWBCCD Properties Basic Data Type a t Advanced Properties Label Field Type u Decimal Position Length Row Column ColorId Label Okhers Row Attribute Currency Symbols Code Field Field Processing Total Field X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Mo Default Default Column ColorId BLE yt Display Length EditCode Date Format Blank Mot Allowed d Yes Mo Field Check Blank Entries d Cancel 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 223 Options on Screen Components PREVIEW DES
222. ays the Reengineered Action Diagram option from the Action Diagram toolbar X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 419 Anda Appendix F X2E Specific Features View Code drop down menu be Programs Ela TSAJELR E3 oO Action Diagram for ER Edit Hospital Edit recordi 1 screend TSAJE1R O g E H a aue a aoi Reengineered Action Diagram Action Diagram Data Section Workftield Generated Java Generated Controller Reengineered 5250 Program Ly The Reengineered Action Diagram is the RPGLE member generated for the Action Diagram This is created in the name lt Program gt A e g DRPZE1RA Reengineered Action Diagram be Programs TSAJEIR gl TSAJEIR i3 E Source List of TSAJEIRA in AAZEDEMO QRPGLESRC Lines 536 Yiew Leve 5s GA Bh fy Ed Seq No Ce seo eee ee ee ne a eee ee 0132 00 P InitPgm 0133 00 PR aS SS aa 0134 00 D pi E 0135 00 include Z2E GRPGLESRC X2EFROTO1 0136 00 free Dia teu aopenfilesi 0138 00 2Crtivar hlanks 0139 00 return 0140 00 fend free 0141 00 P lt im gt INTERNAL ROUTINES OBJECTS The X Analysis Initialise process uses the Model information to identify internal routines This information is maintained in the X2E repository in the XS2ZEANXRF file Opt for INTRTN on the Work with Objects dialog This displays the following screen X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 420 Joa d e O
223. b aig Work with libraries a 45 Work with objects Filter created succes b As Wor GoTo l a Libre k Show tn Table Monitor Refresh Be IBMi Co GB Jobs x Delete en gt GF IFS Files gt ES Spoolec E Qshells Paste gt Wh X Ref Li Move b 9 TD OMS b Ea X Analysis Update hange Save Restore User Actions Rename Copy Add To i Project Make Available Offline Debug Service Entry Debug Prompt Debug As C Properties 23 Property Attribute Name Run Prompt Number of chil Run As Source X Analysis Text Visualize Application Diagram Ep Not conne Properties Alt Enter 4A Remote System Details 3 4 Structure Chart Data Flow Diagram Zoom Source For instance if you select the Data Flow Diagram option then the following dialog will get invoked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 476 thJst LEGACY Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi File Edit Navigate Search Project Test AA API Call Run Window Help RRE GPG Ei e O Q i 4iv ii HA Remote Syste 3 Gs Team h TD OMS Wor 8 lt t 4 New Connection b Ee Local a X Analysis 192 168 21 102 4 B Objects p lag Work with libraries a 2S Work with objects Filter created successfully Expand this again to create al b ie Work with members gt ge Library list E User libraries a Be XAN4CDEM WWCUSTS b E WWCUSTS pgm
224. basanapanavenseanecnwans 267 Specialized AmalyS unuri EENE EE 267 PY OO OMAR VY SIS aseene Ee EN EEEE 275 OFC CE FOC Oieee EE E E O E AAE 277 Database U y oepa AE E E 278 SUMMA REDOT serere i EE EE TE EEE 278 initialize Sorte ArcChIVINgE wssascncsscccvesanacssaescdcaseaeuvsaveeranseuesaeacaunescassansesvanemerneneunaanneaeas 282 Generate Metrics FAI SIS veces gate ecer stones esc anteenteaceaaneeeecaseteuareeraneeev eee eaeeieneceees 283 EGIL Prone AUE ENING eneke a E 283 Edit Problem Cate SOMOS sicssesanxcssicreoanasdwadssanevsindassewasndirneawredwadaset visimantansecniemeaeewteeees 284 Generate Problem AnalySis c csscccsssecccssececessceccesceeeesececeececseseeeseaeceseuecessueceesees 289 View Database 74 hs Ws US UC ee 289 UML Diagramming oncicseserecesesanavevseteacessianesssvweaccnsiicscecrecuesosnianscurdacccunsiacaesuseaeeon 294 TAE Pre OCG E NE S E E 294 Recone rate UME ocsi E AT 294 ACV DI E a n E E E E 294 daS Daa ea i E E E 296 Re generate UML for Application Are ad ccccccssscccsssececsececeeeceseesceseeseceseneceseeeeees 298 Data Management Features esis cdeewsceccscesicccescecesetecseccadecvetssesveceascveisecenssenusecenrecenses 299 VIOW DRaa A E E E 299 DOCU I e E E E E E erie eee 299 Data Dictionary Override S conte ccsessescatsnnnsg scan cianasenal tacsaencoasenndsaacaeaiancreeaitorseanneosseeeaes 304 Verity Data Relations hiDS xteccoanageierotsawacauesanceaes ciecegananedenotsawstauesauce sue tecuaasseedenoese
225. bject List Object List of ALLUSR ALL ALL YALL YALL YALL Total Objects 796 A 8 A Library Mame 41002465 41002495 10024993 41002500 1002503 41002504 1002505 1002526 liS A1002526 1002569 A025 2 1002573 1002576 1002579 lizay 41002605 ALO02609 41002610 1002915 10029319 ALO02920 ALOO2925 lilI Type INTRTM INTRTM INTRTM INTRTM INTRTM TINTRTM INTRTM INTRTM TINTRTM TINTRTM INTRTM INTRTM INTRTM INTRTM INTRTM INTRTM INTRITN INTRITN INTRTN INTRITN INTRITN INTRTN INTRITN INTRTN LNT Attribute Appendix F X2E Specific Features Object List displaying INTRTN objects ZH s Description Notepad Create Configuration Tab Change Configuration Tab Delete Configuration Tab Create Distributed File Change Distributed File Delete Distributed File Determine Recs to Delete Dlt Table amp view Chg Recs Ensure ROG Exists on Tab Retrieve Table For view MULL FUR TIOr Create Config Recs Crk Table amp view Chg Recs Dlt Table amp View Y2O0STFP Convert DT Check DT Convert TM Check TH Create Date List Header Change Date List Header Delete Date List Header Create Date List Detail Change Date List Detail BUSINESS PROCESS LOGIC METRICS Select Audit Options on the context menu over the cross reference library and choose the Business Process Logic Metrics option from it as is shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1
226. ble on the right click menu of a rule Referenced Programs and Referenced Files These options only apply to SELECT lines They allow the user to specify the selection of referenced Objects A value of A specified for either option will initiate an iterative process Each additional dependent Object will have any relevant criteria applied to it to determine any further dependent Objects If a value of A is specified for Referenced Programs then referenced programs will also be included for any files selected by Owning File and Dependent File options A value of U specified for both options will also initiate an iterative process Each additional dependent Object will have any relevant criteria applied to it to determine any further dependent Objects If a value of U specified for both options then any files included only by virtue of the Owning File or Dependent File options will not be included Referenced Programs This option only applies to SELECT lines It allows you to specify the selection of referenced programs Select one of Y Yes includes programs called by the specified program or programs which reference the specified file N No do not include programs called by the specified program U Update programs include programs that update the specified file X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 109 Application Area E S Split include programs that are not allocated t
227. bset Library ORDERSS1 Include Owners YES w Include All Dependents mo M Replicate Triggers Constraints MO t Data Option REPLACE X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 313 Data Management Features The Subset Data dialog prompts for the following options Subset Library Library to hold the subset records Include Owners Select from YES default value NO ALL Include All Dependents Select from NO default value YES ALL Replicate Triggers Constraints Select from NO default value Yes Data Option Select from REPLACE default value ADD After making the choices click OK to execute the batch server command XSUBAREA This produces the subset library as the name specified in the Subset Data dialog The records on the file obey the subset filter criteria specified on the files under the application area This also adds the subset library ORDERSS1 as a node under the application area node in the navigation view Subset Library node eis ORDERS Order entry System ORDERSS1 ss Application 4rea Diagram xt Data Model Diagram ott Area Flow Diagram im Overview Structure Chart be All Objects Programs IE Files Business Rules Em Consolidated Rules ARCHIVE DATA According to its name the Archive Data option helps you in archiving data thus supporting application development and maintenance work Select the option from Data Management Options submenu to invoke the followi
228. c option e Object List Ee congor 23 0 Business Process Logic of CONOO1 in X4N4CDEM QRPGSRC 0 J aag HA Business Froceg MAINLINE s Logic di Receive Parameters FLIST ENTRY il Until Do until Fg Fun Key O35 i Initialise screen CMDDTSA AWADD 1 AWADD 2 Source Outline Select the Source Cil BLANKS BLANKS Outline option to view all subroutines modules and called programs available in the source code The cursor is positioned to a particular line of code in the source browser when any of the listed items is double clicked from the Source Outline view X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 153 Quick Reference to an Object Source Outline Source List of CON 5 conan JGES P w B BBia S amp gt svc L PRLNS Seq No ete oat ee eee A ee ene MEAs E E erg aire Mens oo ALID 00Sa Fetrievej contract Details CREON 0054 C EXSR RVCON pet up Plank subfile for Froduct gOS h EXSR FRELNS 0056 Display Contract Entry screen 0060 MOVEL 1 Show Split Panel The Show Split Panel option helps you compare the Normal Source Code with its Business Process Logic code It promotes better understanding of the Business Process Logic code Show Split Panel option Source List of CONOO1 in X4AN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Level 5 E BAGA P E mh SOO i a e amp seq No K a027 00 Show Split Panel 2 R
229. cate to invoke the Install CA Certificates dialog as shown below Install CA Certificates dialog Install CA Certificates Alias Mame Last Modified Open Import Details 3 Click Open to invoke the Open CA Certs Keystore dialog with cacerts file Select it and click Open Open CA Certs Keystore dialog Open CA Certs Keystore skin TE E E cacerts bly Recent Documents Desktop hy Documents bly Computer File name cacet 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 447 Anos Appendix K Use SSL feature 4 Anew dialog is displayed which prompts you to enter the password for Keystore The default password is changeit Password for Keystore dialog Install CA Certificates Alias Mame Last Modified Password for Keystor Enter Password 5 Click OK The Install CA Certificates dialog displays the list of all the available certificates Install CA Certificates window displaying all certificates Install CA Certificates Alias Mame addtrustclassica addtrustexternalca addtrustqualifiedca aolrookcat aolrookcaz baltimorecodesigningca baltimorecybertrustca camerfirmachambersca camerfirmachamberscommerceca camerfirmnachambersignca certplusclass2primaryca certplusclass3pprimaryca certumca cerctumbrustednetworkca Pat netee fa a3 5 75 Last Modified 02 105 2006 06 20 24 02 05 2006 06 21 44 O2 05 2006 06 25 29 1701 2008 09 41 21 27 103 2008 01 00 26 1Of0
230. ce USING THE FRENCH INTERFACE If you wish to run the Eclipse provided with the Runtime Environment in the French mode you need to edit the properties of the shortcuts provided in X Analysis group Clean start Eclipse and X Analysis for Eclipse Using the Properties option on the shortcuts update the Target value by appending nl fr_FR at the end of existing value Clean start Eclipse Properties dialog Clean start Eclipse Properties General Shortcut Compatibility Security Clean start Eclipse Target type Application Target location eclipse Target taborough eclpsereclpre ese clean nl fr FA Start ir D Program Files D ataborough E clipse Shortcut key None Run Normal window Comment Cleans cached data and launches Eclipse Use t In case there is any other problem not covered above please send your requests to Support freschelegacy com along with the log file for the current X Analysis session The file can be obtained by using X Analysis gt Open Log Folder menu option X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 436 ae Jost d Appendix H Refresh X Analysis Appendix H Refresh X Analysis X Analysis provides two commands for the operational maintenance of X Analysis repository cross reference library These two commands are XREFRESH and XAXREF XREFRESH The XREFRESH command refreshes the cross reference library to reflect
231. ce Type Source Lines Cyclomatic Complexity Halstead Maintainability Index Files Device files comprising Display Files and Printer Files Called Programs Calling Programs The Metrics information is displayed under the following headings Batch Programs Interactive Programs These two highest levels are then further sub categorised as High Average and Low The user specified values determine where a program fits into these sub categories By default these Preferences are blank hence all programs are listed under Low complexity until values have been set using the Metrics Preferences discussed below The following screen displays the Metrics information for the cross reference library XAN4CDXA X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 255 Audit Options Metrics information for XAN4CDXA Saar LEGACY 7 551 1 191 Average WKCUS8E Customer Release Average WKSECF6 Generate CPU Letter b Low Total 117 Application Area Breakdown 4 ACCOUNTS SA S B O 5 R BB EARE O E Be Average Total 1 240 b Low Total 1 144 aOR 8 2T B ID BR A 1289 a ee ee b Average Total 26 b Low Total j a g a 14 gt a CUSTOMERS AS MR B DB AR B M M a FS SN EC a e b Average Total 3 772 b Low Total E i ee ee es Se ee eee The Metrics information displayed above has the following columns 1 Complexity Level
232. ce cess vrcn easeresvaravsmadsnavacedevaveancesnavehmamaaras 190 inverted SUF UCTUNG CMGI ssccicicrascaruca nasa adancuaunotcnainanoayesusdetecan adenseevacssasuanseaseaaeeeimennases 197 PrOeh ani Str cture Chart PSC csceagcsestasccseiusscsansoeneaseriaacsamaensectarekevanareainarsanacnenneetes 198 Overview Structure Chart OSC 00 cece ccceccccseccccesececeececcecccccecceceuceeenanececsnesecsueeeeas 199 Screen Report DESI wiistescachetesee ten tecencestivsetvniysdiGedsaertselecaviaseissacieiecceeuteessceloniewet 206 Sereen How SC aMis r sae oswautratenadoreainecesemuedeaseevantrcoe 208 Access Path Didera seiasnordisins ased diiran ane A aT Aei 211 Sereen ACTIVILY DIa grai eese 212 Data Model Diagram sesessesessecessecessecessececeecesoscecsesoesescecescecesoeosssecesoeceseeceseeoesee 214 Ganer U DNIO e a A S E 216 DMD for an Application Area ccccssscccsssecccssececeececeesecceeeceeauecesseeeeseaecessuscessenees 217 Understanding Data Model DatabasSe ccccccsssccccssecccesececeeceseesceeseeceseeceseeeees 219 OPTIONS ON Screen COMPONE NN ccccccccscscscscscscscsccccccccccscscscscscscscecscscscsscscscecs 220 SSCA OC L OE tener sis E E vite vasa ac E E 220 Fr CUT CUNO GY OO Me artiste Ses parce naaten Ss nnsenee castes Henens one aacten ER 221 PREVIEW DETON O iucsiccsacseveecen T 224 Pa DE OI O a E E E E E E erie e ers 225 DTCOMMENT EE E E A er ee 228 ERAON ETE EE A eset 229 Adae DIAE AG e E E nee 230 BUSINESS
233. ch job Batch Job Progress view rh Thumbnail View Business Rules Progress s vie E XREENGINER SKHAN 66452 Co a ACTIVE At any point while the batch job is running click the hyperlink ACTIVE to view the Job Log The Job Log view is shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 72 JHJ LEGACY Application Library Job Log view Reengineer Programs Command AREENGINER PROGRAM ALL AALIB AAN4CDAA Library List XAN4CDKA XAOBJ OGPL OTEMP Job Log Mon Dec 01 17 46 57 IST 2014 Job 668452 SKHAN XREENGINER started on 01 12 14 at 12 17 48 in subsystem QBASE in OSY Job entered system on 01 12 14 at 12 17 48 Mon Dec 01 17 46 57 IST 2014 Job 662452 SRAAN AREENGINER submitted Mon Dec 01 17 46 57 IST 2014 AREENGINER PROGRAM ALL AALIB AANACDXA Mon Dec 01 17 46 57 IST 2014 Library AAN4CDAA already exists in library list Mon Dec 01 17 46 57 IST 2014 Member AAALIBL file AAALIBL in DBURK opened Mon Dec 01 17 46 57 IST 2014 Open options ignored for shared open of member w The Task Completed message is displayed once the process is complete Now double click on the Screen Components node available under the cross reference node in the navigation pane It displays the Screen Components for the application This option is also available for application areas Screen Components nts 53 Risk R A 8 AbS w oO Progra Function Type
234. chapters sections and all of the screens available in X Analysis displayed with a simple selection wizard Existing documentation object field annotation can be included in the exported PDF Microsoft Word documents EXPORT TO PDF Selecting the Export to PDF option from the Export Options icon available on the toolbar to export the content to the PDF format PDF view of current Source Code i X Analysis Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 206 View Level 4 1 pdf 2 C X File Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help x ey ee a gt lm we os ae lm Ll Be ee lm gt gs 10 05 04 Ag000002 testing FCONOOIDECE WORKSTN F RRN1 KSFILE CESPL FCUSTS IF DISK FCONHDR UF DISK FCONDET UF DISK FETEMAS IF DISK FSTOMAS IF DISK FETHEBAL IF DISK FTRNHSTLIIF DISK CMD Key Data ROUTINE SROUT 11 69 x 6 26 in iili X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 319 HSA EXPORT TO MICROSOFT WORD Exporting amp Printing Select the Export to Microsoft Word option from the Export Options icon available on the toolbar to export the content to the Word format Microsoft Word view of Current Source Code my ocumenti Microsoft Word T o a it View Insert Format Took BCS Table Window 710 Bz U 4 Normal Couri Courier Mew r I r 1 r 1 r 1 r I r 1 1 2 1 r i x Analysis Source for CONOO1 Seq addi odz oddz a004 00S 000b
235. cified on the Generate Programs dialog by default This is used as the first part on the package names created in the project o Application Area Name If selected the application area name is used as the first part on the package names created in the project o Package Prefix Only Selecting this option would only use the value in Package Prefix as the prefix for the package name without appending Project Application Area Name Function Level Logging This controls the logging statements to include on the generated code By default None is set i e no logging Trace includes the Entry and Exit statements into the Public functions by default Selecting Debug includes the statements to log values of the entry parameters when entering a Public function and their values when exiting the function These are in addition to the Entry and Exit statements generated by the Trace option For Trace Debug mode you may select All to log all the functions the control enters and exits at the runtime X REDO ADVANCED PREFERENCES Expand the X Redo node to view modify the X Redo Advanced Preferences X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 55 Using X Analysis Client X Redo Advanced Preferences type filter text Advanced Remote systems Advanced X Redo Preferences gt Run Debug bo Server Page Designer Service Policies Design Page using Eclipse g
236. ck 2003 11 14 2 618 far 47 340 F644 Ti 29 Illl Metrics History Chart X Analysis can also display the Metrics History in a chart form for all individual parameters The Metrics History toolbar contains a drop down button called Metrics Analysis Metrics Analysis drop down button Summary Metrics nd Metrics History 2 Metrics History for XAN4CDRA Complexity Level Change Date Source Lines Cyc Complex Halstead Maint Index Files iowa 2 The drop down button contains the list of parameters against which a chart can be generated Metrics History drop down options Summary Metrics Metrics History i Metrics History for XAN4CDXA Complexity Level Change Date Source Lines Cyc Complex Halstead Maini Source Lines Ee o Complex Current State 2 263 785 40 211 26682 Halstead Total 20 months back 2011 08 19 2 263 rog 40 206 2552 Maint Index Total 23 months back 7011 06 04 1 904 rla 39 027 2599 Files Total 34 months back 2010 07 02 1 910 709 39 582 3057 Device Files Total 39 months back 2010 02 08 2 465 75l 45 971 6674 Called Programs Total 4z months back 2009 11 14 2 616 fa 47 340 7644 Calling Programs Select the Cyc Complex option from the drop down menu X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 261 Ths Complexity Level Cyclomatic Complexity option for Chart Summary Metrics T Metrics History i Metrics History for XAN4CD RA Change Date Source Lines Cyc Co
237. cking View SA variable Where Used 2 e a Mel H O Variable Where Used For ALL CLISNC Ein i SIU jltielLet Nl esenianniunrselanig CBCUSTSD CBCUSTSD CBCUSTSD CBCUSTSD AWBCCD 0 10 STEXTi Custoner 2NSAGE 2USGPATR HT SFIELD 2WECCD cat AWENCD ca 4 PERSON ae 2DSDCDE ay 2S AGE 2DSPATR HT SFIELD CBCUSTSD CBCUSTSD CECUSTHL CBCUSTSD CBCUSTSD E E Pe P Pe PFE PF P be FILE FIELD DETAILS The File Field Details option displays the field details for a file This option is available for objects having PF LF attribute Right click for the context menu on a PF LF from the Member Object List and select the File Field Details option The following window will be displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 167 Quick Reference to an Object File Field Details for CUSF JHJ a Mnemonic Long Name Type Display Grid 5eg Record Screen Seq DSDCDE Distributor CHAR Distributor Sts Phone Extn Last Cnt Date Next Cnt Date Contact Salutation Job Title Fax Ho STATUS Sts CHAR o0 TELNO Phone CHAR 00017 ExTN Extn CHAR O00 LCTDOAT Last_Cnt_Date ZONED 0006 APOATE Mext_Cnt_Date ZONED Q0006 USERNM Contact CHAR 00034 SALUT Salutation CHAR 00034 TITLE Job_Title CHAR 00034 FasNO Fax_Mo CHAR O0015 ee If there are keys for a PF or LF they are displayed in blue color as shown in the image below File Field Deta
238. closed For this to take effect Model Validation Plug in Development Remote Systems Run Debug Open Office Installation Path Server Mote Service Policies The user should specify the path of Open Office Folder Team Tomcat UML Diagrams Usage Data Collector Validation Web Web Services 3 X dnalysis Advanced Folders General Data Test H Redo xDorclet XML Restore Defaults Apply Folder Preferences o X Analysis Folder Specify path for the X Analysis folder Logs and Temporary files folder Oo Specify Folder Specify location to change the default location for the X Analysis logs and temporary files If this is left blank then default location is set X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 49 Using X Analysis Client Open Office Installation Path Oo Specify Folder Specify location to change the default Open Office Installation path If this is left blank then default location is set GENERAL PREFERENCES Expand the X Analysis node to view modify the General Preferences type filter te gt General gt Ant gt Data Management gt Help gt Install Update Java gt JavaScript JPA b Plug in Development b Remote Systems gt Run Debug gt Server Service Policies gt Tasks Team gt Usage Data Collector Validation t Web b Web Services A Analysis Advanced Folders X Data Test t X
239. cludes fields used as parameters Variable Where Used Level 4 Parameters View Sa Variable Where Used 52 i al Variable Where Used for 4LL CUSNO ines sesy Wien Devel 4iRarameters RS H M Oo CBCOSTAD CECUSTSD AUBCCD FIELD CECUSTSD CECUSTSD CECUSTSD CECUSTSD CECUSTSD CECUSTSD CLET X Analysis User Manual 11 1 me Pe Pe fe P I he AWENCD 2 PERSON 2USDCDE AFIELD 2C0SN0 2CUSN0 FARMI amp PE 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Le ee is ee 14 ae 19 aaREFFLD CUSNO AaN4CDEN CUATS 19 aaREFFLD CUSNO 4AN4CDEM CUSTS al i Page 166 Ando Quick Reference to an Object Level 5 Cascading Parameters Extending the information in Level 4 Level 5 includes references where CUSNO fields are parameters in a function called by another function Variable Where Used Level 5 Cascading Parameters View SA Variable Where Used 23 a A Hi Els O Variable Where Used for ALL CUSNO Diieswa04y Wien DevelsyS Gsscading Parameters CBCUSTAD CBCUSTAD CBCUSTAD CBCUSTAD AWBCCD O 10 STEAT Customer FIELD ZWBCCD J a2 ZWENCD l 42 2 PERSON 13 22 Un 0CDE 14 22 FIELD CBCUSTAD CBCUSTAD CBCUSTAD CBCUSTAD 2ACUSN0 19 2 REFFLD CUSNO AN4CDEM SCUSTS CECUSTAaD 2CUAN0 19 22REFFLD CUSNO XANACDEM CUSTS lt E i Fee P P P be Maximum Tracking Tracks the usage of a variable or field to maximum level of indirection Variable Where Used Maximum Tra
240. crosoft Windows Version 6 3 9600 c 2613 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Co NWindowssystem32 gt java version java version 1 7 8_55 JavatTh gt SE Runtime Environment Chuild 1 7 8_55 b13 gt Java HotSpot IM gt 64 Bit Server UM Chuild 24 55 h83 mixed mode C Windows s ystemsg2 gt Select the appropriate version and click the corresponding link license freschelegacy com XALicenseManagerTool win32 win32 x86 64 zip license freschelegacy com XALicenseManagerTool win32 win32 x86 zip The XALicenseManagerTool according to your selected version will be downloaded as seen in the image below p F n z Compressed Folder Tools Home Share View Extract Pi b This PC Downloads r Favorites Mame Date modified E Desktop fey 7z920x64 12 07 2011 18 31 Windows In Be Downloads 1658 4145 450_ b4b0bb09c9_o 23 03 2015 14 57 JPEG image Recent places 16594143 450 28526a31d9_m 23 03 2015 14 56 JPEG image _ dmtempdownload7D9BC60588709B41943106 12 07 2011 18 31 TMP File a Hormegroup A Greenshot INSTALLER 1 2 4 10 RELEASE 25 02 2015 14 05 Application Nov 2014 get together_1 28 11 2014 19 46 JPEG image 1E This PC Nov 2014 get together_2 28 11 2014 19 46 JPEG image Ly Problem Analysis Detail 18 03 2015 11 28 PDF File th Network Ei AALicenseManagerl ool_win32 win32 xd6_b4 02 04 2015 17 27 Compressed zipp i X Analysis_Installation_ amp _Upgrade_Guide_10 2 13 11 2014 12 25 PDF File 10 ite
241. cts 48 e A E mMM WWCCONSC Work with Customer Contacts WWCCONS Work with Customer Contacts WWICUSF Work with Customer Sites EDTFIL MBCCLMSG Clear a Message Queue CUSFMAINT Customer Site Maintenance BCLS Clear a Message Queue Structure Chart Diagram with Files The SCD provides a graphic display of the program to program relationships The SCD with files also displays associated files along with programs To see the SCD with files click on the Show Files icon available on the SCD toolbar Show Files icon Se Object List EQ CLET amp OLET t4 Structure Chart for CLET Total Objects 8 Bl h gt X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 186 Program Logic Documentation Structure Chart Diagram with I O Files e Object List CLET G ce E Expanded Structure Chart for CLET Total Objects 19 amp M h E g T Ci IECLET Build Customer Letter OTHCAL LETN 1 Letter Prefix Generation SLETSQ Update Letter Sequence CUSLETSQ Update Letter Se Structure Chart Diagram Show Overridden Files Only In the case of only CLP CLLE objects the SCD has the feature that displays the Overridden Files The following image shows the Show Overridden Files Only icon Show Overridden Files Only icon Se Object List CLET E ees H Structure Chart for CLET Total Objects 8 Al y gfe E M Ei gt Show Overridden Files Only A
242. cument for XAN4CDXA pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional Bfk File Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help x 0g kie MOE 4 Screen Action Diagram for ZZF T01 CUSTMNT101D Customer Detal Maintenance CUSTMNTI01D 22FT01 0 26 x 11 69 in lt Screen Design Re engineered Screen System Document for XAN4CDXA pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional ig fx sums l WOE 5 Screen Design for 77FT01 CUSTMNT101D Customers Customer Detail Maintenance Databe Customer Wo Customer Wane Statement Account Related Account 11 69 x 6 26 in 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 394 ths Appendix C Component Documenter Business Process Logic System Document for XAN4CDXA pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help Cable eer We amp com 6 Migrated Logic for Function 47FT01 CUSTMNT101D INITIALIZE fi Mainline Code Entry parameters 77 Initialise message subfile tiTnNa2 1 SSUBET ZZPGM 1 8 CUSTMNT1 SWECCO RRECCD GETREC f Set date ZLUATE DATE ZYR CHAR YEAR FILLR1 ZMTH CHAR MONTH 11 69 x 6 26 in lt Business Rules System Document for XAN4CDXA pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional Sil File Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help x Danas esla MY gooh i Business Rules for ZZFT01 CUSTMNT101D Rule o Sacco ark 00002 Rep not found on Salesp
243. cussed under the Screen Components section X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 235 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Business Rules Analysis Business Rules Analysis Fresche Legacy s Business Rules Extraction software X Rules can be used to highlight the business rules within a source member using X Analysis Using X Rules the business logic may be identified and narrated from individual programs or parts of the entire system This business logic thus extracted is analyzed and documented using the various related features of X Analysis The Business Rules of an application are what makes the application function uniquely While X Analysis can expose the Business Rules implicit in the data and process models of an application this does not entirely account for the vast amount of business logic that is buried inside the source code of the programs X Rules is capable of identifying and narrating this logic automatically from individual programs or parts of the entire system The business rules logic can then be analyzed and documented with the powerful and interactive source browser integrated with X Analysis BUSINESS RULES The program source is grouped into discrete blocks of logic so that each block represents a particular execution of a business rule This block of code is then converted into Pseudo Code that describes the execution of the logic Literals and constants are liberally used in the narrati
244. d E Customer Wo oOo Customer Name DO E Statement Account fe f Related Account Distributor gt J Credit Limit O O TEMS o aaa OSHDSC a er Cr Guarantee e oN BCs ee ans LaNg oaa I Date Loaded e Chg Date e Last Sale Oo e PAGE DESIGNER X Analysis allows you the access to two versions of page design via the Page Designer option Set the option on the X Redo Advanced Preferences window refer to the image below The default option to edit the selected page is Eclipse X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 225 Options on Screen Components X Redo Advanced Preferences window type filter text Advanced gt Run Debug Advanced lt Redo Preferences gt Server 2 B Page Designer Service Policies Tasks Design Page using oon C Generate WAR EAR t Tomeat eras UML Diagrams _ Generate Separate UserLogicClass Usage Data Collector Generate Java to use with Other Databases Validation _ Suppress try catch Statements in Logic Classes gt Web gt Web Services A Analysis Advanced Folders General A Data Test 4 A Redo b gt ADoclet t AML Restore Defaults Apply Alternatively you can edit page s using Dreamweaver If Dreamweaver is installed on your machine then the drop down will show it as an option After setting the Page Designer preference as Dreamweaver in the X Redo A
245. d Choose from P Program E Entry point program i e a program that calls other programs but is not called by any program F File F File _ All Object types For an AND line The AND line takes the same value as the SELECT OMIT line Specify the comparison type EQ equal NE not equal CT compare text Object Name An individual name a generic name ALL Both individual and generic names can have wildcards specified Enter amp to denote that any character is allowable Thus AAA amp 1 means that any 5 character name where the first three characters are AAA and the fifth character is 1 will be selected More examples AA amp amp 2 OE 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 107 Anda Application Area Feature Brief Description Object Usage Usage Comparison Usage Value Library Comparison Object Attribute Name Text Status X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Specify as follows Last Used This will select the objects based on the last used date Created This will select the objects based on the Object creation date Modified This will select the objects based on the object change date Days Count This will select the objects based on the total number of days the Object was used Specify as follows Less than Less or Equal Equal Not Equal Greater or Equal Greater than Specify the usage value here If the usage is Last used Modified or Created
246. d Details _ Field Annotation Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Normal C Detailed Annotation Structure Chart Normal _ Expanded C Detailed Depth Annotation Screen Flow Diagram Normal _ Expanded Program Structure Chart _ Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal Detailed Business Rules A _ Export to MS Excel Summary l Detailed Include Internal Rtn s Source Source level Pseudo Code Flowchart Level _ Business Process Logic Level Choose the options which you want to document from the above dialog Click Next which will present the following screen X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 368 Document Manager Sequencing of the Features oystem Documentation Specity Sequence What sequence would you like to have for the System Document Application Area OSC Normal Application Area DMD Normal LF Access Path details File Field Details Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Normal with Annotation Structure Chart Normal with Annotation creen Report Layout Normal Source Source Flow Chart Screen Flow Diagram Normal From the above screen the user can re sequence the options selected for System Documentation After re sequencing click Next to reach the final step of documentation wizard Here the user can see all selections that he has made and can also define various options related to document formatting like
247. d Submit Report Save Definition Only After changing the report definition click Save Definition Only If you would like to generate the report then click Save and Submit Report Copy Report Definition The user has the option to copy the existing report definition It can be used when the user wants to retain the existing report as well as have a customised report X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 272 Anda Audit Options Copy Report Definition option Td Specialized Analysis 24 HE X Analysis Metrics for XAN4CDXA Shel l Category Report Run M Date Type Status RPG Metrics Reports COMPLEXP General cross language complexity by program COMPLEXS General cross language complexity by SUBROUTINE TT O OE DATACFY Program data complexity Run Metrics Report LOGICP Program logic complexity Modify Report Definition LOGICS Program logic complexity by subroutine Copy Report Definition SourcefObjeck Reports Delete Report Definitio HARDCODE Programs with hardcoded libraries MISSING Source or objects missing SRCOBIDT Source change date after object created E Database Reports DATAERR Database file and member errors and alerts DSGHALRT Database design alerts Delete Report Definition The user can delete an existing report definition using the Delete Report Definition option Delete Report Definition option i Specialized Analysis 2 5 m X Analysis Metrics for
248. d for existing source member No source member for file No program object found for source member No source member for program module Source member changed after file created No device file found for existing source member No source member for device file Referenced data area does not exist Referenced database file does not exist Referenced other file does not exist Referenced program object does not exist No source member for copy book aka Total Description 14 2 8 6 31 Expand the available Problem Category section to view name of the files having problems There is an option to allow Customized Export to Excel for the Problem Analysis data Customized Export to Excel option Alert Category Object 4 Source Object Alerts 4 Source member changed after devicefile created Clicking on this icon will invoke the following dialog CONO01DF CUSFMAINTD No file found for existing source member No source member for file No program object found for source member No source member for program module Source member changed after file created Order Entry Display Customer Site Maintenance X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 276 Audit Options Select Alert Category dialog Select the Alert Category to export Export All Source Object Alerts gt Database Alerts gt _ Program Code Alerts gt Migration Alerts gt DDL Conversion Issues Othe
249. data Complete DAT ACP Program data complexity LOGICF Program logic complexity LOGICS Program logic complexity by subroutine E Source Object Reports HARDCODE Programs with hardcoded libraries MISSING Source or objects missing SRCOBIOT Source change date after object created E Database Reports DATAERR Database file and member errors and alerts DSGNALAT Database design alerts The following similar report will be displayed The user can export this report to MS Excel X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 270 Anda Audit Options COMPLEX Report Specialized Analysis f COMPLEXE 3 O COMPLEXP General cross language complexity by program Run 1 Total Objects 72 A Object Name Object Attribute Sum of Cyclomatic Complexity Sum of Halstead Yol Greatest Maintainability Index Source statements CBS0SR RPG 17 1072 l t 139 CBS0SF RPG 30 93 Fozil RPG J J5 CONFIS RPG J ng CONFI RPG 45 a4 CONDO RPG loz CUSLETSQ RPG J5 0 CUSRGZ RPG i z 0 FASERRI RPG ll 39 FASERR2 RPG 119 39 FASNOSL RPG 63 fe k Modify Report Definition The user has the option to modify the existing report definition Modify Report Definition option E Specialized Analysis 5 7 X Analysis Metrics for XAN4CDXA gma sid AS Category Report Run M Date Type Status H RPG Metrics Reports COMPLESP General cross language complexity by program COMPLEXS General cross la
250. date Letter Sequence UPDFIL WKCUSBEF Find Fax Number OTHFIL Legend The description of the OSC Legend is as follows Update This depicts the program that updates a file Display This depicts the program that uses a Display file Print This depicts the program that uses a Print file Input This depicts the program that uses an Input file Output This depicts the program that writes to a file Command This simply depicts a Command Others This refers to the Programs that are referring to a file which is not Update Display Print Input Output Internal Routine This refers to the Synon specific routines 4 Update F Display Print Input Output O command Others F Internal Routine Indeterminate E Trigger WS Module Indeterminate This depicts the programs where the usage cannot be programmatically determined X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 201 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Program Logic Documentation Trigger This depicts the program which is a Trigger Module This depicts the program which is a Module The OSC can be expanded collapsed using the button on the lines Collapse CBC 110 Order Entry System OTHFIL ia CBS06R Back out account EDTFIL CBo07R Expand CBC 110 Order Entry System CBS06R Back out account EDTFIL X GSCD Generate Code Rollup Group CEC 110 Ord
251. ddress of the IBM i on which the X Analysis server components are installed User Specify the username to sign on to X Analysis Case sensitive Password If the IBM i server is configured for case sensitive passwords i e QPWDLVL is 2 or 3 and then check this option For QPWDLVL on the IBM i as O or 1 leave it unchecked The default option is checked DB2 Port Specify the port number for the DB2 instance where DB2 services must be running DB2 Port will be enabled on offline IP address i e 127 0 0 1 or localhost The default DB2 port is 50000 User Interface Specify language for the X Analysis user interface The default language is English Begin with Outline Specify appropriate settings for the Outline Pane View Pane The default option is unchecked which means that the Outline Pane will not be 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 45 Using X Analysis Client displayed automatically The outline or any other view will be displayed only when asked for Detailed DFD by default Check this option to invoke detailed data flow diagram as default Show Re engineered Screen for Screen Report layout Check this option to view the re engineered screen for Screen Report layout When not selected the Screen Report layout shows the green screen display This is the default setting Ignore Linked Repositories if any Check this feature to ignore linked repositories The default option is unchecked Open Called Procedure Program so
252. de Indented Source Code e Object List Ba conom 3 gt TH Indented Source of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 211 Yiew Leve 5 A E BHEM RP W B SEGi a ek Seq No INDENTED SOURCE CODE 4 008z 00 C Delete SFL 0083 00 C MOVEL 1 IN 0084 00 C WRITEGESFLC 0085 00 G MOVEL O IN JUS fs 00 G End So long as Exit not requested 3 0088 00 C END OO90 00 Cs End So long as Exit not requested 2 0091 00 C END ggsa 00 Ce End So long as Exit not requested 1 0094 00 C END 0096 00 C End Until F3 0097 00 C END 0099 00 C Terminate Program il x X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 150 Quick Reference to an Object Business Rules Overlay Select the Business Rules Overlay option to observe the business rules embedded in the Normal Source Code The following screen displays the Business Rules Overlay view for CONOO1 Business Rules Overlay window gt Programs Ee CONOC Business Rules Overlay for CON001 QRPGSRC Lines 282 View Level 5 _ E D AEH Ry ity Auei Ara T EXFMTOESFLC So long as Exit not requested 1 INOS IFNE 1 Contract gt 300000 Validate Contract no DSORDHN IFGT 300000 MOVEL OEMO010 ZMSGID 7 ENDIF r e e l a a TEEPEE TtETea H B O5 Business Rules for CONO01 Number of Lines 11 Source Member Rule Number Field File Rule CONO01 00001 XWORDN CONDET Contract gt 300000 CONO001 00002 AWORDN CONHDR Contract not found on Contract_Head
253. de the same Work with Objects dialog is invoked but with the Type Attribute set as PGM ALL Click OK to get the Object List for Programs X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 78 Application Library Object List Programs e Programs 3 E Object List of ALLUSR ALL PGM ALL ALL ALL Total Objects 153 ay a Ale fa Library Name Type Attribute Description Status Changed Created GLXAN4CDEM CBC110 PGhM CLP Order Entry System A 10313 o1f09 o8 REMAN4CDEM CBOOER PGM RPG Back ouk account FE CLYAN4CDEM CLET PGhM CLP Build Customer Letter A CLXAN4CDEM CLETN PGM CLF Print Customer Letter tE SAN4CDEM CNTEMAINT PaM RPGLE Contacts Maintenance fe MON4CDEM CONUPCO PGM RPGLE Revert Back Customer Info feMON4CDEM CONUPDI PGM RPGLE Update Customer Info version 1 LE MAN4CDEM CONUPD2 PGM RPGLE Update Customer Info version 2 REXAN4CDEM CONDO1 PGh RPG Contract Entry CLAAN4CDEM CPOM PGM CLP List Correspondence CLYANACDEM CSEC PGM CLP Build Security Fax CLYAN4cDEM SECS OGM CLP Add Code to Batch CL XaN4CDEM SECS PGM CLP Agent Fax Prompt 2h MANACDEM CUSCPY D RFG Customer Copy 19 03 13 t The columns that appear in the Programs List are as follows Library displays the name of the Object Library Name displays the name of the program Type displays the type of object in this case it is PGM Attribute displays the object attribute like RPG LE or CLP or CBL Descriptio
254. details of all the mainline entry level programs are displayed which give an idea of the modules and sub modules present in an application The Overview Structure Chart node is available under the cross reference library node and application area s node Double click the Overview Structure Chart node to display the following dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 199 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Program Logic Documentation Overview Structure Chart dialog Overview Structure Chart Application 4rea Mame Description All Members Selected Library s Object Library Program OSC Data Option Re Use cached OSC data if exists Re generate OSC data Cancel The Overview Structure Chart dialog prompts you to 1 Select the Application Area name if available else leave it as NONE 2 Pick the Object Library from the drop down list 3 The Program Name will be set as ALL 4 Select OSC Data Option to re use cached data or re generate data Click OK to display the Objects OSC based on the selection criterion 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 200 Pa Overview Structure Chark 4 Program Logic Documentation Overview Structure Chart window oe E Overview Structure Chart for XAN4CD 4 ALL ALL Total Objects 1005 i F ie x ooo 4 z FHECEC110 Order Entry System OTHFIL CHICBSO6R Back out account EDTFIL P N G5CD Generate Code OTH CUSLETSQ Up
255. dialog for XAN4CDXA Work with Change History Eg Object Mame 4LL From Date Ory h Do To Date YYYY MM OD Click OK to invoke the following window X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 90 be Object List Application Library Change History window for XAN4CDXA Change History 2 Change History for 34N4CD 4 ChangedDate Mame USSR SELF CUSGRSELR CUSPFSELR CUSPFSELR 2015 03 14 ARATE EURO WESECFG wk LSP wk LUSGEF WE USOE wWkCUSF SECI Library SAM CONA ea Dh cre ee ee cre ee ee AON DEM AON 4 DEM ANF DEM SAN DEM SAN 4 DEM SAN DEM SAN 4 DEM Attribute RFPGLE RFGLE RFPGLE RFGLE RPts RPG RPts RFG RFG RFG RFG E a e IAr Description Customer group Selection Customer group Selection Customer Site Selection Customer Site Selection Euro Conversion Calculation Generate CPU Letter Customer Enquiry Letter Find Fax Mumber Customer Release Letter Summary Customer Report Security Code Report Select a row and right click on it for the context menu to call up a suitable source compare window The following screen displays the context menu against a selected row Se Object List Change History for XAN4CDXA ChangedDate Mane USSR SELR CUSGRSELR CUSFSELR CUSFSELR 2013 03 14 RATE EURO WwESECFE wk CUSGP WwECLUSGEF WwECUSGE wkECUSP SEC 1 Library SAMP ee ee ee cee ee ee sAN DEM AAMA DEM AAMA DEM AAMA DEM AAMA
256. dvanced Preferences window restart the X Analysis plugin to invoke Adobe s Dreamweaver software for designing a web page Dreamweaver option X Redo Advanced Preferences window type filter text Advanced Team Advanced A Redo Preferences Usage Data Collector Validation Web Design Page using Eclipse Web Services Eclipse X Analysis _ Generate WAR EAR Dreamweaver Ady anced Generate Separate UserLogicClass Folders Generate Java to use with Other Databases Page Designer General _ Suppress try catch Statements in Logic Classes A Data Test A Redo Advanced A Doclet XML Restore Defaults Apply X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 226 Ghoda LE Options on Screen Components Right click on a Screen Component for the context menu and select the Page Designer option as displayed underneath _Page Designer option Context menu Pe screen component a IGS Moga H thee a moea Function Tee Seq Mo OSPF Format Physical File Title CUSTMAT1 EUSTMNTIOID a HA By screen Source Code CUSTMAT 1020 eF T Z aa Function Editor at Preview Designer ial Page Designer CUSTMNT1_0O CUSTMNT1_O01D CUSTMNT1_0020 F7FTOL F7FTOZ CUSTMNT1_1 CUSTMNT1_102D F7FTO2 B Screen Actions H Class Diagram Business Rules CUSTMNT1_2 CUSTMNT1_ 2010 CUSTMNT1_ 2020 F TOL eFTUe CUSTMNTIR Pa
257. e Report an Issue Install SSL CA certificate You can view the marked records through the Documenter icon on toolbar Documenter icon Ol le a amp 55 wo we aT al od Documenter i XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System PGM FILE PGM CBCONDE TH P CBCUSFMNT CBCUSTMANT2 CBCUSTS CBC110 CBTRAHST CBS06R CLET CLET CAT MAINT CONOO1 POM lt P P PM PM P P P PM PM P PGM On clicking the Documenter icon the Document Manager dialog will display all the marked records Document Manager dialog X Analysis Document Manager Description Order Entry Menu sites Work with Order Details Work with Order Details Long Fields used Move Down Customer Site Maintenance Customer Detail Maintenance Long Fields usec Work with customer Cobol vers Order Entry System Work with transaction history Back ouk account Build Customer Letter Print Customer Letter Delete All Contacts Maintenance Contract Entry List Correspondence Invert Selection qT Generate Document Save amp Exit X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 41 Using X Analysis Client i 2 Change Application Folder e The default Application Folder for a specific application can be changed by selecting the Change Application Folder option from the X Analysis menu X Analysis gt Change Application Folder The following dialog appears on selecting this opti
258. e F 4 ees ae ae 5 D 0021 00 Pseudo Code pugag Click the icon to display the Pseudo Code for CONO01 Pseudo Code for CON001 fe Object List El cONooL E3 E Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 194 ViewLevel 5 A S DABE w A Si A amp amp Seq Mo Pseudo Code A I O00 Pi a aa aa aa a a a aa a a a a aa a r aaa a a aa a a L l o0z 00 ttt Receive Parameters 0023 00 PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 0024 00 aea HERTN 1 Return Code 0026 00 f Until F3 Die F lt 0d Repeat Until Command Three equal to 1 0029 00 Initialise screen GE 0d Mowe Array CMD 1 to CHDDTS 0031 00 Mowe Left BLANES to CONOOLDF Address 0032 00 Mowe Lett BLANES to COMNOOL1DF Address 2 2 he lt i gt You can switch back to the Original Code through the toggle action of the button Pseudo Code toggle button be Object List Ea conoo 3 H Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 194 Yiew Levei 5 ss A E B AGH P W B amp bi A 6 f Seq No K Pseudo Code iti 0021 00 Original Code SSeS Sere Teese Le tere eee tee eee Te ee ee oO22 00 ttt Receive Parameters d z 3 0d PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 0024 00 aHa GERTN 1 Return Code wh lt il a X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 155 Quick Reference to an Object Source Level Source Levels 1 5 are available on Program objects only The Source Level menu on this display allows f
259. e appears under it as shown below DDL Modernization node under application area CUSTS a fA CUSTS Custs file i Application Area Diagram xt Data Model Diagram att Area Flow Diagram Fes Overview Structure Chart e All Objects Programs Files Business Rules Consolidated Rules Screen Components Regenerated Programs DDL Modernization Run DDL Conversion Analysis Problem Analysis There are two sub nodes under the DDL Modernization node These are Run DDL Conversion Analysis Problem Analysis Add Conversion Library Right click on the DDL Modernization node for the Add Conversion Library option This will invoke the DDL Conversion Setup dialog DDL Modernization node Add Conversion Library option a A CUSTS Custs file X Analysis User Manual 11 1 i Application Area Diagram at Data Model Diagram att Area Flow Diagram Ba Overview Structure Chart All Objects Programs Files Business Rules Consolidated Rules Screen Components Regenerated Programs DDL Modernization Problem Analysis 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 127 Application Area Through this dialog you can formulate a new DDL conversion setup DDL Conversion Setup dialog Provide the Name and Description adding Description is optional The following image shows the name of the new DDL set up DDL Conversion Setup dialog with Name Name RMTODL OR Click OK The new node
260. e exsr zurtprbobjs endif endif endif read e xtriggers endda endsr fi XEXKEXERKERKERERKRERKERERKEREEREEKRERAKERERARERKEKRAKEKERKERK EX ji KERKREXERRERREXREERRERREXREERERRERKERERKREREKREREERERREREERREREMR ER ee Fi2 Cancel Fi0 Cursor Fil Toggle 04 026 a Hd aS Bm wl sla ele Host Port Columns SEU FMT 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 0130 0131 0132 UEER 0134 0135 Disconnect Browse Workstation D if KEXEERERRERKEREERERKREXRRERERREREERERKERKRERERRERKRERERRERRER begsr zuwrtprbobjs prbcat TRIGGERS prbob trfile setllle prbcat prbobj xprbobjs if not equal xprbobjs Write the records writele rprbobjs Clear the existing records clear rprbobjs F9 Retrieve Fi0 Cursor Fi Cancel F24 More keys Fill Taggle 05 016 QRPGLESRC XRADDTRGRS Audit Options These modifications in the Problem Analysis will be reflected in the Problem Analysis Editor when taken Now when you select the Problem Analysis option the Edited Category can be seen there X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 288 HSA Audit Options GENERATE PROBLEM ANALYSIS Generate Problem Analysis analyzes the application database files and reports problems Select the Generate Problem Analysis option from the Audit Options on the context menu of th
261. e in the service program are displayed above The user should call the appropriate sub procedure to READ UPDATE WRITE DELETE the record There is one parameter a data structure which includes a before and after image of the database record plus the fields in the copybook member ZSHEADER Keys are passed in the before image ZOLDRECORD and data is returned in the after image ZNEWRECORD Currently only one field is used from ZSHEADER ACTION X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 334 ths inuser indate intime aCTLON entrypoint rtamsgtp rtnmsg rtnmsgids ioe ime leks rtnupdbuf rtnnewfun GEOS zworkfids zwinames zwftypes supflds Comm ikds Cl mikes Owieo Bae selact supacts calltype D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D X Analysis User Manual 11 1 The copy book member ZSHEADER 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Exporting amp Printing Page 335 Document Manager Document Manager The Documenter Document Manager facilitates the generation of a PDF MS Word document containing the system design information for the specified objects in an application The System Documentation is generated in the following two ways Marking the individual objects complete list Documenting an application area MARKING THE INDIVIDUAL OBJECTS COMPLETE LIST Follow the steps below to generate the system document L S
262. e X Analysis application This invokes the following dialog Generate Problem Analysis dialog A Ref Library AANACDAA Remove History Y Cancel You can choose to Remove History The default selection is Y which deletes the entire history that existed previously Select N if you want to retain the history Click OK to invoke the batch job command VIEW DATABASE SIZE STATISTICS View Database Size Statistics helps you monitor the growth statistics of a database over a selected period of time The current aggregate total database statistics will be displayed for the database and also for individual files on a new editor To use this option below steps need to be executed Double click on the Files node for the Object List Select the files you wish to audit using the Add to Database Auditing option This option is available only for PF type objects The following image shows the option X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 289 a Library PF XAN4CDEM PF XAN4CDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XAN4CDEM PF XANACDEM PF XAN4CDEM PF XANACDEM PF XAN4CDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XAN4CDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XAN4ACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XANACDEM PF XAN4CDEM PF XANACDEM lt Mame CONDET CONDET CONHDP CPYBESR CUSF CUSGRP CUSTS DDLTBLX DELIVA DISTS EVFE
263. e lower the number the less maintainable the code will be This is also at the subroutine level It uses four numbers as input HV Halstead volume from above CC Cyclomatic Complexity from above LOC Lines of actual code in the subroutine COM Lines of non blank comments in the subroutine beginning after the previous ENDSR MI 5 2 naturallog HV 0 23 CC 16 2naturallog LOC 50 0 sin square root 2 46 COM Metrics Toolbar The Metrics toolbar comprises various options which are discussed below Toolbar available on Metrics Window E Summary Metrics pa gt Metrics Analysis for XAN4CD A Double Click to iew History F Po Ae Metrics Preferences You can set the Metrics Preferences as per your requirements General Metrics Preferences icon on Metrics Window Toolbar e Object List Summary Metrics 3 i Metrics Analysis for XAN4CDXA Double click to view History A Bl a4 Complexity Level Pee ete Source asi 30 em kalasia 4 Grand Total a HighTotal ie 1186 82 7551 High RPG d 186 133 Taal y gt Click the General Metrics Preferences icon to invoke the following dialog General Metrics Preferences dialog Metrics Preference Setting Source Lines Cyclomatic Halstead Maint Idx Called Pam Calling Porm Files Device Files Highvalue ooo e S L e S S X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 258 thJ
264. e name X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 136 Application Area Window displaying Tables for RMTDDL STATUS FILE_ASTATUS ASTATUSAOQ CONTRACT _DETAIL_CONDET CONDET CONTRACT _HEADER_CONHDR CONHDR CUSF CUSF CUSTOMER_GROUPS CUSGRP CUSGRP PURCHASES CUSTS CUSTS DISTRIBUTORS DISTS DISTSAQ LISTSXOQ LISTSXQ ORGANISATIONS ORGS ORGSAQ PROJECTS PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT TRACKING PROTRE PROTRE PRODUCTS _PTYPES PTYPESAQ SALESPERSONS SLMIEN SLMENAQ The table names have a right click option Zoom Source to invoke the Source List for that table Select the Zoom Source option to invoke the following window Source List window CUSF Bi Views fff Tables Ea CUSF 3 a F Source List of CUSF in RMTDDL QDDLSRC Lines 128 View Level 5 ErhbAPrMm Bi a e a u oe E a Generate SOL Version VTRIMO 100423 Generated on 22 06 15 12 06 51 Relational Database SLOSBOOR Standards Option DB for 1 Indexes Double click the Indexes sub node to display the index names Similar to the Tables each index is assigned a System Index Name X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 137 thJst LEGACY Application Area Window displaying Indexes for RMTDDL CONDETL2 CONDETL2 CONDETL3 CONDETL3 CONHDRL1 CONHDRL1 CONHDRL1IA CONHDRLIA CONHDRL2 CONHDRL2 CONHDRL3 CONHDRL3 CONHDRL4 CONHDRL4 CONHDRLS CONHDRLS CUSFLA CUSFLA CUSFLB CUSFLE CUSFLC CUSFLC Right click on an i
265. e option called Add Criteria i Add Criteria option Spool File context menu ey Spool File Exclusion 3 F Test Result Spool File Exclusion ap SY a4 i Spool Name Spool Description Recognition Value Recognition Start Postion Recognition Length Exclusion ORDERSPL Eliminate date time differences assesses SSS oes Ie Add Criteria gt Click the Add Criteria option to invoke the following dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 123 THUS Application Area Add Criteria dialog Add Criteria Recognition Value Recognition Start Postion Po Exclusion Stark Position Po 510 Type Sd Provide the necessary criterions in the dialog box and click OK to add the criterions under the selected Spool File in the Spool File Exclusion window Follow the same sequence of steps to add more Spool Files as per requirement For more details refer to the X DataTest User Manual REENGINEER PROGRAMS Refer to the Reengineer Programs section GENERATE PROGRAMS Refer to the Generate Programs section AUDIT OPTIONS For detailed description refer to the Audit Options section given below UML OPTIONS The UML Options menu has the following two options Re generate UML View App Area Class Diagram Re generate UML The Re generate UML option is specific to application areas When a user selects this option then both the UML diagrams Activity and Class diagram
266. eas further into sub application areas for better application analysis For analyzing an application application area X Analysis provides another diagrammatic construct called Application Area Diagram The Application Area Diagram helps in visualizing the relationships between various applications areas When selected for the entire cross reference library the Application Area Diagram option displays all the application areas and sub application areas Application Area Diagram for XAN4CDXA AANACD RA COBOL CONHDR conhdr 138 Files 142 Poms Dan fi F a ete ie ie pis lg p OW RAE WRK Ms Ww N ERROCES i Eri ote Lis A ES Sa NENE b 2 awe A A ite ee i j ee a a w Ai IDATATEST gt T ET all i a al RA p Ay eee A ZY 96 Files L ee Y 123 Poms Ze os N saps SALES Sales System 47 Files 2 Files 1 Poms 9 Pgms The bluish grey blocks represent an application area The size of the box is indicative of number of objects it contains A larger box has more objects as compared to a smaller box X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 141 Application Area Diagramming The relationship among various application areas can also be displayed by selecting an application area Select an application area to test this JHJ TEGAGY The Application Area Diagram displays colored arrows Red and Blue Blue Arrow Displays Program to Program call
267. eccceesccceesecceeeceseuseeeseseceseneceseusceeseecesegecessgeeeees 92 SOU CO 6 eaa cates cae eatyneacacresaeoeateranacienapanseansaneaessueayawueonccaunesccenetesencaeres 93 POC AUTO agree tances ceca E E E 95 Application Area ecaiccprireeicccoinroreriereiir oai o iE EE EEE EA 100 Add Application Area seesessesesserresseresreresreossrrosseresrerssreesseresseresrereseresseresseeesreesseeens 100 Adding Object to an Application Area ccccsscccssssccssssccessssccensseccessscneneseneneseneusss 101 Removing Object from an Application Area ccccccsssccccssececessceceeseeeseeceesseesauaees 103 Context menu ON an Application Area cccccssecccsssccccssecceesececeececeenceeseecesseeeeeees 104 Application Area Options sesssssesseresreresreossrresseresrerssreessrresseresrersseresseresseresreesseeens 105 SS BUSNES RUO a a E T N N 117 EXPO ODUON S orrara r E E E E E E aries ats 117 APOCO aa a TEE E A N E T EE E E E A A 117 Document Application Area seessessseesrerssreessrresseresreresreossrresseeesrerssrresseresseeesreesseeens 117 Data Management OPTIONS ccccccssccssccscccsccesccesecaeccsscssecesecesecesecseseseeeeeeseceaes 117 Test Management Options sesssssnsessessessessesseseessesessessessessessesseseesessessessesressessesees 118 Reengineer ProgramMS ssesssssssesssssessesrrsresreseessossssessrosrosesseseesseseosessessessesseseeseesee 124 Generate Programs aicc secon iecnnce dina ee aE E EAE 124
268. eceeeceeeeseceeeeceseuecesagaess 58 New Application Al Ce iccazscnssnceeninvcsasdnavasacesosaantworinarandveaniadentasaianasaaatensteardwiveaanndentaaneat 58 Add Alternate Data Library List sciciossivscasevancmavarcwesenssaavenosssuseatesancmavanioesantinanemessenaed ie 58 PROTOS FO UI ONS errin sacar cute sires A sauce ean ceseaaenebeweeeanets 63 Derive BUSINESS FR UNGS sicscs saens sdnaccaradescninndesuaeadsuncmabdessdancanivommatasesanel sae SEENEN 66 IMPO OPON ose ous ormntaameaacseatcesraneroaenns 67 PHPT OION een E E E E EA E 68 DOCUMENT Entire Applicati M sisii aaa aA 71 DOCUMENT Changed ODJeCts sic ssicccvssiciwasssandvisaneasaneecsdncndansedwadasadeventngnissdessduewarswieetesss 71 PRECIP INCI ProBralTS Sioctenateneaexscnsctcrseeseatavsenstanckenastes E aR R eE Ei 72 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 3 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Contents Generate PrograiNS assess seesaw anaes s wagie E A E 74 Inter Repository ODORS esra a EEE E 75 Aud OSE AS eener a ERE A A OEE EOE 75 Work With Multiple List Options sseosensssensssenssserssressseesssrrsssrreseersseeessereserreseereseeree 76 Deo a E N E conte N N E A N A E E E AA N T 77 Memoer ET ara A E naeebeweaeeanse sauce ean ceseaeencbew eet 84 SOUE FC sara EEE O E E EEEE E AE N 85 BU e RU oo E EE E E EE een 86 Selge e 2 Fea 270 ih 5 eee A A E E A O AA eee ee ee 86 SECON ON I eena a E E E EA 87 cmane AITON en E E E vis E TE EE N 90 Regenerated Programs scscccsssecccss
269. eceive Parameters Select the Show Split Panel option to display a split panel displaying the Normal Source and the Business Process Logic code simultaneously Normal Source Code and Business Process Logic code te object ust Ba CONOL 9 Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM OQRPGSRC Lines 271 View Level 5 EEA P U R SOBO i A oe amp R tes 1 estass 2 soetas J nastase 4 Business Process Logic Get Contract Details Read data CONHDRR using DSORDN CHAINCONHDRR Ca a a n IN40 IFEQ 1 Not Foun MOVEL BLANKS If Not In40 C Get Contract Details if existing MOVEL BLANKS InN40 SERROR MOVEL BLANKS End MOVEL BLANKS TE INn40 XWADD1 BLANKS XWADD2 BLANKS C Get Customer Details XWADD3 BLANKS C DSCSNO CHAINCUSTS XWPCDE BLANKS c IN82 IFEQ 1 End ENDIF X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 154 ths Quick Reference to an Object When you double click on a particular line in the Normal Original Source code its corresponding source line on the Business Process Logic code gets highlighted The Show Split Panel button has toggle behavior and clicking it reverts to the Normal Source Code view Pseudo Code Pseudo Code is also a toggle option for viewing the Pseudo Code for the Normal Source Code Pseudo Code toggle button Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Levei 5 A E E ERG w e h SBE i a aA SEC Mo x 1 i rae ee 2 ee ee ate 3 ee
270. ects H P Attributes F Input Programs 59 Objects H P Input Services 1 Object H F P Input Triggers 1 bject H a ries per tie Sites by Salesperson Sites by validator P InputfOutput Programs 2 Objects H b Attributes P Attributes 7 Update Programs 14 Objects H CEJ06R Back out account 1 CUSFLE 5 CLUSFL1 CB906RR Back out account Sites by Organisation Sites by Mame CUSFMAINT Customer Site F Attributes b Attributes Maintenance CUSFMOLD Customer Site Al Fl Maintenance CLUSFL CUSFL3 Sites by Status Sites by Number P Attributes P Attributes CUSLETSQ Update Letter Sequence URG Reorganize Customer File 5 CLISFLS m CLISFLG lt Awe IE View Annotation The View Annotation option allows user to see annotation for a specific object There is a red icon denoting Annotated text on the right side of the Object see the following screenshot X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 177 Program Logic Documentation View Annotation option be Files Zh Object Where Used CUSTMNT1 faa CUSF E3 H A gt a E CUSFLA F Sites by Product renamed From cusfla For testing Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 m A e E b Access Paths 13 Objects F Input Programs 59 Objects F Attributes P Input Services 1 Object a CUSFLL Sites by Salesperson F Attributes m CLISFLE w lt i gt F Input Triggers 1 Object P InpukfOutput Prog
271. ed by the X Analysis data modelling process These tables are listed below Feature Brief Description XPIDS Primary identifiers XDD Data dictionary XRELS Relationships XSHKEYS Relationship detail XKEYMAP Access paths X Analysis Data Model Database AKEY MAP MRELS Access paths File relasionehips J XSHKEYS Fid rials ps The easiest way to view the data in the data model is to use the Data Dictionary facility provided within X Analysis 1 Open the Customer Maintenance System in X Analysis 2 Click the Data Dictionary icon on the toolbar X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 219 HJA Options on Screen Components Options on Screen Components X Analysis is equipped with a set of options that provides you with significant details about the application like source codes business rules data content and other similar information The following options are covered under the Screen Components feature Screen Source Code Function Editor Preview Designer Page Designer Data Content Screen Actions Class Diagram Business Rules Component Documenter E Annotate SCREEN SOURCE CODE Select the Screen Source Code option to display the source code for the associated display file A new source browser window will be invoked displaying the source member of the associated display file X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 220
272. een Activity Diagram for CUSFMAINT P INITIALIZE Initialization Routine CUSFMAINTOL Customer Site Maintenance Fields Actions wt s Ll 2 Click the l icon to expand the screen and reveal the Fields and the Actions of the object as displayed underneath Screen Activity Diagram Expanded view e Object List E CUSFMAINT E E Screen Activity Diagram for CUSFMAINT gt INITIALIZE Initialization Routine CUSFMAINTOID Customer Site Maintenance Fields Ackions CSPDISTS Distributor Ww CONS Contacts WW ROR ES Delivery Areas wt lt gt Note Generating the Screen Activity Diagram is limited to objects with RPG RPGLE CBL CLP CLLE attribute X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 213 TTA _ a C7 P rT i Data Model Diagram Data Model Diagram The Data Model Diagram displays file relationships for a File within the cross reference library or an application area The related members are displayed distinctly in yellow while the external Objects applicable only in the application area are displayed in blue att Data Model Diagram 2 5 DMD for XAN4CDXA Demo Application Data Model Diagram for ALL Total Objects 50 ES a ih at DMD Details 23 DMD Relations For 4LL Total Relations 53 RelNo Dependent File l CNTACS CNTACS CNTACS CNTACS CNTACS CONDET CONDET CONDET Relation Type REFERS TO REFERS TO REFERS TO
273. entation failed FileNotFoundException ceeccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 428 SWTException on Windows 2000 MaCHINES ccccceeseccceseceeesceceeeeeeeeecesseeeeesees 429 Screen Report Design feature fails with Server Job Error ccccccccceeeececseseeeeeeeees 430 X Analysis Diagnostics Utility svc cassscedcdssvavdivecdvesavacavasseasnced sdsavewavancdeees Cadesusdvavenetesaaweeas 430 Error Message appears ON Signon tO X ANALYSIS cecccessecccesececeeseeeeeeceeseeceeeesess 431 Data Flow Diagrams are Unavailable cccccccssscccessecccesececesceceeseeeeeecensescesseaess 432 Setting the password Field ccceccccsssccccesececesececeescecseneceeeuecesseeceesenecesegecesseeeeeeees 434 Error in generating program documentation ccccesccccssececessceceeseeceeeceeeeeceesenees 435 Usine the EV OME WRC ACE cacissesceccesasaceasenoaberdececvanlassnewseveacsvamezonescaetedeacacssieetasseesels 436 Appendix H Refresh X AnallySis cecsccscscsccccscsceccccscnceccccecscescccecsceccccscsceceecess 437 APEERE SU ellcgspet vate arden ned eects diver E uh ncbagaraneearentneiences 437 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 7 Contents MITE EP saaece te teaser eee treat ve ants vate da cite so tn tess saints esate Hoa tinea opments act ose ssssnaees 439 Appendix I X Analysis Indexes Job Scheduler Entries scscsscscsecsceccsceecscees 443 PS GID EID CONG sierra tes
274. er CONO001 00003 AWBCCD CONHDR Debtor not found on Purchases CONO001 AWORDN CONHDR Contract found on Contract_Header CONOO1 00005 XWABCD CONDET Product lt gt 0 CONO001 00006 AWABCD CONDET Product found on Contract_Detail CONO01 00007 XWABCD CONDET Product lt gt 0 CONO01 AWABCD CONDET Product not found on Product_Master CONO01 AXWABCD CONDET Product not found on Stock Balances CONO01 00010 AWAACS CONDET Store not found on Store_Master CONO01 00011 AWABCD CONDET Product not found on Transaction_History Business Rules Select the Business Rules option to access the business rules for the selected source member The Business Rules for CONO01 are displayed below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 151 thJst LEGACY de Programs i Business Rules for CON001 in XAN4ACDEM QRPGSRC View Level 1 Quick Reference to an Object Business Rules Ee CONO01 3 E Eire BRO a os amp Business Rules Receive Parameters J Until F3 Initialise screen Get Contract No amp Customer No f So long as Exit Not requested 1 ROOO01 Contract gt 300000 f f Validate Contract no IF XWORDN gt 300000 ERROR OEM0010 END i Retrieve Contract Details f Set up blank subfile for Product lines HA Business Rules 52 Business Rules for CONO001 Number of Lines 11 htTtrTaea R a Source Member Rule Number Field File Rule CONOO1 00007 XWORDN CONDET Contract gt 300000 CO
275. er Entry System The Rollup group describes the cumulative component function of the program and its dependents The following types of Rollup groups are available UPD At least one program updates a file PRT Program and dependent programs create a printed report DSP Program and dependent programs use input files and display files OTH No cumulative component function can be determined Function Type Function Type describes the function of the object and is based on COOL 2E definitions 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 202 SSS m Program Logic Documentation ITA CS J n C Hierarchy Exclusions in OSC n Work with Exclusions is an option on the master command menu X4WRKAPP Option 16 Using this feature you can add a program s name for Hierarchy Exclusions This has effect in the OSC and the SCD This feature removes the child nodes of the excluded object and a green arrow is shown to indicate the hierarchy exclusion Repeated Nodes in OSC The OSC displays the repeated objects having child nodes with a green arrow beside them The following screen displays repeated nodes in OSC Repeated nodes in OSC Ea Overview Structure Chart 4 z Overview Structure a NIPA Total Objects 526 a e H 5P012 Derive the date n working days from the input date OTHFIL XRZZP Exception error Handling called from XRZZ subr OTHCAL OTH SP012 Derive the date n working days
276. er Information to Fresche Legacy to receive your License file Server Info Serial Number Partition ID Total Partitions Install License File F o T T j 3 PEN Click Install The Install log showing only the licenses included in the specified license file will appear Next click the License tab to get a complete list of the installed licenses It displays all information about the Product Expiry Date Status Install Date and License Type X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 37 thJs LEGACY License Manager View License tab 1 Enter the login informations and Connect to retrieve the server informations to Nae sename ron Use SSL LI License Security Code Product A 2E Analysis X 2E Migrate A Analysis Xx Archive X Audit X Control Lite DB Modernize X Datatest X Verify XA Open Expiry Date Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Fermanent Permanent Permanent Install Date 2015 02 15 2015 02 15 2015 02 15 2015 02 15 2015 02 15 2015 02 15 2015 02 15 2015 02 15 2015 02 15 2015 02 15 Using X Analysis Client License Type Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Perrnanent Perrnanent Permanent The third tab is Security Code which displays any installed V1 modules based on the installed security code In the absence of any security code
277. erence database for the specified libraries for all the changed objects The refresh will have no effect unless there are changes to at least one of the source files registered in the cross reference database This command will update the Object and the Member lists immediately and run a separate job to re index the appropriate source code To run the refresh command from the 5250 screen go to the master command menu X4WRKAPP and select Option 14 against the cross reference library X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Applications Databorough LEd XARWKAPP E a OFTA Aaa AILS Enter options press Enter 1 Authorities 2 Change 3 Copy 1 Delete 5 Display 7 X A Log 8 Libraries 9 Variable Calls 10 App areas 11 Reports 12 Initialise 13 Build data model 14 Refresh 15 Gen Business Rules 16 Exclusions 17 Objects 18 Pgm Stds X ee ene Text Company division XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System 14 XAN4CDXAT XAN4CDEM Tutorial System X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 20 Ths Configure Cross Reference Library Press ENTER to invoke the XREFRESH command screen displayed below Refresh Changed Objects XREFRESH Type choices press Enter Z Nayetlly Sakis a ions suewe ey ee ee ONNATOIDD Avan Refresh Application Areas NO Refresh Business Rules Ne Feature Brief Description X Analysis Library The X Analysis cross reference library name Refresh Application Areas If you wish to refre
278. ersons 00003 Distributor not found on Distributors 00005 Se Cus No not found on Sites 00006 Debtor found on Purchases 50001 __ Fiera range is from 0 to 99999 11 69 x 6 26 in lt X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 395 ahs Appendix D XREDOAPP Command Appendix D XKREDOAPP Command The XREDOAPP command is the master interface to control an X REDO application The Library List needs to be set correctly before using this master command SET THE LIBRARY LIST Change the Library List to ensure the following sequence XAOBSJ QGPL QTEMP Use the EDTLIBL command to set the library list EDTLIBL command screen Edit Library List System DBS PW6 Type new changed information press Enter Sequence Sequence Sequence Number Poe ea Number Dibrary Number Liprary Low S00 XAOBJ TON 310 QGPL FAN oA QTEMP 180 S180 Le 340 ZAG S510 210 3260 Zee 310 220 380 240 330 250 400 N 410 270 420 30 200 140 290 FIELE F5 Refresh Fil2 Cancel After updating the Library List type the XREDOAPP command and press ENTER The following screen similar should appear X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 396 Ahd Appendix D XREDOAPP Command XREDOAPP Command screen X Analysis 4 2 Redo Applicarionm Control Databorough Ltd XARREDOAPP 11 49325 2 aen e Enter options press Enter 2 Linking 3 Copy 6 Date Attributes 8 Libraries 12 Initialise 15
279. ery X Analysis is a suite of modules fully integrated with IBM Rational products WDSc RDp RDi etc and MyEclipseBlue It also runs standalone on Eclipse without any other product dependencies Individual modules are grouped together to provide useful solution sets that meet a number of requirements around a central theme PROFILE AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS The initialization refresh jobs make extensive use of various IBM i commands like CRTDUPOBJ CRTPF CRTLF DLTF RGZPFM RTVMBRD CRTLIB CLRLIB RSTLIB DLTLIB DSPFD DSPFFD DSPPGMREF DSPDBR CLRPFM CPYF CRTDTAARA RTVOBJD ALCOBJ DLCOBJ DLTUSRIDX DSPOBJD RTVSYSVAL RTVDTAARA In order to run the X Analysis jobs on an IBM i machine it is recommended to use the QPGMIR profile or the user profile having QPGMR as the group profile Regardless of the profile used you should have the following authorities The profile must have a USE authority to all of the commands listed above and also SAVSYS special authority For the Source and the Object libraries specified during setup The profile used requires object operational OBJOPR authority to all programs and files in these libraries The profile also requires execute EXECUTE authority on all of these libraries For the X Analysis cross reference library The profile used must have full rights to this library If you do not use the QPGMR profile you must make sure the profile used has ALL rights to al
280. es YES NO If YES is specified then wherever there are two or more contiguous underscores in the generated alias they will be replaced by a single one Data Areas XSQLCVREFR and XSQLCVRTO If you have requested the generation of aliases then you can specify replacement for invalid characters You can specify up to 50 from characters in the XSQLCVREFR data area and up to 50 to characters in the XSQLCVRTO data area The characters are matched between from and to areas X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 329 Exporting amp Printing Display Data Area DBeS2 5B Data aire a ee Ge XSQLCVRFER ie lo a ae ee ee XAN4CDXA VIDS ae ee ee ee ee CHAR Eero ay eee etn 50 Texten eee E er a XDDSTOSQL Replacement Characters From Value Offset Sao Po ood 0 S Display Data Area System DBSSZ55 Dara area o o o o o o o XSQLCVRTO ED ave 1G E E EE XAN4CDXA EOS oy ve ee en er ces coe CHAR Tenorea a ane ees eee era ee 50 Texte ee et ea ee eo e XDDSTOSQL Replacement Characters To Offset O If any of the following characters remain then they are automatically removed pl P lt gt t BE Embedded blanks are then replaced with underscores The only values that may normally need changing relate to the generation of aliases File Exclusions Files are excluded in three ways Source PF files which have been loaded into X Analysis are automatically excluded These can be found in the XPFSR
281. es Report DB rels and Biz Rules Report on deleted objects FAO DISPLAY DIFFERENCE ANALYSIS The Display Difference Analysis option displays the differences of the application database files and programs The difference analysis data is available only when the difference analysis has been generated by selecting the Generate Difference Analysis option Demo Case Display Difference Analysis Create a demo case for better understanding of Display Difference Analysis Follow the given steps 1 Create a new X Analysis application call it XAN4CDXC with the following libraries Source XAN4CDEMCU XAN4CDEM Object XAN4CDEMCU XAN4CDEM X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 244 THUS Inter Repository Options 2 Initialize the new application 3 To populate Difference Analysis data opt for the context menu on the new X Analysis application KAN4CDXC and then select the Generate Difference Analysis option from the Inter Repository Options submenu Select XAN4CDXC from the drop down box Other X Analysis Repository Then click OK to submit the batch job Generate Difference Analysis dialog Ref Library Other 4nalysis Repository Report Trivial Differences Report DB rels and Biz Rules Report on deleted objects 4 To display the Difference Analysis data opt for the context menu on the new X Analysis application KAN4CDXC and then select the Display Difference Analysis
282. es oystem Documentation Specify Contents Select features to be included in the System Document Object List Data Model Diagram Normal In Word as Image Detailed In Visio _ Annotation LF Access Path details Detailed File Field Details Field Annotation Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Normal C Detailed Annotation Structure Chart Normal C Expanded C Detailed Depth 5 v Annotation Screen Flow Diagram Normal _ Expanded _ Program Structure Chart Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal C Detailed Business Rules _ Export to MS Excel Summary C Detailed Include Internal Rtn s Source Source level A w Pseudo Code Flowchart Lewel Business Process Logic Lewel If a user selects the Screen Report Layout for documentation with the Normal option then the System Documentation process will print the Screen and the Fields list of X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 340 Document Manager individual formats one after the other for all the screen formats If the Detailed option is selected then it will also print the Header information the Data Content Diagram and the Screen Action Diagram for each screen apart from the Screens and the Fields List for all the screen formats Select the options to be included in the document and click Next to proceed further Single System Document Specify Sequencing oystem D
283. esececeesecceesececeuscesauscesseecessecesseaees 374 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 6 Contents Viewing the Generated Document csscccssececesececeesceceesececeuecesseeeesenecessueseesees 374 Limitations of X Analysis System DOCUMENTED cccccssececesseeceeseeeeesecesseecessenees 377 Uone te FINO CA Ola upien E EENE ONN 377 Appendix A X Analysis Offline sessesessesessesessssessscessssecsscesssoesessesesoesessecesseoecee 379 X Analysis Offline Prerequisites ssccccsseccsssssccesssccesseccneneseccusseceeueseneueseseusecnens 379 AAMS ONTE aan EA A 380 Appendix B Enabling the SEU Interface ccccscsecscsccccecscsccccscsceccecccscececcees 382 Create User Profile XAN4SEU ccscccsssscscssrescssscccsesscncusssscavscevcessencussssvacssenensrens 382 Creatine macro of XANASEU surreerirrierniariere riat iino sia ien EEEE ere aateeeesese 383 Appendix C Component Documenter sessssesessesessecesssoesoscesescecssoesessesesoesesseoee 387 Work with Component Documenter sssessseessseessrrresersssressrrreserresrerssereserreseeeseeees 387 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command sessssesessesessecessecessscessscesssoecssoecsessesessesesseeee 396 Sd Ae a ao E E E A ee eee eee 396 Options available on the XREDOAPP command interface c ccscccsseseeeeseeenseeeees 397 A 2E DI AIOI enana A E E E euayeanedesvene 409 Appendix E Overriding Dat
284. ew It lists all the applications added using the X4WRKAPP command Application Libraries view M 192 168 170 10 Wh ZAN4CD 4 XAN4CDEM Tutorial System e Application Area Diagram att Data Model Diagram Es Overview Structure Chart e All Objects Ts Programs IE Files Source Files Business Rules ers Consolidated Rules Screen Components Eh Change History Regenerated Programs Esl Source Scan J amp Sanitize j A Resize Fal Procedures fs ACCOUNTS Company Accounts AY COBOL Cobol Application fl CONHDR conhdr B CONUPD fs CUSTOMERS Customer App Area fete DATATEST sDataTest Demo BE MVCPROCESS Re Engineering E3 Be OE Order Entry B OEDOL Application Area GEDO1 TE ORDERS Order entry System E3 T PLAN Planning System ak PRINT Printed documentation BE SALES Sales System BS TEST X Datatest Example X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 57 HJA Application Library APPLICATION LIBRARY MENU OPTIONS Select the cross reference library and opt for the context menu which displays the following pop up menu Context menu for the X Ref New Application Area Add Alternate Data Library List Reset Library List Application Library List Affinity Comparison Refresh Options Derive Business Rules Import Options Export Options Document Entire Application Document Changed Objects Reengineer Programs Generate Programs Generate Web Services Generate Data App
285. ew DB2 Connection option By selecting this option you can create connections to use offline X Analysis Provide valid DB2 sign on information when selecting the New DB2 Connection option X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 39 JHJ LEGACY Using X Analysis Client Creating New DB2 Connection from X Analysis Plugin Analysis Eclipse Platform File Edit Mawigate Search Project X Analysis rh oO Navigation Metrics Dashboard W 192 168 170 10 B New Connection Tomcat Run Window Help HAN Rae Host Name 127 0 0 1 DB2 Username MARK DB2 Password Use SSL LJ Session Information Session Items Description Host Name A Analysis Usern A Analysis Library Job Details lt Login Cancel Refer to Appendix A for more details on X Analysis Offline Mark all for Documenter s Lx Ai 7 Java EE Select the Mark all for Documenter option to mark all records for system documentation which are listed on the X Analysis window X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 40 gt F u mI Upnety DE Mavigation CUSF CBCONDET Metrics Dashboard m 197 166 170 10 Using X Analysis Client Mark all for Documenter option Tomcat Run Window H License Manager New DB400 Connection New DBZ Connection Mark all for Documenter N Change Application Folder Open Log Folder Open Application Folder Authorize Google Driv
286. eywordst t tHtttHttttttttt tttttt CommentstHttttttttt H Changed on March 11th 2013 H DATEDIT YMD PRFFSSESSSESSSESSESSSSSSSESSESSSELELESSLESELE SESS ESLSLESELESELESEL ESE SESE Files PRFFFSSSESESSSSESSSSSESESELELESSSSS SSS LELELELESELESELAELELESSESESSELE SELES FWCUSTSD CF WORKSTN F SFILE ZZSF 1 SFLRRN Syntax Check Selection F Convert Selection To Free Form FCUSE FCUS Save Ctrl S FDIS p4 FCONH X Analysis Options Variable Where Used FTI p TD OMS z Object Where Used D D D Cut Ctrl X HEKEKEEKEKKEKEKEKKEEE D Se DR Copy Ctrl Insert GTEXT D IN Paste Ctrl V 1 1 d FII Select d F Selected D si Deselect Alt U D Ds Filter view D Show all Ctrl W zi Source D View D Z Page 481 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Index Index 5250 Emulator 52 158 Access Path Diagram 11 210 211 Action Diagram 88 415 416 418 419 424 Activity Diagram 156 207 211 212 293 294 295 297 Add Status Category 455 Add User defined Rule 451 Affinity Comparison 62 63 105 115 116 Alternate Data Library 58 59 60 61 Annotation 174 176 177 233 239 376 377 449 Annotation Template 377 APIs 456 458 459 461 Application Folder 42 43 70 325 350 373 374 428 Archive Data 117 313 314 316 AS400 12 Attributes 174 177 178 179 396 399 437 441 Audit Options 9 75 76 123 253 254 267 274 277 288 420 Bookmark 145
287. fference with the files The PTF Analysis option analyzes the base and the customized applications for PTF analysis The Manage Linked Repositories option allows analysis of one or more IBM i and or non IBM i Windows cross reference library to an existing cross reference library The Inter Repository Options is available on the context menu of the cross reference library The following group of options is available under it Difference Analysis Generate Difference Analysis Display Difference Analysis PTF Analysis Customized Libraries Generate PTF Analysis PTF Analysis Manage Linked Repositories Note Fresche Legacy supplies the following two additional data libraries for demonstrating Difference Analysis and PTF Analysis XAN4CDEMCU This library contains objects from XAN4CDEM with simulated changes XAN4CDEMPT This library contains simulated PTF for XAN4CDEM X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 243 Inter Repository Options GENERATE DIFFERENCE ANALYSIS The Generate Difference Analysis option submits a batch job which populates data for Difference Analysis You must provide the cross reference library name which will used to compare the cross reference libraries The following dialog is displayed when you select the Generate Difference Analysis option Generate Difference Analysis dialog Ref Library Other Analysis Repository Report Trivial Differenc
288. fied Since an application area has been specified the X Analysis cross reference library too is passed as parameter to the command Run Mode The Run Mode parameter is passed as REPORT implying generate a report showing the primary keys and the foreign keys of each record that breaches a given relationship up to a maximum number for each relationship as specified by the Maximum records parameter Maximum Records If you have selected a run mode of REPORT then XVERIFY will print a report showing the primary keys and the foreign keys of each record that breaches a given relationship This parameter allows you to specify the maximum number of records printed for each relationship If a dependent file contains fewer than the maximum number of records specified but more than zero records and all the records breach the relationship then that relationship will be updated Verification Report Opt for the context menu on the Verification node under the selected application area select the Orphaned Records option This generates a report displaying the primary keys and the foreign keys of each record that breaches a given relationship X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 310 JHJ LEGACY Verification Report Data Management Features Orphaned Records Report For Subset Data Library MVCPROCESS File Owner Total Primary Key Foreign Key AU a a a ee CUSF CUSGRP DISTS SLMEN Rela
289. following dialog is displayed when you select the Generate PTF Analysis option Generate PTF Analysis dialoc Compare Base to PTF Eg Base Repository Provide the base repository name in the Generate PTF Analysis dialog and this will be used to compare the PTF repository with the base repository X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 246 Inter Repository Options PTF ANALYSIS The PTF Analysis displays the comparison between the PTF repository and the base repository Select the Generate PTF Analysis option first to access the PTF Analysis data Demo Case PTF Analysis Create a demo case for better understanding of the PTF Analysis Follow the given steps to set up the demo case 1 Create a new X Analysis application call it XAN4CDXP with the following libraries Source XAN4CDEMPT Object XAN4CDEMPT 2 Initialize the new application XAN4CDXP 3 To generate the PTF Analysis the first step is to identify libraries as the customised libraries Select the X Analysis application XAN4CDXC and then select the Customized Libraries option from the Inter Repository Options submenu on the context menu This invokes the following dialog Customized Libraries dialog Library Name Customized Customized Apply Changes Cancel Type in XAN4CDEMCU to the Library text box and check the Customized box Then click Add This adds the XAN4CDEMCU library as the customized library X An
290. from the PTF library was found in one of the BASE libraries Vanilla but not in any of the CUSTOMISED libraries User Action The PTF object can overlay the object in the base library X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 249 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Inter Repository Options REFERS The object from the PTF library refers to one or more objects in one of the CUSTOMISED libraries The details are in XPTFROBJ User Action The PTF object will have to be revised to make sure all customised objects referred to still meet the requirements of this object REFERENCED The object from the PTF library is referenced by an object in one of the CUSTOMISED libraries The details are in XPTFROBJ User Action The CUSTOMISED objects will have to be reviewed to make sure the PTF object still meets the requirements of that object MANAGE LINKED REPOSITORIES If you want to link one or more IBM i and or non IBM i Windows cross reference repository to an existing IBM i repository select the Manage Linked Repositories option The option is available under Inter Repository Options You can use this option to manage the linked repositories Linking IBM i Repositories The Manage Linked Repositories option opens the following dialog Manage Linked Repositories dialog Manage Linked Repositories 45 400 Repositories pc Repositories Repository Mame Location 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 250 Inter Reposit
291. g Lig Database Development ie Debug a Java Ev Java Browsing T Java EE default fet Java Type Hierarchy a JavaScript H JPA ED Planning Plug in Development tO Remote System Explorer Fie Resource 5 Team Synchronizing Web X Analysis Click OK X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 474 Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi Select the object from the Member List or the Object List as shown below Selected object WWCUSTS a Remote System Explorer IBM Rational Developer fori File Edit Navigate Search Project Test XA API Call Run Wind Di L HL 37 3 OR FM H Remote Syste 24 5 Team Ce TD OMS5 Wor b of New Connection gt Et Local a fie X Analysis 192 168 21 102 4 B Objects b gt iy Work with libraries AS Work with objects iw Filter created successfully Expand this again to create al gt iz Work with members gt Library list User libraries go XAN4CDEM WWCUSTS gt WWCUSTS pgm rpgle gt BS Commands gt BE IBMi Contexts gt Ge Jobs gt OF IFS Files gt EX Spooled Files FE Qshells b Wh X Ref Libraries ny TB OMS gt Fig X Analysis 192 168 21 100 Now right click on the object to use the X Analysis options The following screenshot shows these options X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 475 Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi X Analysis Options
292. g don wea in by bd i ae e mama yA wera n aa s oa i wi we _ gt Ar gt amp ww ta ta weet eet hy DTE w ewm A lt be or pene se rer ay hs a ae 7 ne ee ee 4 map a i l v be aa et ow i woee bs i oe w mrp ope Be A J ewes o9 os wet ww i n ba aqra w Jim ae s pe A i ASY Pi aan M mrw unin eg Ea a tos wtes A u eo we Ace res Os ws e an are eee he ff po gt mnra i a _ ow E or eee PY n HH tip pihi SJ HO ti yt A DDL MODERNIZATION NODE ON AN APPLICATION AREA The conversion of DDS into DDL is intended for the clients planning to modernize their databases to get the enhanced DDL features Below are some of the benefits 1 Better data integrity data validation is performed at Write Update unlike in DDS where the validation is performed on a read 2 Access to new data types not supported in DDS identity columns BLOBs CLOBs DataLinks etc 3 Better read performance DDS to DDL X Analysis In X Analysis enhancing the maintainability of databases by converting from DDS to DDL can be achieved via the DDL Modernization node This feature is only available for X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 126 Application Area application areas When an application area is expanded the DDL Modernization nod
293. g the objects using CUSF the objects using the LFs built on CUSF e g CUSFL3 are also reported Object Where Used Usage References screen be Object List 34 Object Where Used 22 E Object Where Used Usage References for CUSF Total Objects 77 im Al BSR CONUPDO CONUPD CONUPD2 CUSCPY CUSFLI1 CUSFLZ CUSFL3 CUSFLS CUSFLG Back out account Revert Back Customer Info Update Customer Info Version 1 Update Customer Info Version 2 Customer Copy Sites by Name Sites by Status Sites by Mumber Sites by Dist amp Status Sikes By Dist amp Mame dated By Program File Updated By Prograrn File Updated By Prograrn File Updated By Programm File Reads Written To By Program Logical File Logical File Logical File Logical File Logical File CUSFL Sites by Last Cnt Date Logical File CUSFLE Sites by Next Cnt Date Logical File 4 ll If you select the Object Where Used on a variable in a PGM type object then all objects where the variable has been used are listed Select an object and click ENTER to access its Source List Alternatively double click on that object row Double click on an object from the Object Where Used list to zoom on to the source line where the first reference has been made VARIABLE WHERE USED The Variable Where Used option lists all source lines from the application where the field variable of a file program is used referenced in any of the source members and its associated device
294. ge 298 Data Management Features Data Management Features X Analysis is unique in that it automatically derives the system data model by analyzing both the actual data contents and all programs that use this data to verify the existence of any cross file relationships These potential relationships are verified by performing an integrity check to ensure that all data from the dependent file does indeed validly reference data records from the owning file In this way even the most complex legacy system can be data modelled with relatively no effort View DATA Using the View Data option from the context menu the records of FILE type objects PFs and LFs may be viewed On selecting the View Data option the following Data View is displayed View Data on CUSFL1 Company Distributor Sts Last Next 030514 031025 031102 031125 030408 031006 Bertwhiste amp Company Ltd OT Besson Bros DT Beta Company Limited 031102 031125 030508 031015 Cable Installations Ltd Carmel aeiia Ltd 5 T a Bock amp Co Ltd 3 030408 031006 T 2 Fans 01 05 ee 15 Cus Mo 00001 00015 00140 00014 ob0092 00100 Product Code Computer Products Ltd 18 030408 031006 01 fools Consumer Products Ltd 0 030514 031025 Culver plc 5 030514 031025 Driver Drawdowns plc 9 030908 031013 Express International plc 9 030908 031013 First Chemicals Ltd 3 030514 031025 First Trarinn trd 070514
295. generated X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 444 THUS Appendix J Dual Installation of X Analysis Appendix J Dual Installation of X Analysis X Analysis gets installed on the X Analysis Runtime Environment if both RDP and Runtime Environment are installed as preference is given to the Runtime Environment In order to run X Analysis on both the Runtime Environment and RDP 8 5 you must follow the steps given below 1 Uninstall X Analysis which is installed on RDP and then install X Analysis Runtime Environment 2 Install the X Analysis client 3 In the location where Runtime Environment is installed for e g C Program Files Databorough Eclipse look for a subfolder named dropins This would have a file named com databorough xanalysis plugin link 4 Now locate the installation path for RDP At the same level where eclipse exe lies like C Program Files IBM SDP look for the dropins folder or create one if it does not exist Copy the file as in 3 above to this dropins folder 5 Copy a shortcut to RDP to desktop Right click the shortcut and select Properties At the end of the Target text box append clean 6 Start RDP using the new shortcut X Analysis should be visible as one of the perspectives The UML plugin cannot be installed from within Rational 8 5 as the underlying Eclipse Modelling Framework required for these plugins does not match those which Rational has inbu
296. ght click for the context menu and see the Zoom in Lpex option X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 480 thJsst LEGACY File Edit Navigate Search Project X Analysis TestXAAPICall Run Window Help POIs MOBPE RBr A BAAX By GS Qe SigritirGly Py hay eed a eye etrics Vasnbo i gt I WORXREFORG gt WB WORXREFTST gt I XACNVDEMXA New demo code by Ajeet gt Wf XACNVDEMXB New demo code by Ajeet Java gt Wh XACTISXA MF Source Cobol Mohammed gt Wh XACTISXB XACTIS MF Cobol Mohammed gt Wh XAFAMDH Familiprix XA lib Dhruv gt Wh XAFAMPRDEI Familiprix XA lib DBI gt XAFAMPRIX Familiprix POC gt W XAFAREWAY2 Sample 36 Fareway gt Wh XANITO Japanese Test gt W XANQUERY Rafi Zack s XA lib contents gt W XANQUERY2 Rafi Zack s XA lib contents gt Wh XAN_00 gt Wh XAN401 gt W XAN4CDDDL DDS gt DDL 4 fh XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System W Application Area Diagram a Data Model Diagram Fs Overview Structure Chart 8e All Objects amp Programs b Files Source Files Business Rules ee Consolidated Rules Aa r o Session Items Description Host Name 192 168 21 102 Ay 3o Programs 3 Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi Right click context menu Zoom in Lpex option gt E nteger Quick Access Object List of ALLUSR ALL PGM ALL ALL ALL Total Objects 161 Library CLXANSCDEM CLXANSCDE
297. gle Drive Appendix M Export to Google Drive You can now export DOCX and XLSX type to Google Drive The use of Google Drive export requires Authorization setup As the initial step you will need to authorize the Google Drive and then select the related options from X Analysis Preferences The link provided below helps you with all the information related to the Google Drive Web APIs https developers google com drive web quickstart quickstart java The steps to be followed are given as below 1 Generate a Client ID Client Secret for your google account Click on the link https console developers google com start api id drive amp credential client ke The following window will appear Sign in window Google Developers Console H Goege Developers Loriol N k hii ts googlecom i ii FN xci tA tA Google One account All of Google Sign in to continue to Google Developers Console n Stay sigped in Hesg Heep Creal an acopunt One Google Account for everything Google AaM onwrt Bg a Enalsh United Statasi ia X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 457 Appendix M Export to Google Drive Sign in with your google email id and password 2 After sign in is complete the following registration window will appear Google Developers Console P hitps console developers google com flows enableapi apiid d Q Search Welcome to Google
298. gram DFD is a diagrammatic representation of the data flow A particular application contains many files and programs and a DFD depicts all possible interrelationships among these multiple files and programs contained within a particular application A color coded DFD simultaneously plays the dual role of presenting the data flow at high object level in addition to providing contextual details regarding specific variables and parameters passed between objects The Bus Routing DFD offers two benefits One it gives a precise idea of where and how the inputted data affects the desired output two it helps to visualize how an object within an application correlates with the other objects The diagrams showing the data flow in neat blocks let even non technical users get a clear picture of the object s interrelationships Select the Data Flow Diagram option from the context menu over an object as shown below Data Flow Diagram option CUSTMNT1 e Files E3 Object List of ALLUSR ALL YFILE PF YALL YALL Total Objects 50 A ae 3A Object Where Used Library Mame Type Attribute Description PFXAN4CDEM CPYBKSRE FILE PF HIXAN4CDEM ee PFYAN4CDEM CUSGR PFxAN4CDEM CUSTS PFRAN4CDEM DELIVA PFXAN4CDEM DISTS PFRAN4CDEM EYFEVENT PFYAN4CDEM GENTAB Er s Data Model Diagram Cobol copybooks p zoom Source er Groups gt Data Flow Diagram Object where Used h j Variable Where Used ic Table File
299. gt IP Serial number Ga Partition ID 1 PGroup P05 Security Code modules 123456739 10 Exp 2038 11 30 No installed licenses Click OK to automatically copy the information to the clipboard Now you will simply need to paste the information or take a screenshot of the above window and email it to license freschelegacy com to get the License File Applying the License File Note Proceed with installing the X Analysis V11 client and server only when you have received the License File from support Please store the new License file safely You can continue to use the old version till you receive the new file The following steps are to be taken on Eclipse Rational where X Analysis is installed After you have received the License file the next step is to install it Select the License Manager option from the X Analysis menu as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 36 JHJ LEGACY Using X Analysis Client X Analysis menu License Manager option New DB400 Connection New DBZ Connection Mark all for Docurnenter Change Application Folder Open Log Folder Open Application Folder Authorize Google Drive Report an Issue Install SSL CA certificate The License Manager View will be invoked Browse and enter the License File path as shown below License Manager View with the License File path Host Name Username Use SSL l Info License Security Code 2 Send the Serv
300. h describe data processes that are independent of both the data model and the environment The rule narration too is held along with the rule for better understanding Right click for the context menu on a Screen Component and select the Business Rules option as shown below Business Rules option 2 Screen Components E4 Lali ve Mob E amp i amp Ba gA OO Screen Components For Application Library AM4 CO5 Call Programm Function Type Seq Wo OSPF Format Physical File Title CUSTMANT1 I eerste SMI Sq Screen Source Code 13 CUSTMAT 1020 22F 102 CUSTMNT1_0 sig Function Editor came at Preview Designer eF T Z R I CUSTMNT1_001D R CUSTMNT1_1 Sean E Page Designer CUSTMNT1_101D R zzFqo1 OE Data Content CUSTMNT1_102D R 77FTO2 BRE Screen Actions I R R I R CUSTMNT1_ HL Class Diagram CUSTMNT1 2010 ee a mR Business Rules CUSTMNT1 202D Z2PTU1 Z22F 102 CUSTMNTIR Component Documenter CUSTMATIROID 2 FTO1 ral I j P Annotate The business rules for the source member will get listed The business rules are listed only when the Derive Business Rules option has already been opted on the source member X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 231 i Business Rules for function C Source Member ACUSTMNTI CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1 w HS a TE Rule Number Options on Screen
301. h there is a conditioning logic X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 264 Audit Options Screen Metrics toolbar The Screen Metrics toolbar comprises various options which are discussed below Toolbar available on Screen Metrics window J Screen Metrics E3 E Screen Metrics for XAN4CD A E M a A Screen Metrics Settings The user can set the Screen Metrics settings as per the requirements Screen Metrics Settings button on the Screen Metrics Toolbar IE Screen Metrics 3 E Screen Metrics for XAN4CDXA Ha A Complexity Level Units Files Database Fields Work Fields Outgoing Calls E Grand Total 88 131 664 324 Click Screen Metrics Settings to invoke the associated dialog Screen Metrics Preferences dialog Screen Metrics Preference Setting Files Database Fields Work Fields Ink Calls Fun Keys Cancel The user can set the criteria for High Average using the above dialog Expand All Screen Metrics Data Click Expanded Screen Metrics icon which will expand all the data Expanded Screen Metrics button on the Screen Metrics Toolbar Screen Metrics E3 H Screen Metrics for XAN4CDXA do im fal Complexity Level Units Files Database Fi Work Fi Outgoing In ll Expanded Screen Metrics ou E Grand Total 88 i131 664 324d Print Screen Metrics To print the Screen Metrics information click the Print icon available on the toolbar X Analysis User
302. he Metrics History data will be available only when the Metrics data is generated more than once The Metrics History can be generated for all individual levels High Average amp Low Totals for Batch Programs or Interactive Programs and for the Grand Total also Invoking Metrics History if Summary Metrics i4 i 7 Metrics Analysis for XAN4CDXA Double Click to iew History A A High Total Average Total E Low Total Select High Total Average Total Batch Source Members Low Total and double click to High Total invoke the History window Average Total 3 408 Low Total 76 One can also invoke the History 123 5 095 window for Grand Total or Batch Program or Interactive Program Select Low Total row from the Metrics Window and perform double click action to invoke the Metrics History window as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 260 ths Audit Options Metrics History window i summary Metrics nd Metrics History 2S TEH Metrics History for XAN4CDXA ES v mei Level Change Date Source Lines Cyc Complex Halstead Maint Index Files Device Files eS ES a Current State 2 263 40 211 oe Total 20 months back 2011 08 19 Total 23 months back 2011 06 04 1 904 l3 39 027 2599 3 29 Total 34 months back 2010 07 02 1 910 r09 39 302 S05 Ta 29 2 263 s 40 206 Aone Total 39 months back 2010 02 08 2 465 fal 45 971 0674 Ti 29 Total 42 months ba
303. he Variable Where Used option on the Lpex Source Editor X Analysis Options Variable Where Used File Edit Source Compile G Navigate Search Project TestXAAPICall X Analysis Run Window Help vy HeSie is Moers gt fh XANITO Japanese Test gt Wh XANS_00 gt Wh XAn4 01 gt WB XANACDDDL DDS gt DDL 4 XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System W Application Area Diagram a Data Model Diagram f Overview Structure Chart e All Objects B Programs b Files Source Files Business Rules E Consolidated Rules Screen Components E Change History Regenerated Programs Source Scan A Field Search D gt gt gt f Procedures Db Session Items Description Host Name dioh X Analysis User Manual 11 1 gt W XAFAREWAY2 Sample 36 Fareway gt W XANQUERY Rafi Zack s XA lib contents gt W XANQUERY2 Rafi Zack s XA lib contents G ACCOUNTS Company Accounts A ateemre z w onea BrO BAAXNK A 09A iror Aiamaa AR es F B e edCrashReporter Quick Access ES Remote System Explorer X Analysi frown Amasse OOOO Line 8 Column 12 Replace 000100 000200 000300 000400 000500 000600 000700 000800 000900 001000 001100 001200 001300 001400 001500 001600 001700 001800 001900 002000 002100 002200 002300 002400 002500 002600 002700 002800 002900 003000 003100 003200 003300 003400 terr FFilenffme IPEASFRlen LKlen AlDevice K
304. he access paths for the file and is verified against the data in the file All the primary identifiers are written to the XPIDS file Data View for XPIDS Be Object List S Entities 2 E Entities e TLE PF NAME ASTATUS CNTACS CONDET CONDETNW CONHDR CUSF CUSGRP CUSTS DDLTBLAMP DELIVA DISTS EVFEVENT GENTAB ITEMS LISTS X Analysis User Manual 11 1 PID FILE ASTATUS CNTLF4 CONDET CONDETNW CONHDR CUSFL3 CUSGRP CUSTS DDLTBLAMP DELIVA DISTS EVFEVENT GENTAB ITEMS LISTS KEY STATUS PRPCDE AWORDN AWORDN AWORDN CUSNO AWBNCD AWBCCD CUSNBR AWBDCD DSDCDE EVFEVENT FLDNWAM ITEM LSLCDE KEY STATUS AWABCD AWABCD CODVAL 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 300 Data Management Features Access Paths The second submenu option is Access Paths This file records all of the access paths available to each Physical File There is one XKEYMAP record for each access path You can select the Access Paths option by clicking on the Data Dictionary icon Data Dictionary Access Paths o Object List 5 Access Paths 3 E FILE NAMIE LF NAME ET KEY FIELDS REF FIELDS FIELD ATTRIBUTES 1 ASTATUS ASTATUS STi ATUSA00001 CNTACS CNTACS CUSNOQ PRPCDE SNO NOOO05PCDEA00002 CNTACS CNTLF1 SINIT USERNM NIT AQODOSERNMAOQDOS4 CNTACS CNTLF2 USERNM ERNMAOO034 CNTACS CNTLF3 STATUS CUSNO ATUSA00001SNOQ N00005 CNTACS CNTLF4 PRPCDE STATUS PCDEAG0002 A TU
305. hip Details e Object List 5 Relationship Details 3 gt Oo Relationship Details 3 TYE ati OWN PF DEP PF DEP PF FLD OWN PF FLD KEY SEQ CONSTANT RELNID ASTATUS CNTACS STATUS STATUS 1 0 00102 ASTATUS CUSF STATUS STATUS 1 0 00114 CONDET PROJECT AWORDN AWORDN 1 0 00126 CONDET PROJECT AWABCD AWABCD 2 0 00126 CONDET TRNHST AWORDN AWORDN 1 0 00144 CONDET TRNHST AWABCD AWABCD 2 0 00144 CONDETNW PROJECT AWORDN AWORDN 1 0 CONDETNW PROJECT AWABCD AWABCD 2 0 CONDETNW TRNHST AWORDN AWORDN 1 0 CONDETNW TRNHST AWABCD AWABCD 2 0 CONHDR CONDET AWORDN AWORDN 1 0 CONHDR CONDETNW AWORDN AWORDN 1 0 DATA DICTIONARY OVERRIDES The elaborate Data Modelling process demands the presence of several details Select the Data Dictionary Overrides menu to access detailed information for every field in each file in the application database Much of this data is the standard metadata extracted for each file and stored on the XDD file for instance field and column names field size and field type Thus record metadata is readily available for use by other applications The drop down icon for this option is present alongside the Data Dictionary icon on the X Analysis toolbar The Data Dictionary Overrides submenu options are Data Dictionary Overrides Submenu options AE aK ae we l a Override PIDs E Override Relationships ak Override Relationship Details E Override Program References Override PIDS The first submenu op
306. hy Exclusions The Hierarchy Exclusion option is used to prevent all the programs called by the excluded programs to be shown in the Structure Chart Diagram and the Overview Structure Chart The excluded programs in SCD or OSC are highlighted by a green arrow next to it XARWKUMLE Work with UML Exclusions Use this option to exclude objects for UML diagram Specify the object name which you wish to exclude from the UML diagram INITIALIZATION The initialization can now be executed From the master command XK4WRKAPP screen select Option 12 against the cross reference library for initialization Initialise X Analysis 4 XAXREF Type choices press Enter An laea a Oicaiay a ea ee ae XAN4CDXAT Ob 7 Ser seman aie mes ye an eco ee ee eee OPECIF ITED OPECIFIED for more values Source Libraries s o o o o o o amp SAC IIE IG 0 SP he le LED NONE for more values Tade Source fi hese o o o o o CIC ANOTE ATA VEEG Build Darta Mocel s s o o o o x NO x NO Generave Busimess RUS 2 xNO NO ioe elke OK SIRS aS o o o o o o x NO x NO Include obsolete source object SINC Ne X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 17 HIS Configure Cross Reference Library Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys You can change the default job queue QBATCH by changing the job description for XAOBJ XAN4 Use the following command to change the job descrip
307. iable Where Used view is available up to six view levels and the Default View Level icon located on the toolbar allows access to these levels Expanded View Level Menu SA Variable Where Used 3 i Al Ra izl 7HE ariable Where Used for 4LL CUSNO Lines 184 View Level Levell w Levell Nane Seq Wo tasata l vvetdess Z t Level Rae BcecusTsp o270 00 3 ZCUSNO R Level XANACDEM CUIRE CBCUSTSD 0383 00 a ZCUSNO R Lv4 Parameters XANACDEM CU CLET 0004 00 DCL VAR sCUSNO TYPE L 5 Cascading Parameters CLET 0009 00 CHGVAR lt CUSNO amp CUSNC Maximum Tracking CLET 0010 00 CALL LETW1 amp CUSNO PREFIX LETS0 CLETN 0001 00 PGM PARM CUSNO PREFIX sLLETSQ lt liii gt Higher Variable Where Used levels can be requested using VWU Levels The Variable Where Used levels display the following information Level 1 Direct references to the field I F Em g imm a CBCUSTAD CBCUSTAD CLET CLET CLET CLETH CLETH CLETN CHTACS le Where Used for 4LL Varia ICUSNO Lines 184 View Level Levell led si Variable Where Used Level 1 View A a a i DT ZCUSNO R E 19 ZZREFFLO CUSNO XANACDEM CUSTS ZCUSNO R 0 19 22REFFLD CUSNO XANACDEM CUSTS DCL VAR sCUSNO TYPE DEC LEN S 0 CHGVAR amp CUSNO sCUSHC CALL LETW1 sCUSNO gPREFIX sLETSQ PGN PARN gCUSNO PREFIX sLLETSQ DCL VAR sCUSNO TYPE DEC LEN S 0 CALL LETW1 sCUSNO PREFIX LLETS0 A CUSNO oF O
308. ibutes S CNAME Company CLSNO Cus No a CMMNTI eae Ne 3 CMMNTI una ORG Organisation a CMMNT Comment Line 8 CMMNTZ Comment Line 2 CHMNTS Comment Line 3 ii a 1 v CMMNTS Comment Line 3 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 180 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Program Logic Documentation Legend icon The Legend icon on the toolbar displays details of the color scheme used by the DFD Click the icon shown below Legend icon fe Files Spy Object Where Used CUSTMNT1 Ea cuSr E3 E Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 fF a Bly amp Os de Legend z S USF Oo CUSFLA Sites Sites by Product renamed From l cusfla For testing Access Paths 13 Objects H No attributes P Input Programs 59 Objects H s lt gt The color scheme helps you understand the reference and association of specific objects like how each object is referred to or used by the main object on which the DFD was opted The expanded view of the Legend is given underneath Legend Expanded e Files ZA Object Where Used CUSTMNITI el usr E3 0 Object Centered Data Flow Diagram For CUSF Total Objects 94 Po g im A amp i e m Access path ha E Called 5 CUSFLA J Sites by Product renamed From F Calling cusfla For testing b Access Path No Attributes F Input Progr E Input b Input Servic D Internal routine F CUSFLE F Input Trigge Output Sites by Salesperson b Input Outpe i
309. igh level view of a Synon program The X 2E feature allows the user to merge the user source invoked by EXCUSRSRC function into the Synon program to present a complete view of the residual logic By default this functionality is always available and the XSZ2EMRGEUS data area is set to YES If it is changed to NO then the X 2E process will not merge the user source into the Synon program Synon Debug Data This X 2E feature allows the user to maintain the Synon debug data in the XS2EDEBUG file in the cross reference library To enable this feature the user needs to change the value of the XSZ2ERUNDBG data area to YES By default the data area XS2ZERUNDBG is set to NO Synon Consolidated RTVCND Values The X 2E reengineering process creates the RTVCND values in the XS2EYYCNDX table This is a special feature which works only when the user sets the value of the XSZEYYRUN data area to YES By default it is set to NO Synon Prototype Library By default the Synon base product library is set to Y2SY for the various X 2E functionalities In case it does not match your setup then change the XAZEPROLIB data area to suit your environment As an example Y1SY is another base product library X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 410 HSA Appendix E Overriding Data Tables Appendix E Overriding Data Tables SYNON FUNCTION KEY OPTION DEFAULTS The XS2EFODFT table identifies default function keys a
310. ight click on the bookmarked field and select the Remove Bookmark option or use the Delete option from the X Analysis Bookmarks window To view the bookmarked items click the X Analysis Bookmarks icon featured on the X Analysis toolbar X Analysis toolbar displaying the X Analysis Bookmarks icon X Analysis Source List of CONO01 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 View Level 5 Sei File Edit Navigate Search Project Analysis Tomcat Run Window Help EO EPe kB A BAAN E s PLY pce kaa o TI When you click the icon the following window is invoked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 172 Quick Reference to an Object X Analysis Bookmarks window Object Source Description Ref Library Location CONOO1 C INOS DOUEQ I Se ee Oe line 27 USF u CNAME 34A TESTE Company XAM4CDKA line 2 FT You also have the option to share the bookmarks When shared the bookmarks become visible to others who are using the same cross reference The following window displays the Share option X Analysis Bookmarks context menu showing the Share option Object Source Description Ref Library Location COMODI C ee DOUEQ I KAMAO A CUSF Ea Foom Source i 34A TEXT Company XAN4CDXA lineZ2 ocal Shared X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 173 ths Program Logic Documentation DATA FLOW DIAGRAM Program Logic Documentation A Data Flow Dia
311. ils showing key in blue color e Files iE File Field Details 3 gt a File Field Details for XANACDEM CUSTS Total Fields 40 im Al Mnemonic Long Name Length Dec Pos Grid Seq AWG4ATA Mame CHAR AWB2CD Statement_Account CHAR AWBSCD Related Account CHAR AWHITA Tax_Reg CHAR AWEONB Bank PACKED AWIUNO Bank c PACKED AWDVCD Forex CHAR AWBNCD CusGrp CHAR PERSON Rep CHAR DSDCDE Distributor CHAR AWBTCD Terms CHAR Credit Limit PACKED eo a a a a a et el LFs ACCcESS PATHS Select the LFs Access Paths option to display all Access Paths for the selected physical file Opt for the context menu on a PF from the Object Member List and then select the LFs Access Paths option X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 168 THUS Quick Reference to an Object LFs Access Paths fe Object List E Access Paths 23 E LFs Access Paths for CUSF Total Objects 14 im Al Access Path Text Unique Keys SelectfOmit Field Mames LF Seq Do Not Dis ee eee CUSFLA Sites by Product ren CUSFLB Sites by Orig List CUSFLC Sites by Salesperson CUSFLO Sites by Validator PRPCDOE CNAME 0000S LSLCDE CNAME OO0L4 SINIT CNAME OOO VINTT CNAME OO006 ORG CNAME a000 CNAME adagi STATUS CNAME apoga CUSNO OOO DSDCDE STATU OO009 DSOCDE CNAME 00010 CUSFLE Sites by Organisation CUSFL1 Sites by Mame CUSFL2 Sites by Status CUSFL3 Sites by Number CUSFLS Sites by Dist amp Status CUSFL6 Sites By Di
312. ilt The new version of EMF no longer supports the UML2Tools plugins that are supplied with our UML Support msi X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 445 Appendix K Use SSL feature Appendix K Use SSL feature The X Analysis Sign on dialog is equipped with the Use SSL feature The feature has been introduced to transfer data in a secure manner The box is unchecked by default Check the box to enable the feature while working with X Analysis The following screenshot shows the dialog X Analysis Sign on dialog Host Name 192 168 21 102 Username SKHAN Before using this feature follow the given steps to establish the SSL connection 1 Choose the X Analysis drop down menu from the X Analysis toolbar and click on the Install SSL CA certificate feature The selection is shown below X Analysis drop down menu Install SSL CA certificate feature File Edit Navigate Search Project X Analysis Tomcat Run Window Help ras ON J fa License Manager ae a pE D Ee e New DE400 Connection Navi gation Metrics Dechboani New DB2 Connection a ff 192 168 170 10 Mark all for Documenter Change Application Folder Open Log Folder Open Application Folder Authorize Google Drive Report an Issue Install SSL CA certificate X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 446 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Appendix K Use SSL feature 2 Click Install SSL CA certifi
313. image X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 459 JHJ LEGACY Google Developers Conse Appendix M Export to Google Drive APIs window x VY Apps For quick access place your bookmarks here on the bookmarks bar Import bookmarks now Google Projects My Project APIs amp auth APIs Credentials Consent screen Push Monitoring Source Code Compute Networking Storage Big Data Support Need help Privacy amp terms Sign up for a free trial Enabled APIs gmail com Some APIs are enabled automatically You can disable them if you re not using their services NAME QUOTA BigQuery API Debuglet Controller API Drive API Google Cloud SQL Google Cloud Storage Google Cloud Storage JSON API x Browse APIs NAME QUOTA STATUS o o o o o oO z z z Ad Exchange Buyer API 1 000 requests day Ad Exchange Seller API 10 000 requests day If not locate it under Browse APIs The image below shows Drive API as OFF Click OFF to enable the feature Directions AFI Distance Matrix API DoubleClick Search API Drive API Drive SDK Elevation API Enterprise License Manager API Fitness API Drive API under Browse APIs section 2 500 requests day 2 500 requests day 100 000 requests day 10 000 000 requests day 2 500 requests day 10 000 requests day 86 400 requests day 5 Under My Project gt APIs amp auth
314. ingle System Document Options oystem Documentation Specify Contents Select features to be included in the System Document Object List Data Model Diagram Normal In Word as Image C Detailed In Visio Annotation _ LF Access Path details _ Detailed _ File Field Details _ Field Annotation Object Where Used _ Data Flow Diagram Normal C Detailed Annotation Structure Chart Normal D Expanded O Detailed Depth hi Annotation Screen Flow Diagram Normal D Expanded Program Structure Chart _ Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal C Detailed _ Business Rules S E _ Export to MS Excel Summary _ Detailed _ Include Internal Rtn s _ Source sourcelevel 1 w _ Pseudo Code Flowchart Level _ Business Process Logic Level A user can select different options from the above dialog as per the requirements If a user selects the Business Rules for documentation then he has the option to get the business rules documented in MS Excel This can be done by checking the Export to MS Excel option If the user selects the Business Rules for documentation with the Summary X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 339 Document Manager option then the basic rule information will be documented if the user selects the Detailed option then the logic behind the rule will also be documented JHJ LEGACY Single System Document Featur
315. ion Package Naming options Project Name _ Application Area Name _ Package Prefix Only Package Pretix Function Level Logging Function Level Lagging None Public All Restore Defaults Apply You can modify the following X Redo Preferences Web Server Folder Specify the path for the Web Server folder You may specify the Tomcat folder other than the one installed by X Redo installer Web URL Specify the X Redo URL for its execution The default value is 127 0 0 1 You may change the Tomcat port to use X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 54 p y Using X Analysis Client T O Grid Display These configure the grid presentation l TA o Show 5250 Grid Labels Checkbox The default value is checked o No of rows to display in the Grid Drop down This is used to set the default number of rows to display in a grid The default value is DEFAULT You can override the default rows to show by setting the number of rows to show on each grid Site Date Format This is used to set the default date format settings for the generated web pages You may select the required date format to use on the generated web pages to show and receive the dates Numeric Precision o Higher Numeric Precision Selecting this option would use the BigDecimal data type instead of Double data type Package Naming options Radio button o Project Name Name of the project as spe
316. ion The highlighted objects are those referred to by the object Input This depicts the input file if program is selected and a program receiving input if file is selected Output This depicts the output file if program is selected and a program writing output if file is selected Update This depicts the Update file Called Program This depicts the program called by other programs Calling Program This depicts the program calling other programs Click Export Options and select to export the generated AFD into either MS Visio or Image Area Flow Diagram with Export Options JA Area Flow Diagram 3 a Area Flow Diagram for MYCPROCESS Total Objects 30 aN f oar Bs Export to MS Visio i WWCUSTS jp Z CONHDR gt i aa concert tol Work with Customer Groups Contract Header E casera sks Customers CUSFSEL _TRNHST TRNTYP CUSTMNT1 i Customer Site Transaction History Transaction type Customer Detail Selection description hiintenance 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 145 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 ANUS Quick Reference to an Object Quick Reference to an Object X Analysis is loaded with various options that provide more information regarding the various objects members These options let you to refer to any given object in quick time and also provide relevant information and or diagrammatic presentations as is required Feature Brief Description
317. ion Library Edit Problem Categories Generate Problem Analysis View Database Size Statistics For detailed description refer to the Audit Options section WorK WITH MULTIPLE LIST OPTIONS X Analysis facilitates you to work flexibly and methodically by generating multiple lists Under an application library double click on these nodes Files Programs or All Objects to display the Work with Objects dialog Alternatively click Member List from the toolbar to bring up the Work with Members dialog Likewise you can access additional lists by double clicking on the Source Files node to view the source list comprising source files Double click on an individual Source File to view its Member List The various lists that can be generated are as under Lists Brief Description Object List Displays a list of all specified objects Member List Displays a list of all specified source members Source Files Displays a list of all source files Business Rules Displays a list of all business rules and their narrations Consolidated Rules Displays a list of all rules based on file field combination Screen Components Displays a list of all reengineered components Change History Displays a list of all source members that are modified Procedures Displays a list of all procedures X Analysis Bookmarks Displays a list of objects that are bookmarked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 76 Joa d
318. ion and its location Audit report generates Single document with documentation of the selected Application 4reafCross Ref Audit report Documentation type Generate Single Audit report Document Document Details Mame Browse Audit Report For 4h4CO 4 pdf Path C Program Files Databoroughis Analwsis 192 168 170 10 PCF 4h4cCb 4 Quit Report For s4N4C0 4 pdf Cancel Specify Type and Location Click Next X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 279 Summary Report Options X Analysis Audit Report Options Select option to be included in the Audit report Audit Report Metrics Analysis Problem Analysis Summary Detailed Difference Analysis Summary Detailed Business Process Logic Metrics Mark options to be included in the Summary Report and click Next Summary Report Specify Sequence X Analysis Audit Report Specify Sequence What sequence Would you like to have For the Audit report Metrics Analysis Problem Analysis Difference Analysis X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Audit Options Cancel Page 280 Audit Options Specify the sequence of contents for the Summary Report and click Next Summary Report Finish X Analysis Audit Report Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Paper Size Metrics Analysis f Problem Analysis Lette
319. is for Eclipse shortcut and select the Run as administrator option Refer to the description of the option given above INITIALIZATION REPORTS After initializing an IBM i application various log reports are generated by the X Analysis server The log reports generated are categorized as Program Reference Exclusions Missing Object and Source Program Reference Exclusions These exclusions are specified in the XAOBJ XPGREXCS file X Analysis is shipped with XPGREXCS file containing values QRN QLE QC QM QS The file is duplicated into the user s X Analysis library Any program reference specified in this file is excluded from the X Analysis program cross reference database X XPGRF Two reports are produced to list all actual exclusions XARRMIVN program reports on exclusions from the DSPPGMREF output E X PMxX1 program lists exclusions from the QBNLPGMI output Missing Object and Source Various programs in X Analysis initialization process write mismatches to all logs These mismatches are printed out under the following headings References to Objects not loaded References to Sources not loaded Source Code without Objects The above reports help you to interpret the outcome of the initialization command run on an IBM i application SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION FAILED FILENOTFOUNDEXCEPTION On executing the X Analysis Documenter if the following error is reported X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015
320. ist S OEMENU 23 Structure Chart for OEMENU Total Objects 14 4 OEMENL Order Entry Menu 001 Orde 7 OE001 Order Entry aa CUSLET Customer Leti CUSLET 1 Cust Be Screen Report Design Screen Report Source Consolidated Rules a A E RB A T i o omm Moml Zoom Source Data Flow Diagrarn Object Where Used r 3 Variable Where Used r Hierarchical Structure Chart h Structure Chart Diagram 8 Inverted Structure Chart Frogram Structure Chart Joj 6 E The screenshot below shows the delineation of the main object OEMENU into several blocks of related objects in the order of calling The color codes signify the identity of objects as command based or input based or print based and so on Hierarchical Structure Chart Se Object List A OEMENU 3 m Hierarchical Structure C EMENU Total Objects 14 F x ga Cai O OEMENU Order Entry Menu Referred Files LJ OE002 Order Enquiry Product Enquiry Order Entry Referred Files Referred Files Referred Files L OE004 Customer Enguiry Mainte Referred Files X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc OEOOG Print Invoices Referred Files LJ CUSLET Customer Letter Stage 1 Page 191 Program Logic Documentation Narration Access the additional details related to an object through the icon Narratives icon Ye Object List E Hierarchical Structure C
321. ith 1 O or B are renamed to start with Il OO and BB are set accordingly with the long field names which have been passed as the actual parameter from the calling 2E program s action diagram The example below illustrates this DRPRDFR Action diagram snippet Execute function Scan EXECUTE FUNCTION Scan TYPE EXCUSRSRC PARAMETER RCD Oms_ status PARAMETER CTL Oms_status_p12 PARAMETER LCL Scanresult Execute user source content of Scan Scan for search string Parameters 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 414 Ths Appendix F X2E Specific Features x input ixutx te onderzoeken string input ixvtx zoekstring output Ounnb positie X D up C const ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORS D TUVWXYZ D lo w const abcdefghi klmnopars D tuvwxyz D ulen S 3 Initialize parameters movel blank u scanl 80 C movel plank uscan2 80 G movel Plank utranl 80 movel DLank utran2 80 C z add ZeELO uresul U Te onderzoeken string saven in uscan2 C movel ixutx uscan2 Zoekstring saven in uscanl C movel ixvtx uscanl Lengte van de zoekstring bepalen C eval ulen Slen Strim uscan1 Startpositie in de te onderzoeken string bepalen C z add 1 upos 3 0 Translate USCAN1 to Uppercase C lozup xlate scarnl tcranl Translate USCAN2 to Uppercase LOrup xlate uscan2 utran2 Find argument utranl ulen scan e utranZz upos uresul Li gError C z add 999 ounnb
322. ith Annotation Source Source Flow Chart Program Structure Chart Screen Flow Diagram Normal Move Up Move Down Cancel From the above screen the user can re sequence the options selected for System Documentation After re sequencing click Next to reach the final step of documentation wizard Here the user can see all the selections that he has made and can also define X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 346 Document Manager various options related to document formatting like Paper Size Contention Resolution etc Individual System Documents Finish oystem Documentation Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Level Settings Data Flow Diagram Normal with Annotation Structure Chart Level 5 Structure Chart Normal with Annotation Source Level 1 Source Source Flow Chart Level 1 Source Flow Chart Screen Flow Diagram Level 1 Program Structure Chart Screen Flow Diagram Normal Paper Size C Letter 8 5 x 11 Ad Size 8 27 x 11 69 Contention Resolution System Documentation creates documents in Application Folder If the Application Folder ts shared and documents are created opened while the documentation is in progress then this may lead to contention Please select appropriate options to enable resolution C Do not overwrite Overwrite if exists but if in use then Create document by similar na
323. ject generated by the Re generate Programs The screenshot below shows the generated Java project with both Generate Business Logic amp DAO and Ul checkboxes checked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Generated Java Project e Aa2edemoMigrate 8 Aazedemo dao gt PB Aa2edemo daoservices gt P Aa2edemo data AaZzedemo jsfbean gt pP Aatedemo logic gt 8 Aa2edemo logic data gt pP com databorough utils applicationContext datasource xml applicationContext xml constants_en properties datasource override properties datasource properties log4 xml messages _en properties persistence xml gt Bey JRE System Library jre6 gt Ta Referenced Libraries cont gt 2 META INF gt 2 WebContent F build properties e build xml 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 424 Appendix F X2E Specific Features The tool also gives the option to review the Reengineered Action Diagram and the generated Java code side by side by clicking the Show Spilt Panel icon on the Reengineered Action Diagram view Generated Java Project be Object List TSAJEIR egetpomdta zmessages zmsgqidxiz eqetwrktlds ti ertncode hlanks select when in03 on Or ferror lt gt on select when in03 on other znxtpgren 00203 znxtpom TSALEFR zputwektlds ij eputpomdta smessagqes zmsqidx zstatevar recur endal jiii private void zgetpamdta MSGOBJ z
324. l Page 390 Appendix C Component Documenter Component Documentation Wizard Screen lV X Analysis System Documentation Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Level Settings Screen Components Residual Lagic Level 4 Header Information Data Content Screen Actions Screen Design Residual Logic Business Rules Summary Paper Size Letter 8 5 x 11 A4 Size 8 27 x 11 69 Contention Resolution System Documentation creates documents in Application Folder IF the Application Folder is shared and documents are createdfopened while the documentation is in progress then this may lead to contention Please select appropriate options bo enable resolution Do not overwrite Overwrite if exists but if in use then Create document by similar name O Exit Skip document creation Here you can see all selections that he has made and can also define various options related to document formatting like Paper Size and Contention Resolution Click Finish to generate the document The Progress status is displayed on screen while generating the system document The document will be located in the specified save location After the documentation process is over the following screen is displayed by X Analysis to open the generated document X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 391 Appendix C Component Documenter X
325. l objects in the supplied X Analysis libraries For details refer to Initializing X Analysis doc X Analysis release 10 x onwards is digitally signed 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 12 THUS Configure Cross Reference Library Configure Cross Reference Library Before the X Analysis Client can be used the cross reference library i e the application repository has to be built The initialization process takes care of the setting up of the cross reference database This chapter presents the steps specific command screens and the command keys for building a cross reference library WORK WITH X ANALYSIS FOR APPLICATIONS On the IBM i type the X4AWRKAPP command and press ENTER X4WRKAPP command screen X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Applications Databorough Ltd XARWKAPP 12 58 51 Ean o Enter options press Enter 1 Authorities 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 X A Log 8 Libraries 9 Variable Calls 10 App areas 11 Reports 12 Initialise 13 Build data model 14 Refresh 15 Gen Business Rules 16 Exclusions 17 Objects 18 Pgm Stds MS aers 5 Male Teste Company division XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System Fl Help F3 Exit F6 Add F10 Cmd Line F12 Cancel F24 More Keys The X4WRKAPP is the master command menu of the X Analysis Server The first step is to add a new cross reference library Press F6 to add a cross reference library X4WRKAPP Add Application screen X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Applications
326. lay Print Input Output Internal Routine This refers to the Synon specific routines Indeterminate This depicts the programs where the usage cannot be programmatically determined Trigger This depicts the program which is a Trigger Module This depicts the program which is a Module X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 196 INVERTED STRUCTURE CHART Program Logic Documentation The Inverted Structure Chart depicts the reverse order of the calling programs In other words it traces the backward movement of how a specific program gets called It shows the immediate calling programs that may be the same for the other programs called In the screenshot below XCMMENU program is calling for both WWCUSF and CUSFMAINTC along with the main called program CUSFMAINT fe Object List Inverted Structure Chart for CUSFMAINT Inverted Structure Chart CUSFRGINT Customer Site Maintenance CUSFMAINT Customer Site Maintainance OTH WA CUSF Work with Customer Sites EDTFIL Legend OTH SCMMENLU Customer System Main Menu The image and the description of the Inverted Structure Chart Legend are as follows Update This depicts the program that updates a file Display This depicts the program that uses a Display file Print This depicts the program that uses a Print file Input This depicts the program that uses an Input file Output This de
327. lay the reported issue Option 7 Notes Use this option to provide notes related to the issue Option 8 Comp Errors Displays Compilation Errors for the program Option 9 Missing Files Displays Missing Files required by the program F20 Summary Displays Project Summaries The user can see various project summaries by opting for F15 F21 Project Notes Displays Project Notes F22 File Errors Reports the File in Errors 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 408 X2E RPG Work with X2E File Errors Appendix D XREDOAPP Command F22 screen Files in Error Databorough Ltd XARWKDBERR Project AA2EDEMO Ref d Project RF2EDEMO Is Soe IL HARR 21 Jan 20L3 File Description FFD0001 EDAAPI Pole EDAAPT nen an OR ECT Bottom Fl Help F3 Exit F1l12 Cancel X Analysis User Manual 11 1 X 2E DATA AREAS The user can customize the X 2E settings to meet the project specific needs These can be controlled by the data areas available in the X Analysis cross reference library The purpose of each data area has been detailed below Synon Date Fields This data area indicates that the Date Fields have already been processed If the process is successful in processing the date fields it sets the XS2EDTSRUN data area to YES The default value is NO Synon Entry Parameters The entry parameters processing for a Synon application is governed by the reengineering process and the details are maintained
328. layed Schema Diagram Select the Schema Diagram option to invoke the block diagram for the entire schema The diagram shows the files and relation among the files Various relevant details like the primary keys foreign keys columns are presented in the Schema Diagram X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 139 JHJ LEGACY K DDL Conversion Error log Schema Diag File Conversion Report ram for RMTDDL W RMTDDL i4 Application Area E DDL Schema Diagram for RMTDDL B ASTATUSLI Columns STATUS STSTAT X Analysis User Manual 11 1 E CONDET PRODUCT CONTRACT Primary Keys Columns CONTRACT PRODUCT STORE REF NO TRN_HST_TRN_TYPE CONTRACT_OTY STK_UNIT_OF_MEASURE PRICE 2015 Fres E CONHDR Primary Keys CONTRACT Columns CONTRACT DEBTOR CUST_REF CONTRACT _DATE STATUS REP CONTRACT VALUE ADDRESS ADDRESS_2 ADDRESS 3 ADDRESS_4 POST CODE COUNTRY che Legacy Inc B CUSF Columns COMPANY DISTRIBUTOR STATUS PHONE EXTN LAST CONTACT DATE NEXT_CONTACT_DATE CONTACT SALUTATION JOB_TITLE FAX NO EMAIL WEBSITE ADDRESS 1 ADDRESS 2 ADDRESS 3 ADDRESS 4 COUNTRY POST CODE CUS_NO COMMENT_LINE_1 COMMENT_LINE_2 Page 140 Application Area Diagramming Application Area Diagramming APPLICATION AREA DIAGRAM X Analysis allows easy subdivision of an application into business areas or application areas You can split the application ar
329. lder IF the Application Folder is shared and documents are created opened while the documentation is in progress then this may lead to contention Please select appropriate options to enable resolution Do not overwrite Overwrite iF exists but if in use then Create document by similar name O Exit Skip document creation Click Finish to generate the document No Detailed Object Documentation If the No Detailed Object Documentation option is selected then only the Overview Structure Chart and or the Data Model Diagram as specified in the Application Area Options dialog is created X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 360 Document Manager No Detailed Object Documentation X Analysis System Documentation Application Area Options Select Application Area Features to be included in the System Document Diagram Options Overview Structure Chart Normal Expanded Detailed Data Model Diagram Normal In PDF as Image Detailed In visio Show All Application Area Diagram Annotation d Application 4rea Annotation Coverage of System Document Detailed Object Documentation in Alphabetical Order Detailed Object Documentation in Call Sequence Order No Detailed Object Documentation Click Next to proceed further X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 361 Document Manager Sequencing of the Application Area Features
330. le on the context menu over the Object Member List then it will generate the Activity Diagram and the Class Diagram for that Object ACTIVITY DIAGRAM The Activity Diagram illustrates the dynamic nature of a system by modelling the flow of control from activity to activity An activity represents an operation on some class in the system that results in a change in the state of the system Typically Activity Diagrams are used to model workflow or business processes and internal operation Let us see how an Activity Diagram looks for our example From the tutorial application XAN4CDXA select the CUSTMNT1 program and opt for the context menu on it then select the Activity Diagram option This invokes the Activity Diagram as displayed below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 294 UML Diagramming Activity Diagram for CUSTMNT1 thJs0 LEGACY CUSTMAIT 1 Customer Detail Maintenance FfFTO1 Customer Detail Maintenance FFF T02 Customer Detail Maintenance rh rh WCLIS TPR Print Customer Detail rh Function Logic The Function Logic is available as context menu on Activity Diagram The following screen displays the Function Logic options on an Activity Diagram X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 295 UML Diagramming Function Logic options on Activity Diagram for CUSTMNT1 CUSTMNT1 activity umlact 2 3 A lt CUSTMNT 1iCustomer Detail Maintenance a
331. lem category To write the entry in the XPRBOBJS file for the above category you have to write your own logic as displayed below File Edit Yew Communication Actions Window Help 5 D0 AR BS a t ed O10 Host Port Workstation ID Disconnect Columns T 1 71 Browse QRPGLESRC SEU gt XRADDTRGRS Fan E E T RT 8 age r A N Wi aes e 0085 00 read e xtriggers 0086 00 dow not eof xtriggers and not error 0087 00 if trfile lt gt blanks and trtrig lt gt blanks 0088 00 0089 00 Ensure the file object exists 0090 00 chainle trfile FILE xobjectt1 0091 00 if found xobjectt1 and not error 0092 00 0093 00 Retrieve the source file and source library details 0094 00 chainle trfile trfatr xmember11 0095 00 if found xmemberl1 and not error 0096 00 0097 00 Source library 0098 00 orbsrclib x lib 0099 00 0100 00 Source filey 0101 prbsrcfil xsrcf F9 Retrieve Fi0 Cursor T Er T 04 018 J 1902 Session successfully started X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 287 File Edit Yew Communication Acton Window Help 8 DA AR BS a ht 2 ee Host File Edt Yew Carmmunication Part Columns SEU FMT 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 0115 0116 0117 Acton Window Help Disconnect Workstation ID QRPGLESRC XRADDTRGRS Write the record in XPRBOBJS fil
332. les you to hide show objects In the following screenshot the icon against Access Paths is clicked to hide objects X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 175 l be Files ahh Object Where Used Hide Option for Objects CUSTMINT E cur i Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 custa For testing CUSF B O Sites b Access Paths 13 Objects F gt Attributes P Input Programs 59 Objects b Input Services 1 Object Abide objects P Input Triggers 1 Object H CUSFLA Sites by Product renamed from CUSFLC Sites by Salesperson Program Logic Documentation TE ea M R Ar Pa J CUSFLE Sites by Orig List b Attributes J CUSFLO Sites by Validator P Input Output Programs 2 Objects H P Attributes P Attributes v E The following screenshot shows how another click displays all the objects within Show Option for Objects e Files Sy Object Where Used CUSTMNT ER CUSF 3 a Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 im fly amp ig aa A USF b Access Paths P Input Programs b Input Services P Input Triggers B 1 Object gebo Objects 1 Object H P InputiGutput Programs 2 Objects H P Update Prograrns H b Update Output Programs 4 Objects H i 14 Objects H Expand Collapse Referenced Objects La CUSCPY customer Copy P Attributes SECFO Reorganize Codes File b Sttributes I lt we The DFD takes a
333. lication Data Migration Inter Repository Options Audit Options NEW APPLICATION AREA X Analysis creates an application area from part of one or multiple systems It is possible to programmatically subdivide an application into logical modules or areas For more details refer to the Application Area section ADD ALTERNATE DATA LIBRARY LIST The library list changes accordingly when you select a cross reference library This library list contains cross reference library data library QGPL QTEMP and XAOBJ When you select the View Data option on a PF or LF then data is displayed from the data library mentioned in the library list X Analysis provides a feature called Alternate Data X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 58 THUS Application Library Library List if you want to use a data library other than the ones mentioned in the library list The Add Alternate Data Library List option is available on the right click menu of a cross reference library It provides a method of inserting a library or a group of libraries into the data portion of the library list This gives a name to a group of libraries that can be maintained by the Work with Alternate Data Library List option discussed below On selecting the Add Alternate Data Library List option the following dialog appears Add Alternate Data Library dialog Add Alternate Data Library List Eg Mame TEST Description Alternate Data Library
334. llup group describes the cumulative component function of the program and its dependents The following types of Rollup groups are available UPD At least one program updates a file PRT Program and dependent programs create a printed report DSP Program and dependent programs use input files and display files OTH No cumulative component function can be determined Function Type Function Type describes the function of the object and is based on COOL 2E definitions Hierarchy Exclusions in SCD Work with Exclusions is Option 16 on the X4WRKAPP master command menu With the help of this feature you can add a program s name for Hierarchy Exclusions This has effect in the SCD and the OSC This feature removes the child nodes of the excluded object and a green arrow is displayed to indicate the hierarchy exclusion The following screen shows this feature Hierarchy Exclusions in SCD te Object List S CUSFMAINTC amp Structure Chart for CUSFMAINTC Total Objects 2 a A x amp H iCUSFMAINTC Customer Site Maintainance CUSFMAINT Customer Site Maintenance X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 185 ahs Program Logic Documentation Repeated nodes in SCD The SCD displays the repeated objects having child nodes with a green arrow beside them The following image shows the repeated nodes in an SCD Repeated nodes in SCD Structure Chart for XCMMENU Total Obje
335. located to any other area Referenced Files NOT APPLICABLE WHEN THE SELECTED OBJECT IS A FILE Owning Files N Do not include any owned files Y Include files which own the selected file C Include files which own the selected file or which own those in turn and so on Dependent Files N Do not include files which are owned by the selected file Y Include files which are owned by the selected file C Include files which are owned by the selected file or which are owned by those in turn and so on Special case when Referenced Programs and Referenced Files are set to U Feature Brief Description Referenced U Include programs which update the selected file or any file Programs added by these rules Owning Files NOT APPLICABLE Referenced Files U Include files which are updated by the selected program or any program added by these rules Dependent Files NOT APPLICABLE Make the appropriate selections in this dialog for adding or modifying a rule for a specific application area X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 113 Application Area Affinity Identification The Affinity Identification option displays the linkage of a program to another program and thereby helps to identify the objects that do not exist in an application area but have high or low affinity to one or multiple programs under that application area mainly due to data linkages or program dependencies The affinity c
336. lowing screen displays the File Metrics information for the cross reference library XAN4CDXA X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 266 J Audit Options Cc Window displaying File Metrics for XAN4CDXA ae if ile Metrics ii mT File Metrics for XAN4CDXA am lt r LEGACY Mame Units Fields Access Paths Creating Pgms Reading Pgms Updating Pgms Deleting Pgms Total References O Grand Tota aaae sh ge a accounts a 16 CONHDR 16 1735 66 3 SB CONUPD 3 100 28 BB CUSFMAINT 11 156 45002 BBR O CUSTOMERS 13 154 S12 BR BUSINESS PROCESS LOGIC METRICS The Business Process Logic Metrics Report displays business process logic data in metrics form Total Lines Excluded Lines Controller Lines and Residual Logic The following screen displays the Business Process Logic Metrics Report for XAN4CDXA Business Process Logic Audit Report for XAN4CDXA Id Summary Metrics i4 a 75 Business Process Logic Audit Report for AN4CD2A i Al a Za 7 Mame Total Lines Excluded Lines Controller Lines Residual Logic CBS06R 141 135 CHT CMAINT 196 19 li CAT CMAINTR eval 187 CONDO Eris els CORNOOLR 441 ere CUSCPY l 61 CUSFMAINT 254 eda CUSFMAINTR 326 239 CUSFMOLD end 240 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPECIALIZED ANALYSIS The Specialized Analysis option allows users to design their own reports using the full metrics database in the defined system repository the summary metric
337. loyal a oes ee AA2EDEMO Member a o 2 amp XA4LOG RECOrd 2 ane as 36 Comae rere ee B COLUMM o o o o o 1 Pind r E E T E E E S E E ret ai mach Mente ee ear E a r ceeeeba neers eieers A020 3 00S 433 33 AA EDEMO E RE EN Program TSAHSRR MANOJK ZOTZ OO T e 00S TAA EDEMO XREGEN Brocmamnk eaS Mirra MANOJK 202 009 222 03372 CRAZE DEMO XREGEN micomicsiils ank EMEA MANOJK X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 404 AOI 0 SIZ ZO 209 alee Ad OC I Oe Vs Os Manor O Oo nko AOILZ0 S25 10 ZOLZ UG Zod ZO e OI lhe O OO a 0 AO 0 f 2510 Z a i 0 ella O2ZAA2E DEMO 07AA2EDEMO 0O6AA2E DEMO 42AA2E DEMO 36AA2EDEMO 20AA2E DEMO 41AA2EDEMO 13AA2EDEMO L4AA2E DEMO 20AA2EDEMO 1 6AA2EDEMO XREGEN XREGEN XREGEN XREGEN XREGEN XA4INIT XDMODEL PEOQ ram Prooucam Program Program Ruogami Application Initialization CA2E Appendix D XREDOAPP Command SBME SBME IP SleWMleleds TSBMPFR WSBMEER XREENGPGMS ALL programs XGENBRULES ALL programs ATL programs ALL programs XREGEN XREGEN MANOJUK MANOJK MANOJUK MANOJUK MANOJK STUART STUART STUART STUART STUART THS LHR SS OS TS US AEA END OF DATA Se US IS US US US Bottom F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys Option 21 File Check Option 21 submits the XCMPDB2MDL command to batch This option identifies all the programs and identifies any missing display files printer files
338. lue is 5 o Preferred Volume Limit The Interactive Structure Chart gets displayed according to the volume limit set provided in this field The default limit is 1000 System Document amp View Export as o PDF The PDF option is checked by default It implies that System Document will be generated as PDF document Also all list view diagram exports will be as PDF o MS Word Document Select this option to generate System Documents in MS Word format Also then all the subsequent exports will be in MS Word document Paper Size o A4 The A4 option is checked by default It implies that the print paper size will be A4 o Letter Choose Letter as paper size for printing Google Drive Export o Allow Export to Google Drive as DOCX Check this option to allow Google Drive export in the DOCX format o Allow Export to Google Drive as XLSX Check this option to allow Google Drive export in the XLSX format Program Structure Chart o Default View Level Program Structure Chart can be displayed up to 20 levels Select appropriate level The default level is 13 Variable Where Used X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 51 Using X Analysis Client o Default View Level Variable Where Used can be displayed up to 6 levels Select appropriate level The default level is 1 Object Where Used o Entry Level References The Entry Level References need to gather information about calling program and then
339. m is generated The generated service program contains sub procedure definitions for Extended READ X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 333 Exporting amp Printing Using Generated Service Program The following is a snapshot of the generated service program Snapshot of a Database Service Program Hedebugi yes s copyright Databorough LEd 20027 H nomain D x x x xxx xxxkxxkxkxxkxkxxkxkxk xkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkx xkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkkxkkkxkkkkkkkxk De DP eat Rn E o D x x xxx xxxkxx xkxkxxkxkxxkxkxxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxk xkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkkxkkkkkkkkkkxk D zrecord e ds extname condet D zrecordsql e ds extname condet D prefix sql D zrecordcpy e ds extname condet D prefix cpy D Data Structure Containing all required parameters Dx Plus before and after database record image D Keys passed in ZOLDRECORD data returned in ZNEWRECORD D zsdata ds D znewrecord D zoldrecord like zrecord like zrecordcpy D copy qrpglesrc zsheader De Prototypes D Read D zcondetr D zreadparms D Update D zcondetu D zupdateparms D tWrite D zcondetw D zwriteparms D t Delete D zcondetd D zdeleteparms likeds zsdata likeds zsdata likeds zsdata likeds zsdata likeds zsdata likeds zsdata likeds zsdata likeds zsdata Note the various sub procedures defined for Read Update Write and Delet
340. me O Exit Skip document creation Click Finish to generate the document The progress status is displayed on screen while generating the system document The generated document will be available in the specified saved location System Documents using previous values X Analysis provides a unique feature of recalling previous options opted by the user in the System Documentation process With the help of this feature the user can generate a X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 347 ths Document Manager System Document without selecting the same options again for the System Documentation process The Generate System Documents using previous values option can be used by the user when he wants to generate the System Document using the previous options selected for the System Documentation This option gets disabled if the user switched to generate the System Document for Application Area from System Documentation for Object s or vice versa Start the Documenter either by marking individual Objects for Documentation or selecting the Documenter option on Application Area Select the Generate System Documents using previous values option from the documentation wizard as shown below Generate System Documents using previous values Type and Location X Analysis System Documentation Type and Location Select the type of documentation and ts location System Documentation can generate Single documen
341. mediately see the business logic within the context of the program as a whole Source Code of CUSFMAINT e Object List Be CUSFMAINT 23 H Source List of CUSFMAINT in XAN4CDEM QRPGLESRC Lines 330 Yiew Level 5 A E BHBE F W B OG ia amp amp w Normal Source Code eee ee ee oe ee ne ee ere Indented Source Code HARADA EATER ETAT ETT PTAA TAPP Business Rules Overlay Mainline Code P EE Cai a a a a ee ee a a ee ee ee r r Consolidated Rules Retrieve record Business Process Logic cusno chainlel rcus 005s 00 i 1E not found cusft1l3 0060 00 ii eval inlr on b lt ti gt The following window is invoked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 239 JHJ LEGACY Business Rules Analysis Business Rules for CUSFMAINT te Programs CUSFMAINT amp E iness Rules for CUSFMAINT in XAN4CDEM QRPGLESRG View Levei 1 r Ere Priv ma amp BBOa os amp Business Rules MAINLINE fiHainline Code R000001 Cus No not found on 5ites Retrieve record Read data rous using cugno IF Not Found custl3 inlr on RETURN END f f Set screen values Until Exit Cancel J Business Rules gt 83 Screen Components TETESaA HP RU G Business Rules for CUSFMAINT Number of Lines 10 Source Member Rule Number Field File Rule CUSFMAINT 00001 CUSNO CUSF Cus No not found on Sites CUSFMAINT 00002 CNAME CUSF Company blank CUSFMAINT TELWO CUSF Phone lt gt blank CUSFMA
342. member object or variable for fast access to Source Browser DFD Structure Chart PSC Object Where Used Member X Reference Variable Where Used and DMD X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 146 HSA Options Quick Reference to an Object Jump to dialog Jump to Eg Object Variable foo 00m Source Data Flow Diagram O Structure Chart Diagram O Program Structure Chart Object Where Used Variable Where Used Physical File Field Mamet Variable Where Updated Physical File Field Mamet variable Where Defined Physical File Field Mamet Data Model Diagram Cancel Each option acts on the Object Variable specified in the selection edit box Zoom Source Data Flow Diagram Structure Chart Diagram Program Structure Chart Object Where Used Member X Ref Variable Where Used Variable Where Updated Variable Where Defined Data Model Diagram X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Zooms the source code of the object Displays the Data Flow Diagram of the object Displays the Structure Chart of the object Displays the sequence of calls within the program Displays all the instances of an object in the application Lists all the Source Lines where the Field Variable has been used referenced in the Source Member and its associated Device Files and Copybooks This option enables only when Jump to is opted on the Source Browser Displays all the instances of the
343. mer Letter CNTCMAINT 2013 03 14 Soh 4 DEM Contacts Maintenance REGENERATED PROGRAMS You can view the list of programs regenerated through the Regenerated Programs node The node is available on the navigation pane of the tutorial application as shown below Regenerated Programs option Q 192 168 170 10 E uh ZAN4CORA4 XAN4CDEM Tutorial System ra Application Area Diagram at Data Model Diagram Es Overview Structure Chart e All Objects Is Programs B Files Ep Source Files Business Rules Consolidated Rules Screen Components ch Change History Regenerated Programs A Source Scan H O amp Sanitize 2 Resize fal Procedures Double click the node to invoke the following window X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 92 Application Library Regenerated Programs window oH Regenerated Programs 2 5 E Regenerated Programs list for XAN4CDXA Total Objects 29 ES D7 amp F fo E io M Access Path Legacy Program MTT 1 MTT CUSFSEL CUSFSEL CUSGRS5EL CUSGRS5EL CUSTMNT 1 CUSTS5EL CUSTS5EL DISTSSEL DISTSSEL QORDSTSEL SOURCE SCAN Reengineered Member Name MTT 1 MTT CUSFSELR CUSFSELR CUSGRSELR CUSGRSELR CUSTMNTIR CUSTS5ELR CUSTS5ELR DISTSSELR DISTSSELR QORDSTSELR Physical File CUSTS CUSTS The Source Scan node helps you scan particular text also comments used in a prescribed source member or in general all across the application application a
344. messages mmsgidx 0 clearOb zmessaqges zerror false evalGorr s zstatevarj for zidx 1 zidx lt 99 zidxtt QIND zidx getBoolVal substr s qeto1 retParms zmsgidx zmsgqidx return private void zputpgmdta MSGOBJ zmessages for zidx 1 zgidx lt 99 zidxtt s setOin replaceStr s get in zidx eval orr zstatevar a retParms zmsgidx zmsgidx return X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 425 Appendix G Troubleshooting Appendix G Troubleshooting Ths LEGACY X ANALYSIS PERSPECTIVE NOT VISIBLE WORKING AFTER UPGRADING X ANALYSIS CLIENT Close the X Analysis Perspective and exit from Eclipse WDSc RDi RBD Select Clean start Eclipse for X Analysis invocation In case of Windows Vista and above you may need to select the Run as administrator option Opt for the context menu on the Clean start Eclipse X Analysis for Eclipse shortcut from the X Analysis program group and then select the Run as administrator option as shown in the screen below Context Menu for Run as administrator P Run as administrator Open fie location EditPins WD Add to archive 3B Add to ecipse rar FE Compress to ecipse rar and email This will launch Eclipse correctly and you will be able to switch to the X Analysis Perspective X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 426 Appendix G Troubleshooting X ANALYSIS MENU
345. mmand Option 18 Errors Option 18 can be used to list compile time errors for program failures from the Generate Option 16 job The following screen displays the Errors window Errors Report Display Report Report width Riou waleiae cron ube a eee Shire tO COLUMNA ere anes Line a Pee cae ea mea E cn EN ean eo ne Oe PORE E eG een giomey a URE gp T A E ee mee 7 me a oy A EO ew ony E eon Source Source Compiler Compile Compile Ob Library Member Command Date Time KKKKKK KKKKKKKK End OL report KkKkKKKKKK Option 19 Load Log Option 19 can be used to display any notifiable errors encountered in any of the Generate processes The following screen displays the Load Log window Load Log Report screen Display Physical File Member A Syne ee en XS2ELDLOG LEDE E mens AA2EDEMO Member s s s s s XOZELDUOG Rer r E eae 3 Crongne cry ese oe onic weeapees ne ornare 1 Find Soe Bea tava pecans elle E ee eee eee E a eee et reams ney epee h ences are T E eran Coe tera E tem mel emer at cerue ALOOZIZ0 OZhSkRezZ AAZEDEMO XRRVYZERPDYZDLSHLO Missing access path for ener AKkKKKKK END Or DATA KkKAKKKK Bottom Fo Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left EZ OSTRIA F24 More keys Option 20 X Analysis Log Option 20 can be used to display an audit of X Analysis and Generate processes The following screen displays the X Analysis Log window X Analysis Log Report screen Display Physical File Member ale eae ee XA4LOG trie
346. mplex Halstead Maini Low Total e ee Total Total Total Total Total Current State 2 263 20 months back 2011 06 19 2 263 23 months back 2011 06 04 1 904 34 months back 2010 07 02 1 910 39 months back 2010 02 08 2 465 4 months back 2009 11 14 2 618 F09 Eii fla 709 fal fal 40 211 40 206 39 027 39 382 45 971 47 340 zoot anne 2599 3057 0674 Jott Audit Options Source Lines Cyc Complex Halstead Maint Index Files Device Files Called Programs Calling Programs This action invokes the Metrics History chart displaying Cyclomatic Complexity Metrics History Chart displaying Cyclomatic Complexity S Metrics History Chark E3 Ta summary Metrics Metrics History a00 700 600 T 500 i E S 400 o 300 oo 200 100 Metrics History 4 0 Sed 3 0 Interactive Source Members Low Tota sid 2 0 elia Time in Days Similarly the user can generate charts for all the other parameters 0 5 0 0 You can check Metrics History for all the Interactive Programs Batch Programs and Grand Total from the Metrics window Source code tracking The Metrics History provides a facility to see changes in the source code Expand the Metrics History and select a program as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 262 Audit Options Invoking source code tracking if Summary Metrics if Metrics History 25 aes Metrics Histo
347. ms 1 item selected 30 8 MB X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 29 JHJ J 0 gt lt Using X Analysis Client Right click on the downloaded XALicenseManagerTool compressed folder and click Extract All from the right click menu Home View t BR gt ThisPC Downloads ir Faworites B Desktop my Downloads E Recent places Homegroup jml This PC th Network 11 items 1 item selected 30 8 ME Name m ALicenseManagerTool_win32 win32 x86_64 iB 72920x64 E 16584143450_b4b0bb09c9_o E 16594143450_e8526a31d9_m le dmtempdownload D9BC 60538 7096841943106 fd Greenshot INSTALLER 1 2 4 10 RELEASE Nov 2014 get together_1 Nov 2014 get together_2 J Problem Analysis Detail XALicenseManagerTool_win32 win32 x86_64 LJ X Analysis_Installation_ amp _ Open woo Search Downloads Date modified 06 04 2015 13 08 12 07 2011 18 31 23 03 2015 14 57 23 03 2015 14 56 12 07 2011 18 31 23 02 2015 14 05 28 11 2014 1 46 28 11 2014 19 46 18 03 2015 11 28 02 04 2015 17 27 Open in new window Search Everything Extract All Pin to Start Tortoises VN T Zip Open with Share with Send to Cut Copy Create shortcut Delete Rename Properties The following window will appear Type File folder Windows Installer JPEG image JPEG image TMP File Application JPEG image JPEG image PDF File Compressed Zipp PDF File X Analysis Use
348. n displays textual description long name of the program Status displays the program status which will be either A B C or D The details are provided in the Component Status section on the following page Changed displays the date when the program was changed Created displays the date the program was created Used displays the date when the program was last used Function displays the function of the object The various types are explained under the Function Type section PF Name displays the name of the physical file related to the program BR Count displays the total count of business rules related to the program Annot Count displays the total count of business rule annotations related to the program Stmt Count displays the total count of the statements in the source list of the program X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 79 ar yng Application Library Screen Count displays the total count of screens recovered by the re engineering process Mode Count displays the total count of modes available to access the screens belonging to a program Double click on the list item opens the object s source code in the source browser Files Similarly double click the Files node under XAN4CDXA to bring up the Work with Objects dialog with the Type Attribute set to FILE PF Double clicking on the All Objects node re sets the Type Attribute to ALL ALL The following screen displays the Object
349. names Ul DATA DICTIONARY 03 04 01 0 4 05 ni 00102 00139 00029 00116 00043 anina X Analysis makes the seemingly complicated task of data modelling an easy one When the data inherent in a specific application is accessible data modelling can be a straightforward procedure X Analysis has the Data Dictionary option for this purpose X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 299 ths Data Management Features The Data Dictionary contains detailed information for every field in each file in the application database Much of this data is the standard metadata extracted for each file and stored on the XDD file for instance field and column names field size and field type Thus record metadata is readily available for use by other applications Click on the Data Dictionary icon available on the X Analysis toolbar This will show up the Data Dictionary submenu options These options are Data Dictionary menu options Me ob og a E2 Entities EA Access Paths 16 Fields Ba Relationships Ton Relationship Details Entities The first submenu option is Entities Select this option to display the Primary Identifiers view This is also the default view when the Data Dictionary is invoked from X Analysis The identification of the correct primary identifier is crucial to the building of an accurate data model The primary identifier is determined by an examination of all t
350. nd options their texts and action type Applications may re assign the PREVIOUS key from F12 to F24 and use A for DELETE and Z for DETAIL Table Structure for XS2EFODT A R XS2EFODFTF A S20DTYP 1A TEXT Function Key Option A S20DVAL 2A _ TEXT Value A S20DOVL 2A _ TEXT Override Value A S2ODTXT 50A TEXT Text A S20DACT 20A _ TEXT Action JAS ect e A K S2ODTYP A K S2ODVAL S2ODTYP Default Values of the Table XS2EFODT F F OJOJO S2ODTYP F F X Analysis User Manual 11 1 S20DVAL S2ODOVL S2ODTXT S2ODACT 03 Exit EXIT 09 Add Change ADD CHANGE 11 Delete DELETE 12 Cancel PREVIOUS 01 Select SELECT 04 Delete DELETE 05 Display DETAIL Example Modified Values for the Table XS2EFODT S20DVAL S2ODOVL S2ODTXT S2ODACT 03 Rinucia EXIT 09 Modo lt Inser gt Modo ADD CHANGE lt Modif gt 11 Annullamento DELETE 12 24 Ritorna PREVIOUS 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 411 Appendix E Overriding Data Tables S2ODTYP S20DVAL S2ODOVL S2ODTXT S2ODACT O A Cancellazione SELECT O Z Zoom DELETE O 01 Selezione DETAIL SYNON FUNCTION KEY OPTION EXTRA DEFAULTS The XS2EFOXTR table details additional function key usage In some applications F12 could be an extra default function key for the functions listed Table Structure for XS2EFOXTR A R XS2EFOXTRF A S2OXTYP 1A TEXT Function Key Option A S2OXVAL 2A TEXT Value A S2OXFNT 10A TEXT 2E Function Type
351. ndex name to invoke the Zoom Source option The following image shows the Source List for a selected Index name Source List window CONDETL1 Indexes CONDETL1 amp m Source List of CONDETL1 in RMTDDL QDDLSRC Lines 13 View Level 5 ae E BH PFP rM Oi Ara Seq No ee ee eee oe ee en eee ee ee oe oem eee 0001 00 Generate 50OL 0002 00 Version VTRIMO 100423 0003 00 Generated on 22 06 15 12 06 57 0004 00 Relational Database S108B00R 0005 00 Standards Option DB for i 0006 00 0007 00 CREATE INDEX CONDETL1 0008 00 ON CONDET XWAACS ASC XWORDN ASC XWABCD ASC 0009 00 y lt gt Views Select the Views sub node to invoke the window listing the Table Name besides the System View Name The screenshot below presents the Views window X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 138 Application Area Window displaying Views for RMTDDL Table Schema Select the Zoom Source option to invoke the Source List window Source List window ASTATUSL1 E Views Ea ASTATUSL x Source List of ASTATUSL1 in RMIDDL QDDLSRC Lines 24 View Level 3 E BAP mE Gina Generate SOL Version V7R1M0 100423 Generated on 22 06 15 12 06 56 Relational Database 5108B00R Standards Option DB2 for i CREATE VIEW ASTATUSL1 STATUS STSTXI Note Zoom Source displays the source from QDDLSRC if existing in the given library Otherwise the image of DSPFFD would be disp
352. neral General X Analysis Preferences Ant Data Management IP Address 192 168 21 102 Help Install Update Java JavaScript Offline Mode JPA Specify the DB2 port number in order to access offline A Analysis cross reference Plug in Development DB Port 50000 Remote Systems Run Debug Server L Begin with Outline Detailed DFD by default Service Policies _ Detaile by defau Tasks _ Show Re engineered Screen for Screen Report layout Team Ignore Linked Repositories if any Usage Data Collector Open Called Procedure Program source in same tab Validation Open Data Flow Diagram in same tab en Use Business Rules Overlay mode as default Web Service a _ Use Source buffering Doclet _ Allow editing in Consolidated Rules XML Show only Objects in Metrics Restore Defaults Apply OK Cancel 3 Login again You will be able to input more than ten characters for the password X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 434 JHJ LEGACY Appendix G Troubleshooting ERROR IN GENERATING PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION There may be instances while generating program documentation when you may encounter the following error Information window showing error in MS Word initialization Export to MS Word OOOO OOOO M Error in initializing Microsoft Word Please ensure that it is installed correctly To resolve this error check the preference setting for documenta
353. ng screen should appear XAXREF command screen Initialise X Analysis 4 XAXREF Type choices press Enter X Analy ere EID rar Bottom POSEI L F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel PIRB3 HOw to use this display F24 More keys Parameter XRFLIB required Provide the name of the cross reference library and press ENTER to input further details X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 439 Ando Appendix H Refresh X Analysis XAXREF command screen Initialise X Analysis 4 XAXREF Type choices press Enter An a ala oa clia Wiig re NE eater ed NaC AB Clog ALITA rte een ee as PIC IVE IL ab os PC IE 1L a0 for more values Source Libraries so so s o o o a SPECIE 1ED lt SPEC ILE LED NONE for more Values index Source Files s o a o o o ACRE xNO ACL UPG Ithieh Denese Weel 4 6 5 4 8 A 4 INO NO Generate Business Rules xNO NO TaLrcialise Res 167 o o o o o x NO x NO Include obsolete source object ANO x NO If the sources and objects are modified then the XAXREF job needs to run with CHG option and Build Data model to YES to track any file level changes in keys fields etc Generate Business Rules to YES to track any source level changes The details of the various options available on the XAXREF command are given below Feature Brief Description X Analysis Library The X Analysis cross reference library name Object Libraries Special value SPECIFI
354. ng dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 314 THUS Data Management Features Archive Data dialog Archive Data Ref Library Application 4rea Archive Library ORDERS AL Subset Library ORDERSS1 Archive mode CENSBS Delete live data Database library name Cancel The dialog prompts you to supply the following details Archive Library Name of the Archive Library Subset Library Name of the Subset Library Archive mode Select from GENSBS default value ARCDTA BOTH After providing the details click OK to submit a batch job Batch Job Progress view Progress 3 ie O AARCASS SKHAN 668944 JOBQ At any point while the batch job is running click on the hyperlink JOBQ to view the Job Log The Job Log view is shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 315 Data Management Features Batch Job details Archive Data Command XARCASS XA44REA ORDERS XAALIBMANSCD XA ARCLIB ORDERSA1 SBSLIB ORDERSS1 ARCMODE GENSBS DLTDTAPNOQ DBASELIB LOADLIB Job Log Tue Dec 02 13 40 10 IST 2014 XARCASS ARCMODE GENSBS ARCLIB ORDERSA1 SBSLIB ORDERSS1 DLTDTA NQ XA4LIBRRAN4ACD XA XAAAREA ORDERS DBASELIB LOADLIB Tue Dec 02 14 12 22 IST 2014 Job Completed PURGE DATA Select the Purge Data option from Data Management Options to eliminate superfluities and further streamline the data The following dialog with available
355. ngs Usage Data Collector Occurrence Validation Web Web Services Advance Setting Preferences Default Program Attribute Subset Data Include All Dependents UML Diagram _ Show object name in Class diagram X Analysis eee ag Aai Use MS Word OLE Automation Folders Diagram Export General Use Open Office Draw for 64 Bit A Data Test Synon Data Flow Diagram A Redo _ Use old logic for Synon DFD ADoclet Database Language Translation AML non You can modify the following Advanced Preferences for the X Analysis Client Work with Objects o Default File Attribute Specify attribute for Object List of Files The default value is PF o Default Program Attribute Specify attribute for Object List of PGM The default value is ALL X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 47 Using X Analysis Client Subset Data o Include Owners The default value is YES o Include All Dependents The default value is NO o Replicate Triggers Constraints The default value is NO o Data Option The default value is REPLACE Search Settings o Occurrence Select the appropriate search setting from the drop down box You will view the streamlined content based on this selection If no selection is made then the default search setting will apply UML Diagram Check the Show object name in Class diagram box to see the object name in the Class Diagram Document Generation
356. nguage complexity by SUBROUTINE fT O fJ DATACRS Program data complexity Run Metrics Report LOGICP Program logic complexity Modify Report Definition LOGICS Program logic complexity by subroutine Copy Report Definition Source Object Reports Delete Report Definition HARDCORE Programs with hardcoded libraries MISSING Source or objects missing SRCOBIDT Source change date after object created Database Reports DATAERR Database file and member errors and alerts DSGNALRT Database design alerts Select the Modify Report Definition option to invoke the report configuration dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 271 Audit Options Report Definition dialog X Analysis Metrics Report Specification and Submission Report Mame Report Title leneral cross language complexity by SUBROUTINE Report category RPGMET Application rea All Members Selected Object Mame Select Report Columns and Options Column Metrics YarMame Subr BINA Object and Source ID Data OBISUBHAM Object Library CIBILIE OBIATR Object Mame OBINAM CYC Object Type OBITYP HAL Object Attribute DBJATF MI Object creation date OBJICRTOAT SRCLINSTM Object last used date QOBILSUDAT Source File OBISRCFIL Source Library OBISRCLIB Source file change date OBISRCFCHD Cen Tada Aaah Show report data at subroutine level OBIATR RPG OR OBISTR RPGLE Filter User metric Formula User program Save an
357. nother dynamic form when you expand the referenced object s on selecting a particular category from the main object s box The following screenshot displays the action to be performed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 176 Program Logic Documentation Expand Referenced Objects be Files jy Object Where Used Ba CUSTMNTL Ga CUE 8 i Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 A w i we Oo Ei 7 A J CUSFLA CUSFLE Sites by Product renamed from Sites by Orig List custla for testing P Attributes P Attributes CLSF sites b Access Paths 13 Objects H P Input Programs 54 Objects A P Input Services 1 Object H P Input Triggers 1 Object A P InputfOutput Programs 2 Objects A i peee Programs 14 Objects H pdate Output Programs 4 Objects H fa A CLISFLE 0 CUSFL1 i a J CUSFLE CUSFLE Sites by Salesperson Sites by Validator P Attributes P Attributes A single click on the arrow icon adjacent to Update Programs reveals all the ten objects updating CUSF The following screenshot displays the expanded view of the referenced objects list Expanded view of Update Programs fe Files Object Where Used CUSTMNT CUS 83 O Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 ae Ay e fag 3 A CLSF B z CUSFLA z CUSFLE Sites Sites by Product renamed From Sites by Orig List cusfla For testing P attrib b ributes Access Paths 13 Obj
358. nter the names of those libraries here specifying the library type as M These libraries are used when initializing the application and for various other commands which need this information The maximum number of libraries allowed for each type is 300 Two items of data are held against each library name Library type O Object S Source or M 2E Model type of libraries X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 401 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command Sequence Number It determines the order in which the libraries are placed in the library list Option 12 Initialise Option 12 can be used to initialise the X REDO Application Library The following screen displays the Initialise window Initialise X Analysis 4 Type choices press Enter Analysers bibrary Ooae LDT ar ke ce eee for more values Source Libraries A E E wee for more values inde Source Piles Build Data Model Generate Business Rules Initialise X Resize P TN Include obsolete source object Import 25 Modell F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F24 More keys Option 15 Business Rules Initialise screen AA2 EDEMO SPEO TETTED PE O TETED ALL ns YES ZNO INO MODEL Fl2 Cancel XAXREF Name Name SPECIFIED Name SPECIFIED NONE SCEIE IMO Minh WIDE YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO CODE MODEL Bottom PiS How to use thus display Option 15 can be used to
359. ntext menu on that object and select Omit from Application Area as displayed below Omit from Application Area option Application Area Options Add to Application Area Add to Application Area with Related Objects Omit from Application Area The following dialog will be displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 103 Application 4rea OIE MEOO1 ORDERS Application Area Omit from Application Area dialog Omit CONOO1 from Application Area Description Order Entry Application 4rea CEOO1 orders Planning System Printed documentation Sales System test app area Tesk Demonstration Cobol Application To remove the object select the application area name and click OK CONTEXT MENU ON AN APPLICATION AREA The context menu on an application area is displayed below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Context menu on an application area Application Area Options d Derive Business Rules Export Options Annotate Document Application Area Data Management Options Test Management Options d Reengineer Programs Generate Programs Generate Web Services Generate Data Application Data Migration Audit Options UML Options d 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 104 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Application Area APPLICATION AREA OPTIONS The Application Area Options sub group consists of the following Update Description Remove Application Area Applicati
360. o any other area and update the specified file E A All include programs called by the specified program or programs which reference the specified file or any dependent programs or files V All update programs include programs that update the specified file or any other files which have been added Foran AND line The AND line takes the same value as the SELECT OMIT line Note When you select to include All program references or All Batch Programs a program level from 2 to 9 can be specified The default value is ALL which brings the entire depth of called programs Referenced Files This option only applies to SELECT lines It allows you to specify the selection of referenced files Select one E Y Yes include files referenced by the specified program N No do not include files referenced by the specified program U Update files include files updated by the specified program A All include files referenced by the specified program or any dependent programs V All update files include files updated by the specified program or any called programs For an AND line The AND line takes the same value as the SELECT OMIT line Owning Files and Dependent Files These options only apply to SELECT lines They allow you to specify the selection of files which reference the specified file s A value of C Cascade will initiate an iterative process selecting files which refe
361. o define various options related to document formatting like Paper Size Contention Resolution etc X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 355 Document Manager Select Paper Size and Resolution oystem Documentation Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Level Settings Application Area OSC Normal Application Area OSC Level 2 Application Area DMD Normal Structure Chart Level 5 Object List Source Level 1 Data Model Diagram Normal Source Flow Chart Level 1 LF Access Path details Business Process Logic Level 4 File Field Details Screen Flow Diagram Level 1 Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Normal with Annotatio Structure Chart Normal with Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal E Business Rules Summary _ Letter 8 5 x 11 Source Pan E ee ee AA Size 8 27 x 11 69 Source Flow Chart BS Paper Size Contention Resolution System Documentation creates documents in Application Folder lf the Application Folder is shared and documents are created opened while the documentation is in progress then this may lead to contention Please select appropriate options to enable resolution Do not overwrite Overwrite if exists but if in use then Create document by similar name Exit Skip document creation Back Next gt Cancel Click Finish to generate the document Detailed Object Documentation in Call
362. o ld 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Release 7 Messages 8 Attributes SSWouel with printing status Device or Total Current Opt File Queue User Data Status Pages Page Copies XREPORT OQPRINT XARPTRLOG RID 1 1 QPJOBLOG QEZJOBLOG ARERO K RDY 2594 1 Parameters for prions 27S or Command F3 Exit F10 View 3 F1ll View 2 F12 Cancel B22 ieee F24 More keys Then use Option 5 against spool files to view the report Spool file for the XREFRESH command Display Spooled File alg a gees cone XREPORT Page Line aly all Geignene esl ae eee eee Columme M Find TE Soe eer E E E A A E E oe o E T N E E E E E O E E eres Ocoee rere EN X Analysis Audit hog tor X4SRCXC XREPRESH Processing XARPTRLOG XREFRESH completed X4SRCXC alc Wiss S05 Sey eng 0A 10 A END OF REPORT X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 438 Appendix H Refresh X Analysis Bottom F3 Exit F12 Cancel F19 Left IE ZO e lquie F24 More keys Overprinting not displayed XAXREF The XAXREF command reinitializes the cross reference library to reflect any changes that have been made to the cross reference library It is recommended to run this command each night or weekly as the case may be so that the cross reference reflects the most updated state Before using the XAXREF command ensure the following sequence of the library list XAOBJ QGPL QTEMP Then type the XAXREF command on the command line and press ENTER The followi
363. o004 OOS OO006 00007 O00 jogg 000i Field File nnotate Rule Status Manager Change Rule Status to Matched Rules Variable Where Used Convert to Exportable Show Hierarchy Rule Cus Mo not found on Sites Company blank Phone lt gt blank Fax No lt gt blank Distributor lt gt blank Exact match not Found For Distributor Sts lt gt Blank Contact blank Salutation lt gt blank and lt gt Mr and Customer 0 The X Analysis client allows you to view the Business Rules Matching Exclusion list produced as a result of a process on server which compares the existing cross reference against an older one and moves the Business Rule Status and Annotations from the older to the new cross reference This report can be seen by the right click option Business Rule Matching available on the context menu of the entire cross reference an application area or a program The report can be filtered to view only one of the types Changed Removed Matched and also exported to Word PDF Excel The following image shows Business Rule Matching view of application area HORIZON JBR Matching BR Matching window Business Rule Matching Exclusion List for HORIZON in FISGLOXC Category Changed Removed E Matched Member Library ODAFO0LE ODAFO0LE ODAFO0LE ODAS4O0LE Prk A ea FISGLOKA FISGLOXA FISGLOXA FISGLOXA Pre AN X Analysis User Manual 11 1 SIR TFRMO PRTCODE DDR T
364. object s Refer To This depicts a relationship where a non key field of another file is referred Owned By This depicts a relationship where the key field of another file is referred Uni Directional This indicates a singular relationship Refer To n j between two objects E Owned By Multiple Rels This indicates multiple relationships P Uni Directional between two objects Multiple Fels Internal This depicts the file internal to an application F Internal area External External This depicts the file external to an application Extended By area Extended By This depicts a special kind of Refers to which is seen in Synon applications 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 215 Data Model Diagram GENERATING DMD To generate the DMD expand the Application Library and double click on the Data Model Diagram node This invokes the Data Model Diagram dialog as shown below Data Model Diagram dialog Application Area Name Description NONE All Members Selected Object Object Text DMD Data Options Display External Relationships Show unrelated files It prompts the user to 1 Select the Application Area name if available else leave it as NONE 2 The Object Name on the Object group can be o ALL for all Objects o Object Name maximum 10 characters long 3 DMD Data Options to Display External Relationships for Application Area only
365. ocumentation specify Sequence What sequence would you like to have for the System Data Model Diagram Normal Move Up LF Access Path details File Field Details Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram Normal with Annotation Structure Chart Normal with Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal Business Rules Summary Source Source Flow Chart Business Process Logic Screen Flow Diagram Normal Move Down Cancel From the above screen the user can re sequence the options selected for the System Documentation After re sequencing click Next to reach the final step of documentation wizard Here the user can see all the selections that he has made and can also define various options related to document formatting like Paper Size Contention Resolution etc X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 341 Document Manager Single System Document Finish System Documentation Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Level Settings Object List Structure Chart Level 5 Data Model Diagram Normal Source Level 1 LF Access Path details Source Flow Chart Level 1 File Field Details Business Process Logic Level 4 Object Where Used Screen Flow Diagram Level 1 Data Flow Diagram Normal with Annotation Structure Chart Normal with Annotation Screen Report Layout Normal Business Rules Summary Source Source Flow Chart C Letter 8 5 x 11
366. ogram using the generic file to determine which programs to call In this instance PG_V5 is a generic program called by CL_GEN_PGM See PG_V5 as listed under the Generic Programs list Work with Generic Programs screen X Analysis 4 Work with Generic Programs Databorough Ltd XARWKGPS We ons ray Il 21 Jan 2015 Enter options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display Pieces i Type File name POG Va FILE PGNAME The following screen shows PGNAME as listed under the Generic Files list X Analysis 4 Work with Generic Files Data borough irae XARWKGFS oS GA ge ZO Enter options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display File Key type Key field name Called pgm field PGNAME ALL PGM1 PGM1 field of PGNAME file is considered for variable program calls There are two options to specify the Key type ALL All the program names for the Called Program Field i e PGM1 existing in the generic file i e PGNAME will be added as the program references CONSTANT It works differently because it tracks the actual constant key value moved in the key field name for selecting the database records matching the key value for the variable call selection As an example below are the entries in the PGMNAME file X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 23 X Analysis 4 Work with Generic Files XARWKGE S Enter options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display COND PGMI PGM2 000001 A PG V2K Beal 000002 B
367. om REFRESH process Archive From sA4MAINT process Archive From 445RCMNT process Source archiving is started by the XACVINI command which sets up a controlling DTAARA in the XA library and makes an initial copy of all source codes If archiving is deactivated and then restarted later the initial archived copy is not made Source archiving can be deactivated by XACVEND which optionally clears all source archives and controlling data This command can only be run on the server Files All archived source versions are recorded in XAACVSRC whose data is only ever purged when XACVEND DLTHISTO YES is run whereas metrics can be purged independently which clears XMETOBJ When archiving is active the source date time of the latest version archived is recorded in XAACVHDR Archiving handles all the source types whereas metrics only records for CL RPG and CBL Source archiving continues to maintain data in XMETOBJ XMETOBJH if necessary The data in XMETOBJ XMETOBJH is not necessary to the source archiving process itself but is used by the PC client to locate the change history If data is written to XMETOBJ by source archiving the SRCACT field is set to the value A Processing Source archiving is invoked from XA4INIT XREFRESH XA4MAINT and XA4SRCMNT which all call the wrapper program XRACVMBR The archive processing itself is done in srvpgm XACV in procedure XACV_ArchiveMember This procedure checks the source update d
368. omers CUSFSEL lt TRNHST gt Transaction History Customer Site Selection _ CUSGRSEL Customer group Salespersons Order status Selection DISTSSEL Distnbutor Selection STKMASEL Product taster Selection description TRNTPSEL Transaction type Selection _ Legend al o CUSTSSEL Customer Selection _ 7 Store blaster a Transaction type descnption C SKIN gt Last Skeleton Letter ORDSTSEL Order status Selection C WWCONDET Work wth Order Details Contract Detail Stock Balances CUSTMNT1 Customer Detail hieintenance re C WWCONHDR Work with Orders WWTRNHST Work with transaction history Sam The nature of the programs and the files can be established through the AFD Legend bar The image is shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 144 Application Area Diagramming AFD with Legend H Area Flow Diagram 22 H Area Flow Diagram for M CPROCESS Total Objects 30 i WWCUSTS Customer Site ion Hi Transact Called Prograrn a ETTR F Selected Object Work with Store w Input Customers Output LI Update CUSFSEL a Ea TRN Selection descr Calling Program i lt Selected Object This depicts the object on which you have made the select
369. on Change Application Folder Select Application Folder P Application Folder for XAN4CDXA is r D Program Files Databorough X Analysis 192 168 170 10 PCF_XAN4CDXA Do you want to change Application Folder for XAN4CDXA To select new Application Folder click Yes in the dialog box The following dialog appears prompting to specify location for the new Application Folder Select New Application Folder Browse For Folder Select Application Folder Ef Desktop 4 My Documents 4 9 My Computer E3 a My Network Places Folder My Documents Make New Folder Open Log Folder This option opens the folder currently used to record the log files of X Analysis The XAPlugin log file can also be used for bug error tracking Select the Open Log Folder option from the X Analysis menu X Analysis gt Open Log Folder X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 42 Using X Analysis Client Open X Analysis Log folder Log 2010 2 18_2 49 6977 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Folders fine Search amp XAPlugin log Text Document 13 KE Open Application Folder Each application has its own Application Folder This folder contains generated System Documents Flowcharts and DDL files To view the Application Folder select the Open Application Folder option from the X Analysis menu X Analysis gt Open Application Folder Open Application Folder PCF_XAN4CDXA File Edit View Fa
370. on wherever possible giving very accurate descriptions of the logic Each rule has an exclusive identifier that makes system wide analysis and documentation of business rules possible in X Analysis The entire process is achieved by invoking a single command on X Analysis The business rules generation process identifies the various components of the business rules and writes them to either 1 Anew source member or 2 An index over the original source member X Analysis can display business rules automatically using the generated index X Rules not only identifies the Business Rules Logic but also generates a prototype application for a part of the original application X Rules uses the X Analysis cross reference database and the original application program source code to provide shadow programs for the functions in the prototype application These shadow programs contain all the business rules logic from the original programs These rules include all field validation that is additional to the normal database integrity checks which are generated automatically calls to batch programs for additional functions and secondary file processing 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 236 Business Rules Analysis The primary criteria to track Business Rules are the presence of CAS COMP IF ELSEIF and WHEN statements For the secondary criteria the following are specified The condition involves one or more database fields The condition c
371. on Area Library ATEST w Ah DEM we Source File Type Search Details Search Text When the scan is complete the Source Scan result is displayed as follows X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 94 Joa d Application Library Window displaying Source Scan result Business Rules Source Scan Result E3 fly l aaa m Source Scan For Test Name seq No Peet ee teeta e eer ey ce athe te ewotina bile eime ct Sree aeeee eet eer hens AAS YSOPR 24 00 SHDIMS G MHaG xA Test Alert TOUSR SYS50FR ORDAUDITOL ORDAUDITOL ORDAUDITOL ORDAUDITOS ORDAUDITOS ORDAUDITOS ORDAUDITOO ORDAUDITOO ORDAUDITOO l4 19 ad l4 13 ad l4 13 ad O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 USEDTS BATCHTEST USEDTS BATCHTEST USEDTSA BATCHTEST USEDTS BATCHTEST USEDTS BATCHTEST USEDTS BATCHTEST USEDTSA BATCHTEST USEDTS BATCHTEST USEDTS BATCHTEST HT SPLFNAME ORDERS SPLFNAME BALANCESTO SPLFNAME BALANCEPRD SPLFNAME ORDERS SPLFNAME BALANCESTO SPLFNAME BALANCEPRD SPLFNAME ORDERS SPLFNAME BALANCESTO SPLFNAME BALANCEPRD X Analysis User Manual 11 1 PROCEDURES Select the Procedures node to access procedure related information This node is available on the navigation pane of the application Expand the Procedures node to reveal four sub nodes displayed below Procedures node wh ZANACDXA SAN4CDEM Tutorial System A Application 4rea
372. on Area Rules Affinity Identification E Affinity Comparison New Application Area Add to Application Area Omit from Application Area Update Description Select the Update Description option to modify the application area description Change the description and click OK to reflect the changes to the application area description Update Description dialog Update Description Description Company Accounts Remove Application Area Select the Remove Application Area option This prompts for deleting the selected application area After confirmation it deletes the application area Application Area Rules Select the Application Area Rules option This invokes a window displaying the available Application Area Rules These rules determine which objects are to be placed in that particular Application Area You may update delete by using the right click context menu on a row or add new rules using the Add button from the editor toolbar 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 105 JHJ LEGACY Application Area Rules dialog Application Area Rules for ACCOUNTS Seq Rule Type Rule Value Selection Object Type Object Attribute 10 Object Select Program ALL Equal 20 Object Select Program ALL Equal The following dialog will come up when the Add button is clicked Add dialog Application Area Rules Seq No t Rule Type Object Selection Select Object Type Program Object Attribute ALL Object
373. onal TERMS OF SERVICE URL Optional GOOGLE PAGE Optional plus google com Page ID Provide your email address and Product Name as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 461 Appendix M Export to Google Drive Consent screen window with email and product details Google Developers Console X amp https console developers google com project fluted bit 803 apiui consent wW ata JHJ EGACY Google Sign up for a free trial gmail com Projects Consent screen The consent screen will be shown to users whenever you request access to their private data using your client ID My Project Note This screen will be shown for all of your applications registered in this project APIs amp auth EMAIL ADDRESS gmail com Credentials Logo Consent screen PRODUCT NAME Push XA Project Monitoring Project Name would like to Source Code HOMEPAGE URL Know your basic profile info and list of people in your cle Compute Networkin 9 PRODUCT LOGO Storage Make your listen app and comment activity available Rg via Google visible to Big Data Your circles This is how your logo will look to end users Support Max size 120x120 px Need help Privacy amp terms PRIVACY POLICY URL TERMS OF SERVICE URL GOOGLE PAGE plus google com Page ID Activities Idle Create Project My Project Cancel See all activity Click Save 6 No
374. onmirmenr Control Status Ui acrave Selection or command F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F12 Cancel Then use Option 4 to work with associated spool files Job specific Spool Files Work with Job Spooled Files Jeb XAXREF User Us Number 087868 Type options Precs awe 1 Send 2 Change 3 Hold 4 Delete 5 Display 8 Attributes 9 Work with printing status 6 Release Device or oce C rrent Opt File Queue User Data Status Pages Page XREPORT QPRINT XARPTRLOG RDY XREPORT QPRINT XARPTRLOG RDY XREPORT QPRINT XARPTRLOG RDY QPJOBLOG QEZJOBLOG XAXREF RDY Then use Option 5 against spool files to view the report X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc DBSEWG 7 Messages Copies i il iL IL Page 442 THUS Appendix X Analysis Indexes Job Scheduler Entries Appendix I X Analysis Indexes Job Scheduler Entries X Analysis initialization process XA4INIT command calls the XASCDEIDX and XAROBOT commands towards the end of the processing These commands generate source members for IBM Job Scheduler entries and ROBOT Job Scheduler entries X Analysis initialization process starts the ROBOT processing if it finds the RBTROB8 RBTCMD1 and RBTCS2 files all in the same library For ROBOT entries it creates and indexes source members in QCLSRC and writes XMEMBER records It also populates the XAROBOTIDX file XASCDEIDX COMMAND The XASCDEIDX command will cross reference the IBM job scheduler en
375. ontains the screen fields which get tracked to the database fields The condition involves the EQUAL FOUND EOF built in functions The condition contains the resulting indicators for the database I O operations analogous to EQUAL FOUND and EOF built in functions The presence of the conditioning indicators for some other operation codes e g CHECK SCAN LOOKUP Based on the above specifications the recovered logic contains the following business rules components Field Validations Calls to other significant programs Secondary database file updates Non owner file reads DERIVE BUSINESS RULES This option is available on the context menu of a cross reference library and an application area The Business Rules may only be generated for RPG RPGLE and CBL objects PGM type The Derive Business Rules option on an individual program calls the XBIZRULES command This command uses the X Analysis databases to re engineer all relevant functionality from a legacy program The extracted code comprises the following Validations Batch Program Calls Secondary File Updates Non owner File reads X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 237 Business Rules Analysis The Derive Business Rules option on an individual PGM object invokes the following dialog Derive Business Rules dialog Derive Bus Rule Source Member Source File Source Library Source Type s Rev Library Analysis
376. option Invoking 5250 session requires XAN4SEU user on the IBM i Refer to Appendix B for creating XAN4SEU user The X Analysis Plugin comes with default Preferences settings To change the Preferences settings start IBM s RDi RDp WDSC 7 5 and above or Eclipse 3 4 and above then select Window gt Preferences to display the Preferences window General X Analysis Preferences setting for Source Editor Analysis Default view Level Advanced Folders Object Where Used Entry Level References 7 Data Test e 7 he Default Source Editor ADoclet n 5250 Emulator Okhers Number of records to display 1000 View Job Log Restore Defaults Apply More Info The More Info option presents detailed information about an object Select the option from the source browser toolbar or the right click menu over a selected object from the Object List More Info option Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Leve 5 GA E B AEH P i elu ae fq seq Na pig Aris tree canal Ca rei itor ee ee ae More Info pt anaes eee Fe HE 0021 00 Dennemo e Rc De a oe to oe a EERE o GT ae Poe nce a a ote ae Important information related to the status function attribute etc of an object are displayed besides other relevant details like the number of Business Rules or the Complexity figures The screenshot underneath shows the More Info dashboard for the object CNTCMAINT 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc
377. option from the Inter Repository Options submenu The following screen should appear Display Difference Analysis for XAN4CDXA Difference Analysis 2 H Difference Analysis for XAN4CDXA compared against XAN4CDXC M Oooo aa Heading ObjectiCategory Description Total Library Element Difference amp E CHANGED Changed Files fe Jf Jf CNTACS Contacts E FIELDS Database File Fields 1 Field CUSNO has been changed ONC DEM Changed RELNS Database File Relationships E CNTLF1 Global Contacts by Salesman FIELDS Database File Fields E KEYS Database File keys key no 1 has been added OM DEM key no 2 has been added OM 4CDEM CNTLF2 Global Contacts by Mame X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 245 HJA Inter Repository Options CUSTOMIZED LIBRARIES A customized library is where you would store programs taken from the vendor s library and modified In this way you will retain the original programs from the vendor and have their modified version too The following dialog is displayed when you select the Customized Libraries option Customized Libraries dialoog Library Name Customized AGMAN W A MAND W AGMSRC YARLACOERA Customized Apply Changes Cancel Provide valid entries for Customised Library ies and for Non Customised Library ies GENERATE PTF ANALYSIS The Generate PTF Analysis option submits a batch job which populates data for PTF Analysis The
378. or Less than LT Less than OR Equal to LE X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 312 ths Data Management Features Filter Criterion Description Field Value Field Value Supply the field value against which the field is to be compared Click Save to save the filter criteria Click Return to present the display dialog listing the filter criteria specified for the application area SUBSET DATA The Subset Data option creates complete test data subsets from live data based upon existing application data model Subset Data uses the data model constructed by X Model to produce test data sets that satisfy all the constraints of the data model The product first takes a specified number of records from each client file and then examines each data modelling relationship in turn to check that all referenced records are also included Creating test data sets is a three stage process Define the application area using the X4WRKAPP X Analysis Define the filter using X Analysis Take the Subset Data option on the application area Creating Subset Data Select the application area ORDERS from the tutorial application XAN4CDXA Select the Subset Data option from the Data Management Options submenu available on the context menu on application areas The Subset Data option brings up the Subset Data dialog as shown below Subset Data dialog Subset Data Ref Library Application 4rea Su
379. or indentation and five levels of source listing Each level suppresses certain source lines Source Level options be Object List Ba conoo E3 Source List of CONOO1 in ZAN4CDEM QRPGSARC Lines 271 Yiew Level 5 Fo a4 SBE LS bl Bee amp seq Mo BO i a a Comments OnlviScreen Reads Comment tense 4 aatas 5 waa HA 0204 00 Bview Level 1 Call Operation Wie Level 2 File Operation 0206 00 view Level 3 Program Structure Operation view Level 4 Field Operation 0208 00 y view Level 5 Commented Out amp Excluded 1 INGS O209 00 L REN lt 4 li The current source level is shown on the title bar Diagram Options Choose different diagram options 1 Data Flow Diagram Generates Data Flow Diagram for the Object Hierarchical Structure Chart Generates Hierarchical Structure Chart diagram for the Object Structure Chart Diagram Generates Structure Chart Diagram for the Object Screen Flow Diagram Generates Screen Flow Diagram for the Object Program Structure Chart Generates Program Structure Chart for the Object X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 156 ths 0206 00 Ct validate Contract k lt li gt Quick Reference to an Object Diagram Options e Object List Ee CONDI 83 H Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Levei 5 AY E BAEK i amp SOG i wa Gar Seq Mo eee fa Data Flow Diagram 020
380. oret Contract Prod CONDETLZ FILE by StorefContract Prodi CONDETLS FILE by Produckitontrack Select by Type CONHDR FILE Contract Header CONHDRL1 FILE by Debtor Contract COMHORLI amp FILE by Debbor Cusk Ref The a hanes CONHDRL FILE by RepfContract CLOPRADRLS FILE by Debtor Date CONHDRL4 FILE by Debbor Date Rep LORADRLS FILE by Date USF FILE Sites CUSFLI1 FILE Sites by Mame CUSFLZ FILE Sites by Status CUSFL3 FILE Sites by Number CUSFLS FILE Sites by Disk amp Status CUSFLG FILE Sites By Dist amp Mame CUSFL FILE Sites by Last Cnt Date CUSFL amp FILE Sites by Next Cnt Date CUSFL9 FILE Sites by Fax Mo CUSFLA FILE Sites by Product renan z 0I ISRIE ETI E Dikar has iwin ick 4 gt Cancel The dialog offers removal of objects from the system documentation process based on the name type of objects The selected name type can be removed using the Delete buttons X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 353 thJsst m m gt lt Document Manager Single System Document Document Features oystem Documentation Specify Contents Select features to be included in the System Document Object List Data Model Diagram g Normal In Word as Image 0 Detailed In Visio _ Annotation LF Access Path details Detailed File Field Details _ Field Annotation Object Where Used Data Flow Diagram g Normal C Det
381. ory Options In the above dialog Host Name is the field that will show the IP address of the AS 400 server whose repositories can be selected from the Repository Combo Add the repository ies on to the base working repository for combined analysis The dialog lists all repositories available on the X Analysis server besides the base repository You can select the repository to add Linkage Type Link repository ies in the following two ways ADD In this mode the cross reference information from the entire linked repository ies is merged with those of the base repository on the X Analysis lists and diagrams REPLACE Here ONLY the distinct cross reference information from the repository ies is put on the X Analysis lists diagrams This depends on the sequence of the repositories Repository It lists all the X Analysis repositories on the machine besides the one working with Select a repository to link with the base repository To link a repository select the desired repository from Repository drop down and click Add This adds the selected repository to the linked repository list To delete the repository from linked repository list select the repository and click Delete This removes the selected repository from the linked repository list The base repository shown in blue cannot be removed from the list Use the arrow buttons to change the sequence of the linked repositories Old Linked Repositor
382. ows the database record details to extend to three separate display device pages 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 82 Application Library DSPTRN Display Transaction Defines a program which displays the records from a specified pair of database files The pair must be connected by an Owned by or Refers to relation EDTFIL Edit File Defines a program which maintains records on a specified file many at a time using a sub file EDTRCD Edit Record Defines a program which maintains add change and delete records on a specified file one at a time EDTTRN Edit Transaction Defines a program which maintains the records on a specified pair of header and detail files The pair must be connected by an Owned by or Refers to relation EDTRCD2 Edit Record 2 panels Is identical to the Edit Record function except that it allows the record details to extend to two separate display pages EDTRCD3 Edit Record 3 panels Is identical to the Edit Record function except that it allows the record details to extend to three separate display pages EXCUSRPGM Execute User Program Defines a program which allows a user to describe the interface to a user written HLL program so that it can be referenced by functions OTH Other Defines a program which calls a program and does not have any files in update write read mode Also the program does not have any Display File s or Printer File s OTHCAL Other Call
383. physical files and access paths files It also identifies field errors It can be run over the entire application or application areas The file results can be found in XZ2EDBERR and all associated programs can be found in X2EDBEPG File Check Report Compare Database to Model XCMPDB2MDL Type choices press Enter K Analysis X Ref Library gt AA2EDEMO Name xX Analysis Appl ication Avea a ALL Character value ALL Bottom Po EIL F4 Prompt F12 Cancel Pis How to use thus duspllay F24 More keys F5 Refresh Option 22 Compile Check Option 22 submits XGENORGOBJ command to batch This option compiles all the original programs in QTEMP It can be run over the entire application or application areas All failures are logged in X2ZEGCMLOG and the associated error records are logged in X2ECPLLOGO In addition any original programs which fail to compile are written to the exclusion file XZERGNEXS The programs listed in the exclusion file are not generated as part of Option 16 XREGENP Generate Original Objects XGENORGOBJ Type choices press Enter gt AA2EDEMO Name Character value ALL x Analysis X Ref Library X Analysis Application Area ALL X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 405 Appendix D XREDOAPP Command Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Option 24 Prb Anl Option 24 can be used to display problems a
384. picts the program that writes to a file Command This simply depicts a Command Others This refers to the Programs where they are referring Update Display Print Input Output Internal Routine This refers to the Synon specific routines X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Update F Display Print Input l Output command Others F Internal Routine Indeterminate E Trigger P Module Page 197 ths Program Logic Documentation Indeterminate This depicts the programs where the usage cannot be programmatically determined Trigger This depicts the program which is a Trigger Module This depicts the program which is a Module The Inverted Structure Chart can also be viewed as the diagrammatic representation of Object Where Used gt Entry Level References for a particular program The references appear as a list in tabular form that gives the lead of the calling object In this case it is XCMMENU as shown in the screenshot below Entry Level References List XCMMENU e Object List CUSFMAINT E7 CUSFMAINT JA Object Where Used 23 E Object Where Used Entry Level References for CUSFMAINT Total Objects 1 im fl Object Type Text Library MCMMENU PGM Customer System Main Menu Entry Level Reference HANH DEM PROGRAM STRUCTURE CHART PSC The Program Structure Chart graphically displays the sequence of calls in the
385. playing DDL Conversion Setup dialog DDL Conversion Error log A DDL Conversion Setup E DDL Conversion Setup For RMTDDL Copy data to new tables VES w S Name of new SCHEMA RMTODL Naming option SYS Date format JOB Date separator JOB Time format 0 Time separator JOB i Decimal separator PERIOD w Apply 7 Modify the conversion parameters as is required Then click Apply to implement the changes Generate File Analysis When you select the Generate File Analysis option the following dialog will be invoked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 133 thJst LEGACY X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Application Area Generate File Analysis dialog A Ref Library AANACDAA Application Area CUSTS Conversion Library RMTDDL OR Cancel Click OK File Analysis When you select the File Analysis option a list will be presented displaying all the files These files are sorted to be rebuilt as SQL Index LF rebuilt directly as SQL Tables or Unspecified category The following screenshot shows the File Analysis list for application area CUSTS File Analysis window E ile Analysis xe co z File Analysis list for CUSTS Category Object Description ype Attribute Object Library t To be rebuilt as SQL Index Count49 t To be rebuilt as LF Count 13 4 Tobe rebuilt directly as SQL Tables Count CONDET Contract Detail XANSCDEM XANA4CDEM QDDSSRC CONHDR Contract Header XANSCDEM XANA4CDE
386. plication He can use the Generate Programs option available on the context menu over a selected cross reference library or an application area Generate Programs option over X Ref library New Application Area Add Alternate Data Library List Reset Library List Application Library List Affinity Comparison Refresh Options Derme Business Rules Import Options Export Options Document Entire Application Document Changed Objects Reengineer Programs Generate Web Services Generate Data Application Data Migration Inter Repository Options Audit Options This presents the following dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Generate Program s dialog Name Aad edemo Project Components DAQ Entities Ul JSF beans CSS Business Logic OR 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 423 HSA Appendix F X2E Specific Features Click OK The process generates the following components Java for Business Rules under logic and logic data package DAO components for each Physical file These are held in dao daoservices and data packages of the Java project Managed Javabeans java for each JSF under jsfbean package Java Server Faces JSF for each reengineered screen is created under WebContent folder The process on completion prompts the user to switch to Java Perspective if desired If selected Eclipse perspective switches to Java and the user gets to see the Java pro
387. plication Area Individual System Documents Select the Generate Individual System Documents option as displayed below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 363 Document Manager Document Application Area Individual System Documents X Analysis System Documentation Type and Location Select the type of documentation and its location System Documentation can generate Single document with documentation of all the objects marked For documentation OR Generate multiple documents For each object marked For documentation System Documentation type O Generate Single System Document Generate Individual System Documents Document Details Folder lt Select Browse to set location gt lt Select Browse to set location Click Browse to select the desired location to save the document and enter a new filename if required X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 364 Desktop Make New Folder Document Folder Browse For Folder E3 i My Documents E3 F My Computer a My Network Places Folder My Documents Document Manager After selecting the desired location for documentation and providing the file name the System Documentation wizard processes further as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 365 Document Manager Select Application Area Features X Analysis System
388. plication Area Options Derive Business Rules Export Options Annotate Document Application Area Data Management Options Test Management Options Reengine r Programs Generate Programs Generate Web Services Verify Data Relationships Data Management Features verify Data Relationships Subsetarchive Filter Subset Data Archive Data Purge Data Archive amp Purge Data Generate Data Application Data Migration Audit Options UML Options This presents a dialog showing the selected cross reference library and the application area Verify Data Relationships dialog Verify Data Relationships Ref Library Maximum Error Allowed It prompts for maximum records in error to be reported showing the primary keys and the foreign keys of each record that breaches a given relationship This can range from 1 to 999 If the request is successful then the job gets submitted and the job details are displayed On completion a Verification node gets added under the application area X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 308 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Data Management Features Verification node under Application Area J E MYC PROCESS Re Engineering d mycrrocesi verification w Application 4rea Diagram xt Data Model Diagram Sti Area Flow Diagram ES Overview Structure Chart Se All Objects Programs E Files Business Rules Em Consolidated Rules Screen Components H Regener
389. press or implied about the accuracy of this information and reserves the right to revise this document or make changes to the products described herein at any time without notice and without obligation Fresche Legacy Inc is not liable for any loss of data damage to databases or other software or any other losses arising from the use of this manual 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 2 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Contents Contents Publication Informati n a5 ccscareccepcstesvcescase sermons vonnaceeseindees veenbaeesen eevee suepsacesuiedeeseuepeaees 2 COMES cercarono E AE EE 3 PETI O O tedsbuossecnwsees 9 OVEIVIEW oraa N E A OA O EAE A E AOT E OENE 11 Acronyms used in the Manual ssesssesseessreresreessrresseresreresreossrresseeesseresreesseresseresseresss 11 Introduction to X AnalysiSs essesessesesssoesessecessecesoecessecesssoecesoecescesesossesoesesoesessecesee 12 Profile Authority Requirements ccccsssccccssecccenececeesceceeseceseeecesseceeseecessgecesseeeees 12 Configure Cross Reference LiDrary ccsccccccscsccccccscsccccccscsccccccscsceccccscncescccecscesess 13 Work with X Analysis for Applications cc ccscccsssecccesececesccccesececeescesseseeeseeeeaeaees 13 ESO ANG aaa ents acest wand Gates ee E E E E A E E E 14 EXCUS eee eee E E E en nee ee eee eee 16 VIET ANZA NO Vo easan E boaatiabahanbonatbooateatiseensenabaactatianaberstbanceetearsbontteaactads 17 Geer aun Cie Data IY OCC earo T E ANA 19
390. ptionally run to setup the demo application XAN4CDXA X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 379 JHJ LEGACY type filter text General Ant Data Management Help Install Update Java JavaScript JPA Plug in Development Remote Systems Run Debug Server Service Policies Tasks Team Usage Data Collector Validation Web Web Services A Analysis ADoclet AML Appendix A X Analysis Offline X Analysis Preferences Analysis General A Analysis Preferences IP Address 192 168 170 10 User l _ Case sensitive or greater than 10 character Password Offline Mode Specify the DB2 port number in order to access offline A Analysis cross reference DB2 Port v Begin with Outline Detailed DFD by default _ Show Re engineered Screen for Screen Report layout Ignore Linked Repositories if any Open Called Procedure Program source in same tab Open Data Flow Diagram in same tab Use Business Rules Overlay mode as default _ Use Source buffering Allow editing in Consolidated Rules _ Show only Objects in Metrics Defaults Cancel START X ANALYSIS OFFLINE Select the New DB2 Connection option and provide the required details in the dialog box as shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 380 Appendix A X Analysis Offline
391. ptions Derive Business Rules Export as Web Query Metadata Document Entire Application Export as Web Query Application Export Business Rules as AML Convert DDS to SQL Document Changed Objects Reengineer Programs a ilae Galles Generate Database Service Programs Generate Web Services X Analysis then invokes Generate DDL dialog as displayed below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 324 Exporting amp Printing Generate DDL dialog Generate DDL Select the model objects that you want to include in the DOL script Tables Primary Key Constraint Foreign Key Constraint Indexes F VIEWS _ Use Long Name for Tables and Fields _ Include Default value For Column Ignore Files starting with Make choices from the Generate DDL dialog and click OK to start the process X Analysis displays the following confirmation dialog to get confirmation from the user and start the process DDL Export confirmation dialog X Analysis DOL export might take a while Do you want to proceed After the process is over X Analysis displays a successful message dialog l DDL Export completion dialog X Analysis Data Model Diagram successfully exported to DDL File Jj sAM4CDAALLALLALLE ddl in Application Folder X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 325 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Exporting amp Printing To view expor
392. r by Debtor Contract by Debtor Cust Ret hy Ren Contract More Into Dashboard 24 More Info for CONDET General Mame Description Contract Detail Library XAN4CDEM Type FILE Attribute PF Function Status B 01 09 08 Creation Time 15 27 40 Last Used 29 09 14 Days Used 1 Creation Date Complexity Fields Access Paths Creating Pgms Reading Pgms Updating Pgrms Deleting Pgms Total References X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 160 ths Quick Reference to an Object Export Options It is a drop down menu and contains options for exporting list adding annotates and generating system document 1 Export to PDF MS Word Exports current list on the X Analysis Client to PDF MS Word 2 Export to MS Excel Exports current list on the X Analysis Client to MS Excel 3 Annotate Allows to add annotates for the selected object 4 Documenter Allows to access the Documenter option for generating a customized system document Export Options Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 ViewLeve 5 ss PA E 6 AEH P U Bm SBGi are amp Seq No Tuaana l seat 2 aaa PS Export to POF oor 1 mg A Export to MS Excel OOe22 00 Ct Receive Parameter B inode 0023 00 a TEN TRY W 5 l Documenter 0024 00 L TM 1 w lt jii gt Print The Print option directly prints the currently displayed source content Print option Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRP
393. r 8 5 x 11 Difference Analysis C A4 Size 8 27 x 11 69 Contention Resolution Audit report creates documents in Application Folder If the Application Folder is shared and documents are created opened while the documentation is in progress then this may lead to contention Please select appropriate options to enable resolution Do not overwrite Overwrite if exists but if in use then Create document by similar name Exit Skip document creation Choose desired settings for the Audit Report and click Finish to generate the report When the generation is over the following dialog appears which asks to open the generated document X Analysis dialog to open the generated report X Analysis Audit Report Documentation process completed The documents has been saved in D Program Files Databoroughis Analysis 192 168 170 10 PCF_ 4nN4CO 4 Audit Report For S4h4C0 4 pdf Do you want to open this X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 281 Audit Options INITIALIZE SOURCE ARCHIVING Source archiving can be run independently of metrics The Initialize Source Archiving option is available for the cross reference library and the application areas When the user chooses the option the following dialog is invoked Initialize Source Archiving dialog amp Initialize Source Archiving Ref Library Archive From S441NIT process Archive Fr
394. r Entry details from Operational System and Sales Ledger details from Financial System representing the application area as a specific part from multiple systems The Application Area feature facilitates grouping of an application into different Business Areas They are defined on the basis of certain criterions called Application Area Rules Application Area Rules are hence a mechanism which categorizes an application into different Application Areas You can create an application area by running the X Analysis Client or using X4WRKAPP on IBM i Using X Analysis Plugin Opt for the context menu on the cross reference library and select the New Application Area option This brings up a dialog to add a new application area to the selected cross reference library The dialog takes the Application Area Name and Description as inputs Click OK to add the new application area to the cross reference library New Application Area dialog New Application Area Mame ORDERS Description Order entry System Copy Rule from an existing Application Area 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 100 HIS Application Area New Application Area added Mm 192 168 170 10 E Wh XAN4ACDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System i Application Area Diagram at Data Model Diagram Pa Overview Structure Chart e All Objects Irs Programs IE Files Source Files Business Rules Em Consolidated Rules Screen Components ae Change History Regenerated Programs
395. r Google Account Authorize and copy code Mamail com Paste code from Web Browser 12 After sign in the following window will appear X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 467 Appendix M Export to Google Drive Google Authorization window https accounts google com o oauth2 auth access_type online amp approval_prompt auto amp iclient_id 1007793397 CS XA Project would like to 3 View and manage the files and documents in your Google Authorize and copy code Drive By clicking Accept you allow this app and Google to use your information in accordance with their respective terms of service and privacy policies You can change this and other Account Permissions at any time Paste code from Web Browser Click Accept 13 The following window containing a code will appear Copy and paste this code on the Paste code from Web Browser box Google Authorization window with code https accounts google com o oauth2 auth access_type online amp approval_prompt auto amp client_id 1007793557 Please copy this code switch to your application and paste it there Authorize and copy code Paste code from Web Browser Cancel X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 468 Appendix M Export to Google Drive Click Authorize 14 The following window will appear Click OK to confirm the use of the Google Drive feature
396. r Info Serial Number Partition ID Total Partitions Send Server Information Copy to Clipboard In the above view provide the Host Name IP address Username and Password Check the Use SSL box for the SSL security feature Click Connect to authorize the IBM i machine to provide the Serial Number and the Partition Number The following window displays the Progress Information X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 32 Using X Analysis Client Progress Information X Analysis License Manager Tool o ES Help JHJ LEGACY Server Info Serial Number Fartition ID Total Partitions Send Server Info Once the connection is established the following window is displayed X Analysis License Manager Tool o E Help License Manager View 24 1 Enter the login informations and Connect to retrieve the server informations Hos Name Usemame E v so UseSSL Installed Licenses Security Code Cea eg er Progress Information Server Info Serial Number Partition ID Total Partitions X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 33 JHJ LEGACY Using X Analysis Client Click OK The Server Info will now show the Serial No Partition ID and Total Partitions License Manager window with the Server Info Help icense vlanager lew i 1 Enter the login informations and Connect to retrieve the server informations i v Password rT TiTiiiy Host
397. r Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 30 JHJ LEGACY Using X Analysis Client Home Share View 7 tT di Downloads XALicenseManagerTool_win32 win32 x86 64 v Search AALicenseManagerlo 2 Name Date modified Type Size x Favorites E Desktop di xALicenseManagerTool 06 04 2015 13 17 File folder a Downloads SE Recent places 4 Homegroup jE This PC thi Network Home Share View ha ie G di XALicenseManagerTo XALicenseManagerTool vi Search XALicenseManagerTo 2 F3 i Favorites Name Date modified Type Size B Desktop m configuration 06 04 2015 13 08 File folder Jp Downloads d plugins 06 04 2015 13 09 File folder E Recent places 06 04 2015 13 09 File folder 06 04 2015 13 08 ECLIPSEPRODUCT me Homegroup AALicenseManagerT ool 06 04 2015 13 08 Application AALicenseManagerTool 06 04 2015 13 08 Configuration sett This PC iy Network Now double click on the XALicenseManagerTool application marked above to invoke the License Manager View X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 31 thJst LEGACY Using X Analysis Client X Analysis License Manager View 1l Enter the login informations and Connect to retrieve the server informations Host Name Username Password ens Use SSL L Info Installed Licenses Security Code 2 Send the Server Information to Fresche Legacy to receive your License file Serve
398. r to the original file s or any further files which have been selected by this rule Owning Files This option only applies to SELECT lines If allows you to specify the selection of files which own the specified file s Select one of Y Yes include files which own the specified file s N No do not include files which own the specified file s X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 110 thJs0 LEGACY Application Area C Cumulative include files which own the specified file s or any other files which have been selected X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 111 dhUSsts Application Area Dependent Files This option only applies to SELECT lines It allows you to specify the selection of files which are owned by the specified file s Select one of Y Yes include files which are owned by the specified file s N No do not include files which are owned by the specified file s C Cumulative include files which are owned by the specified file s or any other files which have been selected by this rule Cumulative means including all the dependents of the first file all the dependents of the dependent files and so on Use F3 to exit Press ENTER to build Application Area Lists Dependencies options Tables summarizing the options and their interactions are compiled below When the selected Object is a Program Featu
399. rams 2 Objects P Update Programs 14 Objects F Update Output Programs 4 Objects Double click on the View Annotation icon to invoke the Annotation dialog box displaying the notes that had been written earlier You can further add modify notes in the Annotation dialog box and click Save These notes will be viewable later using the same option Annotation dialog e Files Z Object Where Used El CUSTMINT1 CUuse x E Object Centered Data Flow Diagram For CUSF Total Objects 94 A w M amp Sites by Product renamed From cusfla For testing b Access Paths 13 Objects P Attributes Annotation for CUSF Additional Notes Additional comments For CUSF Wayne says so Attributes The Attributes feature comprises the impacted fields of a particular object Through these fields the main object is referenced X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 178 e Files 3A Object Where Used Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 b Access Paths F Input Programs F Input Services b Input Triggers Attributes icon CUSTMNT4 fal cuse i3 13 Objects 59 Objects 1 Object 1 Object b InpukfOukpuk Programs 2 Objects Update Programs 14 Objects b Update fOutpuk Programs 4 Objects Fi Wt CLISE Work with Customer Sikes iors F ZECUSFMNT Customer Site Maintenance PF Attributes Fl WCLISFR Work with Customer Sikes F Attributes E ZECUSFMNTR Cu
400. rary List changes accordingly This Library List contains cross reference library data library QGPL QTEMP and XAOBJ You can change this set of Library List by using the Add Alternate Data Library List option After the Alternate Data Library is set up select the Select Alternate Data Library List option to modify the Library List of the cross reference If you want to use the previous Library List original Library List at the time of cross reference selection select the Reset Library List option The Reset Library List option is available on the right click menu of a cross reference library On selecting Reset Library List the Library List is modified by removing the Alternate Data Library ies from the user part of the Library List and restoring the original Data Library ies to the user part of the Library List The Reset Library List option gets enabled only when the Select Alternate Data Library List option is selected from the right click menu of the Alternate Data Library List Application Library List The Application Library List is used to view update the list of object and source libraries for the selected cross reference This feature allows you to add or remove any library or even change the sequence number However you need to re initialize to see the effect after changing the application library list To view change the application libraries opt for the context menu on the application library and select the Application Libr
401. rated for all the selected objects Generate Individual System Documents It means that individual system documents will be generated for all the selected objects Generate System Documents using previous values X Analysis provides a unique feature of recalling the previous options selected by the user in System Documentation process Through the Generate System Documents using previous X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 388 Appendix C Component Documenter values option the user is able to generate a System Document without choosing the same options again in System Documentation process Document Details Document Title The user can change document title as per the requirement Path Click the Browse button to change the default path After making appropriate selections click Next which displays the following screen Component Documentation Wizard Screen Il X Analysis System Documentation Components Documenter Select Features bo be included in the Components Document Header Information Annotation This includes Parameters and Windows information iF any Data Content Screen Actions Screen Design Normal Detailed Residual Logic Level Business Rules Summary Detailed Export to M5 Excel Cancel The user can select various options as per requirement from the Wizard Screen ll The options available are Header Information
402. re Brief Description Referenced N Do not include any called programs Programs Y Include programs called by the selected program A Include programs called by the selected program and any programs called by any programs included by this rule Referenced Files N Do not include any referenced files Y Include files referenced by the selected program U Include files updated by the selected program A Include files referenced by the selected program or by any programs subsequently included by the referenced Program value V Include files updated by the selected program or by any programs subsequently included by the referenced Program value Owning Files NOT APPLICABLE WHEN THE SELECTED OBJECT IS A PROGRAM Dependent Files NOT APPLICABLE WHEN THE SELECTED OBJECT IS A PROGRAM X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 112 m gt SHS Application Area When selected Object is a File Feature Brief Description Referenced N Do not include any called programs Programs Y Include programs which referenced the selected file U Include programs which update the selected file A Include programs which reference the selected file or any files which have been included as owner or dependent files V Include programs which update the selected file or any files which have been included as owner or dependent files S Include programs which update the selected file and are not al
403. rea The node is available on the navigation pane as shown below Double click the node to invoke the Work with Members Source Scan dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 E Ez Source Scan node W 192 168 170 10 ZAN4CDXA X4N4CDEM Tutorial System i Application Area Diagram xt Data Model Diagram t Overview Structure Chart Se All Objects rr Programs E Files Source Files Business Rules Em Consolidated Rules Screen Components Cp Change History Regenerated Programs Pee 2OUrce Scan OA Sanitize z FResize Frocedures 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 93 SJ U U A J H Application Library Source Scan dialog Work with Members Source Scan Member Details Application 4rea Library NONE w ALLUSR hal Source File Type Search Details You can provide keywords in the Search Text box If an application area is not selected then click OK to scan the entire application for the Object s with the keywords specified by you Limit the scan by selecting appropriate details in the other drop down boxes In this way you will get results quickly The words mentioned in the Search Text box will also scan the source member s for comments if any containing the keywords Select the required Member Details and fill in the keyword s as is shown below Source Scan dialog with details Work with Members Source Scan Eg Member Details Applicati
404. rence Eg Click OK to execute a batch job and refresh the cross reference for any changes This action locks X Analysis Plugin After the Refresh process is over the lock on X Analysis Plugin is released Rebuild Data Model Select the Rebuild Data Model option to bring up the Rebuild Data Model dialog Rebuild Data Model dialog Rebuild Data Model Eg Click OK to unselect the application and submit the modelling command in batch mode The process locks the application X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 65 Repository Refresh Log Application Library The Repository Refresh Log view displays list of commands executed over the selected cross reference library Select the option from the Refresh Options submenu on the context menu of the cross reference library Repository Refresh Log 2 Repository Refresh Log Repository Refresh Log of XAN4CDEA Run Cate 2012 12 20 2012 12 20 2012 12 20 2012 12 20 012 12 14 eO12 12 14 2012 12 03 2012 11 29 2012 11 29 012 11 29 f012 11 29 012 11 29 2012 11 29 e012 11 29 2012 11 29 2012 11 29 2012 11 29 eQU12 11 27 f012 11 22 012 11 05 2012 11 05 Run Time 12 50 25 12 40 36 12 11 54 075703 OF se 02 17 48 04 25339 laiia 11 46 19 11 46 00 10 53 04 10 51 17 10 26 16 10 24 01 l ii iz5 10 06 46 140s 2 06 31 26 Diliz 06 41 16 Program Executed REGEN REGEN REGEN REGEN REFRESH REFRESH REFRESH
405. rification 307 308 309 310 X 2E 2 396 398 399 408 409 XALicenseManagerTool 28 29 30 31 X Analysis 1 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 39 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 54 56 57 58 69 75 76 86 90 100 116 125 145 147 158 160 171 172 181 189 218 224 225 233 235 236 238 243 244 246 247 248 250 260 280 288 293 295 298 299 303 308 309 312 318 319 320 322 323 324 325 327 329 330 331 335 337 346 373 376 378 379 380 381 386 387 390 391 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 408 409 415 419 425 426 427 428 429 430 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 442 443 444 445 448 452 Suite of products 10 X Analysis Client 9 13 25 27 47 48 100 160 323 378 425 X Analysis Perspective 25 26 295 415 425 426 X Extract 235 440 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 485
406. rinter files It does not have display files MEMBER LIST The Member List option displays the list of source members for a specified source file of the selected library The Member List contains the members available in the selected library and the source file based on the selected criteria Click the Member List icon the following dialog is invoked Work with Members dialog Work with Members Application 4rea Application Area Description All Members Selected Library Source File Mame Library Source File Member Details Member Type Text hE Specify the selection criteria on the dialog to display a set of members 1 Select the Source File and the Library using the drop down list Selecting ALLUSR as the library name prevents the source files in the cross reference library from getting displayed 2 The Member name on the Member Details group can be oO ALL o Member Name maximum 10 characters long X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 84 Joa d Application Library 3 Select the Type from the drop down list 4 Click OK The following screen displays the list of members for the selected criteria Select any member and double click to invoke its Source List Member List Member List 4 H Member List of ALLUSR ALL YALL YALL Total Members 325 Library Source File Name Type Description ODOSSRC STATUS Status file C YAMN4CDEM C YAN4CDEM C YAN4CDEM C YAN
407. roject san cdxaMwcprocess com databorough utils san cdsa dao san cdza daoservices san cdza data mantcdxa jsfbean san tcdza logic mantcdxa logic data application Conkext datasource xml applicatianContext xml datasource override properties datasource properties lag 4j xml messages_en properties persistence xml BA JRE System Library eclipse 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 74 Ahadi Application Library You can also generate the Silverlight C project Here the recovered screens are generated using Silverlight and the code behind business logic is in C INTER REPOSITORY OPTIONS X Analysis provides an option to compare database files across two cross reference libraries The options available are as under Generate Difference Analysis Generate PTF Analysis Display Difference Analysis PTF Analysis Customized Libraries Manage Linked Repositories For detailed description refer to the Inter Repository Options section AUDIT OPTIONS X Analysis provides the following Audit Options Metrics Analysis Screen Metrics File Metrics Business Process Logic Metrics Specialized Analysis Problem Analysis Object Allocation Database Summary Summary Report E Initialize Source Archiving Generate Metrics Analysis Edit Problem Audit Limit X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 75 dhs Applicat
408. rom the IBM i screen The following image shows the XSETUPLOG command screen Page 290 Audit Options XSETUPLOG screen Ede Edt Ven Cannon Ashend Weds Help ES a A a ae Es Bie Oe Hist Port Workstation if Drecennect Setup Database Audit XSETUPLOG Bottom 09 037 The Enable Database Auditing is set as N by default You must change it to Y Select the other details as required Press ENTER Specifying the requirements through this screen will ensure that the selected files are monitored for the database growth from the date they have been added after you have initialized the X Ref Now select the View Database Size Statistics option from the Audit Options submenu The database size statistics will be displayed as below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 291 JHJ LEGACY Database Statistics Analysis for XAN4CDXA Audit Options Database Statistics Analysis for XAN4CDXA No of Members Records Database Name 4 ASTATUS CONHDR Right click on the Database Name More options will appear as shown below Date 2012 07 05 2012 09 06 2012 12 12 2013 05 09 2014 12 03 2015 08 05 2012 07 05 2012 09 06 2012 12 12 2013 05 09 2014 12 03 2015 08 05 2012 07 05 2012 09 06 2012 12 12 2013 05 09 2014 12 03 2015 08 05 2012 07 05 2012 09 06 2012 12 12 2013 05 09 2014 12 03 2015 08 05 2012 07 05 W497 A Ne Size 81920 91920 82920 81930 71920 8
409. rovide the username and the password of a valid IBM i profile 3 Check the box for Use SSL feature for additional security For details refer to Appendix K 4 Click Login After successful sign on X Analysis lists the application libraries which were initialized using the X4WRKAPP command on the IBM i SESSION INFORMATION The X Analysis Client displays detailed session information about the connection in the associated Session Information view Session Information Session Information Session Items Description Host Name 192 168 170 10 Analysis Username MARK Analysis Library CD Job Details 24394302 D4SOINIT OUSER Database Library Application Area Data Model Info Available Library List SAMHCDSA sAMHCDEM QOF The Session Information details are as follows Host Name Displays the IP or the web link of the connected IBM i X Analysis Username Displays the user name which is connected to the IBM i X Analysis Library Name of the cross reference library the user has currently selected Job Details Displays job details in format Job Number Job Name Job User Database Library The Subset Library which is being used to get the data from where the Data View options are selected This displays a value only when a subset library has been selected Application Area Displays the currently selected Application Area Data Model Info Informs the user whether Data Modelling
410. rpgle X Analysis Login dialog on RSE IP Address Library XAOBJ User Password X Analysis User Manual 11 1 E Commands l F IBMi Contexts Jobs GIFS Files ES Spooled Files Fz Qshells gt ih X Ref Libraries b TD OMS t s X Analysis 192 168 21 100 Enter the IP Address and your user name and password to enable the X Analysis Login Login details Remote System Explorer IBM Rational Developer fori ge ee File Edit Navigate Search Project Test XA APICall Run Window Help RAT ETE TE R Breras E FENE of New Connection b E Local a Gig X Analysis 192 168 21 102 ae Objects p A Work with libraries a 25 Work with objects Filter created successfully Expand this again to create al b 24 Work with members b gee Library list b gt User libraries a ae XAN4SCDEM WWCUSTS gt E WWCUSTS pgm rpgle IP Address BF Commands Library AAQBJ gt EE IBMi Contexts T gt Ge Jobs a 2 IFS Files Password ss F Spooled Files gt W X Ref Libraries gt TD OMS b Fig X Analysis 192 168 21 100 G8 X Analysis Login 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 477 thJst LEGACY Appendix O RSE Remote System Explorer on RDi Click OK This will invoke another dialog that will ask you to specify the X Ref library The dropdown box will show as follows Select X Ref dialog Drop down showing the available X Ref libraries _XAN4CDKXAMT gt O XAN4C
411. rred Files le Object List OEMENU 7 Hierarchical Structure C EMENU Total Objects 14 A 0 O OEMENU Order Entry Menu Referred Files Product Enquiry Referred Files Print Invoices Referred Files OE001 Order Entry Referred Files The box will expand to display the files referred to by OE001 The color coded geometric shape before the file name indicates the file type be Object List Referred Files Expanded Hierarchical Structure C_ EMENU Total Objects 14 Fl gt H O OE002 Order Enquiry Referred Files m Customer Enquiry Mainte Referred Files X Analysis User Manual 11 1 LJ OEMENU D Order Entry Menu Referred Files OEO05 T Product Enquiry Referred Files DEDE Frint Invoices Referred Files 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc L OEO01 Order Entry Referred Files fA CUSTSL3 by Cusno R O QEOO1DF Order Entry fi PTYPES Products Page 194 Program Logic Documentation Show Root Node Click the Show Root Node icon to display the root node Show Root Node icon ony be Object List h OEMENL i Hierarchical Structure C EMENU Total Objects 14 fa E T show Root Node E OEMENU l Order Entry Menu F Referred Files OE002 D OE003 oll H OE00 Order Entry Order Enquiry Product Enquiry a Referred Files Referred Files Referred Files Legend icon The Legend icon on the toolbar displays details of the color scheme used by
412. rs Cancel The user can individually select Categories to be exported to Excel By default the Export All box is checked OBJECT ALLOCATION The Object Allocation option displays the information about all objects along with the application area names to which they belong The following screen displays the Object Allocation window Object Allocation for XAN4CDXA Specialized Analysis Mame ASIMPLTEST ASTATUS BALAM EFRO BALAM EFRO BALAMCESTO BALAMNCESTO CBCUSTSD CBCUSTSDO CBC110 CBS06R CBS06RD CBS06RD L1 CBS06RR Description Status File Balance by Product Balance by Product Balance by Store Balance by Store Work with Customers Work with Customers Order Entry System Back ouk account Order Entry display File Back ouk account Problem Analysis Type FILE FILE FMR Y OMFORM OMORY OMFORM FILE FILE BGM FGM FILE FILE FGM Attribute PF PF SQL QUERY MGR SQL QUERY MGR DSPF DSPF CLP RPG DSPF DSPF RPG Application Area aan Y th e E Library SON4CDEM SOh4CDEM AON 4CDEM SOh4CDEM SOh4C DEM AON 4 CDEM SOh4C DEM AAMA DRA AAMACDEM CONC DEM SOh4CDEM AAMA DAA AAMA DAA The above screen lists all objects from the application library XAN4CDXA and provides information about application areas Notice that some rows were blank under the X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 277 Audit Options application area column
413. ry Component Status for Files A Accessed by other files but does not access any other file B Accesses other files and gets accessed by other files C Only accesses other files not accessed by others E D Standalone file Function Type This describes the function of the object and based on COOL 2E definitions Work with Objects dialog displaying Function Type Function Attributes Component Status Function Type PF Mame Program Type The Function Attributes apply to program type objects only The available Function Types are defined here ALL Displays all objects no function filter is applied DSPDEV Defines a program which includes the Display file s DSPFIL Display File Defines a program which displays the records from a specified file many at atime using a sub file DSPOTH Display Other Defines a program which displays records from Display File s and does not have any file s in update write read mode Also the program does not have any Printer File s DSPRCD Display Record Defines a program which displays a single record from a specified database file DSPRCD2 Display Record 2 panels Defines a program that is identical to the DSPRCD function except that it allows the database record details to extend to two separate display device pages DSPRCD3 Display Record 3 panels Defines a program that is identical to the DSPRCD function except that it all
414. ry functions CB906R CB907R Parameters are passed to the program when itis called EH Detailed Overview Structure ALL ALL Totalobjects 406 G A gt e OM TA Li Ei lt The Rollup group describes the cumulative component function of the program and its dependents The following types of Rollup groups are available X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 204 Program Logic Documentation UPD At least one program updates a file PRT Program and dependent programs create a printed report DSP Program and dependent programs use input files and display files OTH No cumulative component function can be determined Function Type Function Type describes the function of the object and is based on COOL 2E definitions OSC with Files The Normal Overview Structure Chart displays a snapshot of an application using programs only Click the Show Files icon available on the OSC toolbar to display the available files along with the programs 2 Object List a Overview Structure Chart 25 Overview Structure Chart with I O Files Expanded Overview Structure Ch ALL ALL Total Objects 483 A BE T PACO worni orders coore TL E C CONHOR f_CONHDRLI gt K CUsFL3 4 f__CUSTS 4 f__ORDSTS gt GoiractHeades _by Debtor Stesbynumber Purchases J Order status P cc ana arei Cara e Store Gem Gita Recs sn S IWWCONDET Work with Order Details EDTFIL
415. ry Chart Metrics History for XAN4CDRA Aled Complexity Level Change Date Source Lines Cyc Complex Halstead Maint Index Low Total 32 Current State aed Yio 40 211 finite Total 20 months back 2011 08 19 2 205 fot 40 206 eon Total 23 months back 2011 06 04 1 904 F135 39 027 2599 E Total 34 months back 2010 07 02 1 910 703 39 302 3057 forms cca zoroos oserzsaon OO O O OO OOO QEO02 CHG 2010 08 27 21 27 39 Total 39 months back 2010 02 08 2 465 Fol 45 971 p74 Total 4z months back 2009 11 14 2 618 oe 47 340 tt lt il The Source Compare editor is invoked when a user double clicks on the listed program as shown below Source Compare editor displaying the code differences Text Compare WKCUIS8E Changed on 2011 08 05 WKCUSEP of 2010 03 12 I C Moy A C MOVE 1 C REA C READ QL c INLE DOW C INLE DOWEQ C EXC C EXCPTEE C REA C READ QL C END C END OQSYSPRT HOO 1 OA OOSYSPRT HOO 1 OA O EF 1 EF 1 PRI D SRL GS END OF PGN t ii SCREEN METRICS The Screen Metrics option provides low medium and high complexity classification of all the available screen functions The screen metrics information is displayed for the complete application and for all the application areas The Screen Metrics information is displayed under the following headings Grid type functions Record type functions X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 263 Audit Options
416. s The blue arrow points towards the application areas which has more calling programs Red Arrow Program to File references are displayed with distinct red arrows In case a program from both application areas refers to files of the other application areas then there should be two distinct red arrows Application Area Diagram Details View The Application Area Diagram provides an option to view the Application Area Diagram details Click Show AAD Details on the Application Area Diagram toolbar Show AAD Details button gt A new window displaying the relationship details for all the application areas will be invoked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 142 thJss LEGACY X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Application Area Diagramming Application Area Diagram details for XANACDXA _ te AAD Details x a Aly OO pplication Area Diagram details for KAN4CDe4 4Soplication Area Rel Application Area Object Count ACCOUNTS COBOL Referred File ACCOUNTS COBOL Called Program ACCOUNTS COMNHDR Referred File ACCOUNTS CUSFMAINT Referred File ACCOUNTS CUSFMAINT Called Program ACCOUNTS CUSTOMERS Referred File ACCOUNTS CUSTOMERS Called Prograrn ACCOUNTS DEL16 Referred File ACCOUNTS DETI Called Program ACCOUNTS MYCFROCESS Referred File ACCOUNTS ORDERS Referred File aiii The Show AAD Details displays limited records if a particular application area is selected from the Applic
417. s 3 0 0 v200806111800 7U 8 9LInwYBUV7sk ea Java Persistence API Tools 2 0 0 v200806090000 7938aCYOCD4CmHtI Uninstall Properties Revert Configuration Ut Java Persistence API Tools EclipseLink Support e 2 0 0 v200806090000 3 85 73313D683333 l JavaScri pt Developer Tools 1 0 0 v200806092130 6 BcMAAwAbORLC Wit JST Common Core 3 0 0 v2008060921 30 25 85 73313C4G6D37 ea JST Enterprise Core 3 0 0 v200806092130 42E9w_kE 77c 7590 _JI be IST Enterprise UI 3 0 0 7200806092130 7 7BFSHEPOWOKwk Wipe IST Enterprise User Documentation 3 0 0 v200712031330 52EAUAgI9m9YDct w x gt Open the Automatic Updates preference page to set up an automatic update schedule If the GEF version number on the user s RDi is below 3 3 the Data Flow Diagram will not be displayed In such a scenario perform the following steps to update the Graphical Editing Framework 2 Click on the Available Software tab and check for the latest version of the Graphical Editing Framework X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 432 thst LEGACY Appendix G Troubleshooting Available Software window Installed Software 4vailable Software ype filter text Install Name b 4 bttp download eclipse org technology epp updates 1 0 t _ a http download eclipse org tools mylyn update e3 4 b O a http download eclipse org webtools updates Properties Manage Sites Show only the latest versions of
418. s Customer Site Maintenance Customer Site Maintenance pak NPE P Attributes P Attributes ata ee E CUSFSEL E CUSTMNTJR 5 5 Customer Site Selection Customer Detail Maintenance CUSFL CUSFLE gt Attributes gt Attributes Sites by Last Cnt Date Sites by Next Cnt Date b Attributes gt Attributes E custwntt BH custmnti_o 5 Ea 7 iid Customer Detail Maintenance Customer Detail Maintenance eae account account o CUSFL9 gt Attributes gt Attributes gt Attributes gt Attributes Sites by Fax No b Attributes Oo E p CUSTMNNT _0 m CUSTMNT 1 Cust i e a Customer Detail Maintenance Customer Detail Maintenance amer re Mortenance P Attributes gt Attributes b Attributes b Attributes v lt Lilt gt al The DFD is also a graphic equivalent of the Object Where Used data Besides the Logical Views Access Paths for CUSF you can see how CUSF fits into the application i e the programs that update CUSF programs that use CUSF as an input file and so on You will see how the dynamic and interactive diagram facilitates access to other features contained within an object There are varied and flexible features and options like Hide Show Objects Expand Collapse Referenced Objects View Annotation Attributes all of these and more are explained ahead Hide Show Objects To have better understanding of object interrelationships you may want to hide show all objects pertaining to programs A single click action on the icon alongside the objects enab
419. s are re generated for the selected application area When the process is over the following dialog is displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 124 Application Area X Information dialog X Analysis i UML Diagrams have been successfully generated View App Area Class Diagram The View App Area Class Diagram option is specific to application areas This is a special class diagram which displays all the objects available in the application area The following dialog is displayed when either the class diagram does not exist or the UML diagrams were not generated for the application area Information dialog X Analysis No Presentable Class Diagram for MVCPROCESS Either Class Diagram has not LD yet been generated or Class Diagram could not be generated In order to view the class diagram for the application area you must execute the Re generate UML option X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 125 LEGACY Application Area App Area Class diagram for the application area MVCPROCESS i a Object List VCAROCESS deere umie a e pass Pi D amm wss i ns rrr r mie oe s p sato 0s ae bad re iaa nao Pres ws seven a e Drd ri te d owe a Ks ene P ____ me be ah See if liners amp e e opan r meari emaer pm mue w s aes rems e f n Th et hg a Sai n wus by uw oe wre FS ina mea
420. s described in the previous section uses a subset of this database This reporting provides a valuable way to measure and manage the quality and complexity of a code base either as a one off or on an ongoing basis The Specialized report can be viewed in two ways Static reports X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 267 Audit Options Difference reports that show the changes in those values over a period of time Opt for the Specialized Analysis option from the Audit Options submenu The following screen displays the Specialized Analysis for the application library XAN4CDXA Specialized Analysis window J Specialized Analysis 3 X Analysis Metrics for XAN4CDXA a lt l Category Report Run Mumber Date Type Status RPG Metrics Reports COMPLEXP General cross language complexity by program COMPLEXS General cross language complexity by SUBROUTINE DATACPS Program data complexity LOWSICP Program logic complexity LOGICS Program logic complexity by subroutine Source Object Reports HAROCODE Programs with hardcoded libraries MISSING Source or objects missing SRCOBIDT Source change date after object created Database Reports DATAERR Database file and member errors and alerts DSGNALRT Database design alerts The user has the option to generate pre configured reports Select any report under the listed category and then right click on it to invoke the conte
421. s for which there is another source member with the same or similar attributes higher up in the load library list Obsolete objects are likewise defined as objects for which there is another object with the same or similar attributes higher up in the load library list GENERATING THE DATA MODEL You should attempt to build the data model only if you have purchased the Re engineering Data Modelling Module X Analysis provides a data modelling environment on IBM i It can re engineer a current application and then automatically generate the data model and the process model The logical data model or entity relationship diagram is derived from the physical data model implicit in the application The initialization procedure asks for generating the Data Model If you have not generated the Data Model then the next step is to generate it To do this select Option 13 on the Work with X Analysis 4 Applications menu X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Applications Databorough Ltd XARWKAPP ho oe al ESS ete 2 GES Enter options press Enter 1 Authorities 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 X A Log 8 Libraries 9 Variable Calls 10 App areas 11 Reports 12 Initialise 13 Build data model 14 Refresh 15 Gen Business Rules 16 Exclusions 17 Objects 18 Pgm Stds Keeie Iailo esa Company division XAN4CDXA XAN4CDEM Tutorial System 13 XAN4CDXAT XAN4CDEM Tutorial System Press ENTER Generate Data Model XA4MODEL Type choices press Enter
422. sh the Application Areas select YES If you select NO the Application Areas will not be updated Refresh Business Rules If you wish to refresh the Business Rules for each changed program select YES If you select NO the Business Rules will not be updated and you will need to re generate all Business Rules next time to bring them up to date VARIABLE PROGRAM CALLS FROM FILES PROGRAMS RPG language allows the use of variables in the CALL statements where the variable would contain the name of the next program to be called at run time The variable might be getting the next program name through some database file or hard coding in the program logic itself In such cases the display program references command shows the variable name instead of the actual program which would be called at run time Therefore some mechanism is required in X Analysis to identify the possible programs which are called through variables at runtime In order to achieve this Option 9 has been provided on the X4WRKAPP screen where the variable calling setup can be done X4WRKAPP command screen X Analysis 4 Work with X Analysis 4 Applications Databorough Ltd XARWKAPP 2 eG eon A ein 20a Enter options press Enter 1 Authorities 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 X A Log 8 Libraries 9 Variable Calls 10 App areas 11 Reports 12 Initialise 13 Build data model 14 Refresh 15 Gen Business Rules 16 Exclusions 17 Objects 18 Pgm Stds KSEE 1s Mesa Company division X
423. should be selected then objects not belonging to the selected application area are highlighted in blue The names of the application areas are displayed on the tool tip of those objects which do not belong to the selected application area While using the Restrict To Application Area feature ensure that the originally selected application area remains the same Structure Chart Diagram for WWCCONSC when Application Area is selected e Object List WWCCONSC 3 Structure Chart for WWCCONSC Total Objects 5 amp Al 3 h W 7 WWCCONSC Work with Customer Contacts QUSTSYS Objects not belonging to the selected Application Area Note that the SCD can be limited by level as well as volume This is applicable to the interactive mode of SCDs You must set the Preferred Volume Limit in the X Analysis General Preferences dialog HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE CHART DIAGRAM The Hierarchical Structure Chart Diagram offers a different layout for viewing the SCD This illustration offers a well defined view of all the programs by representing their control flow and call structure Neat color coded bus routing block diagrams depict the movement of control programs Select the Hierarchical Structure Chart option for any object from the context menu In the following screenshot OEMENU is selected X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 190 Program Logic Documentation Hierarchical Structure Chart option Se Object L
424. ss than OR Equal to LE Equal to EQ Field value Boolean IF AMD w OR X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Field Name Column which the criterion is to be created Operator Column Pick the operator to apply Field value This column lists the fields of the Physical File picked Pick the field on Supply the field value against which the field is to be compared Boolean Column The default value is AND The other option is OR 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 318 ths Exporting amp Printing Exporting amp Printing Modern software design tools frequently offer the facility to re engineer a data model or entity relationship diagram from an existing database This is usually done over an Open Database Connectivity ODBC connection and relies on the metadata held within a database to describe the relationships between tables These tools are often unable to re engineer an accurate data model from an existing DB2 database because it predates the database features that the tool relies on You can use the X Analysis data model to bridge this gap and import your data model into other tools X Analysis provides various export options for exporting diagrams and technical details directly to applications such as PDF Microsoft Word or Microsoft Visio The interface to PDF Microsoft Word is sophisticated enough to automatically produce detailed and structured documents that have Contents amp Index pages
425. ssociated with the application The following screen is displayed when Option 24 is selected Problem Analysis screen Analyse Application Problems XPRBANL Type choices press Enter Z Analar inllonc sie wy gt AACA2EDEMO Bottom EOE E F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Plo How to se thus display F24 More keys Press ENTER to submit a batch job which will execute the XPRBANL command in batch mode Option CT Prj Ctl Option CT can be used to work with X2E RPG Project Control The following screen is displayed when you select Option CT Problem Control screen Work wich X2E REG Proj ct Control Project AA EDEMO Ref d Project RF2EDEMO X2E RPG XARWKPRJL Databorough Ltd Weee Zaa A OS Type options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Notes 8 Comp Errors 9 Missing Files Se I SUS oE Eeo een Type Category Program Description Ms is Iho Cl TO TSAGEFR TSAWEFR TSAXELR TSAZETR Fl Help F3 Exit F21 Project Notes X Analysis User Manual 11 1 EALE DOCCOL Edit Medication EDTRCDTEdI C Diagnos lS TEN Edic reser ipi Ions DSPDTASFL PMTERROR SCNDATE TRNLOGIC F5 Refresh F6 Add F10 Drop Fold F12 Cancel F22 File Errors 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc LYNDAB LYNDAB LYNDAB LYNDAB Bottom F20 Summary Page 406 HISH Appendix D XREDOAPP Command Options under Project Control Screen The flow of actions from the Work with X2E RPG Project Control screen is as follows
426. sst LEGACY Audit Options Specify a high value so that any value above this will determine that the program is of high complexity Any program that falls below the Average setting will be determined as Low complexity Print Metrics To print the Metrics directly select Print Print icon on Metrics Window Toolbar Source Type court Compl Halsteac Export Metrics Select the PDF or MS Excel option as required under the Export Options icon xport Options on Metrics Window Toolbar Expand All Click the Expand All icon which will expand all the data Expand All option on Metrics Window Toolbar Complexity Level 4 Grand Total The screen below shows the expanded window after the Expand All icon is clicked X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 259 Audit Options Expanded Metrics window Ind Summary Metrics aN F Metrics Analysis for XAN4CDXA Double click to view History A B lt Complexity Level Uni Source Type Source Lines ORGMNT Organisation Mainte 33 Average CNTCMAINT Contacts Maintenance RPGLE Average OED01 Order Entry RPG Average CUSTMNT1 Customer Detail Mai RPGLE Average WWCONDET Work with Order Det RPGLE Average WWCONHDR Work with Orders RPGLE Average WWCUSTS Work with Customers RPGLE Average CONO001 Contract Entry RPG Metrics History The Metrics History displays all previous instances of the generated metrics data T
427. st amp Name lt 2 2 eer et Ft fee 2 2 eff fF feFfee Sf ff fff eFfeete In order to browse a source of any LF double click on it or select the Zoom Source option from the context menu MEMBER X REF The Member X Ref option lists all source lines where the field variable has been used referenced in the source member and its associated Device Files and Copybooks A wide variety of options can be specified including Files Array Definitions Data Structures Sub Fields of Data Structures Indicators Key Lists Data Fields File Formats Subroutines Program Variable Array Elements Parameter Lists Parameters Key Fields Message Ids EXCPT Names etc Double click on a field in source member displays Member X Ref Alternatively choose the Member X Ref option from the context menu When this option is selected for a sub item such as a Sub Field Data Structure Array Element or File Format a list of the sub items along with all references to the parent items is displayed Double click on the source line to view source of the object X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 169 Quick Reference to an Object Member X Ref view te Member Ref E3 A Ely Be 7 Member Reference For CONOO1DF in 4N4CDEMIOQRPGSRE COND01 Lines 14 View Level 1 seq Wo a T E P E AN re 0002 00 FCONGOIDFCF E WORESTN 0003 00 GRREN1 KSFILE DESFL 0041 00 WRITEQECLR 99 0042 00 WRITEQETRL 99 004
428. stomer Site Maintenance F Attributes 4 Program Logic Documentation H e a i amp aa e CUSFLA Sites by Product renamed From cusfla For testing b Attributes J CUSFLC Sites by Salesperson b Attributes m CUSFLE Sites by Organisation b Attributes USFLZ Sites by Status b Attributes CUSFLS Sites by Disk amp Status b Attributes gt The different objects corresponding to the main object have fields within them implicit as Attributes These are easily accessible by a single click on the Attributes icon The term Attributes is changed to related attribute input update output etc on expanding the Attributes button as shown below e Files a Object Where Used Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 b Access Paths F Input Programs b Input Services F Input Triggers b InputiOutput Programs 2 Objects b Update Programs me F Update Output Programs 4 Objects Fl Wit CLISF Work with Customer Sites Updout 47 Fields a ADDI Address 1 a ADDZ Address 2 e ADDS Address 3 e ADD4 Address 4 a ALTTEL Alt Tel No 1 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Expanded Attributes CUSTMNT1 ga ysr Ee m 13 Objects 59 Objects 1 Object 1 Object 14 Objects 1 m 00 00 00 00 oo Fl WihtCLISER Work with Customer Sikes F Attributes 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc E A amp e aa Pn m CUSFLA Sites by Product
429. t Tasks b Team Generate WAR EAR ee Generate Separate UserLogicClass b UML2 Diagrams Generate Java to use with Other Databases Usage Data Collector _ Suppress try catch Statements in Logic Classes Validation _ Unique Component ID p Web gt Web Services A Analysis Advanced Folders General A Data Test 4 A Redo Advanced t ADoclet XML Restore Defaults Apply You can modify the following X Redo Advanced Preferences Page Designer Option to design page using either Eclipse or Dreamweaver By default Eclipse is chosen Generate WAR EAR When checked this includes a right click option Generate WAR EAR on the X Ref and application area Generate Separate UserLogicClass Check this option to generate separate UserLogicClass Generate Java to use with Other Databases Check this option to generate Java to use with the other databases Suppress try catch Statements in Logic Classes Check this option to suppress try catch statements in Logic Classes Unique Component ID Check this box to prefix the JSF Component IDs with the program names so that they are distinguishable when XHTML files are merged Preference changes will take effect for the new X Analysis Instance X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 56 Anos Application Library Application Library WORK WITH APPLICATION LIBRARIES The Application Libraries view is the first X Analysis vi
430. t as Table with LF for existing name To be rebuilt directly as SQL Tables and Unspecified category This window is similar to the File Analysis window The following screenshot shows the File Conversion Report for CUSTS It gives the total count for the objects falling under each category X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 135 thJst LEGACY W Views a aSTATUSLI A me Conversion Report 3 Application Area File Conversion Report for CUSTS Pa Bo DDL Conversion Error log F ion t z gt E File Conversion Report for CUSTS si 4 Category Object Description t To be rebuilt as SOL Index Count36 gt To be rebuilt as Table with LF for existing name Count13 t To be rebuilt directly as SOL Tables Count 14 gt Unspecified Category Count lt gt When you expand each category the details of the files are presented as shown below This details show data after the conversion has been performed This is seen in the Format level identifier columns for before and after conversion Moreover the record count before and after conversion can also be seen Detailed view of File Conversion Report File Conversion Report for CUSTS Category Object Description Object Library Source Library SourceFile Target Library Target File FrmtidBefore FrmtidAfter Rec Bef Rec After gt To be rebuilt as SQL Index 4 To be rebuilt as Table with LF for existing Count 13 ASTATUS CO
431. t is converted to an LF definition They will have been generated in the DDL source for the SQL table Command Parameters The XDDSTOSQL command requires the following parameters X Analysis Library Enter the name of the X Analysis cross reference library built for the application containing the database objects to be converted New Database Library Enter the name of a new library which will contain the converted database Application Area Enter the name of the application area containing the database objects to be converted You can also enter the special value of ALL This will result in all database objects in the application being converted Compilation Type This option will allow the user to choose whether this command should run all compilation commands or whether calls should be made to external change control systems When the INLINE option is selected the user will be able to set various compile command parameters using data areas XWRKDTAARA command The XWRKDTAARA command assists the user to maintain various values for data areas used in XDDSTOSQL command The command is available in the library XAOBJ which must be included in the library list before executing the command The command accepts the following two parameters X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 331 Exporting amp Printing XWRKDTAARA XRFLIB XAN4CDXA SYSTEM XDDSTOSQL XRFLIB Cross Reference library SY
432. t with documentation of af the objects marked for documentation OR Generate mutiple documents for each object marked for documentation System Documentation type Generate Single System Document Generate Individual System Documents Generate System Documents using previous values Document Details Name System Document for XAN4COXA pdf Path D Program Files Databorough X Analysis 192 168 170 10 PCF_XAN4CDXA System Document for XAN4COXA pdf After selecting the Generate System Documents using previous values option click Browse to invoke the Save As dialog Select the desired location to save the document and enter a new file name if required X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 348 Ths Document Manager Document Folder T System Document for sAN4COsA Application Area MVCPROCESS pdf System Document for X4N4COX4 pdf My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer T t File name SANADA Application 4rea MYCPROCESS fie My Network Save as type pdf Then click Finish to initiate the System Documentation Process DOCUMENTING AN APPLICATION AREA The Document Application Area option documents all information about objects belonging to the selected application area This option is available on the context menu of an application area and invokes the System Documentation Wizard On selecting the Document Application Area option the following Sys
433. tart X Analysis Select a cross reference from the cross reference list view Mark objects to be included for the System Documentation process To mark the objects for documentation process use the context menu on objects and select the Mark for Documenter option Alternatively the entire list can be selected for documentation by selecting the Mark all for Documenter option available under the X Analysis menu Select the Documenter button from the main toolbar Document Manager X Analysis Document Manager Name Description CONDO Contract Entry CEO Order Entry Move Down Delete All Invert Selection Generate Document Save amp Exit X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 336 Document Manager The Objects Members on the documenter list can be arranged using the Move Up Move Down Delete Delete All buttons on the Document Manager The Document Manager provides a facility for object selection for system document Invert Selection On clicking Invert Selection the selected object gets un selected and all other un selected objects get selected After ordering of the objects click Generate Document This invokes the Documenter Wizard as shown below System Documenter Wizard X Analysis System Documentation Type and Location Select the type of documentation and its location System Documentation can generate Single document with documentation of all the objects marked
434. te Metrics Analysis option Generate Metrics dialog Update Metrics Ref Library Update metrics amp Dlt history A batch job is submitted when the user clicks OK EDIT PROBLEM AUDIT LIMIT When you select the option the following dialog is displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 283 Audit Options Edit Problem Limit dialog Limit ID Limit Value EXCGOTO EXCIFDP EXCELSEDP EXCLOOPDP 0 5 1 1 EXCSUBRLN 20 EXCIFLN 48 Cancel The Limit Value given in the above dialog is user configurable The values shown are set by default When you assign a new value through the above dialog it determines the inclusion of the category in the Problem Analysis process Click Save to apply your changes The changed value will get reflected in the related table on the server side EDIT PROBLEM CATEGORIES You can add a new category or edit delete a previously existing category by selecting the Edit Problem Categories option Such modifications can be made for the main category i e the Problem Category group as well as for the sub categories Select the option to invoke the following dialog X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 284 Audit Options Edit Problem Categories window JHJ LEGACY Category Group Problem Category Group Source Object Alerts v Edit Add Froblem Category Category Description
435. ted DDL statements select menu X Analysis gt Open Application Folder The generated DDL file is listed in this folder Application Folder displaying DDL File fm PCF_XANACDXA Sele File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ar ky Back gt p gp Search gt Folders oe ae x iz RE Address D Program Files Databorough Analysis 192 166 170 10 PCF_ AMATORA ka 0 AOh4 0 240R DER SALLALLE ddl DDL File 33 KB DDL is plain text and human readable so you can view the file in any text such as Notepad The snippet of the DDL statement generated is displayed below DDL File in Notepad XAN4CDXAALLALLALLE ddl Notepad Date Description Language ror HANS CDAS Generated using m Analysis Version 9 1 28 DDL Format Generic Date of Generation Jan 4 2011 11 13 54 CREATE TREBLE ASTATUS STATUS char 1 NOT NULL STSTHT char 30 3 F ALTER TABLE ASTATUS ADD CONSTRAINT ASTATUS keys PRIMARY KEY STATUS CREATE TABLE CNTACS CUSNO decimal 5 0 NOT NULL USERNM char 34 PRECDE char NOT NULL TELNO char 17 FASNO char 15 F F F r F Note The Export as DDL option is also available on application areas CONVERT DDS TO SQL The Convert DDS to SQL option calls the IBM i command XDDSTOSQL and submits the job in batch This option is available on cross reference library Application Areas and Physical Files PF 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 326 ne Exporting amp Printing
436. tem Documentation Wizard appears X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 349 Document Manager Type and Location X Analysis Se Ed System Documentation Type and Location Select the type of documentation and its location Syskem Documentation can generate Single document with documentation of all the objects marked For documentation OR Generate multiple documents Foar each object marked For documentation System Documentation type Generate Single System Document Generate Individual System Documents Document Details Document Title System Document for AM4 4 Application Area MYCPROCESS Name System Document For H4h4CD84 Application Area MYCPROCESS pdf C Documents and Settings alakhily Documents 4nalvsis Application Data19 168 170 10 PCF 4ah4cor 4 system Document For s4h4Coe4 Application Area MviCPROCESS pdf Cancel You can choose from the following options 1 Generate a single document with documentation for all objects marked for documentation in the Application Area 2 Generate individual documents for all object marked for documentation in the Application Area 3 Generate System Document using previous values for the Application Area X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 350 Document Manager Document Application Area Single System Document Select the Generate Single System Document option as displayed below
437. tention Resolution etc X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 372 Document Manager No Detailed Object Documentation Finish X Analysis System Documentation Finish Define the Page Size and Contention Resolution Option Selected Sequence Level Settings Application Area OSC Normal Application 4rea OSC Level 2 Application Area DMD Normal Paper Size Letter 8 5 x 11 CO 44 Size 6 27 x 11 69 Contention Resolution System Documentation creates documents in Application Folder IF the Application Folder is shared and documents are createdlopened while the documentation is in progress then this may lead to contention Please select appropriate options to enable resolution Do not overwrite Overwrite if exists but if in use then Create document by similar name O Exit Skip document creation Click Finish to generate the document System Document using previous values We have already discussed this topic under the Marking the individual objects complete list section X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 373 Document Manager DOCUMENTING AN ENTIRE APPLICATION The Document Entire Application option documents all information about objects belonging to the selected application This option is available on the context menu of an application and invokes the System Documentation Wizard The procedure for documenting an entire applic
438. ter CATCMAINTD FILE Contacts Maintenance CONDET FILE Contract Detail Delete by Type CONDETLI1 FILE by Store Contract Prod CONDETLZ FILE by StorefContract Prodi CONDETLS FILE by Produckitontrack Select by Type CONHDR FILE Contract Header CONHDRL1 FILE by Debbor Contract LOPRJHDRL1 4 FILE by Debkor Cusk Ref Undo ll Deletes CONHDRL FILE by RepfContract LOPRADRLS FILE by Debbor Date CONHDRL4 FILE by Debkor Date Rep COPRADRLS FILE by Date USF FILE Sites CUSFLI1 FILE Sites by Mame CUSFL2 FILE Sites by Status CUSFL3 FILE Sites by Number CUSFLS FILE Sites by Disk amp Status USFLG FILE Sites By Dist amp Mame CUSFL FILE Sites by Last Cnt Date CUSFLE FILE Sites by Next Cnt Date CUSFL9 FILE Sites by Fax Mo CUSFLA FILE Sites by Product renan Clleele ETI E Dikar has iwin ick lt Cancel The dialog offers removal of objects from system documentation based on name type of objects The selected name type can be removed using the Delete buttons Click Next to proceed further X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 367 thJsst LEGACY Document Manager Features to Document oystem Documentation Specify Contents Select features to be included in the System Document Object List Data Model Diagram Normal In Word as Image Detailed In Visio _ Annotation LF Access Path details Detailed File Fiel
439. tered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 18 m Al B jad ooo gar E CUSTMNTI 0 CUSFLA Customer Detail Maintenance Sites by Product renamed from i cusfla For testing P Attributes P Access Paths 13 Objects H P Attributes b Input Programs 5 Objects H WWiCLISTS Work with Customers 5 CUSFLC P Attributes Sites by Salesperson F Attributes This tells us that the child objects belong to the application area MVCPROCESS Note While using the Restrict To Application Area feature ensure that the originally selected application area is not changed STRUCTURE CHART DIAGRAM Before undertaking an elaborate exercise of documenting program logic it is imperative to understand how control transfers from one program to the next A Structure Chart Diagram or SCD addresses this issue and represents the control through graphical color coded block diagrams Broadly speaking the SCD is a nested tree diagram that shows the X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 183 ns Program Logic Documentation I C 4 gt os complete call hierarchy of the programs called These diagrams contain all the relevant i information as per control flow and call structure Moreover you can view data input TA objects and avail a summarized description for each of the objects Important functional aspects like updates prints and displays are color coded to help you instantly focus on these commonly preferred details
440. the CRTUSRPRF command to create the XAN4SEU user profile Make sure that the following parameters are set User Password XAN4SEU User Class PGMR Initial Program XSEUCLP Library 5 XAOBJ Create User Profile CRTUSRPRF Type choices press Enter WIS ete p orile aaa a S eee XAN4SEU Name User password ee eee ee USR PRE Name USRPRF NONE E Set password to Bcd ec ne INO NO ee GES SIE EEDS ame ean We es ENABLED ENABLED DISABLED Userkeclaso r ame er ease ee PGMR Wek soo OR SiGMin see Assistance level a s o o o o o c SOMOVA ASSO VAI E BASEO NE RAIMI eee Current Wiese mnm seo d i IC IEAM IDNR AL Name CRTDFT Inreda oe igen WE ete Sees YoSNe UC IL Name NONE Tipps Oc cites ones arc ec oO eet oe Sn XAOBJ Name we lGdbsli C VRIE TaLictial menu s a s o o o o c MAIN Name SIGNOFF lial ac ah eee ee ee eee ee ii Bib Name p ABM gt GU RIMS Limit Sea eee ee ee ee ee ee E xNO xNO PARTIAL YES Terr decor I ELON a a a a Analysis oae User Mone P3 E lt a e F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel PIS How to use this display F24 More keys Press F10 and Page Down X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 382 THUS Appendix B Enabling the SEU Interface Set Special Authorities ALLOBJ JOBCTL E SAVSYS Change User Profile CHGUSRPRF Type choices press Enter Additional Parameters opPecrla k authori y e a a a ATT TOBI SAME USRCLo NONE
441. the page will display as empty as is seen in the following view License Manager View Security Code 1l Enter the login informations and Connect to retrieve the server informations UseSSL i Expiry Date Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Module 5 Module 6 Module 7 Module 2 Module 9 Module 10 Security Code 0001 01 01 Not included Not included Not included Not included Not included Not included Not included Not included Mot included Not included X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 38 Using X Analysis Client New DB400 Connection The X Analysis menu provides the New DB400 Connection option Through this option you can create connections to different IBM i servers Provide valid sign on information when you select the New DB400 Connection option Upon successful sign on X Analysis adds a new IBM i node in the navigation view Creating New DB400 Connection from X Analysis Plugin Analysis Eclipse Platform Es File Edit Navigate Search Project X Analysis Tomcat Run Window Help H HS MOGEL RE DRAA See E FN ka em F kai hh a 9 q Jawa EE BB 192 168 21 102 iB New Connection Host Name 127 0 0 1 Username MARE Password OOO Use SSL LJ Session Information Session Items Description Host Name A Analysis Usern A Analysis Library Job Details lt New DB2 Connection The X Analysis menu provides the N
442. the selected application application area Select the option to display the following dialog Export Business Rules as XML dialog Export Business Rules as XML This may take tine Do you want to continue After the processing is complete the following information dialog is displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 69 Anda Application Library Export Business Rules as XML completion dialog Export Business Rules as XML ML File generated successfully at C Documents and Settings alakhilly Documents lt 4nalvsis Application Datal9 168 170 10 PCF Xah4Coe a FileFieldDetails 4N4CDe4 xml To view the generated XML file open the application folder as displayed below Open Application Folder option z x File Edit Navigate Search Project X Analysis Tomcat Run Window Help Fi qT o pia License Manager ry se ch ra X Analysis G Ay i gt New DB400 Connection 2 Java EE Navigation Metrics Dashboard New DEZ Connection 4 8 192 168 170 10 Ta Application Area Diagram at Data Model Diagram Fes Overview Structure Chart e All Objects Open Application Folder Programs Files Source Files rel business Rules Consolidated Rules Mark all for Documenter Change Application Folder Open Log Folder Authorize Google Drive Report an Issue Install SSL CA certificate The following screen displays the Application Folder listing the generated XML
443. then value should be a Date in the MMDDYY format If the usage is Days Count the value should be a number Specify the comparison type EQ equal NE not equal Library Name An individual name a generic name ALL If the Library Rule is left blank it will be treated as equivalent to EQ ALL Specify the attribute of the objects to be selected The default is ALL Fill the name text of the rule in this box For the files specify the status as A Accessed by other files but does not access any other files B Accesses other files and gets accessed by other files C Only accesses other files not accessed by others D Standalone File ALL This is the default selection 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 108 HJA Application Area Feature Brief Description For the programs specify the status as A Parent or top level program which calls other programs but is not called itself B Program is called by another and also calls other programs C Program at end of a program tree and does not call other program D Standalone Program Library Name Provide the name of the X Ref Library here Click Add on the Application Area Rules dialog after making your selections Then click the Apply Rules button on the editor toolbar to rebuild the application area as per the specified rules The same dialog will open if you wish to update the Application Area Rules The Update Delete options are availa
444. ting LSLCDE Orig List Code SINIT Salesperson VINIT Verified By PRPCDE Product Code CNAME Company CNAME Company CNAME Company CNAME Company CUSFLE CUSFL1 CUSFL2 CUSFL3 Sites by Organisation Sites by Name Sites by Status Sites by Number ORG Organisation CNAME Company STATUS Status CUSE Cus Mo CNAME Company CNAME Company CUSFL5 CUSFL6 CUSFL CUSFL8 Sites by Dist amp Status Sites By Dist amp Mame Sites by Last Cnt Date Sites by Next Cnt Date DSD_DE Distributor DSDCDE Distributor LCTDAT Last Contact Date APDATE Next Contact Date STATUS Status CNAME Company STATUS Status CNAME Company CNAME Company CNAME Company CUSFL9 Sites by Fax No FASNO Fax No Legend The Access Path Diagram Legend displays the following Main Main This depicts the main object Alternative PID Alternative PID This depicts the alternative Primary oo ies eet aes Logical File Identifier file Logical File This depicts the LF for the selected object SCREEN ACTIVITY DIAGRAM The Screen Activity Diagram option is available on the context menu of an object Select this option to study the screen s activity of a particular object Bus routing block diagrams are used to map the activity of the object When you select this option the following diagram appears X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 212 Program Logic Documentation Screen Activity Diagram CUSFMAINT e Object List je CUSFMAINT 2 3 E Scr
445. tion Go to Window gt Preferences gt X Analysis gt Advanced tab You will see a specific setting Use MS Word OLE Automation under Document Generation Check the box to activate the OLE automation for various documenting and exporting tasks Advanced Preferences window Document Generation type filter tert General nt Data Management Help Install Update Plug in Development Remote Systema Run Debug Server Senace Policies Tasks Tear Usage Data Collector Validation Vek 2 Anabysis Adwanced Folders Genaral X Data Test X Redo XDoclet ARAL X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Advanced Advance betting Preferences Work with Objects Default File 4ttribute Default Program Attribute Subset Data Include OQvemers Include All Dependents Replicate TiggersConstraints Data Option Search Settings Occurrence UML Diegram Show object name in Class diagram Use Open Office Draw for 64 Bit lt Synon Data Flow Diagram C Use old logie for Synon DFO Database Language Translation No Translation requerec Restore Defaults 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 435 ar yng Appendix G Troubleshooting If OLE automation fails check your OS configuration For instance if you have a 64 bit OS the OLE automation will not work In such a case uncheck the Use MS Word OLE Automation to continue generating documents in generic format These documents can be viewed later using MS Office or Open Offi
446. tion WRKJOBD JOBD XAOBJ XAN4 You should also change XAOBJ XDMJOBD as this is used by Option 13 Build Data Model on X4WRKAPP for XA4MODEL command Press ENTER to submit a batch job which executes the initialization steps Feature Brief Description X Analysis Library The X Analysis cross reference library name Object Libraries Special value SPECIFIED is selected by default It means that X Analysis will retrieve all object libraries you have previously specified using Option 8 Source Libraries Special value SPECIFIED is selected by default It means that X Analysis will retrieve all source libraries you have previously specified using Option 8 Index Source Files Specify whether or not to create indexes over the source files These indexes will allow the immediate display of where used data They may be required for the generation of the data model depending on which options are taken If the indexes are not built now they can be built for an individual Source Member at the time they are viewed through the X Analysis browser Select one of the following e CHG Only update current indexes It will find newly added source members and remove deleted members It will also index any source member that has changed since the last initialisation e NO Do not build the indexes e ALL It is similar to CHG when it comes to finding new members and removed members It will index all source members without checking the
447. tion Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 Yiew Leve 5 GA E B Ag g i i an GH i A a oeg Mo r a a A E sac T Screen Components seat 4 Aare 5 TES 0204 00 SVALID BREGAR Ww tt gt Screen Report Design The Screen Report Design displays the layout for associated DSPF PRTF Screen Report Design option Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRC Lines 271 ViewLeve 5 A See E i Aly o amp fa Ce ae oat neq No ne ee ak 3 ee eo HS errs Screen Report Design ee ne ae 1 00 Lpex SEU Editor SEU You can make changes to the source code using the SEU option Click the SEU icon available on the Source Browser toolbar Invoke SEU option from the Source Browser Source List of CONOO1 in XAN4CDEM QRPGSRG Lines 271 Yiew Level 5 A E B AEH es a DE Al amp fa Seq No E E Cy E E A AL eee or eee ee BEE SEL TATA TTT TT Pa Po ao oa ow OO21 00 a Lpex Editor You can make changes to the source code using the Zoom in Lpex option Click the Zoom in Lpex icon available on the Source Browser toolbar to initiate the Lpex editor X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 158 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Quick Reference to an Object Zoom in Lpex is a default option for all IBM Rational products having an RSE plugin For all other Eclipse products SEU 5250 Emulator is the default option You can change the default settings using the X Analysis General Preferences
448. tion area The following screen displays the DFD on CUSF Notice that the Restrict To Application Area icon is disabled This is so because this option gets enabled when any application area is selected DFD on CUSF with disabled Restrict To Application Area icon fe Object List SU CUSF i3 E Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 FY g r a A a A O ZEFRNCUSF CUSF B B Print Customer Details Sites P Attributes b Access Paths 13 Objects H a we Now select the application area MVCPROCESS Select the Data Flow Diagram option on CUSF notice that the Restrict To Application Area icon is enabled see the following screen This is so because you have selected an application area X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 182 Program Logic Documentation Data Flow Diagram on CUSF with enabled Restrict To Application Area icon bo Object List UF 2 i Object Centered Data Flow Diagram for CUSF Total Objects 94 P Attributes P Attributes P Access Paths 13 Objects H F Input Programs 59 Objects H b Input Services 1 Object H b Input Triggers 1 Object H b Attributes b Attributes b Input Output Programs 2 Objects H Now click on the Restrict To Application Area icon as shown below Sa Bea To Application Area icon The following screen is displayed Restricted DFD on CUSF for application area MVCPROCESS Be object List Square i E Object Cen
449. tion Area Options dialog is created X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 370 Document Manager No Detailed Object Documentation Features X Analysis E mfx System Documentation Application Area Options Select Application Area Features to be included in the System Document Diagram Options Overview Structure Chart Normal Expanded Detailed Data Model Diagram Normal In PDF as Image Detailed In visio Show Al Application Area Diagram Annotation F Application 4rea Annotation Coverage of System Document Detailed Object Documentation in Alphabetical Order Detailed Object Documentation in Call Sequence Order No Detailed Object Documentation Click Next to proceed further X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 371 Document Manager No Detailed Object Documentation Specify Sequence X Analysis System Documentation Specify Sequence what sequence would you like to have For the System Document Application Area OSC Normal Application Area DMO Mormal Move Up Move Down Cancel From the above screen the user can re sequence the options selected for System Documentation After re sequencing click Next to reach the final step of documentation wizard Here the user can see all the selections that he has made and can also define various options related to document formatting like Paper Size Con
450. tion is Override PIDs Click this option to display the XOVRPIDS file which contains all the override entries for the XPIDS file X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 304 Data Management Features Field Field Size Description Name Physical File Name OVRPF 10A PID File Name OVRPID 10A Access Path for file to be used as the PID Relationship OVRPTY 1A Only 1 2 amp 3 signify 1 is the highest this value is used when Priority determining which owner file is to supply the descriptor for screen layouts Reference Only OVRRFO 1A If this relationship is reference only enter y The screenshot below displays the Override PIDs fields Data Dictionary Overrides Override PIDS iew for XOVRPID x N v Tor ALIWRE PID FILE WAME RELN PRIORITY REFERENCE ONLY Override Relationships Override Relationships is the next option on the Override Data Dictionary menu Select this option to display the XOVRRELS file which holds the override entries for XRELS Field Field Size Description Name Owning PF OVROPF 10A Dependent PF OVRDPF 10A Dependent LF OVRDLF 1A Reference Type OVRRFO 1A The following screen displays the Override Relationships window X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 305 Data Management Features OWNING PF DEPENDENT PF DEPENDENT LF R TYPE O D E Override Relationship Details
451. tionship verified el CONDET E CONHDR xWORDN XVW ABCD 3 000080 x WORDN XVVABCD 4 000083 xWORDN XVVABCD 5 000031 XWORDN XVWABCD 5 000083 xWORDN XVVABCD 7 000083 STEBAL STEMAS ST OMAS TRAIT YP ST REAL CONHDR CUSF TRAST SUBSET ARCHIVE FILTER XWORDN 3 XWORDN 4 XWORDN 5 XWORDN 5 XWORDN 7 The subset selection criteria can be understood as the filter criteria specified on the Physical File s under an application area to select records to subset On the Subset Archive Filter Criteria dialog pick the file in the drop down to add update filter criteria X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 311 ths Data Management Features Subset Archive Filter Criteria dialog Subset Archive Filter Criteria MVCPROCESS Filter Criteria Physical Files SELECT SELECT 4 Boolean Field Name periCONDET Field Value CONHDR CLUSF Query viewer This lists the filter criteria defined on the file if any An add row is provided to add a new criterion Filter Criterion Description Boolean Boolean Column The default value is IF For the second line one can select from AND OR Field Name Field Name Column Cus Mo This column lists the fields of the Physical File picked Pick the field on Cus Mo which the criterion is to be created Company Distributor Sts Last cnt Date Operator i Operator Column Choose operator Pick the operator to apply Choose operat
452. tries A CL source member is generated in the specified library for each job This source is then indexed enabling references to be displayed through the Variable Where Used and the Object Where Used features X Ref Job Scheduler Entries KASCDEIDX X Ref Job Scheduler Entries XASCDEIDX Type choices press Enter XAN lysis Ione Ch source library X Analysis Library Enter the name of the X Analysis library where the Where Used data should be stored CL Source Library Enter the name of the library where the CL source should be stored This can be the X Analysis library itself if required XAROBOT COMMAND The XAROBOT command creates Program References and Global Where Used entries for jobs initiated from the Robot job scheduler X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 443 Appendix X Analysis Indexes Job Scheduler Entries Index Robot Scheduler Jobs XAROBOT Create Index Robot Sched Jobs XAROBOT Type choices press Enter X Analysis library Robo e Ibray Che ource library X Analysis Library Enter the name of the X Analysis cross reference library built for the application containing the jobs scheduled by Robot Robot Library Enter the library name that contains the Robot database CL Source Library Enter the library name where the program can generate CL source members for each scheduled job entry You can enter QTEMP if you do not wish to keep or view the source programs
453. ts Business Rules Analysis Audit Options Document Manager Version This guide describes X Analysis software version 11 1 How to use this guide The manual has 17 chapters Each chapter throws light on one or more of the diverse X Analysis features which adequately support advanced analysis and documentation tasks The Appendices contain the other crucial technical details relevant to understanding and using X Analysis The topics progress from general ideas to more advanced concepts building on the earlier chapters This guide will prove to be very useful for software professionals from analysts and developers to architects and operations teams intending to analyze document or modernize AS 400 IBM i applications Explore this guide to gain insight into the inimitable facets of X Analysis that equip users with rich understanding of existing legacy applications X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 9 Anda Preface The X Analysis suite of products contains a total of eight modules This guide describes only the following module X Analysis For information about the other modules please contact your Fresche Legacy representative or visit us at www freschelegacy com X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 10 Overview Overview A comprehensive stepwise illustrative guide that encapsulates the advantages of X Analysis as a multipurpose software product suite
454. ty will log entries under CLSID value for bean databorough lib folder structure and information about IBM s Rational products 7 5 and above or Eclipse 3 4 and above This utility can also be invoked standalone to provide directory and registry structure related to the X Analysis installation to a log file To run this utility select the X Analysis Diagnostics under the X Analysis program group X Analysis Diagnostics utility dialog XA Diagnostics When You press Start button this will scan your Analysis folder and dump the Directo and Registry structure to HAD agnostics log file Cancel X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 430 Appendix G Troubleshooting ERROR MESSAGE APPEARS ON SIGNON TO X ANALYSIS While signing on to X Analysis if the following error message is displayed then please perform the following troubleshooting steps Error dialog Error Jaya f gt java land UnsatistiedLinkError getbrowserProxysettings Less Details java lang UnsatistiedLinkError getbrowserProxysettings at sun plugin net prose iw VWiExplorerProayC ontig qetbrowserProxys at sun plugin net proxy WExplorerProgontig gethrowserProwiny at sun plugin net proxy PluginProayvhanagerreseti Unknown Sour at sun plugin AppletiewerinitEnvironmenti Unknown Source at sun plugin AppletiewerinitEnvironmenti Unknown Source 1 Go to the Control Panel Double click the Java Plugin This opens the J
455. urce in same tab Uncheck this option for not opening Called Procedure or program source in the same tab The default option is checked Open Data Flow Diagram in same tab The default option is checked Uncheck this box to force any DFD selected from within another Data Flow Diagram to open in a new editor Currently such DFDs are drawn on the same editor Use Business Rules Overlay mode as default Check this option to set the Business Rules Overlay mode as default Use Source buffering Check this option to enable source buffering Allow editing in Consolidated Rules Check this option to make changes in the Consolidated Rules Show only Objects in Metrics window While listing metrics when the relevant box is selected then the metrics is shown for all items which actually have an object in the user s library ies When the box is left unselected it also includes the source members which do not have any objects associated with it ADVANCED PREFERENCES Expand the X Analysis node to view modify the Advanced Preferences X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 46 Using X Analysis Client Advanced Preferences Advanced General Ant Data Management R Help Work with Objects Install Update Default File Attribute Java JavaScript JPA Plug in Dewelopment Include Owners Remote Systems Run Debug Server Replicate Triggers Constraints Service Policies i Tasks Data Option REPLACE Team Search Setti
456. va generation takes care of it suitably too are converted to standalone fields and the additional code to reflect the operation on DS subfields on all its individual converted standalone fields gets added in the generated procedure based module The assignment of compile time data to the corresponding arrays is also done from the initialise procedure The conversion on the keyed data structures and Eval Corr operations is also done in Java acceptable format In the case of EXCUSRSRC no refactoring and service module generation takes place However in order to handle special characters the process replaces the special characters in the field names source code of the specific program as stored in one of the cross reference files Reengineer 2E programs The X2E reengineering process refers the 2E model files to extract various details about the functions fields files access paths conditions etc This information is then held in the various cross reference files created for the purpose Once the basic information is extracted the action diagrams of the 2E members are generated from 2E model files The process then creates the procedure based RPG source from the action diagram If a specific 2E member includes any EXCUSRSRC type member its content which is recovered and stored in cross reference files gets appended The field definitions of the EXCUSRSRC member are also appended to the program using it The parameters e g starting w
457. ved in a table available in the cross reference library Select the All Objects option from the navigation pane and opt for the context menu Then select the Annotation Template option This invokes a dialog box as shown here Annotation Template Annotation Template Object Type Headings Sequence Coste ave Core From the Object Type drop down select the required object type After that provide appropriate headings for the object type and click Save When you now annotate the specified object type you can see the prescribed heading X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 378 Appendix A X Analysis Offline Appendix A X Analysis Offline The X Analysis Client can also be used to run in offline mode The offline mode of X Analysis is based on the IBM DB2 database X Analysis offline can be used in the following scenario Analysis of PC based application which uses the IBM i Java VB VB Net and PowerBuilder by using XA Open of Fresche Legacy For details on XA Open refer to the XA Open User Manual X ANALYSIS OFFLINE PREREQUISITES Ensure that your environment meets the following requirements IBM DB2 Express C must be installed Set X Analysis Preferences o Before connecting the offline X Analysis you need to specify the DB2 port number in the X Analysis Preferences settings in case different from the default port number 50000 XAN4CDXA Configurator can be o
458. verage Affinity Index Green denotes below average Affinity Index The above calculation is done based on the criteria below 1 The program to program dependency at the specific depth in the calling sequence 2 The common Database Files used in the specific pair of the programs 3 Exactly matching Business Rules 4 Partially matching Business Rules The Affinity calculation is done considering the specific weightage for the above cases The default calculation settings are shown below i e in Affinity Index column X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 115 Application Area BizRle BizRle Note The Affinity Identification report can also be exported to MS Excel Affinity Comparison Select the Affinity Comparison option at the application area level to display the comparison of affinity values for all the objects present in that application area versus their affinity in other application areas The following image shows the Affinity Comparison option Affinity Comparison option OUNTS Company Application Area Options Update Description Ree ee ee Remove Application Area Application Area Rules Export Options Affinity Identification Annotate Affinity Comparison Document Application Area New Application Area Data Management Options Add to Application Area Omit from Application Area Test Management Options Select the option to invoke the following window
459. vorites Tools Help i gt Py Folders H J Search Y Address D Program Files Databorough Analysis 192 168 170 10 PCF_xAN4cDx EJ co Authorize Google Drive The Authorize Google Drive option authorizes you in exporting the DOCX or XLSX files to Google Drive For more details refer to Appendix M Report an Issue The Report an Issue option helps you in reporting an issue along with the log files When you select this option X Analysis collects all the information required to sort out the bug error which is being reported and generates a zip file X Analysis then invokes the mail client installed on the user s system and attaches the zip file with this mail X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 43 Using X Analysis Client Install SSL CA certificate The Install SSL CA certificate allows you to transfer data in a convenient and secure manner For more details refer to Appendix K X ANALYSIS PREFERENCES The X Analysis Preferences provides the facility to modify product preferences The X Analysis Plugin comes with default preferences settings You can change default preferences settings as required To change preferences settings open IBM s Rational product 7 5 and above or Eclipse 3 4 and above From the menu bar select Window gt Preferences to invoke the Preferences dialog Preferences option iM ALL ALL ALL Total O window Mew Window Mew Editor Open Perspective Show View
460. w click Credentials under My Project gt APIs amp auth The following window will appear X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 462 thJs0 LEGACY bas Appendix M Export to Google Drive Credentials window Google Developers Console X Pad P https console developers google com project fluted bit 803 apiui credential Q Search Google Develop lt Projects My Project APIs amp auth APIs Credentials Consent screen Push Monitoring Source Code Compute Networking Storage Big Data Support Need help Privacy amp terms 7 lt lt gt Console Sign up for a free trial OAuth OAuth 2 0 allows users to share specific data with you for example contact lists while keeping their usernames passwords and other information private Learn more Create new Client ID Public API access Use of this key does not require any user action or consent does not grant access to any account information and is not used for authorization Learn more Create new Key Create Client ID pop up window Google Developers Console X TE gmail com Click on Create new Client ID The following pop up window will appear https console developers google com project fluted bit 803 apiui credential ve a Search Monitoring Source Code Compute Networking Storage Big Data X Analysis User Manual 11 1 Create
461. w any issues at source object level while promoting to the next stage or visualize the problem analysis statistics history on the selected object The Generate Code Review option is present under the Audit Options submenu as can be seen below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 470 Appendix N Code Review feature TD OMS support Audit Options Generate Code Review New Application Area Add Alternate Data Library List Reset Library List Application Library List Affinity Comparison Refresh Options Derive Business Rules Import Options Export Options Document Entire Application Document Changed Objects Reengineer Programs Generate Programs Generate Web Services Metrics Analysis Generate Data Application Screen Metrics Data Migration File Metrics Inter Repository Options Business Process Logic Metrics Specialized Analysis Problem Analysis Audit Options Session Information oe Generate Code Review Problem Analysis Request History Object Allocation Database Summary Summary Report Initialize Source Archiving Generate Metrics Analysts Edit Problem Audit Limit Edit Problem Categories Generate Problem Analysis View Database Size Statistics When you click the option the following dialog is displayed X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 471 ths LEGACY Appendix N Code Review feature TD OMS support Generate Code Review
462. with Source File Exclusions XARWKBRC Work with Business Rule Call Exclusions XARWKHRE Work with Hierarchy Exclusions XARWKUMLE Work with UML Exclusions XARWKSCE Work with Diagram Exclusions The objects which are excluded using this option will not appear in the following Structure Chart Diagrams Data Flow Diagrams Object Where Used data Application Areas X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 16 Configure Cross Reference Library Note The excluded programs will appear in the Program Structure Charts You should specify an object name and any required descriptive text The object name can be generic If an individual object name is specified then it is validated against all objects currently loaded into X Analysis If a file name is specified then it must be a physical file name All logical views built over an excluded physical file are also excluded XARWKSFE Work with Source File Exclusions Use this option to exclude source files Excluded source files will not be loaded into X Analysis Specify a particular or generic file name You can specify a particular library name or ALL or leave the name blank A blank library name is equivalent to ALL XARWKBRC Work with Business Rule Call Exclusions Use this option to set up Business Rule call exclusions Specify program name which you wish to exclude XARWKHRE Work with Hierarc
463. wountes 307 Subset Archive Filter ccccsesscccssscccceseccccssccccecececesesescusceccesesecasesesenecesceseserasasenens 311 SUSU A ea cerca E E tac aacregas soe TEE E 313 POI CANS DI traces screen csirmts AE E ios E pate aise vane see E 314 PUED ie perenne een ne ne ene en ree ee eee re ee ee ee 316 ArNe lt a PUE Be ean ee ee ee eee 317 EXD OPUINE Ce PrN UNE oreren centedeatusvecscsendeactecataesosencedetesataceecenteacasacsawsecenseasbaceseese 319 810 600 T D eee ee ee ee E eee ee en ee ee eT ee eee 319 Export tO Microsolt Word wasunman E 320 EXDOFE TO Microso EXCE Lerena EE O EE EEE EN 320 Epon O FOwWCNa aerieni ieia ei RE E EN E OENE 321 Printing trom X AnalysiS stscavsnrncuscecwasanness nesndcanneeeivsnearansewesaenoasaesoananasesvansmeranneumanneessne 323 Export as DDL ICOM X ANANVS IS twssseneivite arevacducieverdasanndsvavecsiaieasevacduchdestdaiaewddveseceivieeneves 323 CONAC DDS tTO OE e a E E E E E E E A E T 326 Generate Database Service Programs ccccccssecccssececeseeceesececesceseuceseeeceseneeenees 332 POCO IE MaN ET coia EE EA EE E 336 Marking the individual objects complete list ccccssssssseseseeeeeeceeessseeeeseeeeeeeeees 336 DOCUMENTING an Application Area cccsecccssseccceseccccesceceesececeeeceseeseesseecensuecesaunees 349 Documenting an Entire Application cccccsccccssecccessecccesececesceceeseeeseecesseecesauaess 374 Document Changed Objects ccccssscccssscccessecec
464. xt menu Context Menu on Report Definition RPG Metrics Reports COMPLESP General cross language complexity by program COMPLESS General cross language complexity by SUBROUT DAT ACR Program data complexity LOGICP Program logic complexity LOGICS Program logic complexity by subroutine EE a Run Metrics Report Modify Report Definition Copy Report Definition Delete Report Definition E Source Object Reports HARDCODE Programs with hardcoded libraries MISSING Source or objects missing SRCOBIOCT Source change date after object created E Database Reports DATSERR Database file and member errors and alerts DSGNALRT Database design alerts Run Metrics Report When the user opts for this option the pre configured report dialog invokes X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 268 TTA THUS Audit Options Report Definition dialog X Analysis Metrics Report Specification and Submission Report Mame Report category Application 4rea all Members Selected Select Report Columns and Options Column Metrics YarMame Subr OBIN AM Object and Source ID Data OBISTR Object Library OBILIE CYC Object Mame DBJINAM HAL Object Type OBITYP MI Object Attribute OBISTR SRCLINSTM Object creation date OBICRTBAT Object last used date OBJLSUDAT Source File OBJSREFIL Source Library OBISRCLIB Source file change date OBISRCFCHD Cee Ted habe OBI4TR RPG OR OBISTR RPGLE Filter
465. y LEGACY option Select the option to open a dialog box Browse for the pre defined format of the Excel document Template folder containing the Excel document G t A Analysis template Y Search template Organize New folder Name Date modified Type gir Favorites YP E Desktop AppAreaRulesFormat 30 01 2015 1413 Microsoft Excel g Downloads S Recent places a Homegroup jE This PC Gi Network File name AppAreaRulesFormat The image of the format is shown below X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 67 Application Library Excel sheet Pre defined format AppAreaRulesFormat Compatibility Mode Excel 7 D x HOME INSERT PAGE LAYOUT FORMULAS DATA REVIEW VIEW Shilpi Khan a o h gt AutoSum A e Wrap Text General Ra Se a ES E 7Y A amp A Fill E Merge amp Center D m s g Conditional Formatas Cell Insert Delete Format w Sort amp Find amp d Formatting Table Styles 7 ig i Clear Filter gt Select Alignment ry Number F Styles Cells Editing A v AppAraRules The data loaded from the Excel document can be viewed in the Application Area Rules editor window on Eclipse as shown in the following image App Area Rules editor window i a App Area Rules an gt Ea All Application Area Description Select Omit Object Type Comparision ObjectName Lib Co TESTAREA1 My Test Application Area 1 5 P EQ W
466. y Object When the old users of X Analysis select the Manage Linked Repositories option they see the following information message Message informing about an old version of Server Object X Analysis i The Linked Repository object should be updated before continuing In case you receive this message then request Fresche Legacy for the updated Server Component s X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 251 Inter Repository Options Linking Non IBM i PC Repositories Click on the PC Repositories tab to invoke the following window Manage Linked Repositories PC Repositories Manage Linked Repositories 45 400 Repositories PL Repositories DB Connection information Host Name DBZ User DEZ Password DBZ Port fo _Fetch_ Repository Mame Location Note that in the above window besides the DB2 Connection information group all the other information will remain the same as specified for Linking IBM i Repositories AS 400 Repositories The DB2 Connection information group is described as follows Host Name Host Name is the name or IP address of the machine with which the DB2 connection is required DB2 User Specify the DB2 user that uniquely identifies the DB2 user of the system and allows access to DB2 tools services Password Specify the password that is used for DB2 authentication to prove identity or gain access to a DB2 resource X Analysis User Manual 11 1
467. ystem Document TOC ES System Document for XAN4CDXA pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit wiew Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help Seb we ell BO amp ce SYSTEM DOCUMENT FOR XAN4CDXA TABLE OF CONTENTS LEGENDS Object List fir MANSCDXA Access path details for CUSF File Field Details for CUSF Object Where Used for CUSF Se cetce gene sid paaestn east oepesercasct a creme eee emma Data Flow Diagram Normal fae OEMENU Data Flow Diagram Normal for CUSF PEPE EEEE EEEE E EEE E A Siructure Chart Diagram Normal for OEMENU ror 8 4 E E E Bb E E I oa oo mom amp ho Ba oo 1 1 1 X Analysis User Manual 11 1 2015 Fresche Legacy Inc Page 375 Document Manager Preview of the generated System Document Legend gS System Document for XAN4CDXA pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional Fie Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help LEGENDS Structure Chart Diagram Legends If the Flowchart option is selected then the flowchart will be generated using Microsoft Visio and its link is placed in the System Document Flowchart generated using Microsoft Visio isio 2000 Flowchart for OF001 MAIN Eee E mon fee romet pot Supe ete Lines O051 00 to 0053 00 gt if JT Reteieve Gustomer Details 9B Jump to subroutine RYOUS dy Cut Gi copy OF paste tLines O044 00 to 0054 00 gt E Duplicate Set up blank mbile ft Perform

X-Analysis User Manual 11.1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents